Driver`s Handbook

Driver`s Handbook
Driver’s Handbook
FM, FH
This is a complete Driver's Handbook
with all the information that can exist
in our chassis unique handbooks.
The information in the chassis unique
handbooks is steered on variants and
its content varies. This can cause
duplicated information in this complete
handbook, which can make it difficult to
read correctly. It is only intended for
internal use.
From build week 937 each truck has
its unique handbook which is possible
to order at [email protected]
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO.
This vehicle binder describes the driving and care of your truck and instructions for the
tachograph. It also contains documents such as the Warranty book, Volvo Action Service card
and Driver service documents.
In order for your truck to retain its high safety, reliability and long life, we recommend that
you heed our advice regarding the driving and care of your vehicle.
If there is anything else you wonder about concerning service, maintenance, oils or the care of
your truck or your are missing some documentation in the binder, please contact your dealer.
Additional useful information about your truck and its functions can be found online:
http://www.volvo.com
The specifications and illustrations in this binder are not binding and we reserve the right to
change them without prior information.
©1998 Volvo Trucks AB, Gothenburg.
Reproduction of the contents of this vehicle binder, wholly or in part, is prohibited by law
without written permission from Volvo Trucks AB.
The prohibition covers all forms of reproduction, through printing, copying, recording on tape,
etc.
The following levels of notification and warning are used in this binder.
Note!
Indicates a situation, use or circumstance that should be emphasised.
Important!
Indicates a situation, use or circumstance that is important to be aware of to avoid personal
injury or damage to the product.
Caution!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that, unless avoided, may lead to minor or moderate
personal injury or damage to the product.
Warning!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that, unless avoided,may lead to death, serious
personal injury or damage to the product.
Danger!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that, unless avoided,will lead to death or serious
personal injury.
Symbols
The following symbols may be found on your truck.
The meaning of the symbols is as follows:
Use protective goggles
Read information in the driver's binder
Keep out of reach of children
Corrosive
Avoid sparks or naked flame
Explosive
Table of Contents
Introduction................................................... 1
LVD system................................................. 1
EBS.............................................................. 1
Air suspension.............................................. 1
Booster......................................................... 2
Dynafleet...................................................... 2
Running in...................................................... 4
Starting and stopping.................................... 5
Starting instructions..................................... 5
Starting instructions..................................... 5
Start the truck............................................... 5
Stopping the truck........................................ 6
Stopping the truck........................................ 6
Stopping the truck........................................ 6
Parking......................................................... 7
Clutch........................................................... 7
Keys............................................................. 7
Start the engine............................................ 8
Warming up............................................... 11
Change idling speed................................... 11
Fuel heater.................................................. 12
Instruments and controls............................ 13
Overview.................................................... 13
Gauges........................................................ 17
Symbols...................................................... 19
Lighting and headlamps............................. 22
Windscreen wipers..................................... 25
Rain sensor................................................. 25
Parking brake............................................. 26
Trailer brake............................................... 29
Electric trailer brake................................... 29
Air suspension............................................ 30
Information display..................................... 33
General, about the display.......................... 33
The first that is shown................................ 34
General, about messages............................ 34
Information messages................................ 35
Warning messages..................................... 35
Stop message.............................................. 36
Alarm, warning and information
symbols...................................................... 36
Status symbols........................................... 40
Other Symbols........................................... 41
Menu structure........................................... 42
Show menus............................................... 45
Step between the menus............................. 45
Change a setting......................................... 45
Temperature, outside.................................. 47
Temperature, engine oil............................. 47
Temperature, gearbox................................ 47
Voltmeter/Ammeter................................... 47
Gear position.............................................. 48
Pressure, primary tank............................... 48
Fuel consumption....................................... 48
Leg data...................................................... 49
Remaining fuel........................................... 49
AdBlue....................................................... 49
Trip meter................................................... 50
Average speed............................................ 50
Estimated time of arrival............................ 51
Time and Date............................................ 51
Alarm clock................................................ 52
Driving/rest time........................................ 53
Black Panel................................................ 53
Backlight.................................................... 53
Favourite Display, setting.......................... 54
Night/Day................................................... 56
Vehicle Messages....................................... 56
Tyre pressure.............................................. 56
Set wheel ID............................................... 57
Set reference pressure................................ 57
Reset........................................................... 58
ATS............................................................ 58
Start regeneration....................................... 58
Abort regeneration..................................... 59
Activate/Deactivate ATS........................... 59
System conditions...................................... 59
Soot/ash level............................................. 60
Programming, p-heater timer..................... 60
Reset, p-heater timer.................................. 61
Language.................................................... 61
Units........................................................... 61
Table of Contents
Time/Date.................................................. 62 Fuel consumption....................................... 90
Display lighting.......................................... 63 Leg data...................................................... 90
Change password....................................... 63 Remaining fuel........................................... 91
Traction control.......................................... 64 AdBlue....................................................... 91
DAS............................................................ 64 Trip meter................................................... 91
LCS............................................................ 64 Average speed............................................ 92
Fleet limits................................................. 64 Driving/rest time........................................ 92
Ammeter sensor calibration....................... 66 Time and Date............................................ 92
Fleet ID...................................................... 66 Menu structure........................................... 93
Trailer detection......................................... 67 Black Panel................................................ 93
Day running lights automatic..................... 68 Night/Day................................................... 94
Draining/priming........................................ 68 Backlight.................................................... 94
Fault diagnostics........................................ 69 Contrast...................................................... 94
Instrument panel cluster self test................ 70 Language.................................................... 94
Part number................................................ 71 Units........................................................... 95
Vehicle data............................................... 72 Time/Date.................................................. 95
Vehicle ID.................................................. 72 Program...................................................... 96
Total value................................................. 73 Reset........................................................... 96
Trip data..................................................... 73 Traction Control......................................... 97
Reset trip data............................................ 74 Day Running Light.................................... 97
Password.................................................... 74 Draining/priming........................................ 97
Service reminder........................................ 75 Fault diagnostics........................................ 97
Estimated lining wear................................ 77 Part number................................................ 99
Monitoring of the wheel brakes................. 78 Calibration ID............................................ 99
High brake temperature warning............... 78 Service reminder........................................ 99
Resetting fault codes.................................. 78 Numeric language, general...................... 102
Position and content................................... 80 Display control stalk................................ 102
Display....................................................... 81 Text strings............................................... 103
Display control stalk.................................. 82 Stop message............................................ 103
General, about messages............................ 82 Change language...................................... 104
Information messages................................ 82 Menus, general......................................... 104
Warning messages..................................... 83 Password-protected menus....................... 104
Stop message.............................................. 83 Menus available when driving................. 104
Acknowledge messages............................. 83 Menus with stationary vehicle................. 108
Alarm, warning and information
Numerical translation table...................... 116
symbols...................................................... 84
Status symbols........................................... 88 Driving........................................................ 127
Other Symbols........................................... 89 Driving hints............................................ 127
Gear position.............................................. 89 Hill start aid.............................................. 130
Temperature, outside.................................. 89 Reversing camera..................................... 131
Engine oil pressure..................................... 89 Reversing Warner.................................... 133
Temperature, engine oil............................. 89 Traction Control System (TCS)............... 133
Voltmeter/Ammeter................................... 90 Front wheel drive..................................... 135
Table of Contents
Differential lock....................................... 136 When the vehicle must be braked
Differential lock....................................... 140 manually................................................... 202
Differential locks..................................... 143 Brake protection....................................... 202
Driving at low speed................................ 203
Automatic engagement of the
differential lock (DLC – Diff Lock
If the ACC does not work........................ 204
Control).................................................... 146
Auxiliary brakes....................................... 148 Powertronic................................................ 205
Brake Blending........................................ 152 Powertronic, general................................ 205
ABS.......................................................... 152 Gear shifter............................................... 205
ESP — Electronic Stability Program....... 153 Buttons..................................................... 206
Control of engine torque.......................... 153 Display..................................................... 207
Brake lining wear equalisation................. 154 Driving programs..................................... 209
Panic braking function............................. 154 Automatic gear changing......................... 209
Manual gearbox....................................... 154 Kickdown................................................. 210
Hydraulic bogie lift.................................. 158 Manual gear changing.............................. 210
Bogie........................................................ 159 Select starting gear................................... 210
Tridem...................................................... 165 Autoneutral.............................................. 211
Steered rear axle....................................... 168 Brake interlock......................................... 211
Cruise control........................................... 169 Dual driver stations.................................. 212
Constant engine speed control................. 170 Auxiliary brakes....................................... 212
Lane Keeping Support............................. 170 Actions with gearbox malfunction........... 212
Lane Change Support............................... 172 Reversing with loads................................ 212
Driver Alert Support................................ 174 Rocking free............................................. 213
Power take-off.......................................... 176 Marshalling.............................................. 213
High range lock-up.................................. 179 Idling speed.............................................. 213
High range lock-up.................................. 181 Oil temperature........................................ 214
Tying down the truck on a ferry.............. 182 Retarder temperature................................ 214
Ride height memory................................. 187 Oil pressure.............................................. 215
Oil filter.................................................... 215
ADR............................................................ 193 Checking the oil level.............................. 215
General..................................................... 193
Turn off the power................................... 193 I-Shift.......................................................... 217
Turn on the main switch.......................... 194 I-shift, general.......................................... 217
Turn on power for 20 minutes................. 195 Gear selector............................................ 217
Buttons..................................................... 219
Adaptive cruise control............................. 197 Display..................................................... 220
General..................................................... 197 Program packages.................................... 222
Engaging ACC......................................... 198 Automatic shifting................................... 225
Disengage ACC....................................... 199 Manual shifting........................................ 228
Inactivate ACC......................................... 199 Reverse gears........................................... 229
Change speed........................................... 199 In case of gearbox malfunction................ 230
Change the time gap................................. 200 Starting on hills........................................ 230
When the truck itself adjusts the speed.... 201 Driving off road....................................... 231
Table of Contents
Clutch....................................................... 231
Exhaust cleaning........................................ 291
I-Shift.......................................................... 232 General..................................................... 291
I-Shift, general......................................... 232 Driving a truck with a Euro 4 or
Program packages.................................... 232 Euro 5 engine........................................... 294
Function description................................. 234 Filling with AdBlue................................. 297
Gear shifter............................................... 236 Cleaning the AdBlue tank........................ 299
Buttons..................................................... 238 Diesel particulate filter............................. 299
Display..................................................... 239
Automatic gear change............................ 241 Cab.............................................................. 303
Manual gear changing.............................. 246 Air suspension equipment........................ 303
Reverse gears........................................... 247 Seats......................................................... 309
Actions with gearbox malfunction........... 248 Adjusting the steering wheel.................... 313
Fuel economy driving.............................. 248 Doors........................................................ 314
Hill start................................................... 250 Central locking......................................... 316
Main switch.............................................. 318
Driving on poor roads and in
difficult conditions................................... 251 Air conditioning ECC (Electronic
Disengaging............................................. 251 Climate Control)...................................... 318
Starting when stuck.................................. 251 Air conditioning MCC (Manual
Full VEB/VEB+ in manual mode............ 253 Climate Control)...................................... 323
Climate control system HEAT................. 326
Extra down-changing for
maximum engine brake in low gears....... 253 Cab heater PH-CAB................................. 328
Changing driving direction...................... 253 Cab and engine heater PH-ENGCA......... 333
Rest heater SS-HEAT.............................. 341
Driving with the gearbox-mounted
Luggage
compartment hatch.................... 343
power take-off engaged............................ 253
Electrically
operated sun roof.................. 344
Rocking to empty the platform................ 254
Driving on rollers..................................... 254 Lighting.................................................... 344
Electrical power outlet............................. 351
Loading and unloading............................. 255 Bunk bed.................................................. 351
General..................................................... 255 Lower bunk.............................................. 352
Ride height control................................... 255 Smoke detector......................................... 353
Loading and unloading height memory... 258 Tilt the cab............................................... 354
Quick unloading....................................... 265 Mobile telephone, communication
equipment................................................. 359
Using the air suspension with the
ignition turned off.................................... 267 Alarm on.................................................. 359
Alarm without motion detectors.............. 360
Loading and unloading with the
main switch off........................................ 270 Alarm off.................................................. 361
Fetch the swap body................................. 276 Starting the assault alarm......................... 361
Leave the swap body................................ 281 Switching off the assault alarm................ 362
Fetch a container...................................... 284 Go into service mode............................... 362
Deliver a container................................... 286 To get out of service mode....................... 363
Load indicator.......................................... 287 Assistance button..................................... 363
Table of Contents
Introduction.............................................. 386
Refrigerator............................................... 364 General Overview.................................... 387
Safety instructions.................................... 364 Main Functions........................................ 395
General..................................................... 364 Tips and Tricks........................................ 405
Usage........................................................ 364 Main Functions........................................ 405
Starting the refrigerator............................ 365 Tips and tricks.......................................... 428
Turning off the refrigerator...................... 365
Voltage protector..................................... 365 Telephone................................................... 430
Tilting the cab.......................................... 366 Getting started.......................................... 430
Cleaning................................................... 366 Calling...................................................... 432
Defrosting................................................ 366 While making a call................................. 435
Interior lighting........................................ 366 Managing messages................................. 436
Fault tracing............................................. 367 Menus....................................................... 438
Tips on saving energy.............................. 367 Measures with malfunctions.................... 443
Technical specifications........................... 367
Booster........................................................ 444
Fridge.......................................................... 368 Booster..................................................... 444
Safety instructions.................................... 368 Installation................................................ 444
General..................................................... 368 Methods of use......................................... 444
Usage........................................................ 368 Fuses........................................................ 444
Starting the refrigerator box..................... 369 Indicator lamps......................................... 444
Switching off the refrigerator box............ 369 Subwoofer controls and switch................ 445
Voltage protector..................................... 369 Fault tracing............................................. 445
Tilting the cab.......................................... 370
Cleaning................................................... 370 Dynafleet.................................................... 447
Defrosting................................................ 370 Dynafleet.................................................. 447
Fault tracing............................................. 370 Technical description............................... 448
Tips on saving energy.............................. 371 Controls.................................................... 450
Technical specifications........................... 372 Display..................................................... 452
Menus and symbols.................................. 453
Alcolock...................................................... 373 Using the menus....................................... 454
Start up..................................................... 373 Starting the system................................... 455
Restarting the vehicle............................... 375 Shutting off the system — stand by......... 456
Sharing a vehicle...................................... 376 Transferring data...................................... 456
Energy conservation................................. 380 General..................................................... 457
Volume control........................................ 381 Mail.......................................................... 457
Language selection................................... 382 Mail menu................................................ 458
Dates........................................................ 383 General driving and resting times............ 459
General messages and errors.................... 383 Orders....................................................... 461
Technical messages and errors................. 384 Logs.......................................................... 462
Driver coaching........................................ 464
Radio/CD.................................................... 386 Emergency & Assistance......................... 465
Safe Operation of the Radio..................... 386 Tachograph download menu.................... 465
Table of Contents
Settings..................................................... 467
System errors and warnings..................... 468
External equipment................................... 470
Roof air deflector, setting instructions..... 470
Short low cab FH..................................... 472
Long low cab FH..................................... 473
Globetrotter FH........................................ 474
Roof air deflector, setting instructions..... 476
Globetrotter XL FH.................................. 478
Roof air deflector, setting instructions..... 483
Short low cab FM..................................... 485
Long low cab FM..................................... 486
Globetrotter FM....................................... 487
Globetrotter LXL FM.............................. 488
Front mirror.............................................. 490
Ladder...................................................... 491
Side underrun guard................................. 492
Lower the spare wheel............................. 494
Raise the spare wheel............................... 495
Spare wheel retainer behind the cab........ 496
Turntable, general advice......................... 499
Couple the trailer...................................... 500
Moving the turntable................................ 502
Maintenance............................................... 504
General information................................. 504
Checks before driving.............................. 504
Checks when fuelling............................... 508
Changing wiper blades............................. 509
Replace the battery in the remote
control...................................................... 510
Changing bulbs........................................ 510
Engine wash............................................. 516
Washing the chassis................................. 516
Wash the cab............................................ 516
Polishing and waxing............................... 517
Care of upholstery.................................... 518
Paintwork damage.................................... 519
Care of aluminium rims........................... 521
Care of steel rims..................................... 521
Tools........................................................ 522
General information about oils and
greases...................................................... 523
Engine...................................................... 525
Fuel system.............................................. 530
Diesel fuel— quality and function........... 531
Changing fuel filter.................................. 536
Filter for fuel tank ventilation.................. 537
Priming the fuel system........................... 537
Draining the fuel tank.............................. 538
Changing filter......................................... 539
Drain the cooling system......................... 542
Service intervals....................................... 544
Anti-freeze............................................... 544
Fill with coolant in an empty system....... 545
Viscous fan............................................... 545
Electrically controlled fan........................ 545
Check the drive belts (Multi-V)............... 546
Working on the electrical system............. 546
Instructions for electrical welding........... 547
Connection of electrical accessories........ 548
Checking electrolyte level in batteries..... 549
Charge status............................................ 550
Specifications for the electrical system.... 551
Manual gearbox and I-shift...................... 552
Automatic gearbox................................... 559
Transfer gearbox...................................... 562
Driving front axle..................................... 566
Flywheel mounted power take-off........... 570
Compact retarder...................................... 571
Air drier, general...................................... 575
Checking the air drier............................... 576
Charging with air from an external
compressed air source.............................. 577
Brake lining.............................................. 577
Servo steering........................................... 578
Hydraulic pusher axle and trailing
wheel axle................................................ 579
Rear axle.................................................. 580
Rear axle with hub reduction................... 587
Tyres........................................................ 588
Changing wheels...................................... 593
Disc wheel for disc brakes....................... 600
Painting rims............................................ 601
Table of Contents
Spare wheel in Combi-box....................... 602
Snow chains............................................. 602
Hydraulic bogie lift.................................. 603
Bodywork................................................. 603
Cab tilt pump............................................ 604
Central lubrication................................... 604
Changing air filter for air
conditioning system................................. 605
Refrigerant............................................... 606
Parking heater.......................................... 606
Chassis lubrication................................... 607
Type plates, location................................ 615
Fuses and relays......................................... 617
General..................................................... 617
Electrical distribution unit, lefthand drive trucks...................................... 618
Electrical distribution unit, righthand drive trucks...................................... 619
Main fuses................................................ 620
In relay and fuse box................................ 622
To superstructure..................................... 626
If something happens................................ 628
Air suspension in locked mode................ 628
Airbag...................................................... 630
Warning signs and first-aid...................... 631
Fire extinguisher...................................... 631
Starting with starting cables..................... 632
Towing..................................................... 635
Back-up function...................................... 641
In case of gearbox malfunction................ 641
If the vehicle gets stuck............................ 642
Introduction
LVD system
The vehicle is equipped with software that registers
different types of information about the vehicle. The
information will be transferred to Volvo Trucks AB
and used in product development and fault tracing in
engines and vehicles. Information that is saved
concerns, among other things, speed, fuel consumption
and torque. Volvo Trucks AB and its authorised
workshops will make use of this information.
Questions concerning the use of this information can
be made to Volvo Action Service..
EBS
EBS generation 3 functions in a different way to
earlier braking systems. In previous braking systems a
particular pressure to the pedal gave a particular
pressure to the braking system. With EBS 3 a
particular pressure on the pedal will give a particular
reduction of speed. The same depression of the pedal
gives the same reduction of speed, but the pressure to
the brake cylinders on the axles varies with the axle
load.
After changing loads, the first brake application can
feel strange, since the system must learn the new axle
loads.
EBS adapts the braking pressure to the trailer so that
the trailer brakes to the same degree as the truck.
Air suspension
This truck has full air suspension and thus has bellows
instead of leaf springs. The amount of air in the
bellows can be regulated, and determines the ride
height.
The air suspension is electronically controlled
(ECS, electronically controlled suspension) and
maintains constant ride height irrespective of load
1
2
Introduction
weight and positioning. Ride height can also be
controlled manually, by using the control box.
In order for the air suspension to work, the pressure in
the air tanks must be greater than 8 bar. The air
suspension is activated after starting or when the
parking brake is released or when the air suspension
control box is used. None of the suspension functions
will work before the system has been started by one of
these methods.
This truck has rear air suspension and thus has bellows
instead of rear leaf springs. The amount of air in the
bellows can be regulated, and determines the ride
height.
The air suspension is electronically controlled
(ECS, electronically controlled suspension) and
maintains constant ride height irrespective of load
weight and positioning. Ride height can also be
controlled manually, by using the control box.
In order for the air suspension to work, the pressure in
the air tanks must be greater than 8 bar. The air
suspension is activated after starting or when the
parking brake is released or when the air suspension
control box is used. None of the suspension functions
will work before the system has been started by one of
these methods.
Booster
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 is a premiumclass eight-channel power amplifier for motor
vehicles. If has integrated cross-overs for all channels
and a number of sub-woofer controls for individual
adjustments. The booster is factory installed and preset
to give a natural and well balanced sound.
Dynafleet
Dynafleet is a system for transport planning combined
with vehicle planning, message handling and
automatic reporting of vehicle status and driver times.
Introduction
The driver communicates continually with the office.
The traffic officer in the office can direct the vehicle to
various places for various missions. The driver can
send messages to other drivers, to the office or
privately. Contact between the driver and the office
means that much of the order administration can be
administered in a simple way and more effective
manning of transport is achieved. Communication with
the central office takes place via the GSM mobile
phone network.
The system collects information from the tachograph
and the engine control unit. Dynafleet provides the
driver with information about the vehicle and driving
activities. This makes it possible to have a better
transport administration and follow-up of the running
costs of the vehicle, the work contribution of the driver
and how economically the driver drives.
The section “Design and function” describes the most
basic functions that all drivers must be familiar with.
In the “System management” section there is a system
overview and a description of how the system is
started. The remaining sections describe the system
functions in more detail.
3
4
Running in
Drive carefully during the truck's first 5 000 km. Keep
the engine speed within the green area on the
tachometer.
Do not drive fast with a heavy load. Keep an eye on
the warning lamps!
REMEMBER to leave the truck for warranty service
after 4 weeks operation or 10 000 km mileage,
depending on which occurs first. (With vehicles
manufactured in Europe the guaranteed service is only
offered if they have automatic transmission, fly-wheel
mounted power take-off or all-wheel drive)
All Volvo engines are test driven before delivery. This
means that we have control of all fits and decline all
responsibility for any damage caused by careless
driving.
Note!
During the first 1 500 km, the truck's
power train shall not be subject to
heavy loads, since this can cause
abnormally high temperatures in
gears and drives.
Starting and stopping
5
Starting instructions
Put the gear selector in the neutral or tilted position or
the engine will not start.
When the air pressure to the gearbox is too low, a
warning will be displayed automatically. An icon will
appear on the display at the same time as the
information lamp comes on. Wait until the lamp has
gone out before driving off.
Information lamp
Symbol for low air pressure to
gearbox
Starting instructions
Put the gear shift lever in the neutral or tilted position,
otherwise the engine will not start.
If the air pressure to the gearbox is too low, a warning
will be shown automatically in the display. An icon
will appear in the display at the same time as the
information lamp lights. Wait until the lamp has gone
out before driving off. Then move the gear shift lever
to A, M or R to be able to drive.
J3014466
Information lamp
J3008849
Icon for low air pressure to gearbox
Start the truck
To start the truck, select neutral position N and turn
the key. The truck cannot be started if the gear shift
lever is in the A, M or R position.
6
Starting and stopping
Stopping the truck
When the vehicle is stationary:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Move the gear selector to N, neutral.
• Switch off the engine.
Caution!
Always apply the parking brake
and put the gear selector in N
when the vehicle is parked or
whenever the driver leaves the
driver position.
Stopping the truck
When the vehicle is stationary:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Move the gear shift lever to N, neutral.
• Switch off the engine.
Caution!
Always apply the parking brake
and move the gear shift lever to N
when the truck is parked or if the
driver must leave the cab for
some reason.
Stopping the truck
When the vehicle is stationary:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Move the gear shift lever to N, neutral.
• Switch off the engine.
Caution!
Always apply the parking brake
and move the gear shift lever to N
when the truck is parked or if the
driver must leave the cab for
some reason.
Starting and stopping
7
Parking
Since the gearbox does not have a “parking position”
the truck's parking brake must always be used when
the driver has parked the vehicle and left the cab. For
longer stops and when the driver leaves the driver's
seat, the gear shift lever must also be moved to
position N.
Clutch
The clutch is of the dry disc type, i.e. no torque
converter. Therefore, never pull away in high gears by
slipping the clutch. If the clutch overheats, the
information lamp will light and a symbol will appear
in the display.
J3014466
If the information lamp lights when the vehicle is
started and the truck is already moving, continue to
drive.
If the information lamp lights when the vehicle is
started and the truck is stationary, move the gear shift
lever to the A or R position and let the engine run at
idle until the light goes out.
When starting in manual mode, choose 1st gear to
avoid straining the clutch.
J3008835
Caution!
Never hold the vehicle stationary
on an uphill slope by using the
accelerator pedal. The clutch
could overheat, which could
cause it to fail.
Keys
All keys have the same number as on the separate
number tag. Remove the number tag from the key ring,
to ensure that no unauthorized person can see the tag.
Put or tape the tag in a safe place (there is self
adhesive tape on the back).
Note!
Do not have other keys on the same
key-ring as the ignition key. The
ignition key contain electronics
which can be affected.
8
Starting and stopping
J3014615
Number tag. Remove the number tag
from the key-ring and store it in a
safe place.
Start the engine
1 Switch on the main switch.
2 Check that
• the parking brake is applied
• the gear lever is in neutral.
• auxiliary brakes are in position 0
3 Turn the starter key to drive position
J7008414
Starting and stopping
9
Note!
If the key is turned directly from off
position to start position, there will
be a delay of about 1 second before
the starter motor is activated. During
this time the starter motor shows no
response as it is activated via EMS.
When starting from radio position
there is however no such delay.
Note!
If the key is turned directly from the
off to the starting position, it is not
certain that the automatic radio code
entry will function. To avoid this
problem, wait a short while in the
drive position before starting.
4 The display will show the oil level in the engine. If
the engine has been running during the previous 20
minutes nothing will be shown. The value shown
under the graph is the difference between the engine
max and min oil volumes.
5 If the truck has air bags, the symbol for this is shown
on the display
J3008842
6 Check that all the instrument panel lamps are
working
10
Starting and stopping
7 If the engine has air intake heating, turn the key to
the air intake heating position and release the key
J3015694
8 Wait until the pre-heating symbol goes out
J0008226
Preheating symbol
9 Start the engine
Run the starter motor by turning the key to the start
position. If the engine does not start, the starting
attempt will be automatically shut off after 15 seconds.
A new attempt can be made if the key is first turned
back to 0 position and then to the start position.
If the overheating protection is triggered, a message is
shown on the display when the overheating protection
is activated. The message shows how long the starter
motor must be allowed to cool before it will be
possible to try to start the truck again, usually 10–15
minutes.
J3015695
Warning!
Do not use start gas. An
explosion can cause considerable
damage.
10 Hold down the brake pedal for a few seconds to
enable the cruise control. The air suspension is
Starting and stopping
11
activated first after the parking brake is released or if
the air suspension control box is used.
If the temperature of the coolant is below 50°C when
the engine is started the engine speed will be limited to
1000 rpm for 15 seconds
Warming up
Warm the engine up by driving with low engine speed
rather than running the engine while stationary. Avoid
revving up excessively and high engine speed.
After starting let the clutch out in order to warm up the
gearbox. The oil pump in the gearbox will begin
working and will quickly attain working temperature.
Note!
It is especially important that the
gearbox should be warmed up if it
the outside temperature is below
0°C.
Change idling speed
The preset idle speed can be altered between 550 rpm
and 650 rpm. When the truck is delivered, the idle
speed is normally 600 rpm. (To change the idle speed
temporarily, i.e. when the PTO is in use, see section
"Constant engine speed control")
Conditions:
• The temperature of the coolant should exceed 50°C.
• The truck should remain stationary with the engine
idling (the accelerator must not be depressed) when
the adjustment is begun.
Procedure:
1
Depress the brake pedal. The brake pedal should
be depressed during the entire procedure.
2
Hold B in RESUME for three seconds.
3
Release B.
Idling speed will fall to the lowest possible
setting.
4
Adjust engine speed with SET (A).
5
Hold B in RESUME and at the same time depress
SET (A) for more than three seconds.
J0008305
12
Starting and stopping
6
Release the switches.
7
Release the brake pedal.
The new idling speed is set.
If an error has been made during the adjustment
sequence the previous idling speed will be retained.
Fuel heater
Trucks equipped with Fuel Heater have electrically
heated fuel lines which prevents the fuel from freezing
on its way to the engine. Fuel Heater is used in
extreme cold conditions to heat the fuel before starting
and while driving.
Activate the function by pressing in the switch in the
instrument panel. For the fuel to be warmed up before
starting, the function should be activated at least
5 minutes before starting.
Fuel Heater is active as long as the switch is held
pressed in, but the effect varies according to needs.
The function is switched off automatically when the
ignition is switched off.
J192368
Switch for fuel heater
Instruments and controls
13
Overview
J0010472
14
Instruments and controls
J0010474
Instruments and controls
1
Stalk for direction indicators, cruise control and engine speed control
2
Lighting control panel
3
Instrument with driver information display
4
Tachograph
5
Buttons for radio and telephone
6
Stalk for auxiliary brake
7
Stalk for windscreen wiper and driver information display
8
Blocking valve
9
Parking brake
10
Phone
11
Display for Dynafleet and reversing camera
12
Buttons for Dynafleet and integrated telephone
13 - 22
Switch for reversing lights
Switch for rotating beacon
Switch for reversing camera
Switch for parking heater
Switch for inner lighting
Switch for auxiliary brake
Switch for bogie lift
Switch for differential lock
Switch for ADR
Switch for front wheel drive
Switch for cornering lights
Switch for switching off movement sensor
Switch for Volvo Action Service
Switch for panic alarm
23
Bottle holder
24
Door control panel
15
16
25-29
Instruments and controls
Switch for working lights
Switch for hydraulic kit or body
Switch for container lock
OBD-outlet
30-34
Switch for fifth wheel
Switch for spotlights
Switch for cab tilt
Switch for power take-off
Switch for Emergency Assistance Button
35
Stalk for trailer brake or switch for trailer brake, EBS or extra equipment
36
Climate control system
37
Radio, tachograph or Dynafleet
38
Radio or Dynafleet
39
USB port
40
Electrical outlet 12 V (Max 10 A)
41
Ashtray
42
Roof sign
43
Electric roof hatch
44
Thermostat
45
Spotlights
46
Switch for cab interior lighting
Instruments and controls
17
Gauges
Tachometer
The tachometer is divided into three fields indicated
by LEDs: Green LEDs, red LEDs and a field between
them with extinguished LEDs.
Use the green zone for normal driving.
Use the extinguished zone for engine braking.
Never let the engine go into the red zone.
J201128
Charge pressure gauge
To give good fuel economy, the needle should stay
still when driving on a flat road.
J201133
Oil pressure gauge
If the warning lamp lights up stop immediately and
switch the engine off! Investigate the cause. If the
lamp lights while the engine is running, an acoustic
alarm sounds. In addition the STOP lamp lights and a
warning message is shown on the display.
When driving with the engine at normal temperature,
the needle should stay between 3 and 5.5 bar (300–
550 kPa). The oil pressure may drop when the engine
is idling. This is not dangerous if the oil pressure
increases again when engine speed increases.
J201132
18
Instruments and controls
Temperature gauge for coolant
Stop immediately if the warning lamp lights! Let the
engine idle until the warning lamp goes out and the
temperature drops.
Under normal driving conditions, the pointer should
stay below the red zone.
J201131
Fuel gauge
When the warning lamp lights, there is 7–10% of the
fuel left in the tank.
J201134
Air pressure gauge for brakes
Stop immediately if a warning lamp lights! If the lamp
lights while the engine is running, an acoustic alarm
sounds. In addition the STOP lamp lights and a
warning message is shown in the display. The warning
lamp lights if the air pressure in the braking system is
too low. Investigate the cause of the pressure drop.
When the engine is started after it has not run for a
while, the air pressure can have dropped to a level too
low for driving away. The warning lamp will remain
lit until the air pressure has risen to the correct level. If
there is no air in the braking system, it can take some
time before the indicator needle begins to move.
During driving the needle should remain within the
green zone, but when braking it may go below the
green zone for a short time.
J201135
Instruments and controls
19
When “1” lights, the gauge shows the air pressure in
the front brake circuit and when “2” lights, the air
pressure in the rear brake circuit is shown.
Level gauge for AdBlue
This gauge indicates the approximate amount of
AdBlue in the tank. The red sector and the yellow
LED indicate when AdBlue should be filled.
J201136
Symbols
The symbols shown on the driver information display
are described in section describing the display.
Symbol
Meaning
Note
Left indicator on
In the case of a fault the arrow flashes twice as
fast.
Left indicator on (trailer)
In the case of a fault the arrow flashes twice as
fast.
Note! Fault indication will not occur if LEDs are
used for the trailer lighting.
Stop, there is a fault on the truck
Lights up together with another symbol
or with a message on the display.
Seat belt reminder
Parking brake applied
Check
Lights up together with some other symbol or
together with a message on the display.
20
Symbol
Instruments and controls
Meaning
Note
Information
Lights up together with some other symbol or
together with a message on the display.
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control)
Green lamp = ACC has detected a vehicle. Red
lamp = collision warning, driver must brake.
Low split gear engaged
Main beam on
Front fog lamps on
Rear fog lamps on
Emissions-related fault
Contact a workshop; a fault has occurred in the
engine which can have negative environmental
effects.
Battery not charging
Pre-heating on
Front wheel drive engaged
Differential lock engaged between the
front wheels
Differential lock engaged between wheels Flashes
Differential lock engaged between axles
Instruments and controls
Symbol
21
Meaning
Note
Check the tachograph
Refer to the error menu in the tachograph display.
The bogie lift switch is on.
On trucks equipped with A-ride, the symbol
indicates the end position.
The trailer bogie lift switch is on
ABS fault on tractor vehicle
ABS fault on trailer
If the symbol lights up at speeds exceeding
7 km/h, the ABS is disengaged. The braking
system operates as if no ABS is available.
Instruments and controls
22
Lighting and headlamps
The equipment may vary in different markets.
Headlights
• Parking lights: Turn the lighting switch (1) to b.
• Dip beam: Turn the lighting switch (1) to c.
• Main beam: Turn the lighting switch (1) to c and
pull the main beam stalk towards you.
• Main beam and additional lamps (spotlights):
Turn the lighting switch (1) to d and pull the main
beam stalk towards you.
1
Lighting switch
2
Indicator for front fog lamp
3
Indication (repeater) for rear fog lamp
4
Instrumentation lighting
5
Vertical adjustment of headlamps (extra)
6
Hazard warning flashers
J0010330
Day Running Light
Turn the lighting switch (1) to position a. The dipped
beam and the parking lamps will come on when the
engine is started.
Fog light
The light switch (1) must be positioned in b, c or d for
the fog lamp to come on. In position b, the rear fog
lamps only function if the front fog lamps are lit.
• Front fog lamp: Push the lighting switch in (1).
Indicator lamp (2) lights. Extinguish the fog lamp
by pressing in the lighting switch (1) again.
• Rear fog lamp: Pull out the lighting switch (1).
The indicator lamp (3) and the control lamp light
up. Extinguish the rear fog lamp by pulling out the
lighting switch (1) again.
J3015656
Stalk for main beam and direction
indicators.
Instruments and controls
23
The fog lamps go out if the lighting switch (1) is set to
position a or if the ignition is turned off. If the lighting
switch (1) is set to another position again or if the
ignition is turned on again, the fog lamps must be
turned on manually again.
Guide lights (PS-LIGHT)
Certain parts of the exterior lighting (main and dipped
beam, parking lights) can be kept lit and function as
guide lights after the truck has been locked. The time
delay can be set between 0 and 254 seconds and is
done at a workshop.
• The key should be in position 0.
• The function is activated by holding the “main
beam and direction indicator” stalk in position 1 for
3 seconds.
• Step out of the truck and lock the door.
Pressing the lock button on the remote control once
more resets the timer so that the selected time starts
again from zero.
The function is inactivated by holding the “main beam
and direction indicator” stalk in position 1 for 3
seconds.
Dipping for left-hand or right-hand traffic
The headlamps are asymmetrical, which means that
trucks for right-hand traffic have the light beam
concentrated to the right and for left-hand traffic to the
left. When a truck for right-hand traffic is driven in a
country with left-hand traffic, the oncoming traffic is
therefore dazzled.
To eliminate this problem:
1
Fold out the headlamp.
2
Remove the cover for the lower lamp.
3
Move the lever on the side of the lamp towards
the truck.
To change back again, move the lever away from the
truck.
1
2
J201647
24
Instruments and controls
Static cornering light
Static cornering lightlights up dark areas when turning
left and right.
The light is activated by a switch in the instrument
panel. Light on each respective
side is lit when:
the speed is below 40 km/h
and
the flashers for either direction are on
Identification lamps
Activate the identification lamps by pressing the
switch. An indicator LED in the switch lights.
Switch off the identification lamps by pressing the
switch again. The LED in the switch goes out.
J192304
Instruments and controls
25
Windscreen wipers
Function
1
Intermittent wiping
2
Spring-return position
3
Windscreen wiper, normal speed
4
Windscreen wiper, high speed
5
Windscreen washers and wipers and headlamp
washer
Esc
The time intervals for the intermittent wipers can be
adjusted by the slide control on top of the stalk. The
interval time can be set from 1 to 10 seconds.
J166524
Rain sensor
If the truck is fitted with a rain sensor, it senses the
amount of rain against the windscreen and determines
the speed of the windscreen wipers.
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted with
a slide control on top of the stalk.
Note!
Note! The sensitivity of the rain
sensor can vary in different weather
conditions.
Instruments and controls
26
Function
1
Rain sensor on
2
Spring-return position
3
Windscreen wiper, normal speed
4
Windscreen wiper, high speed
5
Windscreen washers and wipers and headlamp
washer
Esc
The rain sensor can be switched off by moving the
stalk to the neutral position for two to four seconds
and then up again. The windscreen wiper is then in the
intermittent mode. The interval is controlled by a slide
control on top of the stalk. Repeat the procedure to
reactivate the rain sensor.
J166524
Parking brake
Hand control
0 Parking brake released
0–1 The parking brake for the tractor and trailer are
applied gradually between positions 0 and 1. If a
problem occurs with the service brakes, this position
can be used as an emergency brake.
1 Parking brake applied on tractor unit and service
brakes on trailer.
2 ”Parking position”. Parking brake released on the
tractor unit, no brake on the trailer vehicle. The lever
in locked position.
J5012236
Instruments and controls
27
Caution!
Always apply the parking brake
when you leave the vehicle. If the
parking brake is not applied, a
symbol on the display will start to
flash, and at the same time an
audible warning will sound to
alert the driver.
Warning!
Check that the lever is in locked
position (position 2).
Blocking valve
If the pressure in the braking system is too low, for
example if the truck has been parked for a long period
of time, the blocking valve must be pushed in for the
hand-operated parking brake to be released. Before the
blocking valve can be pushed in the pressure in the
braking system must be approximately 5 bar.
J0008051
28
Instruments and controls
Using the trailer service brake when
parking
To ensure that the braking effect when parking a
vehicle combo does not diminish due to air leakage,
the spring brakes only are applied on the truck when
parking. However, in certain situations, such as
parking on slippery surfaces or on steep slopes with
heavy loads, it can be advantageous to apply the trailer
service brakes as well.
To activate the trailer service brakes for parking, pull
the blocking valve button out until it remains out. The
trailer brakes will now be activated as long as there is
pressure in their brake systems.
Note!
As the pressure will gradually leak
out from the trailer, this method
should only be used temporarily and
with the engine running. If the
vehicle needs to be parked in this
way (without the engine running) the
wheels must be chocked or you must
check that the vehicle remains
parked (does not roll away) even
without the help of the trailer's
brakes.
Instruments and controls
29
Trailer brake
Note!
This control must not be used as a
parking brake.
J0008056
Electric trailer brake
Depress the switch to brake the trailer.
Speed must be less than 4 km/h for the brake to be
engaged. The brake is disengaged if speed exceeds
7 km/h or when the switch is released.
When the brake is applied, the indication lamp in the
switch lights up.
J0008526
30
Instruments and controls
Air suspension
Remote control box
More information about how the air suspension and
control box can be used will be found in chapters
"Driving" and "Loading and unloading".
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
Control buttons
To specify air suspension function:
1
STOP, cancels regulation.
2
Drive position, for normal driving.
3
Manual control.
Changing ride height.
J7009817
J7009830
Instruments and controls
31
Axle button
To specify which axle is to be adjusted or which
memory is to be used:
• M1, front axle or memory 1.
• M2, front and rear axle or memory 2.
• M3, rear axle or memory 3.
J7009818
Control buttons
To raise or lower the truck.
To avoid having to hold in the control button, for
example when raising or lowering the truck to it's
highest or lowest height, activate the hold function.
Press one of the control buttons and at the same time
press the memory button. To cancel the hold function,
press the memory button again, one of the control
buttons, or STOP.
J7009819
32
Instruments and controls
J7009831
Memory button
To store or retrieve the memory content.
J7009820
J7009832
Information display
33
General, about the display
STOP
-4A
J201126
The display is located in the middle of the the
instrument cluster. You can use the display to see
vehicle messages, control certain functions on the
truck and see information about the truck, amongst
them temperatures, levels and distances.
The display is controlled via the control unit to the
right of the steering wheel. There are four buttons:
1
Esc
2
"Select"
3
▲
4
▼
34
Information display
The first that is shown
The display lights up when the key is turned to the
drive position.
75ºC
If there are no active vehicle messages, the favourite
display is shown. You select what is to be displayed,
see “favourite display, setting”.
15ºC
The favourite display is shown all the time if there are
no vehicle messages to show or unless you select one
of the menus. To enter the menu system in the display,
press “SELECT” on the control unit. See section
“Menus” for more information about the menus.
If there are vehicle messages, these are shown instead
of the favourite display. The number of the message
shown and the total number are shown in the upper
right corner. 3/3, for example, means that the vehicle
message currently being displayed is the third message
of three active messages. Step between the vehicle
messages using ▲ and ▼. Take suitable actions and
then acknowledge them with “Esc”. For more
information about vehicle messages, see section
“Messages and symbols”.
General, about messages
If there is a fault in the truck or if something happens
that requires attention, such as the outdoor temperature
approaching freezing point, a vehicle message is
displayed or a symbol appears in the display.
If several messages appear at the same time, only the
most important message is displayed. Step between the
vehicle messages using ▲ and ▼.
To obtain more detailed technical information about
vehicle messages, see section “Fault diagnosis”.
98ºC
11:45
AM
CC
7658.8 Km
Information display
35
Information messages
When this light comes on a new information message
is displayed. The lamp is used for information. The
lamp being lit does not mean that there is a fault in the
vehicle.
J3014366
Acknowledge the message with “Esc”. If the message
is still valid, it will be shown again the next time the
key is turned to the starting position. Previously
displayed messages can also be seen at “Vehicle
messages”.
If a message appears on the display and is
acknowledged, it can appear on the display again if the
reason for the message disappears after
acknowledgement but then reappears.
Example: If the gearbox oil temperature becomes too
high, a message is activated automatically. The driver
acknowledges this message using “Esc”. If the
temperature then drops to a normal level but then
becomes too high again, the message will be shown
again.
Warning messages
Acknowledge the message with ”Esc”. If the fault is
still active, it will be shown again next time the starter
key is turned to the starting position. Previously
displayed messages can also be seen at “Vehicle
messages”. If a fault message appears on the display
and is acknowledged, it can appear on the display
again if the fault disappears after acknowledgement
but then reappears again.
Note!
This lamp lights when something
must be rectified. If it is a fault on
the truck, the truck shall be driven to
a workshop for repair. The truck will
not be damaged immediately and can
in certain circumstances complete
it's assignment first. It may also be
something that the driver can correct
himself, such as high temperature in
the transmission, by driving more
sedately or stopping the truck for a
while.
36
Information display
J3014365
Stop message
A buzzer sounds at the same time as a stop message is
displayed. The buzzer and stop message can be
acknowledged with "ESC", but will be repeated after
10 seconds. The symbol is lit continuously.
Warning!
When this lamp lights, the vehicle
must be stopped immediately and
the engine switched off. If the
vehicle is not stopped and the
engine turned off, there will be
serious consequences for the
vehicle, driver or load.
J3014364
Alarm, warning and information symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
High temperature, coolant
Crankcase pressure too high
Low level, engine coolant
Engine fault
Low oil pressure, engine oil
Engine speed too high
Information display
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Low oil level, engine oil
Low air pressure, gearbox
High temperature,
engine oil
Gearbox fault
Pre-heating fault
Low level, gearbox oil
High temperature,
inlet manifold
Low oil pressure, gearbox
Engine temperature too
low for engine brake
(VEB)
High temperature,
gearbox oil
Too high concentration of soot
particles or ash in the particulate
filter. See section “Particulate filter”
for more information.
Parking brake applied
Air filter clogged. Check that the net
in the air intake is not clogged.
Brake pressure low
Engine is switched off
Clutch running hot
Cab tilt lock open
Temperature, hydraulic
retarder
37
38
Symbol
Information display
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
The compressor charge is unusually
high. The cause could be air leakage.
Risk of moisture in the pneumatic
system. There are several causes:
•
•
Time to replace the desiccant
element.
•
The compressor is being used to
much.
•
Fault with the air system.
•
If the symbol is shown together
with the information symbol (i),
the leakage is so large that fuel
consumption
is increased.
If the symbol is displayed
together with the check symbol
(CHECK), then the leakage is so
large that it can cause an
unplanned stop if not remedied.
Fault in trailer EBS function
Leakage from indicated tyre/axle.
This warning may also occur after
changing tyres. Disable by
unscrewing the hose to the tyre
pressure sensor on the tyre in
question, wait for a minute and then
screw on again. (Key in drive
position)
Connected trailer without ABS
High tyre pressure
Poor brake effect on
trailer
Low tyre pressure
Uneven braking effect between
tractor and trailer
Baggage door open
Low pressure in the air suspension
system
Door open
Wheel spin or ABS activated
Door to cargo hold
open
Traction Control Function
temporarily disengaged
Airbag
Information display
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
39
Meaning
Trailer disconnected
Low level washer fluid
Superstructure not in drive position
One or more lamps do not light.
Air suspension in manual position
Fault in the electrical system causing
lamp not to light. Can cause a
hardware fault in the electronics.
Air suspension not in drive position
Warning freezing conditions
Low pressure or flow in steering
servo. The symbol might be
displayed when stationary or at low
speeds without there being a fault.
Fuel filter clogged
Stop
Low fuel level
Voltage warning
Stability control active
Battery discharge
Diagram sheet box open or sheet for
driver 1 missing. (Only for certain
variants)
Alarm in service mode.
Service reminder
40
Information display
Symbols for air suspension
Symbol
Meaning
Action
The control button is set
Select ride height
to manual control or
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
adjustment of ride height. displayed.
Axle load distribution 70%
If the control button is in
the centre position the air
suspension is in locked
position.
Check whether the air suspension is locked:
Turn the ignition key to the stop position (0)
and then back to the drive position (I).
If the symbol remains on the display the air
suspension is locked. See section "Air
suspension in locked position", page 628.
With "optimise traction",
the axle load distribution
is shown in the display.
None. The message disappears when optimal
load distribution has been achieved.
Truck not in drive
position.
Check that the control button is in the drive
position and wait until the truck reaches the
correct drive height.
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
displayed.
A signal will sound if the speed is too high. If
a bellows is punctured, drive, at not more than
30 km/h, to a Volvo workshop, or contact
Volvo Action Service.
CHECK THE AIR SUSPENSION There is an air suspension Check whether the fault is active at the next
AT THE NEXT STOP
malfunction.
stop: Turn the ignition key to the stop position
(0) and then back to the drive position (I). If
the message remains in the display, the fault is
active. See section "Air suspension in locked
position".
Status symbols
Status symbols are shown in the lowest row of the
display.
Symbol
Meaning
Air intake heating or air intake
heating fault
Symbol
LCS
Meaning
Lane Change Support
active
Information display
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Parking heater timer activated
Alarm clock activated
CC
ACC
41
Meaning
Cruise control active
Adaptive cruise control active
Message active
Auxiliary brake position A
Water in fuel
Auxiliary brake position 1
(draining required)
Auxiliary brake working
Auxiliary brake position 2
MI
Odometer, miles
Auxiliary brake position 3
KM
Odometer, kilometres
Auxiliary brake position B
PTO
Power take-off active
ATS (Aftertreatment system)
inactive
High temperature, exhaust system
Lane Keeping Support(LKS) active
Lane Keeping Support (LKS)
inactive
Other Symbols
There are even more symbols within different menus
that have not been included here. See the description
of the menu in question for an explanation.
Information display
42
Menu structure
Menus when driving
1
2
3
4
Gauges
1.1
Temperature, outside
1.2
Temperature, engine oil
1.3
Temperature, gearbox
1.4
Voltmeter/Ammeter
1.5
Gear position
1.6
Pressure, primary tank
Fuel data
2.1
Fuel consumption
2.2
Stage data
2.3
Remaining fuel
2.4
AdBlue
Time/distance
3.1
Tripmeter
3.2
Average speed
3.3
Estimated arrival time
3.4
Clock and Date
3.5
Alarm clock
3.6
Driving/rest time
Display
4.1
Black panel
4.2
Backlight
4.3
Favourite display, setting
4.4
Night/Day
5
Vehicle messages
6
Tyre pressure
7
Reset
7.1
Reset
Information display
8
ATS¹
8.1
Start regeneration
8.2
Activate/Deactivate ATS
8.3
System conditions
8.4
Soot/ash level
¹ Only on trucks with variants JPN07 and EAS-DPF
Menus when stationary
1
2
3
P-heater timer
1.1
Programming
1.2
Reset
Display setting
2.1
Language
2.2
Units
2.3
Time/Date
2.4
Display light
2.5
Change password¹
Vehicle Settings
3.1
Traction control
3.2
DAS
3.3
LCD
3.4
Fleet Limits¹
3.5
Current sensor calibration
3.6
Fleet ID¹
3.7
Day running lights automatic
3.8
Draining/priming
3.9
Set wheel ID
3.10 Set reference pressure
4
Diagnostics
4.1
Fault diagnostics
4.2
Cluster selftest
4.3
Part number
43
Information display
44
5
6
Vehicle data
5.1
Oil level
5.2
Load indicator
5.3
Brake linings, status
Maintenance
6.1
1
Service Warning
Password protected menu.
Information display
45
Show menus
If no other message is shown, the favourite display
will be shown. To enter the menu system, press
"SELECT" on the control unit.
For reasons of safety, not all menus are available when
driving. To see certain menus and to make certain
settings, the truck must be stationary.
75 °C
15 °C
98 °C 11:45
AM
7658.8
km
Step between the menus
1
Move the cursor between menus using ▲ and ▼.
The order number of the marked menu is shown
in the top right corner. 2/6 indicates that there are
6 menus and that the current menu is number 2.
2
Go from a menu to a sub-menu using "SELECT".
3
Leave a sub-menu with "Esc".
Change a setting
Example:
The display shows the favourite display and you wish
to set the alarm clock to ring at 05:45.
1
Go to the menus using "SELECT".
Put the cursor on "Time/Distance" with ▲and ▼.
46
2
Information display
Press "SELECT".
The current time and date are shown.
3
Step the alarm clock with ▲ and ▼.
4
Press "SELECT".
Step down to ”NEW TIME” with ▲ and ▼.
5
Press "SELECT".
The hours are marked.
Step to the required hour using ▲ and ▼.
6
Press "SELECT".
The first digit for minutes is marked.
Step to the required digit using ▲ and ▼.
7
Press "SELECT".
The second digit for minutes is marked.
Step to the required digit using ▲ and ▼.
8
Press "SELECT".
”ON” is marked.
9
Press "SELECT".
A cross is place in the box in front of "ON" and
the symbol for activated alarm clock is shown in
the status bar. The alarm clock setting is then
automatically displayed.
10 Go back to favourite display with "Esc". The
symbol for activated alarm clock is shown in the
status bar.
To deactivate the alarm clock:
• Enter the ”Time/Distance” menu
with ”SELECT”.
• Step the alarm clock with ▲ and ▼.
• Press "SELECT".
• Step to ”OFF” with ▲ and ▼.
• Press "SELECT".
Information display
47
Temperature, outside
The temperature outside the cab.
J3005101
Temperature, engine oil
Temperature of the engine oil.
J3013611
Temperature, gearbox
Temperature of the gearbox oil.
J3005098
Note!
Temperatures below 45°C are not
shown.
Voltmeter/Ammeter
Voltage values less than 20.0 V are presented as LOW
if the engine speed is less than 800 rpm for 10
minutes. The voltage values higher than 30.0 V are
presented as HIGH.
If the ammeter's value becomes too low, the ammeter's
value is shown automatically as well as the text
“Discharge”.
J3008832
48
Information display
Gear position
The menu "Gear position" shows information about
engaged gear, lever position, available gears etc.
For further information about "Gearbox", see separate
driver instructions "I-shift" and "Powertronic”.
Pressure, primary tank
If the pressure in the primary tank drops below 8 Bar,
a fault message is displayed together with the info/
warning symbol.
J3016142
Air-suspended vehicles work with two pressure levels:
• Maximum system pressure at standstill (and low
speed)
• Reduced system pressure when driving (reduce fuel
consumption and wear on air compressor)
Certain variants do not have reduced system pressure.
Fuel consumption
For setting the units, see section “Units”.
Average fuel consumption:
The value is presented as a figure and an arrow
pointing down, (e.g. ø26.) During a time after resetting
the display shows ”— — — ” while average fuel
consumption is calculated.
Instantaneous fuel consumption:
The value is presented numerically as well as in the
form of a bar.
Target fuel consumption:
The value is displayed as a T upside down below the
bar. For information on setting this value, see section
“Fuel (target)”.
Reset fuel consumption
Press “SELECT”.
J3014498
Note!
At idle, no bar is shown and the fuel
consumption is displayed in litre/hr
(alternatively gallons/hr).
Information display
49
To reset all fuel data, hold “SELECT” pressed in for 1
second.
Stage data is also reset.
Leg data
The amount of fuel consumed since the last reset.
J3013617
Resetting, stage data
Press “SELECT”.
To reset all stage data, hold “SELECT” pressed in for
1 second.
Fuel consumption (see above) is also reset.
Remaining fuel
• How far one can drive at the current average
consumption
• How much fuel is left in the tank
J3014498
J0010376
AdBlue
How much AdBlue is left in the tank.
J0013296
50
Information display
Trip meter
Two independent distances can be saved, for leg 1 and
leg 2.
J0009587
Note!
The trip values must be reset before
each measurement.
Reset trip meter
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Mark with ▲ and ▼ if leg 1 or leg 2 is to be
reset.
3
Confirm selection with "SELECT" or depress
"Esc" to exit reset.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated as the distance driven
divided by the time the engine has been running (since
latest reset). Two different average speeds can be
measured, average speeds 1 and 2.
J3013620
Note!
The values must be reset before each
measurement.
Reset average speeds
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Mark with ▲ and ▼ if average speed 1 or 2 is to
be reset.
Information display
3
51
Confirm selection with "SELECT" or depress
"Esc" to exit reset.
Estimated time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is calculated as the
remaining distance divided by the vehicle's average
speed.
J3013621
Show distance
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Enter the remaining distance in km (or miles)
• Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
• Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
• Step backwards with "Esc"
Time and Date
The menus "Time and date" and "Alarm Clock" are
available even when the starter key is in the stop
position. The menu is activated by pressing any of the
buttons on the control unit for at least 1 second. The
menu remains active for 30 seconds after the last
depression.
Current time and date. For alternative settings 12h or
24h and date format, see section “Time/date”.
The clock cannot be altered if the truck is equipped
with a tachograph. This is then done in the tachograph
time setting menu instead (see "Operating instructions
Tachograph").
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Set Time and Date
• Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
• Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
J3013618
52
Information display
• Step backwards with "Esc"
If the starter key is in stop position and it takes more
than 30 seconds between button depressions, the
setting is aborted.
Alarm clock
The menu "Alarm Clock" is available even when the
starter key is in stop position. The menu is activated by
pressing any of the buttons on the control unit for at
least 1 second. The menu remains active for 30
seconds after the last depression.
The alarm clock cannot be set when driving, but the
buzzer that sounds when triggered can be shut off by
pressing "Esc".
Alarm clock, setting
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Move the cursor to NEW TIME using ▲ and ▼.
3
Confirm with "SELECT".
4
Enter the alarm time
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
Step backwards with ”Esc”
5
”ON” is then marked. Confirm with "SELECT".
The symbol to the right is shown on the status bar
to indicate that the alarm clock is active.
If the starter key is in stop position and it takes more
than 30 seconds between button depressions, the
setting is aborted.
Activate alarm clock
Activating the alarm clock without changing alarm
time:
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Move the cursor to "ON" using ▲ and ▼.
3
Confirm with "SELECT".
J3013619
Information display
4
53
The symbol for activated alarm clock is shown
on the status bar in the display.
Switch off the alarm clock
When the alarm clock goes off, the word ALARM
lights up, the current time is displayed and a warning
signal is sounded. The alarm shuts off after 60 seconds
or if "ESC" is depressed.
Driving/rest time
Information about driving and rest times are taken
from the digital tachograph (the function is an option).
The symbol is at the far left and the information under
it varies depending on the selected activity in the
digital tachograph. The symbol in the centre indicates
pause and rest time. The symbol to the right indicates
driving time
Black Panel
When "Black Panel" is active, only the speedometer
and tachometer are illuminated (except the coloured
field).
The following events light the backlighting:
• a message is activated
• a button is depressed
• the engine speed enters the red zone on the
tachometer
Backlight
The display lighting follows the rheostat setting
(which also controls the other instrument lighting).
This menu can be used to alter the display lighting
with respect to the lighting of the other instruments.
00:25
10:27
2:47
Information display
54
Set backlight
1
Increase or decrease the backlighting with ▲ and
▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Favourite Display, setting
Select which of 13 different gauges and functions to be
shown in “Favourite display”.
No display
Outside temperature
Temperature, engine oil
Temperature, gearbox oil
Voltmeter/Ammeter
Gear position
Remaining AdBlue
Fuel consumption
Remaining fuel
J0009588
Information display
Stage data
Trip meter
Average road speed
Estimated arrival time
Time/Date
Alarm
Tacho info
Compass
DAS
1
Press “SELECT”.
2
Press “SELECT” once more and the upper field
becomes active. Select the gauge or function
using ▲ and ▼. Acknowledge with “SELECT”
when required
gauge or function is shown.
3
Press “SELECT” once more to activate the next
field. Select the gauge or function using ▲ and
▼. Acknowledge with “SELECT” when the
required gauge or function is shown.
4
Press “SELECT” or “Esc” until all the fields are
active and the clock is shown.
55
56
Information display
Night/Day
This function is used to activate daylight mode (white
text on a black background) and night mode (black
text on a white background). When the daylight mode
is active, the display changes to night mode if the
lighting is turned on.
Vehicle Messages
If a message is displayed and acknowledged, a symbol
is shown in the status bar. Go into this menu to see
which messages have been acknowledged without
being rectified.
Switch between messages using ▲ and ▼.
Press "ESC" to return to the main menu.
An acknowledged message that is still active the next
time the starter key is turned to drive position will be
displayed as an unacknowledged message. The
message symbol will stay on as long as there are
unacknowledged messages present.
Tyre pressure
This function checks the tire pressures on the truck and
the trailer (if applicable) if the option TPM (Tyre
Pressure Monitoring) is installed.
Switch between measurement points using ▲ and ▼.
J0011924
Information display
57
Note!
The data in the display can vary
depending on how many axles and
tyre pressure sensors are fitted to the
truck.
Note!
It is only possible to read off the tyre
pressure when the truck is stationary.
Set wheel ID
1
Select axle with ▲ and ▼
2
Confirm selected axle with "SELECT".
3
Select wheel with ▲ and ▼
4
Confirm selected wheel with "SELECT".
5
Current ID is shown.
6
Adjust ”Newt ID”.
Adjust the marked digit with ▲ and ▼
Confirm each selected digit with "SELECT".
7
Confirm change of ID with "SELECT".
Press "Esc" to return to previous digit, row or menu.
Set reference pressure
1
Select axle with ▲ and ▼
2
Confirm selected axle with "SELECT".
3
Current value is shown
4
Adjust "New value".
Adjust the marked digit with ▲ and ▼
Confirm each selected digit with "SELECT"
5
Confirm reference pressure with "SELECT"
Press "Esc" to return to previous digit, row or menu.
58
Information display
Reset
If "SELECT" is depressed for more than 1 second, the
following functions are reset:
• Fuel consumption
• Leg data
• Tripmeters 1 & 2
• Average speeds 1 & 2
ATS
(Only JPN07 and EAS-DPF)
The truck has an exhaust after-treatment system (ATS)
that includes a diesel particulate filter (DPF). When a
certain quantity of soot and ash particles have been
collected, regeneration of the filter is necessary. See
also section ”Diesel particulate filter”.
Caution!
The silencer becomes extremely
hot during regeneration.
Therefore avoid driving or
stopping the truck in unsuitable
places, for example. in tunnels, in
fields or close to inflammable
materials or gases.
Start regeneration
This function is used when regeneration must be
started manually.
When regeneration starts, a symbol is shown to the
right and the message ”Regeneration in progress” is
shown in the display.
J3018100
When regeneration starts the symbol High
temperature, exhaust system is shown in the display.
Information display
If manual regeneration fails, the
message ”Regeneration failed . Check system
conditions.” is shown in the display. To find out why
the regeneration failed, select ”System conditions”(see
below) and check the system conditions.
59
Note!
If regeneration is performed while
the engine is idling, the idle speed
may rise.
Abort regeneration
Regeneration can be aborted at any time by:
• turning off the ignition, or
• deactivating ATS (see below)
Activate/Deactivate ATS
To activate/deactivate ATS:
1
Choose ”Activate/deactivate regeneration” with
▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT"
3
Abort with ”Esc”
When ATS is deactivated, the following symbol is
shown on the display. Reactivated ATS as soon as
possible.
J129144
System conditions
This function shows the status of the system
conditions that must be fulfilled for regeneration to
start (applies only to manual start of regeneration).
The system conditions can have the status OK,
CHECK or N/A. For regeneration to function, all
conditions must have status OK. If any of the
conditions has status CHECK, then regeneration
cannot be performed. N/A means that the condition
does not apply to this truck. See all the system
conditions below.
Information display
60
The following table shows the system conditions and
the requirements for them to be fulfilled.
System conditions Status OK if:
Clutch
Clutch not depressed
PTO
PTO not activated
Accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal not depressed
Gears
Gearbox in neutral
Vehicle speed
Truck stationary
Handbrake
Handbrake applied
System fault
Component fault, engine, or diesel
particulate filter do not prevent
regeneration
Action: Contact a Volvo workshop
Temporary system Soot level is not sufficiently high to start
lockout
regeneration
Action: Continue driving as normal until
the soot level requires regeneration
Permanent system The soot level is too high to permit
lockout
regeneration
Action: Stop the truck immediately and
contact your nearest Volvo workshop
Engine
Engine running and warmed up
Inactivation
switch
“Inactivate ATS” selected by driver
Soot/ash level
The function shows the amount of soot and ash
collected in the filter graphically
Choose which image to show with ”▲ and ▼”.
Programming, p-heater timer
If the timer already has a time set, it will be shown.
1
Press "SELECT".
Information display
2
Move the cursor to "Programming" using ▲ and
▼.
3
Confirm with "SELECT".
4
Set the start date with ▲ and ▼
Current date is default.
5
Confirm with "SELECT".
6
Set the start time with ▲ and ▼
7
Confirm with "SELECT".
8
Set duration with ▲ and ▼
The time is changed in 10 minute intervals. The
longest time that can be set is 2 hours.
9
Confirm with "SELECT".
10
The set time and date are shown.
11
Confirm with "SELECT".
Reset, p-heater timer
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Move the cursor to "Reset" using ▲ and ▼.
3
Confirm with "SELECT".
Language
1 To set the required language press "SELECT".
2 The display now shows up to three different
languages. Select the desired language by moving the
cursor to the row concerned with ▲ and ▼. Confirm
the choice with "SELECT".
Units
Distance
Select if the trip should be shown as km or miles.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
61
Information display
62
Fuel consumption
Select if fuel consumption is shown as km/l, l/100 km,
miles per gallon (mpg) with IMP gallons or as miles
per gallon (mpg) with US gallons.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Temperature
Select if temperature shall be shown as Celsius (°C) or
Fahrenheit (°F).
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Pressure
Select if pressure should be shown as psi or bar.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Time/Date
Time
1
Mark the time format with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
In the AM/PM-format the time only goes to 12 and
then starts again from 1. AM is morning and PM is
afternoon.
Date
Select if the date is to be shown as year, month, day
(yymmdd), or day, month, year (ddmmyy) or as
month, day, year (mmddyy).
Information display
1
Select the date format with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
63
Display lighting
Contrast
1
Increase or decrease contrast with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Backlight
The display lighting follows the rheostat setting
(which also controls the other instrument lighting).
This menu can be used to alter the display lighting
with respect to the lighting of the other instruments.
1
Increase or decrease the backlighting with ▲ and
▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Night mode
This function is used for changing between white text
on a black background and black text on a white
background.
1
Mark if the night display should be active with ▲
and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“Esc” cancels the setting.
Change password
First enter the current password.
1
Mark which password is to be altered with ▲ and
▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
J0009588
Information display
64
3
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
4
Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
5
Step backwards with "Esc"
Traction control
1
Select “On” or “Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“Esc” aborts the setting.
If traction control is switched off, a warning symbol is
shown.
J3014424
Note!
When testing on a roller bench or
when towing with an axle raised, the
TCS must be switched off.
DAS
1
Select “On” or “Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“Esc” cancels the setting.
DAS level marking is only shown if it has been chosen
as favourite display.
LCS
1
Select “On” or “Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“Esc” cancels the setting.
Fleet limits
Engine speed (max)
Only accessible if correct password has been entered.
J153857
Information display
This setting gives the fleet owner the possibility to
choose an engine speed limit. If the engine exceeds
this limit, it will be registered, see section “Trip data”.
1
Select “Engine speed (max)” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
Enter a new engine speed limit (in rpm)
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
Step to the next digit using “SELECT”
Step backwards with “Esc”
4
Confirm the new engine speed limit with
“SELECT”
5
The message “Transfer complete” is shown
If the setting fails:
• Press “Esc” and try to do the setting one more time,
see point 1.
• If it still will not work, perform diagnostics of the
display and engine control unit, see section “Fault
diagnosis”.
• Contact a workshop if necessary.
Speed (max)
Only accessible if correct password is entered.
This function makes it possible for the carrier to set a
road speed limit. If the truck exceeds this speed it is
registered, see section “Trip data”.
1
Select "Speed (max)" with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
State a new speed limit
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
Step backwards with ”Esc”
4
Confirm the new speed limit with "SELECT"
5
The message "Transfer complete" is shown
If the setting fails:
• Press "Esc" and try to do the setting one more time,
see point 1.
65
66
Information display
• If it still will not work, perform diagnostics of the
display and engine control unit, see section “Fault
diagnosis”.
• Contact a workshop if necessary.
Fuel (target)
Only accessible if correct password is entered.
This function makes it possible for the carrier to set a
fuel consumption target. For information about fuel
consumption for a journey, see section “Trip data”.
1
Select Fuel (target) with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
State a new fuel target
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
Step backwards with ”Esc”
4
Confirm the new fuel target with "SELECT"
5
The message "Transfer complete" is shown
If the setting fails:
• Press "Esc" and try to do the setting one more time,
see point 1.
• If it still will not work, perform diagnostics of the
display and engine control unit, see section “Fault
diagnosis”.
• Contact a workshop if necessary.
Ammeter sensor calibration
Ammeter sensor calibration must be performed when a
sensor or instrument is replaced.
Follow the instructions on the display. Cancel by
pressing ”Esc”.
Fleet ID
Only accessible if correct password is entered.
Information display
67
In this menu the carrier can enter the fleet ID of the
truck if required. Data registered in the engine control
unit is then registered for that ID.
1
Set new Fleet ID
Set the first digit or letter with ▲ and ▼
Step to the next digit using "SELECT"
Step backwards with ”Esc”
13 digits must be entered (a space is entered for
unused positions).
2
Confirm the new Fleet ID with "SELECT"
3
The message "Transfer complete" is shown
If the setting fails:
• Press "Esc" and try to do the setting one more time,
see point 1.
• If it still will not work, perform diagnostics of the
display and engine control unit, see section “Fault
diagnosis”.
• Contact a workshop if necessary.
Trailer detection
Trailer detection can be shut off in this menu. A reason
for deactivating trailer detection could be to avoid
flashing lamps when using a trailer with LED rear
lights. LCM can currently not detect the low current
consumption of this type of lamp, so we recommend
the use of normal filament lamps.
1
Select “On” or “Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“ESC” aborts the setting.
If trailer detection is “Off”, the driver should observe
the following:
• Trailer indicator in the display is not active
(warning lamp).
• I-shift can select incorrect starting gear, which can
result in an overloaded clutch. When coupling a
Note!
A truck with inactivated trailer
detection does NOT fulfil the legal
requirements for fault indication of
direction indicators on a trailer
(according to ECE R48 6.5.8
warning lamp). Functioning lamps
for direction indication on a trailer
are obligatory.
Note!
Remember to reset the trailer
detection to “On”. This is done in
the same way as turning it off.
68
Information display
trailer, the starting gear should be adjusted
manually if it is too high.
• ESP (electronic stability program) on trucks with
EBS Gen 3 (manufactured from week 335). The
ESP function will have a reduced functionality if
trailer detection is turned off.
• EBS will have difficulty in calculating the correct
total weight after coupling/uncoupling of a trailer,
which can result in variable braking feeling.
• The warning in the display that the trailer has no
ABS will not function. The warning that the trailer's
ABS is out of order is not affected (it functions).
• LCM (lighting control module) will no longer
report fault codes to the combination instrument, a
situation that can occur with faults in the trailer
lighting power outlet.
Day running lights automatic
Day running lights automatic can be switched off in
this menu. This means that if the day running lights
automatic is “Off”, you must switch the dipped beams
on and off with the lights knob in the panel.
1
Select “On” or “Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with “SELECT”.
3
“Esc” cancels the setting.
Draining/priming
Draining/priming of the fuel system is done via this
menu, when required.
Depending on whether it is draining or priming that is
required, the display will show different messages. An
icon is shown together with the text "Draining/priming
request". The display also shows if draining or priming
is not allowed.
The following conditions must be met before draining/
priming can be carried out:
J3016141
Draining
Information display
1
Parking brake applied
2
Engine switched off
3
Ignition key in drive position
4
Symbol for "Draining/priming" must be lit (for
draining, symbol for "Water in the fuel").
If the message "Draining/priming not allowed" is
shown in the display, check first that conditions 1-4
are fulfilled.
Fault diagnostics
A list of the truck control units is shown in the menu
"Fault diagnostics".
Switch between control units using ▲ and ▼.
"SELECT" confirms choice of control unit. To cancel,
press "Esc".
1
During the time that the selected control unit is
polling, the display indicates that data transfer is
taking place.
2
If the selected control unit has no faults "No
faults" is displayed.
Press "Esc" to return to the previous menu.
3
If the selected control unit does not reply within 5
seconds the following is shown "Operation
failed" in the display.
Press "Esc" and try once more, see point 1.
Contact a workshop if necessary.
4
If the selected control unit has a fault code or
fault codes, it displays
1 Which control unit it applies to
2 Which parameter or component is faulty
3 Which type of fault it is
4 If the fault is active or inactive
5 How many times the fault has been registered
since the last reset
69
J3015665
Priming
Note!
To complete the draining/priming
process, the conditions must be
fulfilled during the whole of the
process.
70
Information display
5
If there are several fault codes or fault messages
for the same control unit, you can scroll through
the fault codes with ▲ and ▼. "Reset all" is
shown last in the list. This resetting only clears
the fault codes for the selected control unit.
6
If there are more than 20 fault codes/fault
messages for the selected control unit, the 21st
message will be "Too many fault messages". To
see those messages that are not shown, one or
more of the first messages must be reset.
7
Press "SELECT" to show more information on
the fault code. Fault codes are shown numerically
here. If the fault is inactive, both the time and
date for the fault are shown.
MID: Identification of control unit
PID: Identification of parameters
PPID: Volvo unique Identification of parameters
SID: Identification of components
PSID: Volvo unique Identification of
components
FMI: Identification of fault IDs
To reset the fault code, hold "SELECT" in for 1
second.
Instrument panel cluster self test
Indicator lamps test
1
Select ”Tell-tales test, LEDs” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
The tell-tales light up for approx. 5 seconds.
4
Cancel the test with "Esc"
Gauge test
1
Select ”Gauge test” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
The gauges make a diagnostic sweep.
The pointers move back and forth a few times,
between the end positions. They should not show
Information display
any particular value. This is just a check that they
move (e.g. that the drive stages and gauges
function).
4
Cancel the test with "Esc"
Display test
1
Select ”Display test” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
The whole display lights up for approx 3 seconds
after which it blacks out for 3 seconds. After this
a checkered pattern is displayed for 3 seconds.
The checkered pattern is then displayed inverted
for 3 seconds.
4
Cancel the test with "Esc"
Loudspeaker test
1
Select ”Loudspeaker test” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
The display shows the name of the sound at the
same time as the sound is activated for 10
seconds. Using ▲ and ▼ you can switch
between the different sounds.
4
Cancel the test with "Esc"
Part number
A list of the truck control units is shown in the menu
"Part Number". Both the control unit's hardware and
software numbers are shown.
1
Select part with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
Go back with "Esc"
71
72
Information display
Vehicle data
Oil level
The truck has an electronic oil level sensor.
Note!
The bar marked min and max shows the engine oil
level. The figure in the middle shows how many litres
between min and max levels.
There is no warning for low oil level
while driving.
The engine oil level is also shown when the key is
turned to the ignition position. The level is shown for 5
seconds or until the engine has started and is shown
directly after the SRS and welcome message.
In order to show the correct value, the engine must
have been turned off for at least 70 minutes. If the
engine has not been turned off sufficiently long, the
display shows how many minutes remain until a
correct value can be shown.
If the oil level is ”min” or below "min" a warning
symbol is shown.
Load indicator
The display shows indicated pressure on each axle,
indicated weight of the truck, indicated weight of the
trailer and indicated weight of the load. With bogie
and double drive axles the indicated weight on both
axles is shown. The values are updated every two
seconds.
See the separate driver instruction for more
information about the load indicator's function.
Brake lining, status
Shows the condition of the truck's brake linings.
Vehicle ID
The truck chassis number and the vehicle number that
were entered into the menu "Fleet ID" are displayed
here.
Note!
The oil level shall lie between "min"
and "max". Do not top up before the
level approaches "min". Too much
oil in the engine can increase oil
consumption.
Information display
73
Total value
The total values show the engine's total values to date,
logged during the lifetime of the engine control unit.
The values that are saved are
• Total distance
• Total fuel used
• Total engine hours
• Total idle time
• Total PTO hours
• Total engine revolutions
Scroll between values with ▲ and ▼. Return to
previous menu with "Esc".
If the transfer should fail, then "No data" is shown
when data is missing.
Trip data
There are 14 different trip values stored.
Note!
• Trip distance
In the menu "Trip data" you can find
information saved since the last
reset. To reset, see “Reset Trip data”.
• Trip fuel avg
• Trip fuel acc
• Trip overrevolutions
• Trip uneconomy rev's
• Trip fuel uneconomy rev's
• Trip average speed
• Trip overspeed:
• Trip engine hours
• Trip idle time
• Trip idle fuel
• Trip PTO hours
• Trip PTO fuel
• Trip cruise
74
Information display
Scroll between values with ▲ and ▼. Return to
previous menu with "Esc".
If the transfer should fail, then "No data" is shown
when data is missing.
Reset trip data
Only accessible if correct password is entered.
Reset all information in menu "Trip data". Follow the
instructions on the display.
Password
Certain functions in the display are password
protected. There are three passwords for the display.
When the vehicle is supplied from the factory the
passwords are:
Workshop Password 1: 0000
Owner Password: 1234
Workshop Password 2: 5678
When “Workshop, password 1” is entered, it is
possible to reset values (applies to a number of
functions).
With the two other passwords the following menus can
also be accessed:
• Fleet limit: engine RPM
• Fleet limit: the speed
• Fleet limit: fuel
• Fleet ID
When the key has been in the stop position for more
than 60 seconds or the batteries have been
disconnected, the password must be entered again in
order to access all the functions.
It is possible to remove the password protection for
certain functions. This can be carried out by a Volvo
workshop.
1
Set the first digit with ▲ and ▼
2
Step to the next digit using “SELECT”
Note!
Change password to prevent
unauthorized access to menus, see
“Change Password”.
Information display
3
75
Step backwards with “Esc”
Service reminder
(optional in certain markets)
A service reminder is used to remind the driver when
it is time to leave the vehicle for service. The reminder
is shown in the display, first as a forewarning and then
as a warning.
The service reminder is activated after a number of
kilometres driven.
When the number of driven kilometres is reached the
pre-defined value (as is defined by the fleet owner
together with a Volvo dealer), the service reminder is
activated.
Forewarning
A forewarning indicates that it is time to book a
service with a Volvo dealer. A forewarning is shown
in the display when 90% of the predefined number of
kilometres driven has been reached.
Upcoming maintenance
The forewarning message is active for 30 seconds. The
message will continue to be shown each time the key
is turned to the starting position, together with a lamp
for information messages, until either the service
reminder is reset or until a warning message is shown.
By using the display's control unit by the steering
wheel, you can reach the sub-menu to see the value
that the fleet owner has defined together with the
Volvo dealer. In the sub-menu, the following is shown
in the display when a forewarning level is reached.
J3014466
Information message
76
Information display
Service alarm
1,394 km
Warning
A warning indicates that it is time for service. The
warning is displayed when 100% of the predefined
value is reached.
Maintenance
A warning message is active until the driver has
acknowledged the message with the “ESC” button in
the display's control unit by the steering wheel. The
warning message will continue to be shown each time
the key is turned to the starting position, together with
the warning message lamp, until the service warning is
reset.
By using the display's control lever by the steering
wheel, you can access the sub-menu. When the predefined value has been reached, "--" is shown in the
sub-menu.
J3014465
Warning message
Information display
Service alarm
-- km
Resetting the service reminder
Enter the menu structure under Maintenance and
Service
Service alarm
-- km
Keep the “SELECT” button pressed in for at least 3
seconds. Enter password, workshop password 2, see
the section Entering password. Mark, using ▲ and ▼,
if resetting is to be done. Confirm with “SELECT”.
The display shows a confirmation that resetting has
started.
Estimated lining wear
One can see at which mileage the brake linings need
replacing under menu "Vehicle data" in the vehicle
information display. This information can also be read
off at a Volvo-workshop.
77
78
Information display
Monitoring of the wheel brakes
If the braking effect on a wheel is weaker than on the
other wheels, the "CHECK" lamp lights and a symbol
is shown on the display. You will feel no difference in
the braking power since the other wheels will brake
harder instead. However a fault code is stored in the
system and a Volvo service station should examine the
braking system.
J3014494
Warning symbol for poor braking
effect.
High brake temperature warning
If the brakes start to overheat, the "CHECK" lamp
lights and a symbol is shown in the display. The brake
pedal must be pressed harder to obtain the same
braking power as before.
J5013670
Warning symbol for high brake
temperature.
Resetting fault codes
If the EBS sets a fault code, the fault code cannot be
reset in the same way as other fault codes. It must be
done in this way instead:
Conditions:
• Vehicle stationary.
•
The pneumatic system is filled, to at least 10 bar
pressure.
• The parking brake shall not be set if there is a fault
on the trailer modulator.
Execution:
1
Turn off the ignition so that the control unit is
reset. Wait at least five seconds. During this time,
the brake shall not be applied!
2
Switch ignition on.
3
Wait at least fifteen seconds. During this time,
the vehicle must be stationary without the foot
Note!
See the information in the instrument
display.
Information display
brake being applied. The warning lamp is lit, the
system limitations are active.
4
Apply the footbrake until it is fully depressed.
5
Keep the footbrake pedal fully depressed for at
least five seconds.
6
Release the footbrake until it is fully raised.
7
The brake pedal must be fully released for at least
five seconds.
Reset test successful, warning lamp goes out:
• No fault detected during braking.
• Fault codes disabled.
• Normal brake function.
Reset test unsuccessful, warning lamp stays lit:
Reset test incorrectly performed.
• Braking in progress for longer than 25 seconds.
• The vehicle moved during the test.
Test correctly performed, but there is still an active
fault in the EBS system.
• Perform the test several more times.
The ignition must be switched on/off in order to
perform a new reset test. See points 1–3 above.
79
80
Information display
Position and content
J3018753
1
Tachometer
2
Control and warning lamps
3
Speedometer
4
Control and warning lamps
5
Fuel gauge
6
Display
7
Brake pressure gauge
The display, situated in the middle of the instruments,
has the job of presenting information to the driver,
refer to section "Display" for more information. The
info display is operated with the control lever on the
right side of the steering wheel, and using this the
Information display
81
driver or workshop can obtain information, see section
"Display control stalk" for more information.
Display
J3018843
The display is located in the middle of the the
instrument cluster. You can use the display to see
vehicle messages, control certain functions on the
truck and see information about the truck, amongst
them temperatures, levels and distances.
The display window is divided into three sectors:
1
Menu. This is where the menus are displayed,
together with automatic alarms, warnings and
information messages.
2
Status bar. The upper part displays the status
symbols. The lower part displays the outdoor
temperature.
3
Status bar. The clock is displayed on the left. The
odometer is displayed on the right.
Information display
82
Display control stalk
In order to communicate with the display, the control
lever on the right hand side of the steering wheel is
used. The following commands are available:
1
“Esc” is used to return to the previous character
and to discontinue a setting/operation.
2
“SELECT” confirms a selection or a character.
3
“▲” is used for increasing values when setting
digits and for browsing in the diagnostics menus.
4
“▼” is used for reducing values when setting
digits and for browsing in the diagnostics menus.
J3008810
General, about messages
There are three types of messages:
• Information
• Warning
• Stop
Above the info display are three lamps (for
information, warning or stop messages) which attract
the driver's attention to faults in the vehicle.
Information messages
When this light comes on a new information message
is displayed. The lamp is used to inform the driver.
The lamp lighting does not indicate a fault in the
vehicle.
J3014366
Information display
83
Warning messages
When this symbol lights up, the fault indicated should
be checked before driving. If no other warning lamp
lights to indicate the fault, contact the workshop. Fault
codes are obtained from the diagnostic menu, refer to
section “Fault diagnosis”.
J3014365
Stop message
Warning!
When this symbol lights up, the
vehicle should be stopped
immediately and the engine
switched off. If the vehicle is not
stopped and the engine turned off,
there will be serious
consequences for the vehicle,
driver or load. Contact a
workshop. Fault codes are
obtained from the diagnostic
menu, refer to section “Fault
diagnosis”.
J3014364
Acknowledge messages
The message lamp goes out when ”Esc” is pressed.
Both warning and stop messages can be
acknowledged. Messages which have been
acknowledged but which are active are shown again
when the starter key is turned to starting position.
Warning message: Warning messages can be
acknowledged with ”Esc”. This warning is
84
Information display
acknowledged until the next time the ignition key is
turned to the starter position. The warning message
and the symbol go out 30 seconds after the engine is
started.
Stop message: The buzzer is turned off with ”Esc”,
but is active again 10 seconds after the latest button
depression. The stop light remains lit the whole time.
Alarm, warning and information symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
High temperature, coolant
Crankcase pressure too high
Low level, coolant
Engine fault
Low oil pressure, engine oil
Engine speed too high
Low oil level, engine oil
Low air pressure, gearbox
High temperature,
engine oil
Gearbox fault
Air intake heating fault
Low level, gearbox oil
High temperature,
inlet manifold
Low oil pressure, gearbox
Engine temperature too
low for engine brake
(VEB)
High temperature,
gearbox oil
Information display
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
85
Meaning
Too high concentration of soot
particles or ash in the particulate
filter. See section “Particulate filter”
for more information.
Parking brake applied
Air filter clogged. Check that the net
in the air intake is not clogged.
Brake pressure low
Engine is switched off
Clutch running hot
Cab tilt lock open
Temperature, hydraulic
retarder
The compressor charge is unusually
high. The cause could be an air leak.
Risk of moisture in the pneumatic
system. There are several causes:
•
•
Time to replace the desiccant
element.
•
The compressor is being used to
much.
•
Fault with the air system.
•
If the symbol is shown together
with the information symbol (i),
the leak is so large that fuel
consumption
is increased.
If the symbol is displayed
together with the check symbol
(CHECK), then the leak is so
large that it can cause an
unplanned stop if not remedied.
Fault in trailer EBS function
Leakage from indicated tyre/axle.
This warning may also occur after
changing tyres. Disable by
unscrewing the hose to the tyre
pressure sensor on the tyre in
question, wait for a minute and then
screw on again. (Key in drive
position)
Connected trailer without ABS
High tyre pressure
86
Symbol
Information display
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Poor brake effect on
trailer
Low tyre pressure
Uneven braking effect between
tractor and trailer
Baggage door open
Low pressure in the air suspension
system
Door open
Wheel spin or ABS activated
Door to cargo hold
open
Traction Control Function
temporarily disengaged
Airbag
Trailer disconnected
Low level washer fluid
Superstructure not in drive position
One or more lamps do not light.
Air suspension in manual position
Fault in the electrical system causing
lamps not to light. Can cause a
hardware fault in the electronics.
Air suspension not in drive position
Warning. Freezing conditions.
Low pressure or flow in steering
servo. The symbol might be
displayed when stationary or at low
speed without there being a fault.
Fuel filter clogged
Stop
Low fuel level
Information display
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
87
Meaning
Voltage warning
Stability control active
Battery discharge
Diagram sheet box open or sheet for
driver 1 missing. (Only for certain
variants)
Alarm in service position.
ESP (electronic stability program)
temporarily disengaged
Symbols for air suspension
Symbol
Meaning
Action
The control button is set
Select ride height
to manual control or
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
adjustment of ride height. displayed.
Axle load distribution 70%
If the control button is in
the centre position the air
suspension is in locked
position.
Check whether the air suspension is locked:
Turn the ignition key to the stop position (0)
and then back to the drive position (I).
If the symbol remains on the display the air
suspension is locked. See section "Air
suspension in locked position", page 628.
With "optimise traction",
the axle load distribution
is shown in the display.
None. The message disappears when optimal
load distribution has been achieved.
Truck not in drive
position.
Check that the control button is in the drive
position and wait until the truck reaches the
correct drive height.
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
displayed.
A signal will sound if the speed is too high. If
a bellows is punctured, drive, at not more than
30 km/h, to a Volvo workshop, or contact
Volvo Action Service.
Information display
88
Symbol
Meaning
Action
CHECK THE AIR SUSPENSION There is an air suspension Check whether the fault is active at the next
AT THE NEXT STOP
malfunction.
stop: Turn the ignition key to the stop position
(0) and then back to the drive position (I). If
the message remains in the display, the fault is
active. See section "Air suspension in locked
position".
Status symbols
Status symbols are shown in the lowest row of the
display.
Symbol
Meaning
Pre-heating active or pre-heating
fault
Parking heater timer activated
Alarm clock activated
Symbol
Meaning
PTO
Power take-off active
CC
Cruise control active
ACC
Adaptive cruise control active
Message active
Auxiliary brake position A
Water in fuel
Auxiliary brake position 1
(draining required)
Auxiliary brake in operation
Auxiliary brake position 2
MI
Odometer, miles
Auxiliary brake position 3
KM
Odometer, kilometres
Auxiliary brake position B
Information display
89
Other Symbols
There are even more symbols within different menus
that have not been included here. See the description
of the menu in question for an explanation.
Gear position
The menu "Gear position" shows information about
engaged gear, lever position, available gears etc.
For further information about ”Gearbox”, see separate
driver instructions ”I-shift” and ”Powertronic”.
Temperature, outside
The temperature outside the cab.
J3005101
Engine oil pressure
Oil pressure.
Temperature, engine oil
Temperature of the engine oil.
J3013611
90
Information display
Voltmeter/Ammeter
Voltage values less than 20.0 V are presented as LOW
if the engine speed is less than 800 rpm for 10
minutes. Voltage values higher than 30.0 V are
presented as HIGH.
J3008832
Fuel consumption
For setting the units, see section “Units”.
1
2
Average fuel consumption:
The value is presented as a figure and an arrow
pointing down, (e.g. ø26.) During a time after
resetting the display shows ”— — — ” while
average fuel consumption is calculated.
Instantaneous fuel consumption:
The value is presented numerically as well as in
the form of a bar.
J3014498
Note!
At idle, no bar is shown and the fuel
consumption is displayed in litre/hr
(alternatively gallons/hr).
Resetting, fuel consumption
To reset all fuel data, depress ”SELECT” for 1 second.
Leg data
The amount of fuel consumed since the last reset.
J3013617
Resetting, leg data
To reset all fuel data, depress ”SELECT” for 1 second.
Information display
91
Remaining fuel
How far one can drive at the current average
consumption
J3014498
J0010376
AdBlue
How much AdBlue is left in the tank.
J0013296
Trip meter
Show the distance driven since the last reset.
J0009587
Note!
The trip values must be reset before
each measurement.
Reset trip meter
To reset leg data, hold "SELECT" depressed for 1
second.
92
Information display
Average speed
The average speed is calculated as the distance driven
divided by the time the engine has been running (since
latest reset).
J3013620
Note!
The values must be reset before each
measurement.
Reset average speeds
To reset leg data, hold "SELECT" depressed for 1
second.
Driving/rest time
Information about driving and rest times is taken from
the digital tachograph.
The symbol is at the far left and the information under
it varies depending on the selected activity in the
digital tachograph.
The symbol in the centre indicates pause and rest time.
00:25
10:27
2:47
The symbol to the right indicates driving time
Time and Date
Current time and date. For alternative settings 12h or
24h and date format, see section “Time/date”.
J3013618
Information display
Menu structure
1
2
3
4
5
Displays
1.1
Black panel
1.2
Night/Day 1
1.3
Backlight
1.4
Contrast
Display settings 2
2.1
Language
2.2
Units
2.3
Time/Date
Parking heater timer 2 3
3.1
Programming
3.2
Reset
Vehicle settings 2
4.1
TCS 3
4.2
DRL 3
4.3
Draining/Priming
Diagnosis 2
5.1
Fault diagnostics
5.2
Part number
5.3
Calibration ID
Alternate between positive and negative display
states.
2
Applies only when stationary.
3
Option
1
Black Panel
When "Black Panel" is active, only the speedometer
and tachometer are illuminated (except the coloured
field).
The following events light the backlighting:
93
94
Information display
• a message is activated
• a button is depressed
• the engine speed enters the red zone on the
tachometer
Night/Day
This function is used to switch between yellow text on
a black background and black text on a yellow
background.
Backlight
The display lighting follows the rheostat setting
(which also controls the other instrument lighting).
This menu can be used to alter the display lighting
with respect to the lighting of the other instruments.
Set backlight
1
Increase or decrease the backlighting with ▲ and
▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
J0009588
Contrast
1
Increase or decrease contrast with Δ and ∇.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Language
1
To set the required language press “SELECT”.
2
Up to three different language alternatives appear
in the display. Select the desired language by
moving the cursor to the required row with ▲
and ▼. Confirm the choice with “SELECT”.
J0009588
Information display
Units
Distance
Select if the trip should be shown as km or miles.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Fuel consumption
Select if fuel consumption is shown as km/l, l/100 km,
miles per gallon (mpg) with IMP gallons or as miles
per gallon (mpg) with US gallons.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Temperature
Select if temperature shall be shown as Celsius (°C) or
Fahrenheit (°F).
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Pressure
Select if pressure should be shown as psi or bar.
1
Mark the desired unit with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Time/Date
Time
1
Mark the time format with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
95
Information display
96
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
In the AM/PM-format the time only goes to 12 and
then starts again from 1. AM is morning and PM is
afternoon.
Date
Select if the date is to be shown as year, month, day
(yymmdd), or day, month, year (ddmmyy) or as
month, day, year (mmddyy).
1
Select the date format with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Program
If the timer already has a time set, it will be shown.
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Move the cursor to "Programming" using ▲ and
▼.
3
Confirm with "SELECT".
4
Set the start date with ▲ and ▼
Current date is default.
5
Confirm with "SELECT".
6
Set the start time with ▲ and ▼
7
Confirm with "SELECT".
8
Set duration with ▲ and ▼
The time is changed in 10 minute intervals. The
longest time that can be set is 2 hours.
9
Confirm with "SELECT".
10
The set time and date are shown.
11
Confirm with "SELECT".
Reset
1
Press "SELECT".
2
Move the cursor to "Reset" using ▲ and ▼.
Information display
3
97
Confirm with "SELECT".
Traction Control
1
Select "On" or "Off" with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
If traction control is turned off, a warning symbol is
shown.
Day Running Light
Day Running Lights can be shut off in this menu. This
means that if the Day Running Lights are "Off", so the
dip beam must be turned on and off with the lighting
knob on the panel.
1
Select ”On” or ”Off” with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
"Esc" aborts the setting.
Draining/priming
Draining/priming of the fuel system is done via this
menu, when required.
Depending on whether it is draining or priming that is
required, the display will show different messages.
Fault diagnostics
A list of the truck control units is shown in the menu
"Fault diagnostics".
Switch between control units using ▲ and ▼.
"SELECT" confirms choice of control unit. To cancel,
press "Esc".
1
During the time that the selected control unit is
polling, the display indicates that data transfer is
taking place.
J3014424
98
Information display
2
If the selected control unit has no faults "No
faults" is displayed.
Press "Esc" to return to the previous menu.
3
If the selected control unit does not reply within 5
seconds the following is shown "Operation
failed" in the display.
Press "Esc" and try once more, see point 1.
Contact a workshop if necessary.
4
If the selected control unit has a fault code or
fault codes, it displays
1 Which control unit it applies to
2 Which parameter or component is faulty
3 Which type of fault it is
4 If the fault is active or inactive
5 How many times the fault has been registered
since the last reset
5
If there are several fault codes or fault messages
for the same control unit, you can scroll through
the fault codes with ▲ and ▼. "Reset all" is
shown last in the list. This resetting only clears
the fault codes for the selected control unit.
6
If there are more than 20 fault codes/fault
messages for the selected control unit, the 21st
message will be "Too many fault messages". To
see those messages that are not shown, one or
more of the first messages must be reset.
7
Press "SELECT" to show more information on
the fault code. Fault codes are shown numerically
here. If the fault is inactive, both the time and
date for the fault are shown.
MID: Identification of control unit
PID: Identification of parameters
PPID: Volvo unique Identification of parameters
SID: Identification of components
PSID: Volvo unique Identification of
components
FMI: Identification of fault IDs
To reset the fault code, hold "SELECT" in for 1
second.
Information display
Part number
A list of the truck control units is shown in the menu
"Part Number".
1
Select part with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
Go back with "Esc"
Calibration ID
A list of the truck control units is shown in the
"Calibration ID" menu.
1
Select part with ▲ and ▼.
2
Confirm with "SELECT".
3
Go back with "Esc"
Service reminder
(optional in certain markets)
A service reminder is used to remind the driver when
it is time to leave the vehicle for service. The reminder
is shown in the display, first as a forewarning and then
as a warning.
The service reminder is activated after a number of
kilometres driven.
When the number of driven kilometres is reached the
pre-defined value (as is defined by the fleet owner
together with a Volvo dealer), the service reminder is
activated.
Forewarning
A forewarning indicates that it is time to book a
service with a Volvo dealer. A forewarning is shown
in the display when 90% of the predefined number of
kilometres driven has been reached.
99
100 Information display
Upcoming maintenance
The forewarning message is active for 30 seconds. The
message will continue to be shown each time the key
is turned to the starting position, together with a lamp
for information messages, until either the service
reminder is reset or until a warning message is shown.
By using the display's control unit by the steering
wheel, you can reach the sub-menu to see the value
that the fleet owner has defined together with the
Volvo dealer. In the sub-menu, the following is shown
in the display when a forewarning level is reached.
Service alarm
1,394 km
Warning
A warning indicates that it is time for service. The
warning is displayed when 100% of the predefined
value is reached.
J3014466
Information message
Information display 101
Maintenance
A warning message is active until the driver has
acknowledged the message with the “ESC” button in
the display's control unit by the steering wheel. The
warning message will continue to be shown each time
the key is turned to the starting position, together with
the warning message lamp, until the service warning is
reset.
By using the display's control lever by the steering
wheel, you can access the sub-menu. When the predefined value has been reached, "--" is shown in the
sub-menu.
Service alarm
-- km
Resetting the service reminder
Enter the menu structure under Maintenance and
Service
J3014465
Warning message
102 Information display
Service alarm
-- km
Keep the “SELECT” button pressed in for at least 3
seconds. Enter password, workshop password 2, see
the section Entering password. Mark, using ▲ and ▼,
if resetting is to be done. Confirm with “SELECT”.
The display shows a confirmation that resetting has
started.
Numeric language, general
The instructions describe how the numeric language is
constructed and how it functions. Only the most
important menus and messages are described.
Display control stalk
Manual communication with the displays is achieved
with the control stalk on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel. The following commands are
available:
1
"Esc" is used to return to the previous menu and
to discontinue a setting/operation.
2
”SELECT” confirms a selection or a character
3
"▲" moves the cursor up and is used when
setting numbers/letters
4
"▼" moves the cursor down and is used when
setting numbers/letters
Information display 103
Text strings
Numbers between the symbols "<<" and ">>"
symbolize a text string. For information on what the
numerical text means, see section "Menus" or
"Numerical translation table".
Stop message
Red stop lamp + stop symbol
If the red stop lamp and the stop symbol are displayed
the vehicle should be stopped immediately and the
engine switched off. The associated numerical text
should be read in order to establish where the fault
lies. For information on what the numerical text
means, see section "Menus" or "Numerical translation
table".
J3014364
J3013624
A warning will sound if the engine is running. It can
be acknowledged by pressing Esc, but it starts again
after 10 seconds. For more information about the
message, see "Driver instructions Display, graphical".
Warning!
When this lamp lights, the vehicle
must be stopped immediately and
the engine switched off.
The information lamp CHECK + text
When the information lamp CHECK lights up, the
fault should be checked at the next stop. The
associated numerical text is shown in the display. A
result of measurement is also shown for some
symbols. For information on what the numerical text
means, see section "Menus" or "Numerical translation
table".
J3014365
104 Information display
Change language
The numerical language is a choice and can be shown
as one of three languages in the display. The language
can be changed in the menu "Display settings".
Language
MENU: Display setting, language
The language setting remains even after the ignition
has been switched off.
1
Select "Language" with "▲/▼" and press
"SELECT"
2
Up to three languages can be displayed. Mark
"Numerical" with "▲/▼" and press "SELECT".
Press "Esc" to discontinue the setting and return
to the main menu.
Menus, general
The numerical language is hierarchically constructed
and follows the same structure as in ”Driver
instruction Display, graphical”. In those menus which
have text, the text is marked with numbers. The menu
explanation gives all menu headings and associated
text strings.
Password-protected menus
For information about passwords, see ”Driver
instruction Display, graphical”.
¹ Password-protected menu
Menus available when driving
Menu 1
<<100>> = Gauges
Information display 105
Temperature, outside
Temperature, engine oil
Temperature, gearbox
Voltmeter/Ammeter
Gear position
Pressure, primary tank
Menu 2
<<101>> = Fuel Data
Fuel consumption
Resetting, Fuel Data
<<400>> = Reset ALL fuel data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
Leg data
Resetting, Fuel Data
<<400>> = Reset ALL fuel data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
Remaining fuel
Menu 3
<<102>> = Time/Distance
Trip meter
Reset trip meter
<<403>> = Reset? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
Average speed
Reset average speeds
<<403>> = Reset? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
Estimated time of arrival
106 Information display
Inputting distance to destination
<<405>> = Set distance:
Time and Date
Setting, time and date
Alarm clock
Setting, Alarm clock
<<301>> = ON
<<302>> = OFF
<<303>> = SET
Menu 4
<<103>> = Display
<<304>> = Black Panel
<<306>> = Backlight
Set backlight
<<307>> = Set Favourite display
<<308>> = Night/Day
Menu 5
<<104>> = Vehicle Messages
<<309>> = No messages
MID 128 = Engine system
MID 136 = Brake system
MID 130 = Gearbox system
MID 223 = Gear selector system
MID 222 = Retarder system
Information display 107
MID 144 = Vehicle system
MID 140 = Info display system
MID 150 = Air suspension system
MID 249 = Bodybuilder system
MID 146 = Climate system
MID 232 = Airbag system
MID 219 = Adaptive cruise control
MID 216 = Light control system
MID 231 = Telephone
MID 163 = Immobiliser
MID 179 = FMS Gateway
MID 203 = Transp info system
MID 250 = Steering Wheel
MID 166 = Tyre pressure
<<1000>> = No data
<<1001>> = HIGH
<<1002>> = TOO HIGH
<<1003>> = Freezing conditions
<<1004>> = Discharge
<<1005>> = You need to fill up with fuel.
<<1007>> = LOW
<<1008>> = TOO LOW
<<1009>> = Check
<<1010>> = Check at next stop
<<1011>> = Stop failure
<<1012>> = Check datalink
<<1013>> = Check datalink broken
108 Information display
<<1014>> = Low pressure
Menu 6
<<1040>> = Tyre pressure
<<1041>> = Truck
<<1042>> = Trailer 1
<<1043>> = Trailer 2
<<1044>> = Trailer 3
<<1045>> = Trailer 4
<<1046>> = Trailer 5
Menu 7
<<105>> = Reset
<<406>> = Reset ALL data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
Menus with stationary vehicle
Menu 8
<<107>> = P-heater timer
<<212>> = Programming
<<356>> = Set startdate
<<418>> = Set starttime
<<502>> = Set duration
<<213>> = Reset
<<214>> = No time set
Information display 109
Menu 9
<<108>> = Display Settings
<<200>> = Language
Numerical = Numerical language
Swedish
English
<<201>> = Units
<<310>> = Distance
km
miles
<<311>> = Fuel Consumption
km/L
L/100km
mpg (IMP gallons)
mpg (US gallons)
<<312>> = Temperature
°C
°F
<<359>> = Pressure
psi
bar
<<202>> = Time/Date
<<313>> = 24h or AM/PM Clock Format
<<409>> = 24 h
<<410>> = AM/PM
<<314>> = Date Format
<<411>> = yymmdd
110 Information display
<<412>> = ddmmyy
<<413>> = mmddyy
<<203>> = Display Light
<<315>> = Contrast
<<316>> = Backlight
<<317>> = Day Mode
<<1023>> = Disabled
<<1024>> = Enabled
<<204>> = Change password¹
<<227>> = To see more menus, give password
<<319>> = Workshop password 2
<<318>> = Owner password
<<320>> = Workshop password 1
<<414>> = Enter new password:
Menu 10
<<109>> = Vehicle Settings
<<205>> = Traction Control
<<301>> = On
<<302>> = Off
<<206>> = Fleet Limits
<<321>> = RPM (max)¹
<<415>> = Present limit:
<<416>> = Set new value:
rpm
<<1015>> = Operation complete.
<<1016>> = Operation failed.
Information display 111
<<322>> = Speed (max)¹
<<415>> = Present limit:
<<416>> = Set new value:
km/h, mph
<<1015>> = Operation complete.
<<1016>> = Operation failed.
<<323>> = Fuel (target)¹
<<415>> = Present limit:
<<416>> = Set new value:
l/100 km, mpg
<<1015>> = Operation complete.
<<1016>> = Operation failed.
<<207>> = Ammeter sensor calibration
<<417>> = Switch off all current consumers, then turn ignition off.
<<500>> = Calibrating, please wait
<<501>> = Sensor component changed. Switch ignition on.
<<208>> = Fleet ID¹
<<324>> = Fleet ID:
<<325>> = Enter new Fleet ID:
<<1015>> = Operation complete.
<<1016>> = Operation failed.
<<211>> = Daytime running lights
<<301>> = On
<<302>> = Off
<<284>> = Draining/priming
<<1048>> = Set wheel ID
<<1047>> = Set reference pressure
112 Information display
Menu 11
<<110>> = Diagnostics
<<215>> = Fault Diagnostics
MID 128 = Engine system
MID 136 = Brake system
MID 130 = Gearbox system
MID 223 = Gear selector system
MID 222 = Retarder system
MID 144 = Vehicle system
MID 140 = Info display system
MID 150 = Air suspension system
MID 249 = Bodybuilder system
MID 184 = Rear axle steering
MID 214 = Burglar alarm system
MID 146 = Climate system
MID 232 = Airbag system
MID 219 = Adaptive cruise control
MID 216 = Light control system
MID 231 = Telephone
MID 219 = FMS Gateway
MID 163 = Immobiliser
MID 203 = Transp info system
MID 220 = Tachograph
MID 166 = Tyre pressure system
<<1017>> = Data transfer in progress, please wait.
<<419>> = No errors
<<1016>> = Operation failed
Information display 113
<<420>> = Inactive
<<421>> = Active
<<423>> = More info? Hold SELECT
<<422>> = Number of events:
<<503>> = First
<<504>> = Last
AM
PM
<<505>> = Reset? Hold SELECT for 1s
<<424>> = Reset all faults of this MID? Press SELECT i 1s.
<<216>> = Cluster Selftest
<<326>> = Indicator light test
<<327>> = Gauge test
<<328>> = Display test
<<329>> = Loudspeaker test
<<217>> = Part Number
MID 128 = Engine system
MID 136 = Brake system
MID 130 = Gearbox system
MID 223 = Gear selector system
MID 222 = Retarder system
MID 144 = Vehicle system
MID 140 = Info display system
MID 150 = Air suspension system
MID 249 = Bodybuilder system
MID 184 = Rear axle steering
MID 214 = Burglar alarm system
114 Information display
MID 146 = Climate system
MID 232 = Airbag system
MID 219 = Adaptive cruise control
MID 216 = Light control system
MID 231 = Telephone
MID 179 = FMS Gateway
MID 163 = Immobiliser
MID 203 = Transp info system
MID 220 = Digital tachograph
MID 166 = Tyre pressure system
<<1017>> = Data transfer in progress, please wait.
<<430>> = Hardware number:
<<431>> = Software number:
<<1018>> = No data
Menu 12
<<111>> = Vehicle Data
<<221>> = Oil level
<<331>> = min<
<<332>> = >max
<<330>> = Not available. X min left.
<<222>> = Load indicator
<<228>> = Brake lining, status
Menu 13
<<112>> = Data log
Information display 115
<<223>> = Vehicle number
<<1017>> = Data transfer in progress, please wait
<<333>> = Fleet ID:
<<334>> = Chassis number:
<<1018>> = No data
<<224>> = Total data
<<335>> = Total distance:
<<336>> = Total fuel used:
<<337>> = Total engine hours:
<<338>> = Total idle time:
<<339>> = Total PTO hours:
<<340>> = Total engine revolutions:
<<225>> = Trip data
<<341>> = Trip distance:
<<342>> = Trip fuel avg:
<<343>> = Trip fuel acc:
<<344>> = Trip overspeed:
<<345>> = Trip uneconomy rev's:
<<346>> = Trip fuel uneconomy rev's:
<<347>> = Trip average speed:
<<348>> = Trip overrev's:
<<349>> = Trip engine hours:
<<350>> = Trip idle time:
<<351>> = Trip idle fuel:
<<352>> = Trip PTO hours:
<<353>> = Trip PTO fuel:
<<354>> = Trip cruise:
116 Information display
<<226>> = Reset Trip data¹
<<433>> = Reset all trip data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
<<1017>> = Data transfer in progress, please wait
<<1015>> = Operation complete.
<<1016>> = Operation failed
Menu 14
<<113>> = Password
Enter password
<<227>> = Enter password for more menus:¹
Numerical translation table
In order to see quickly what a number means, all
numbers are presented here in numerical order with
translation.
<<100>> till <<113>>
Number
Meaning
100
Gauges
101
Fuel Data
102
Time/Distance
103
Displays
104
Vehicle Messages
105
Reset
107
P-Heater Timer
108
Display settings
109
Vehicle settings
Information display 117
Number
Meaning
110
Diagnostics
111
Vehicle data
112
Data log
113
Password
<<200>> to <<284>>
Number
Meaning
200
Language
201
Units
202
Time/Date
203
Display lighting
204
Change password
205
Traction Control
206
Fleet limits
207
Ammeter sensor calibration
208
Fleet ID
209
Fog light
210
Spot light
211
Day Running Light
212
Programming
213
Reset
214
No time programmed
215
Fault Diagnosis
216
Instrument panel cluster self test
217
Part Number
218
General question
118 Information display
Number
Meaning
219
Other systems
220
Reset All
221
Oil level
222
Load indicator
223
Vehicle ID
224
Totals data
225
Trip data
226
Reset trip data
227
For more menus give password:
284
Draining/priming
<<300>> to <<358>>
Number
Meaning
300
301
On
302
Off
303
New time
304
Black Panel
305
Favourite Display
306
Backlight
307
Favourite Display, setting
308
Night/Day
309
No messages
310
Distance
311
Fuel consumption
312
Temperature
Information display 119
Number
Meaning
313
24h or AM/PM
314
Date display
315
Contrast
316
Backlight
317
Night Mode
318
Owner Password
319
Workshop Password 2
320
Workshop Password 1
321
RPM Limit (max)
322
Speed Limit (max)
323
Fuel Target
324
Fleet ID
325
Set new Fleet ID
326
Control lamp test
327
Gauge test
328
Display test
329
Loudspeaker test
330
Not available. X min left.
331
min<
332
>max
333
Fleet ID:
334
Chassis number:
335
Total distance:
336
Total fuel used:
337
Total engine hours:
338
Total idle time:
120 Information display
Number
Meaning
339
Total PTO hours:
340
Total engine revolutions:
341
Trip distance:
342
Trip fuel avg:
343
Trip fuel acc:
344
Trip overrevolutions:
345
Trip uneconomy rev's:
346
Trip fuel uneconomy rev's:
347
Trip average speed:
348
Trip overrev's:
349
Trip engine hours:
350
Trip idle time:
351
Trip idle fuel
352
Trip PTO hours:
353
Trip PTO fuel:
354
Trip cruise:
355
Wrong password.
356
Set startdate
357
Draining/priming requested
358
Draining/priming not allowed
<<400>> till <<434>>
Number
Meaning
400
To reset ALL Fuel Data? Hold SELECT for 1 second
403
Reset? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
405
Set distance:
Information display 121
Number
Meaning
406
Reset all data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
409
24h
410
AM/PM
411
yymmdd
412
ddmmyy
413
mmddyy
414
Enter new password:
415
Present limit:
416
Set new value:
417
Switch off all current consumers, then turn ignition off
418
Set start time:
419
No faults
420
Inactive
421
Active
422
Number of events:
423
More info? Hold SELECT
424
Reset all faults of this MID? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
425
Reset all faults? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
426
Alarm
427
Alarm clock
428
Warning
429
Flashers
430
Hardware number:
431
Software number:
432
Set overspeed
433
Reset all trip data? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
122 Information display
Number
Meaning
434
No other systems available
<<500>> till <<506>>
Number
Meaning
500
Calibration in progress, please wait
501
Sensor comp. changed. Turn on ignition
502
Set duration:
503
First:
504
Last:
505
Reset? Hold SELECT for 1 second.
506
Too many fault messages
<<1000>> to <<1096>>
Number
Meaning
1000
No data
1001
High
1002
Too high
1003
Slippery road surface
1004
Discharge
1005
You need to fill up with fuel
1007
Low
1008
TOO LOW
1009
Check
1010
Check at next stop
1011
Stop. Fault.
Information display 123
Number
Meaning
1012
Check datalink
1013
Check datalink broken
1014
Low pressure
1015
Operation complete
1016
Operation failed.
1017
Data transfer in progress, please wait.
1018
No data
1019
Welcome
1020
Have a safe trip
1021
Wrong password
1022
ACC, radar obscured
1023
Inactive
1024
Active
1025
ACC radar warming up
1026
ACC datalink problem
1027
Service of brake linings at:
1028
Brake linings are new.
1029
Brake linings need service.
1030
Disabling idle
1031
Disabling idle, cancelled
1032
Disabling of vehicle started
1033
Vehicle disabled
1034
Trailer, door locked
1035
Trailer, door unlocked
1036
Load, safety system enabled
1037
Load, safety system disabled
124 Information display
Number
Meaning
1038
Calibration:
1039
Too high vehicle speed. Disable PTO before proceeding
1040
Tyre pressure
1041
Truck
1042
Trailer 1
1043
Trailer 2
1044
Trailer 3
1045
Trailer 4
1046
Trailer 5
1047
Set reference pressure
1048
Set wheel ID
1049
Enter new settings
1050
Select axle number
1051
Current value
1052
New value
1053
Set wheel ID
1054
Enter axle and wheel
1055
Current ID
1056
New ID
1057
No data
1058
Starter motor, overheating alarm
1059
Starter motor, gearbox not in neutral
1060
Starter motor, gear wheel sync.
1061
Start not possible, PTO enabled
1062
Stabilization, ACC sensor
1063
Reversing light trailer
Information display 125
Number
Meaning
1064
Fog lights front
1065
Fog lights rear
1066
Spotlight
1067
Reversing light
1068
Brake lights
1069
Brake lights trailer
1070
Direction indicators, front
1071
Direction indicators, rear
1072
Direction indicators, trailer
1073
Parking lights
1074
Parking lights trailer
1075
Snow plough light
1076
Check fuses
1077
Reduced lighting
1078
Brake light, reduced
1079
Main beam
1080
Dip beam
1081
No data, TPM
1082
Interior lighting
1085
Wait with start
1088
Select a lower gear
1089
Test SW installed in
1090
Reduced EGR system
1091
High pressure in diesel particulate filter
1092
Reduce charge pressure
1093
Reduce charge temp
126 Information display
Number
Meaning
1094
Vehicle safety mode
1096
LDWS disabled. Clean windscreen
MID 128 till MID 250
Number
Meaning
MID 128
Engine system
MID 130
Gearbox system
MID 136
Brake system
MID 140
Info display system
MID 144
Vehicle system
MID 146
Climate system
MID 150
Air suspension system
MID 163
Immobilizer
MID 166
Tyre pressure system
MID 179
FMS Gateway
MID 184
Rear axle steering
MID 203
Transp. info system
MID 214
Burglar alarm system
MID 216
Lighting system
MID 219
Adaptive cruise control
MID 222
Retarder system
MID 223
Gear selector system
MID 231
Telephone
MID 232
Airbag system
MID 249
Body builder system
MID 250
Steering wheel functions
Driving 127
Driving hints
Drive economically
The driver is the most important link in the chain for
obtaining the best total economy.
1
Warm up the engine as quickly as possible. A
warm engine and transmission use less fuel than
if they are cold (and also wear less).
2
Use the accelerator sensibly and change gears
correctly. Jerky driving and incorrect use of the
gearbox give considerably higher fuel
consumption.
3
Do not pump the accelerator.this increases fuel
consumption without increasing speed.
4
Use as high a gear as possible when the required
speed has been attained. Keep the revolutions
within the lower half of the green area.
5
Cruise control. Correctly used in good
conditions, the cruise control saves fuel.
Excessive use of the cruise control in hilly
country can increase fuel consumption, however.
6
High speeds use a lot of fuel, partly because air
drag increases sharply as speed rises. Strong side
and head winds increase fuel consumption
further.
7
Drive with the engine speed low! Change down
late. Use the maximum engine power on
upgrades and allow the engine speed to decrease
to the lowest part of the green area before
changing down. It is especially important to let
the D16 engine work at low rpm, since it has very
high torque at low engine speeds. Let the engine
pull, it can manage.
8
When you drive with a light load , excessive
gear changing increases fuel consumption.
9
Use good roads! If possible, avoid poor roads
and roads with many hills. Plan your driving
carefully. Do not drive so that the energy used for
128 Driving
acceleration is wasted by braking again. Use
down hill sections by completely releasing the
accelerator. Use the momentum of the vehicle
when road conditions allow you to do so.
10
Engine braking. On gentle downgrades, the
engine brake could brake too much and thus give
an unwanted effect. To obtain the best fuel
consumption, such ”unnecessary” braking should
be avoided. Please note that there is a middle
position on the accelerator, which neither gives
engine power nor engine braking.
11
Choose tyres carefully. Radial tyres have lower
rolling resistance. The correct tyre pressure
reduces friction and wears the tyres less.
12
Check the front wheel alignment regularly and
axle angles on both the tractor and the trailer. The
correct values always give lower rolling
resistance and lower fuel consumption.
13
Do not use a higher canopy than necessary.
Always tension the canopy and tarpaulins tightly.
Also remember that advertising signs, roof racks
etc. give higher fuel consumption.
14
Volvo's spoiler package gives lower fuel
consumption if it is correctly adjusted.
15
Correct maintenance keeps the truck in good
trim, which keeps fuel consumption down.
Some advice for driving
1
Make a check after starting, and occasionally
when driving, that the instruments show normal
values. If a warning lamp lights up when driving,
stop and check the reason.
2
Starting always start in 1st gear or crawler gear
with as low engine speed as possible (700–800
rpm).
3
Never race a cold engine! Avoid long periods of
idling.
4
Never cover the radiator! Check the coolant
level regularly and always use the correct
coolant. Also check the hoses and belt tension.
Note!
It is not permitted to shift between
HIGH and LOW range while
reversing. First shift to HIGH or
LOW range, then engage reverse.
Driving 129
Do not drive with a leaky cooling or heating
system.
5
Never drive away until the brake system
warning lamps have gone out. Do not forget to
release the parking brake.
6
Try not to turn when the front wheels are
impeded by a curb or other object. The power
steering and the tyres can be damaged.
7
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. Do
not slip the clutch unnecessarily. Using a too high
gear can cause clutch wear.
8
Do not change gear when the power take-off is
engaged. (Does not apply to clutch-independent
power take-offs.)
9
The reverse gear is unsynchronised. Shift to
LOW range before engaging reverse. In good
driving conditions it is possible to reverse with
HIGH range engaged.
10
Use the engine brake when decending hills and
during gentle braking. Avoid having the engine
brake constantly applied on slippery roads.
11
Use the differential lock on slippery roads.
12
Let the engine idle for at least 1 minute after
hard driving, before you switch it off This
avoids heat stress in the engine and involuntary
coolant loss.
13
Check the function of the air drier by draining the
primary tank or one of the circuit tanks every
week.
14
Always use the correct fuel and the correct oil.
15
Close the hatches in the rear shelf before driving
off.
16
The lid on the tachograph should always be
closed.
Warning!
Do not turn corners on firm roads
with the differential lock
engaged.
130 Driving
Driving hints for trucks with air suspension
If the vehicle gets stuck on a slippery surface, the load
distribution between the drive axle and the bogie axle
can be altered to improve traction.
Note!
Take care when using snow chains
on the drive axle's inner wheels.
They can damage the air suspension.
Warning!
Turn off the electronic air
suspension system when using
support legs, a plough without
floating position, or other
equipment that effects the truck's
height above the road. On trucks
with equipment that effects the
truck's height above the road a
special switch can be fitted to
shut off the automatic height
control, mounted by a Volvo
workshop.
Hill start aid
1
Keep the vehicle stationary with the footbrake
2
Depress the clutch
3
Engage a suitable starting gear
4
Press the switch.
The function is activated and the lamp in the
switch lights.
5
Release the footbrake
The vehicle is kept stationary automatically. The
symbol in the display lights as long as the vehicle
is kept braked
6
Release the clutch
7
Start to accelerate
J5013669
Symbol on the switch and display
Note!
The automatic system releases the
brakes when the clutch is released.
Driving 131
The automatic system releases the brakes when the
clutch is released, or when the engine torque is
sufficiently great.
Deactivate the function by pressing the button again.
The function is always deactivated when the starter
key is turned to the 0–position.
Only use the function on uphill inclines.
1
Keep the vehicle stationary with the footbrake.
2
Press the switch.
The function is activated and the lamp in the
switch lights.
3
Release the footbrake.
The vehicle automatically stays still for a short
time.
The symbol in the display lights as long as the
vehicle is kept braked.
4
Start to accelerate
J5013669
Symbol on the switch and display
The automatic system releases the brakes after a short
time, or when the engine torque is sufficiently great.
Deactivate the function by pressing the button again.
When the engine is started
the function is always disengaged.
Only use the function on uphill inclines.
Reversing camera
Turn on the camera
Engage reverse gear
or
Press the button
(In cold weather there may be a short delay before a
good picture is obtained.)
J0010217
132 Driving
Caution!
The ring around the camera lens
cannot be unscrewed. Opening
the camera is not permitted as it
could become damaged.
Change backlighting
The backlighting on the display is altered with the
same control (4) used to alter the other instrument's
lighting.
J0010330
Turn off camera
Disengage reverse (There may be a short delay before
the picture turns off.)
or
Press the button
J0010217
Caution!
The ring around the camera lens
cannot be unscrewed. Opening
the camera is not permitted as it
could become damaged.
Driving 133
Reversing Warner
The Reversing Warning is two-tone.
• Engage reverse gear once for the high tone.
• Disengage reverse gear and then re-engage it within
7 seconds for the low tone.
Traction Control System (TCS)
With Traction Control System (TCS), better stability
and driveability is achieved. TCS automatically
reduces wheel spin by reducing the engine's driving
torque. At speeds below 40 km/h the TCS also
functions as an automatic differential brake and brakes
the wheel that is spinning.
J3014400
The symbol in the display when TCS
is active.
TCS functions
The normal mode is that the TCS is active when the
truck is started. The indication lamp in the switch is
not on. Engage terrain TCS in difficult driving
conditions such as in sand, gravel or snow. Below is a
flow for how the button is used in relation to the
functions,TCS, terrain-TCS and TCS disengaged.
• Engage terrain-TCS by a short press on the switch.
The indication lamp in the switch lights.
• Disengage TCS completely by holding in the
switch for a short time. The indication lamp in the
switch flashes.
Return to the normal mode (TCS) by pressing the
switch. The indication lamp in the switch is out.
J0008525
The switch is spring-loaded. 3
different functions of the TCS can be
obtained.
J3014424
The symbol is shown when TCS is
disengaged.
134 Driving
Note!
Do not use terrain-TCS during
normal driving.
Switching off the TCS
When testing on a roller bench or when towing with an
axle raised, the TCS must be switched off.
Use the display to switch off the TCS. The vehicle
must be stationary.
1
Step to the “Settings” menu (3 and 4)
2
Press “Select” (2)
3
Step to the “Traction Control” menu (3 and 4)
4
Press “Select” (2)
5
Step to the “Off” menu (3 and 4)
6
Press “Select” (2)
J3008810
The next time the starter key is turned to the driving
position or the front axle is rotating faster than
12 km/h the TCS is engaged again.
Note!
Switch off the TCS before towing
with any axle raised!
Note!
Switching off the TCS in the display
disables the TCS switch.
If TCS is activated after a wheel change
If you fit smaller wheels on the drive axle than what
was fitted previously, the TCS may be activated.
Drive a distance at above 25 km/h. The EBS system
then learns the difference between the wheel sizes.
How far you need to drive depends on how big the
difference in sizes is between the wheels.
It may be difficult to drive due to the TCS limiting the
engine torque. In this case, engage the terrain-TCS.
Driving 135
The terrain-TCS allows larger differences in wheel
speeds between the front axle and the driving axle.
When the terrain-TCS is engaged, it takes longer for
the EBS system to learn the difference in wheel sizes.
Front wheel drive
1 Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2 Engage the differential lock between the rear axles.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4017789
3 Move the front-wheel drive switch to its bottom
position.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4015829
136 Driving
1
Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2
Set the switch to the lower position.
The control lamp in the instrument panel will light.
J4015829
Differential lock
Function
Firm ground, no differential lock engaged.
J0008648
Driving 137
Slippery surface, no differential lock engaged. Only
the wheel on the slippery surface is rotating, the truck
remains stationary.
J0008649
Slippery surface, differential lock engaged. The
wheels are forced to turn at the same speed. Only the
wheel on firm ground drives. Accelerate carefully so
that the driving axle and gear are not damaged.
Disengage the differential lock when both wheels are
gripping again.
J0008650
Engage differential lock
Engage the differential lock directly before coming on
to the slippery surface and disengage the differential
lock when the slippery surface has been passed.
None of the wheels may be spinning before the
differential lock is engaged!
Warning!
Drive carefully when the
differential lock is engaged.
Never turn corners on firm
ground with the differential lock
engaged.
138 Driving
1
Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2
Depress the clutch pedal
3
Engage the differential lock
4
Release the clutch pedal
5
Accelerate carefully so that the driveshafts and
gears are not damaged
6
Drive away from the slippery area
7
Release the accelerator
8
Disengage the differential lock
J4017788
The differential lock is engaged. The
lamp on the instrument panel
flashes.
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp on the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
1
Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2
Depress the clutch pedal
3
Engage the differential lock
4
Release the clutch pedal
5
Accelerate carefully so that the driveshafts and
gears are not damaged
6
Drive away from the slippery area
7
Release the accelerator
8
Disengage the differential lock
J4017789
First position, differential lock in
transfer gearbox engaged. The lamp
Driving 139
on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4017790
Second position, differential lock in
transfer gearbox and rear axles
engaged. The axle differential lamp
flashes and the lamp for the transfer
gear comes on.
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp on the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
Note!
For long driving sessions with the
differential lock between the axles
engaged, make sure to drive a few
hundred metres with the differential
lock disengaged now and again.
140 Driving
Differential lock
On vehicles with EBS, the differential lock can be
engaged without depressing the clutch. On pressing
the switch, the EBS system will attempt to synchronise
the wheels so that they rotate at the same speed before
engaging the differential lock. If this is not achieved
within a certain time, the system will wait with the
engagement of the differential lock until the wheels
rotate at the same speed.
For automatic engagement of the differential lock, see
“Automatic engagement of differential lock (DLC Diff Lock Control)” on page
1
Set the switch to the lower position
2
Wait until the control lamp in the instrument
panel flashes
3
Accelerate with care so as not to damage the
drive shafts and gears
4
Drive away from the slippery area
5
Release the accelerator pedal
6
Disengage the differential lock
J4017788
The differential lock is engaged. The
lamp on the instrument panel
flashes.
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp in the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
Driving 141
Engage the differential lock between the axles
1
Put the switch in the centre position
2
Wait until the control lamp on the instrument
panel lights
The differential lock between the axles is engaged.
To engage the differential lock between axles without
activating DLC, engage terrain-TCS. See “TerrainTCS” on page .
J4017789
Intermediate position, differential
lock in transfer gearbox engaged.
The lamp on the instrument panel
will come on.
Note!
For long driving sessions with the
differential lock between the axles
engaged, make sure to drive a few
hundred metres with the differential
lock disengaged now and again.
142 Driving
Engage the differential lock between all wheelpairs
1
Set the switch to the lower position
2
Wait until the control lamp in the instrument
panel flashes
The differential locks between all wheel-pairs are
engaged
3
Accelerate with care so as not to damage the
drive shafts and gears
4
Drive away from the slippery area
5
Release the accelerator pedal
6
Disengage the differential lock
J4017790
Lower position, differential lock in
transfer gearbox and rear axles
engaged. The axle differential lamp
flashes and the lamp for the transfer
gear
comes on
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp in the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
Driving 143
Differential locks
Engage the differential lock just before reaching the
slippery surface and disengage it once you have past
the slippery surface.
None of the wheels may be spinning before the
differential lock is engaged!
Warning!
Drive carefully once the
differential lock is engaged.
Never turn corners on firm
ground with the differential lock
engaged.
1 Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2 Depress the clutch pedal
3 Engage the differential lock between the rear axles.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4017789
First position, differential lock in
transfer gearbox engaged. The lamp
on the instrument panel will come
on.
144 Driving
4 Engage the differential lock between the wheels on
the rear axles.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will flash.
J4017790
Second position, differential lock in
transfer gearbox and rear axles
engaged. The axle differential lamp
flashes and the lamp for the transfer
gear comes on.
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp on the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
5 Move the front-wheel drive switch to its bottom
position.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4015829
Driving 145
6 Engage the differential lock between the front
wheels.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
7 Release the clutch pedal
8 Drive away from the slippery area
9 Release the accelerator
10 Disengage the differential lock
J4015830
The differential lock between the front wheels will be
disengaged if the differential lock between the rear
axles, the differential lock between the wheels on the
rear axles or the front-wheel drive is disengaged.
Engage the differential lock just before reaching the
slippery surface and disengage it once you have past
the slippery surface.
None of the wheels may be spinning before the
differential lock is engaged!
Warning!
Drive carefully once the
differential lock is engaged.
Never turn corners on firm
ground with the differential lock
engaged.
1 Make sure none of the wheels are spinning
2 Depress the clutch pedal
3 Engage the differential lock between the rear wheels.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will flash.
J4015831
Note!
The differential lock is not engaged
until the warning lamp on the
instrument panel flashes. The
differential lock is engaged as long
as the warning lamp is flashing,
even if the switch is turned off.
146 Driving
4 Move the front-wheel drive switch to its bottom
position.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
J4015829
5 Engage the differential lock between the front
wheels.
The control lamp on the instrument panel will come
on.
6 Release the clutch pedal
7 Drive away from the slippery area
8 Release the accelerator
9 Disengaging the differential locks
J4015830
The differential lock between the front wheels will be
disengaged if the differential lock between the rear
wheels or the front-wheel drive is disengaged.
Automatic engagement of the differential lock (DLC – Diff
Lock Control)
Set the switch for the differential lock to the centre
position.
The differential lock is engaged automatically when
the driving wheels rotate at different speeds and the
speed is less than 15 km/h.
The differential lock is disengaged if the speed
exceeds 15 km/h or at the next gear change.
When the truck is delivered from the factory, the
automatic differential lock between the wheel pairs is
disengaged. This can be changed in the “Automatic
diff lock” menu under the main heading “Vehicle
settings” in the display.
Set the switch for the differential lock to the centre
position.
J5013702
Driving 147
DLC becomes active. On trucks with two driven axles,
the differential lock between axles will also be
engaged.
The differential lock is engaged automatically when
the driving wheels rotate at different speeds and the
speed is less than 15 km/h.
The differential lock is disengaged if the speed
exceeds 15 km/h or at the next gear change.
Overview of the switch's functions
Switch position
Function
0 (upper position)
No differential lock engaged.
1 (centre position) and TCS
engaged
DLC active.
1 (centre position) and terrainTCS engaged
DLC inactive.
1 (centre position) and TCS
disengaged
DLC inactive.
2 (lower position)
The differential lock is manually engaged.
Switch position
Function
0 (upper position)
No differential lock engaged.
1 (centre position) and TCS
engaged
The differential lock between the axles is engaged.
Automatic engaging and disengaging of the
differential lock between the wheel pairs
depending on the speed conditions according to the
above description.
1 (centre position) and terrainTCS engaged
The differential lock between the axles is engaged.
1 (centre position) and TCS
disengaged
The differential lock between the axles is engaged.
2 (lower position)
The differential lock between the axles is engaged.
Differential locks are engaged between each wheel
pair.
148 Driving
Auxiliary brakes
General
Use auxiliary brakes to avoid overheating in the brakes
on longer downgrades and to reduce wear on the brake
linings.
If the truck is driven on steep downhill slopes without
a load, there is a risk of jack-knifing if the auxiliary
brakes apply too hard.
The brake lamps light if the auxiliary brakes are
applied hard enough.
On vehicles with air suspension which do not have a
full load the braking effect of the auxiliary brake is
diminished.
On tractors without ABS or EBS, the engine brake is
only engaged when a trailer is coupled.
On trucks with ABS or EBS the auxiliary brakes are
disengaged if the wheels start to lock. The auxiliary
brakes can also be disengaged if the ABS fails.
On trucks with ESP the auxiliary brakes are also
disconnected if this is necessary to retain stability.
Driving instructions for the compact
retarder
Trucks with compact retarders must be run at high
engine speed when the retarder is engaged. If the
engine speed is too low, the oil will not be cooled
properly. If the oil is not cooled properly, the effect of
the compact retarder will be reduced and remain low
until the oil temperature is sufficiently low again. High
engine speed when braking does not negatively effect
fuel consumption.
Warning!
Do not use the auxiliary brake on
slippery roads because of the risk
of the wheels locking and of
skidding. The auxiliary brake
brakes only on the drive wheels
which means that there is risk of
jack-knifing. Instead brake with
the brake pedal which acts on all
wheels. Drive with sufficient
safety margins.
Driving 149
Switch with two positions
• Position 0, the auxiliary brake is not engaged
• Position 1, the auxiliary brake is engaged
Release the accelerator pedal for the auxiliary brake to
take effect.
In order for the auxiliary brakes to function when the
accelerator is released during driving,
• the truck must be in gear, and
J0008637
• the clutch must be released
• the engine speed must be at least 1000 rpm, but
preferably as high as possible without entering the
tachometer red zone
• the cruise control must be disengaged
If the cruise control is engaged, the auxiliary brakes
first start working when the speed is 7 km/h above the
set speed.
Switch with three positions
• Position 0, the auxiliary brake is not engaged
• Position 1, the auxiliary brake is semi-engaged
• Position 2, the auxiliary brake is fully engaged
Release the accelerator pedal for the auxiliary brake to
take effect.
In order for the auxiliary brakes to function when the
accelerator is released during driving,
• the truck must be in gear, and
• the clutch must be released
• the engine speed must be at least 1000 rpm, but
preferably as high as possible without entering the
tachometer red zone
• the cruise control must be disengaged
J0008058
150 Driving
If the cruise control is engaged, the auxiliary brakes
first start working when the speed is 7 km/h above the
set speed.
Full auxiliary brakes (position 2) cannot be engaged
before the engine has attained working temperature. If
the engine brake is engaged at too low a temperature, a
symbol is shown in the display or amongst the check
lamps and the information lamp lights.
J3014455
Symbol which shows that the
temperature is too low.
Stalk
A figure or letter in the display shows which position
the lever is in.
Automatic position A
The auxiliary brakes start working together with the
service brakes when the brake pedal is depressed
("Brake blending"). It is only in position "A" that the
auxiliary brakes begin to take effect together with the
normal wheel brakes when the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the engine cruise control is engaged, it uses the
auxiliary brakes to keep the set speed.
Manual positions 1-3
The auxiliary brake will be applied increasingly for
each step of the stalk switch. A Volvo workshop can
change the degree to which the auxiliary brake is
engaged at each position.
There are even stalk switches with only manual
positions. Manual position means that full auxiliary
braking is engaged.
Release the accelerator pedal for the auxiliary brake to
take effect.
In order for the auxiliary brakes to function when the
accelerator is released during driving,
• the truck must be in gear, and
• the clutch must be released
J0010263
0 Auxiliary brake disengaged
A Automatic position
1-3 Manual position
B Braking program (only on trucks
with I-shift or Powertronic)
The display shows that the stalk is in
position 2.
11:45
AM
(2)
7,658.8 km
Driving 151
• the engine speed must be at least 1000 rpm, but
preferably as high as possible without entering the
tachometer red zone
• the cruise control must be disengaged
Brake program B
1
Stop in the last manual position (3 for stalk
switch with three manual positions and 1 for stalk
switch with one manual position)
2
Pull the lever to position B
3
B is shown on the display
4
Release the lever
11:45
AM
(B)
7,658.8 km
When the brake program is connected the gearbox
changes to the gear which gives the auxiliary brake the
best effect.
Leave the brake program by positioning the lever in
some other position than position 3 or by depressing
the accelerator.
Cruise control with braking
When the engine cruise control is disengaged
1
Drive at the desired speed
2
Put the lever in position A
3
Depress the toggle switch on the lever
4
The speed is set and the accelerator can be
released
The truck brakes automatically when the set speed is
exceeded. Increase or decrease the set speed with the
toggle switch.
The truck can be braked manually with the lever in
positions 1-3, and returns to braking at the set speed
when the lever is moved to position A again.
Disengage the cruise control with braking by pressing
the accelerator or putting the lever in position 0.
When the engine cruise control is engaged
Put the lever in position A
J5012647
152 Driving
The engine's cruise control uses the auxiliary brakes
for braking when the speed is 7 km/h above the set
speed. 7 km/h excess speed is installed at the factory
but can be changed to between 3 and 15 km/h. Depress
+ or - on the toggle switch to increase or decrease the
excess speed. For a short time the display will show at
what speed above the set speed the auxiliary brake will
begin to take effect.
When the speed is down to 4 km/h above the set
speed, the auxiliary brakes stop braking.
The truck can be braked manually with the lever in
positions 1-3, and returns to braking at the set speed
when the lever is moved to position A again.
Disengage the cruise control with braking by pressing
the accelerator or putting the lever in position 0.
Disengage the engine cruise control by pressing the
brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Brake Blending
When the auxiliary brake lever is in position A, the
auxiliary brake is automatically applied together with
the normal brakes when the brake pedal is depressed.
J0010263
Put the lever in position A
ABS
ABS is a part of EBS and is completely automatic.
Driving 153
ESP — Electronic Stability Program
ESP ESP (Electronic stability program) is a stabilising
system that reduces the risk of rolling over and
skidding.
If the system senses that the vehicle is about to roll
over, it first reduces the throttle. If this is not
sufficient, the system also uses the wheel brakes to
reduce the vehicle's speed. The system works best
when the trailer also has ABS or EBS .
If the system senses that there is a risk for skidding,
the throttle is reduced and the wheels are braked in a
manner that allows the vehicle to continue on the
correct course. If necessary, the auxiliary brakes are
also disconnected.
A symbol lights when the system is acting.
Control of engine torque
When the accelerator pedal is released on a slippery
road, the auxiliary brake can lock the driving wheels.
When this happens the auxiliary brake is disengaged
and the engine is accelerated until the driving wheels
rotate at the same speed as the front wheels. This does
not happen if the gearbox is in neutral position, ABS is
activated or the vehicle speed is lower than 10 km/h.
J3015844
Symbol for ESP engagement.
Warning!
Drive the truck in the same way
as vehicles without ESP. ESP
reduces the risk of tipping and
skidding, but the vehicles can still
tip over if the centre of gravity is
very high, if the wheels hit a curb
at high speed, or through careless
driving. A truck can skid on
slippery surfaces even if it has
ESP.
Do not drive on heavily cambered
roads (e.g. test tracks) with
vehicles fitted with ESP. Driving
on heavily cambered roads can
cause the ESPsystem to engage
unnecessarily and dangerously.
154 Driving
Brake lining wear equalisation
If the brake linings on one axle wear faster than on the
others, the braking force is altered to equalize the
wear.
A symbol is shown on the display when there is less
than 20% of the lining left.
J5013668
Symbol on the display when there is
less than 20% of the brake lining
left.
Panic braking function
If the brake pedal is depressed very quickly, the brake
pressure is rapidly increased and the braking effect is
more powerful. The function is provided to reach full
braking force more quickly in emergency situations.
Manual gearbox
General
Starting always start in 1st gear or crawler gear with
as low engine speed as possible (700–800 rpm). Do
not slip the clutch. Select the next gear as soon as the
truck is rolling. Let the engine work within it's most
efficient range, the lower part of the tachometer's
green field. Only use full power when you really need
it. Drive according to the tachometer, not the
engine sound!
Reverse gear
The reverse gear is unsynchronised. Shift to LOW
range before engaging reverse. In good driving
conditions it is possible to reverse with HIGH range
engaged.
To get into reverse gear more easily, engage a
synchronised gear before the reverse gear. This stops
the gearbox shafts from rotating and the engagement
teeth are not worn so much.
Note!
It is not permitted to shift between
HIGH and LOW range while
reversing. First shift to HIGH or
LOW range, then engage reverse.
Driving 155
Crawler gear
Some gearboxes have a crawler gear (C).
Crawler gear is not synchronised and can only be used
in low range. First select low range and then engage
crawler gear. Use the crawler gear in difficult starting
conditions, i.e. if you are stuck or when starting with a
heavily loaded truck on a hill.
In order to engage the crawler gear more easily,
engage a synchronised gear before engaging the
crawler gear. This stops the gearbox shafts from
rotating and the engagement teeth are not worn so
much.
Change between low speed range and
high speed range
The gearbox is divided into a low speed range and a
high speed range. The lower figure in each gear
position shows the low speed range. The upper figure
in each gear position shows the high speed range.
1
Change gear as with a conventional gearbox to
the highest speed in the low speed range (3rd or
4th)
2
Raise the range to the upper level (H)
3
Depress the clutch
4
Put the gear lever in neutral
5
Wait until the gearbox has changed up to the high
speed range
6
Engage the next gear (4th or 5th)
7
In high speed range change as with a
conventional gearbox
Change down in the same way.
A range inhibitor prevents shifting to the low speed
range if the speed is higher than 20–40 km/h.
Before each new gear hold the gear lever in neutral for
a moment.
J0007815
156 Driving
When changing gear it is possible to skip a gear
position if the total weight and general driving
conditions permit it.
Range control:
H High Speed Range
L Low Speed Range
J0007816
Note!
If the air pressure is too low the
range gear can become stuck in
neutral. The gear lever is then locked
into neutral. The gear lever can be
moved when the air pressure
increases.
Driving 157
Change between high splitter and low
splitter
Change within the same gear:
1
Begin with the splitter gear in position L, low
splitter. The symbol for low splitter lights up.
2
Change the splitter gear to position H, high
splitter
3
Wait for suitable engine speed
4
Push the clutch right down
5
The gear will engage and the low splitter symbol
will go out
6
Release the clutch
Change to the next gear:
1
Set the position control in position L, low splitter
2
Wait for suitable engine speed
3
Push the clutch right down
4
Put the gear lever in the next gear position
5
The gear is engaged and the symbol for low
splitter lights up
6
Release the clutch
J0007819
Splitter Control:
H High split
L Low split
Change down in the same way.
If the clutch is not depressed completely the gear
change can be delayed, the gearbox can get into
neutral and the synchronising can be damaged.
When starting in crawler gear, the splitter control must
be used: Change from low crawl to high crawl, to low
1st gear, and so on. Changing gear from low crawl
directly to low 1st gear often means that the truck will
stop before you have time to get into 1st gear.
J3014477
Symbol for engaged low splitter
158 Driving
Hydraulic bogie lift
Lifting the bogie axle
1
Depress the upper part of the switch. A signal is
sounded indicating that the bogie lifting motor is
functioning.
2
Wait until the control lamp lights up. The bogie
axle is now completely lifted.
3
Put the switch in the middle position.
The indicator lamp in the switch only shows that the
switch is switched on.
Lowering the bogie axle
1
Depress the lower part of the switch. A signal is
sounded indicating that the bogie lifting motor is
functioning.
2
Wait until the control lamp lights up. The bogie
axle is now completely lowered.
3
Put the switch in the middle position.
The indicator lamp in the switch only shows that the
switch is switched on.
Avoid quick movements between the upper and lower
switch positions. Pass the middle position slowly, so
that the indicator lamp in the switch has time to go out,
otherwise there will be no change-over.
J0007833
Switch for bogie.
J3014468
Control lamp for bogie.
Note!
If the switch for the bogie is
depressed the bogie lift must be
allowed to become ready before the
switch is put in the middle position
again, otherwise the truck can suffer
damage.
Note!
Never use the bogie lift as long as
the control lamp for preheating is lit.
Driving 159
Caution!
Lower the bogie when tipping
and when driving with a loaded
vehicle. Otherwise damage can
result as the maximum loading is
exceeded.
Bogie
Bogie lamp
The tag axle raise lamp is lit when:
• The bogie axle is lifted
• Load distribution between the drive axle and bogie
axle is changed
The bogie lift lamp lights when the load distribution
between the drive axle and bogie axle is changed.
J3014468
Bogie lift lamp
The bogie lift lamp flashes when:
• The drive axle load has increased by 30% on
vehicles which have a bogie button with a spring
loaded lower position.
Lifting and lowering the bogie axle
Lifting the bogie axle
Set the bogie axle switch to the upper position.
Note!
The bogie axle raised lamp on the instrument panel
lights up and remains on as long as the switch is in the
upper position.
The rear suspension is raised 45 mm
when the switch is in the upper
position. The increase in height
means the vehicle's total height also
is increased. The offset height can be
adjusted at a Volvo workshop.
The lamp always flashes when the speed is below
30 km/h, axle load limits are exceeded and the
function is active.
The bogie axle will not lift if the pressure on the drive
axle exceeds the axle pressure limit.
160 Driving
The bogie axle is not lifted, instead the load is
distributed to the other axles when the switch is set to
the upper position.
J7008416
J3014468
Bogie lift lamp
Lowering the bogie axle
Move the bogie axle switch to the centre position. The
bogie axle raise lamp on the instrument panel is
extinguished.
J7008420
Change load distribution between drive
axle and bogie axle
To change the load distribution, the bogie axle is
drained from air so that more weight is transferred to
the drive axle. The bogie axle is not lifted, it has
contact with the road surface all the time. The function
Driving 161
can be used to increase traction when stuck on a
slippery surface.
1 Press the lower part of the bogie switch once.
The load is distributed so that the drive axle carries a
heavier load than previously, but not more than the
axle load limitation. The bogie lamp is lit.
The function "Optimize traction" is activated. The
function distributes the load between the axles to
provide the best road grip possible with regard to the
load
J7008415
2 Press the lower part of the bogie switch once more.
If the speed is less than 30 km/h when it is pressed:
The drive axle pressure increases to max 30% above
the axle pressure limit. The bogie lamp flashes.
When the speed increases to more than 30 km/h, the
drive axle load drops to the axle load limit again.
J7008415
162 Driving
3 Press the lower part of the bogie switch a third time.
The air bellows for the bogie axle are inflated so that
axle loading is distributed evenly again. The bogie
lamp goes out.
J7008415
1 Press the lower part of the bogie switch once.
If the speed is less than 30 km/h when it is pressed:
The drive axle pressure increases to max 30% above
the axle pressure limit. The bogie lamp flashes.
When the speed increases to more than 30 km/h, the
drive axle load drops to the axle load limit again.
J7008415
2 Press the lower part of the bogie switch once more.
The function "Optimize traction" is re-activated. The
function distributes the load between the axles to
provide the best road grip possible with regard to the
load. The bogie lamp goes out.
J7008415
Driving 163
1Engaging the diff lock between axles.
J4017789
2 Set the bogie switch to the lower position.
The load is distributed so that the drive axle carries a
heavier load than previously. The bogie lamp is lit.
J7008415
To return to normal driving:
1
Put the bogie switch in the centre position
2
Disengage the diff lock
J7008420
164 Driving
Set the bogie switch to the lower position.
The load is distributed so that the drive axle carries a
heavier load than previously. The bogie lamp is lit.
J7008415
To return to normal driving:
1
Put the bogie switch in the centre position
2
Disengage the diff lock
J7008420
Unloading the front axle
On the front axle bellows there is a sensor that
measures the load on the front axle. When the load
becomes excessive, the front axle is automatically
relieved by lowering the bogie. With excessive front
axle loading and if the speed exceeds 30 km/h, the
system automatically reverts to, firstly, "traction help",
secondly, "optimize traction" and finally normal axle
load distribution. If the load on the front axle is too
high, the bogie cannot be raised.
Driving 165
Tridem
Raise the axle
Depress the upper part of the switch.
The bogie lamp for the Tridem-axle lights up.
If the load on the other axles becomes excessive, the
axle will not lift.
If the axle lifts, the rear part of the vehicle will be
raised by 45 mm.
If the axle is lifted and the vehicle is loaded so that the
pressure on the bogie becomes excessive, the Tridemaxle will be lowered automatically.
J7008416
J3014469
Bogie lamp for Tridem-axle
Lower the axle
Put the switch in the middle position.
The bogie lamp for the Tridem-axle goes out.
The load is distributed so that both driving axles
receive equal load. The third axle will receive
sufficient load to make the vehicle as easy to drive as
possible.
J7008420
166 Driving
Distribute the load evenly between the
axles
With high bogie pressure, for example, when loading
and unloading, it can be advantageous to increase axle
pressure on the Tridem-axle in order to obtain the best
possible stability.
Depress the lower part of the switch.
The bogie lamp for the trailer flashes.
The load is evenly distributed over the three axles. The
bogie becomes more stable.
The load on the third axle never exceeds 8 tonnes,
even if the load on the bogie exceeds 24 tonnes.
The function is switched off when the speed exceeds
30 km/h.
J7008415
J3014469
Bogie lamp for Tridem-axle
Driving 167
Increase the axle pressure on the first
drive line
Engage the differential lock between the driving axles.
J4017789
Then depress switch ”AIR DUMP”:
1
First press: The second drive axle is dumped so
that 10.5 tonnes is put on on the first drive axle.
The bogie lamp lights up
2
Second press: The second drive axle is dumped
so that 13.6 tonnes is put on on the first drive
axle if speed is less than 30 km/h. The bogie
lamp flashes.
3
Third press: The second driving axle is loaded
again, and the load distribution between the axles
is 50/50 again. The bogie lamp goes out
If the weight on the first driving axle becomes
excessive, the increase in axle pressure will be
discontinued. Distribution between the driving axles
will be 50/50.
The Tridem-axle is not affected at all by the
switch ”AIR DUMP”.
J3014127
J3014468
Bogie lamp
168 Driving
Steered rear axle
The truck may have a hydraulically steered pusher
axle or a hydraulically steered trailing wheel axle,
controlled electronically.
If a fault occurs in the electro-hydraulic system the
axle will be completely unsteered and it will not be
possible to reverse the truck unless the axle is raised.
Remember that a fault in the system also effect the
driving characteristics when driving straight forwards.
Small simple faults can be corrected by stopping the
truck, turning the ignition key to 0, waiting a short
while and then restarting the engine.
Warning!
Do not try to fix any faults on the
steering of the pusher axle or
trailing wheel axle yourself but
contact a Volvo workshop.
Warning!
In case of any fault with the
steering for the pusher axle or the
tag axle, contact your closest
Volvo workshop. Reversing must
be avoided as this can damage the
truck. There is a great risk that
components e.g. hubs, bearings,
wheels can suffer permanent
damage and must be replaced.
Driving 169
Cruise control
Depress the brake pedal for a couple of seconds after
starting the engine otherwise the cruise control will not
function.
Caution!
Do not use the cruise control in
hilly terrain, heavy traffic or on
slippery roads.
Engage the cruise control
The slide switch for cruise control is on the direction
indicator.
1
Move the slide switch (B) to the ON position.
2
When the required speed has been attained press
SET (A).
The required speed is attained either by using the
accelerator in the usual way or by increasing or
decreasing speed with + or - on SET.
J0008305
When cruise control is in operation, this is indicated
on the display by "CC" or by an indicator lamp.
The cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below
30 km/h.
To disengage cruise control
Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal or push the
slide switch (B) to OFF.
Return to the previous speed by pushing the slide
switch (B) to RESUME and release. (This is valid as
long as the speed exceeds 15 km/h when the slide
switch (B) is depressed).
The cruise control is not disengaged if the accelerator
pedal is depressed. When the accelerator is released,
the truck returns to the set speed.
Note!
Make a habit of using one of the foot
pedals to disengage cruise control in
order to be able to react as quickly as
possible in the event of a critical
situation.
170 Driving
Constant engine speed control
The engine can be held at another speed than idle, for
example when the power take-off is in use. The truck
must be stationary. (To change the idle speed
temporarily, see section "Constant engine speed
control")
Note!
Never set the engine speed higher
than the body builder's
recommendation. See information
from the body builder.
Choice of engine speed
1
Push B to ON
2
Change the engine speed with SET (A)
Preset engine speed
Push B to RESUME.
The preset engine speed is normally 1000 rpm.
Disengage engine speed control
There are four different ways of disengaging the
engine speed control. Do one of the following:
• Push B to OFF
• Depress the clutch pedal
• Depress the brake pedal
• Use the trailer brake
Lane Keeping Support
Lane Keeping Support is a driving support system
aimed at warning the driver for unintentional deviation
from the intended direction. The main area of use for
the system is on motorways when the truck has a
speed above 60 km/h and in monotonous driving
conditions.
J0008305
Driving 171
Engaging Lane Keeping Support
The system is operated via a switch on the instrument
panel. When the system is switched off, no icons are
displayed. When the system is switched on, the status
is shown with two icons, see below.
When the system is SWITCHED ON and ACTIVE
the following symbol is shown on the display. That the
system is ACTIVE means that the system will warn
the driver with unintentional deviations from the
driving lane.
When the system is SWITCHED ON but
INACTIVE the following symbol is shown on the
display. The system will NOT warn the driver with
unintentional deviations from the driving lane.
Examples of when the system is inactive are; when
there are no lane markings or poor markings, when the
speed is below 60 km/h.
When the system is active, a warning signal is
generated from the instrument panel. The signal is a
long, repeated signal that resembles the noise from
lane edge markings.
When does the system warn?
The system warns the driver when the truck crosses
lane markings and the following conditions are
fulfilled:
• The system is SWITCHED ON
• The system is ACTIVE
• The truck speed is 60 km/h or higher
• The driver has not used the direction indicators or
recently touched the brake pedal
The system does not effect the brakes, steering or any
other system in the truck. It only emits an audible
11:45
AM
7,658.8 km
11:45
AM
7,658.8 km
172 Driving
signal via the instrument panel and shows icons on the
display
The system occasionally requires automatic
calibration. This may be when the truck is started for
the first time or after a workshop visit. When
calibration is required, it starts automatically as soon
as the speed is sufficient and the road markings are
legible, independant of if the system is active or
inactive. Calibration takes about 20 minutes, but the
system is functional after 5-7 minutes.
Lane Change Support
Lane Change Support is an information system that, in
certain circumstances, helps to make the driver aware
of vehicles that are travelling in the same direction as
the truck on the passenger side (in the blind spot).
The main purpose of the system is when driving on
multi-lane roads, where the system can minimise the
risk of accidents when changing lanes.
Warning!
The system is a supplement to a
safe driving style and the use of
rear-view mirrors. It cannot
replace the driver's awareness and
responsibility. The responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe
manner always lies on the driver.
Driving 173
Note!
The system does not affect the
brakes, steering or other systems in
the vehicle. It only emits warning
light and
sound signals.
Engaging Lane Change Support
LCS is activated automatically when the truck starts.
The system functions when the truck's speed is above
35 km/h.
The passenger side door pillar has an LED marked
with the symbol to the right. This shows a steady light
when LCS is active.
J151617
Symbol for Lane Change Support
LCS can be switched off in the display menu, see the
section for Display – Vehicle settings – LCS.
When does the system warn?
The system warns when the following conditions are
fulfilled:
• The truck has a speed in excess of 35 km/h
• The direction indicators are on
• Another vehicle is moving within the sensor's field
of view
The system warns with a flashing LED on the
passenger door pillar and a sound signal. The sound
signal is turned off when the truck is delivered from
the factory and can be activated via the display menu.
See the section for Display — Vehicle settings — LCS
sound signal.
Note!
The system does not issue warnings
if the vehicle alongside is moving at
a speed considerably faster or slower
than the truck.
174 Driving
If the LCS does not work
LCS can be limited by snow, ice or dirt in the close
vicinity of the sensor and in some weather conditions,
such as snowfall
or heavy rain. The sensor function can be impaired by
e.g. an extremely wide load, superstructures or other
fixed
installations within the sensor's field of view. If an
alteration to the superstructure or other modification
has been made within or close to the sensor's field of
view, the LCS function should be checked by a
workshop.
LCS does not warn for pedestrians, cyclists or fixed
objects within the sensor's field of view and can in
certain situations
have difficulty in detecting motorcycles and mopeds.
J161417
The arrow shows the location of the
sensor on a left-hand drive truck
Warning!
Any modifications to the area in
front of the sensor will result in
Volvo not being able to guarantee
the correct function of the LCS.
Driver Alert Support
Driver Alert Support is a driving support system, the
purpose of which is to inform the driver of his or her
awareness when driving.
The function is intended to attract the drivers attention
when he/she starts to exhibit impaired driving ability,
e.g. if the driver starts to fall
asleep.
The main area of use is on larger main roads. The
function is not intended for use in town traffic.
Warning!
Driver Alert Support does not
function in all situations, it is
only intended to be a
supplementary aid. The driver is
ultimately responsible for driving
the vehicle in a safe manner.
Driving 175
Note!
The system does not affect the
brakes, steering or other systems in
the vehicle. It only emits audible
signals via the instrument panel and
shows messages in the display.
The system is controlled from the display menu, see
“Vehicle settings” in the Display section. DAS can be
selected as a favourite in the display.
DAS is activated automatically when the truck starts.
The system is activated at a speed of 65 km/h, when it
is switched on via the display.
The display shows a level indicator with 1–5 bars. If
no bars are visible, the system is inactive or turned off.
In order for the symbol to be seen in the display, DAS
must be selected as a favourite, see the Display
section.
Warning!
Driver Alert Support can be
inactivated by indistinct road
markings or certain weather
conditions, e.g. heavy rain or
snowfall.
The system is inactivated at speeds below 60 km/h.
J153857
Level marking for
Driver Alert Support
DAS provides information to the driver in the form of
bars in the display. The number of bars decreases with
deteriorated lane keeping. The driver is alarmed when
the vehicle does not follow road markings in an even
manner. The alarm warns via a message in the display
and a sound signal.
The up/down buttons are used for scrolling between
the messages. Use the Esc button to close a message.
For the DAS to function, the following conditions
must be met:
• The system is engaged
• The road has legible lane markings
• The truck has a speed in excess of 65 km/h
Note!
DAS should not be used to increase
the length of a driving session.
Tiredness is deceptive and it is
difficult to sense when it is starting
to become dangerous. So make sure
that you are properly rested before a
journey and take regular breaks.
176 Driving
DAS detects most cases where the driver's
concentration on driving is detracted, e.g. due to
tiredness or poor concentration. To increase safety
even more the Lane Keeping Support should be
activated.
Calibration
The system occasionally requires automatic
calibration. This may be when the truck is started for
the first time or
after a workshop visit. When calibration is necessary,
it is started automatically as soon as the speed is
sufficient and
the road markings are sufficiently distinct, irrespective
of the system being active or inactive. The calibration
takes about 20 minutes, but
the system functions already after 5–7 minutes.
Power take-off
General
One differentiates between Power Take-Offs that are
mounted on engines, flywheels and gearboxes. A PTO
mounted on a flywheel is called a clutch-dependant
PTO.
All power take-off is disengaged when the engine is
switched off with the starter key, when the power takeoff is engaged. When the engine is started the next
time the power take-off is disengaged despite the fact
that the switch is on. Turn the switch off before the
power take-off is engaged again. If the engine is
switched off remotely, the power take-off will not be
disconnected, and will remain connected when
restarting.
On ADR vehicles, the parking heater will not start if
the power take-off is engaged. The parking heater is
turned off if it is on when the power take-off is
engaged.
Driving 177
With "Constant engine speed control" the idle can be
temporarily raised, so that it is higher while the power
take-off is being used. The idling speed can be raised
by different amounts, depending on which type of
power take-off is installed in the truck.
Note!
Never set the engine speed higher
than the body builder's
recommendation. See information
from the body builder.
Engine-mounted power take-off
Engine-mounted power take-offs can be engaged or
disengaged while travelling without depressing the
clutch.
On trucks with I-shift it will not be possible to change
gear if the power take-off is engaged while driving.
The desired gear must be selected while the truck is
stationary.
The engine speed is limited when engine-mounted
hydraulic pumps are used.
J3015780
J3015781
Clutch-independent PTO
Non clutch-dependent power take-off can be engaged
or disengaged while travelling without depressing the
clutch. Do not switch in the power take-off at engine
speeds exceeding 1200 rpm.
Non clutch-dependent power take-off can be used
during driving and when the gearbox is not engaged.
Non clutch-dependent power take-off can be engaged
or disengaged while travelling without depressing the
clutch. Do not switch in the power take-off at engine
speeds exceeding 1000 rpm.
J0008084
178 Driving
Non clutch-dependent power take-off can be used
during driving and when the gearbox is not engaged.
Engage power take-off
1
Push in the locking button on the switch.
2
Press in the lower part of the switch.
The Indicator lamp lights up and the display shows
PTO.
Disengage power take-off
Push in the upper part of the switch.
Gearbox-mounted power take-off
The vehicle should remain stationary when the power
take-off is engaged.
The power take-off should not be engaged during
driving. If for some reason it must be engaged, then
gearshifting is not allowed.
Engage power take-off
1
Depress the clutch pedal.
2
Engage a low forward gear.
3
Put the gear lever in neutral.
4
Push in the locking button on the switch.
5
Press in the lower part of the switch.
The Indicator lamp lights up and the display
shows PTO.
6
Release the clutch pedal.
Disengage power take-off
1
Depress the clutch pedal.
2
Push in the upper part of the switch.
3
Release the clutch pedal.
J0008081
J0008082
Driving 179
The vehicle should remain stationary when the power
take-off is engaged.
The power take-off should not be engaged during
driving. If for some reason it must be engaged, then
gearshifting is not allowed.
On trucks with I-shift it will not be possible to change
gear if the power take-off is engaged while driving.
The desired gear must be selected while the truck is
stationary.
J0008081
Engage power take-off
It does not matter which position the gear shifter is in.
1
Hold in the lock button on the switch
2
Press in the lower part of the switch
The indicator lamp lights and the display shows
PTO.
Disengage power take-off
Press in the upper part of the switch.
When the gearbox is in neutral it is possible to choose
between two gears, N1 and N2, with different speed
ranges.
1
Move the gear lever to N
2
Select N1 or N2 with the +/- button
3
See which gear is selected on the display
N2 allows about 30% higher engine speed than N1.
High range lock-up
High range lock-up is used when a PTO is installed in
the powertrain. The gearbox will start in high gear
when the vehicle is disengaged from the engine and
gearbox and the powertrain PTO is engaged. Lock-up
will already be active at low engine speed.
Engage
1
The engine must be idling at low speed
2
Move the gear lever to N
J0008082
180 Driving
3
Apply the parking brake
4
Engage the PTO in the powertrain
5
Wait until HS is shown on the display (High
range lock-up Standby)
6
Move the gear lever to position A (or M)
7
Wait until HR is shown on the display (High
range lock-up Running)
8
Increase engine speed to the desired rpm.
9
The C will disappear when the engine speed is
increased (the rpm depends on whether the gear
lever is in A or M)
Disengage the powertrain PTO temporarily
1
Move the gear lever to N
2
HS is shown on the display (High range lock-up
Standby)
3
Re-engage by moving the gear lever to position
A or M
Disengage
1
Lower the engine speed to idling
2
Move the gear lever to N
3
Apply the parking brake
4
Disengage the PTO
5
HD is shown on the display (High range lock-up
Disengaging)
6
Wait until HD is no longer shown on the display
7
It is now possible to drive off with the vehicle. If
HD remains on the display, it may be due to the
parking brake not being applied.
Incorrect usage
If engaging or disengaging is not carried out correctly,
HD (High range lock-up Disengaged) will be shown
on the display. The gearbox will select neutral. Try
one of the following measures:
Driving 181
• Disengage the PTO
• Apply the parking brake
• Move the gear lever to N
• Turn off the engine and restart it
High range lock-up
(Option)
High range lock-up is used when a power take-off is
installed in the drive train. When the gearbox is in
neutral (gear selector in N position) and the drive train
power take-off is engaged, the gearbox will start in the
highest gear. The lock-up clutch locks already at low
speeds.
Engage the drive train power take-off
1
The engine must be idling at low speed
2
Move the gear shift lever to N
3
Apply the parking brake
4
Engage the power take-off in the drive train
5
Wait until HS is shown in the display (High
range lock-up Standby)
6
Move the gear shift lever to position A (or M)
7
Wait until HR is shown in the display (High
range lock-up Running)
8
Increase the engine speed to the desired speed
9
The C will disappear when the engine speed is
increased (the engine speed depends on whether
the gear shift lever is in the A or M position)
182 Driving
Disengage the drive train power take-off
temporarily
1
Move the gear shift lever to N
2
HS is shown in the display (High range lock-up
Standby)
3
Re-engage by moving the gear shift lever to
position A or M
4
The display shows HR again
Disengage the drive train power take-off
1
Reduce the engine speed to idling
2
Move the gear shift lever to N
3
Apply the parking brake
4
Disengage the power take-off
5
HD is shown in the display (High range lock-up
Disengaging)
6
Wait until HD is no longer shown in the display
7
It is now possible to drive the vehicle. If HD
remains in the display, it may be due to the
parking brake not being applied.
Incorrect usage
If engaging and disengaging is not done correctly, an
H is shown in the display. The gearbox selects neutral.
Try one of the following measures:
• Apply the parking brake
• Move the gear shift lever to N
• Disengage the power take-off
• Turn off the engine and restart it
Tying down the truck on a ferry
When the vehicle is to be lashed for ferry transport, the
air bellows must first be completely emptied and then
the air suspension system shut off.
Driving 183
1 Apply the parking brake.
J5012418
2 Select manual control.
J7009823
3 Select M2
J7009824
184 Driving
4 Lower the truck to it's lowest level.
J6009620
5 Press and hold in the lower part of the adjustment
button. Then press the memory button without
releasing the adjustment button. When the LED lights,
release the lower adjustment button first. Wait five
seconds and then release the memory button.
When the button is released the remaining air drains
out of the bellows.
J6009619
6 When all the air is drained and there is no more
hissing, turn the starter key to the stop position.
J7008413
Driving 185
7 Select ride height.
The truck is ready for tying down and the air
suspension system is turned off.
The truck automatically assumes driving height when
the ignition is turned on and the parking brake is
released.
J7009822
When the vehicle is to be lashed for ferry transport, the
air bellows must first be completely emptied and then
the air suspension system shut off.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Select manual control.
186 Driving
3 Lower the truck to it's lowest level.
4 Press and hold in the lower part of the adjustment
button. Then press the memory button without
releasing the adjustment button. When the LED lights,
release the lower adjustment button first. Wait five
seconds and then release the memory button.
When the button is released the remaining air drains
out of the bellows.
5 When all the air is drained and there is no more
hissing, turn the starter key to the stop position.
Driving 187
6 Select ride height.
The truck is ready for tying down and the air
suspension system is turned off.
The truck automatically assumes driving height when
the ignition is turned on and the parking brake is
released.
Ride height memory
The height of the chassis above ground when driving
can be adjusted within certain limits. The range of
adjustment is dependant on the type of vehicle and on
some trucks it cannot be adjusted at all.
It is always possible to restore the ride height factory
settings.
Note!
If the ride height is changed it can
effect the driving characteristics
negatively.
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
Adjusting ride height
1 Select adjustment of ride height.
J7009821
188 Driving
2 Use the axle switch to select the axle to be adjusted:
• M1 for the front axle.
• M2 for both front and rear axles.
• M3 for rear axle.
J7009818
3 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J6009620
4 Keep the memory button depressed for at least five
seconds.
J7009820
Driving 189
5 The new ride height is now set. Select ride height.
J7009822
1 Select adjustment of ride height.
J7009833
2 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J7009831
190 Driving
3 Keep the memory button depressed for at least five
seconds.
J7009832
4 The new ride height is now set. Select ride height.
J7009834
Restoring the factory-set ride height
It is always possible to restore the ride height the truck
had from the factory.
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
Driving 191
1 Select adjustment of ride height.
J7009821
2 Keep the memory button depressed for two seconds.
3 Release the button.
The truck returns to factory set ride height.
J7009820
4 Select ride height.
J7009822
192 Driving
1 Select adjustment of ride height.
J7009833
2 Keep the memory button depressed for two seconds.
3 Release the button.
The truck returns to factory set ride height.
J7009832
4 Select ride height.
J7009834
ADR 193
General
A ADR adapted trucks shall be able to transport
dangerous goods in such a way, that they do not cause
or aggravate any accident.
ADR regulations differ from country to country, but
they are all based on ADR regulations. Follow each
respective country's regulations.
The ADRtruck's main switch disconnects power to all
systems and trailer(s) except the tachograph.
Caution!
Turn off the parking heater before
disconnecting power. Otherwise
the parking heater may be
damaged if it is turned on when
power is disconnected.
Note!
Do not bypass the switch for any
system. If the switch is bypassed for
any system, the truck no longer
fulfills the legal requirements and
safety demands.
Turn off the power
Press in the switch on the dashboard
or
Press in the switch on the cab backpanel (extra
equipment)
When the ignition key is removed from the ignition
lock, power is disconnected firstly after 20minutes. If
the parking lights, parking heater or hazard warning
lights are on or if the air suspension is active (control
button not in drive position) then the power is not
disconnected.
When the main switch is turned off, all systems in the
truck are switched off except the tachograph.
J0010215
194 ADR
Warning!
Do not turn off the power when
travelling! When the main switch
is turned off, the engine and other
important systems are turned off.
Turn on the main switch
Operate both emergency switches
J0010215
Turn the ignition key to at least the radio position
In order to have power when resting or overnighting,
the key must be in the ignition lock in one of its
positions. The key must have been in the radio
position first.
If the parking lights, parking heater or hazard warning
lights are on or if the air suspension is active (control
button not in drive position) then the power is not
disconnected, even if the key is removed.
If the ignition key is already in radio position, power
will be restored when the emergency switch is reset.
J0010213
ADR 195
Turn on power for 20 minutes
Both emergency switched must be on.
J0010215
There are two ways to turn on power for 20 minutes:
1
• First turn the ignition key to the radio position.
• Then turn the ignition key to the stop position.
• Finally remove the ignition key from the lock
The main power is disconnected after 20 minutes.
If the parking lights, parking heater or hazard warning
lights are on or if the air suspension is active (control
button not in drive position) then the power is not
disconnected.
J0010213
196 ADR
J0010282
2
Hold the ignition lock in for 2 seconds
The main power is disconnected after 20 minutes.
If the parking lights, parking heater or hazard warning
lights are on or if the air suspension is active (control
button not in drive position) then the power is not
disconnected.
J0010214
Adaptive cruise control 197
General
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control, adaptive cruise
control) is an extension of the cruise control that
allows automatic speed/distance adjustment, based on
the vehicle in front of the truck.
ACC should primarily be used in open road situations.
Avoid use in heavy traffic and on long down hill
inclines when catching up slow moving vehicles.
Note!
ACC does not replace the driver!
The driver has the final
responsibility for ensuring that a safe
distance is maintained to the vehicle
in front.
Note!
Do not fit anything in front of the
sensor (for example. spotlights). The
sensor will not function.
Caution!
Do not use ACC in hilly terrain,
heavy traffic or on slippery
surfaces.
Caution!
ACC can have difficulty
identifying vehicles that are
displaced sideways, so the
vehicle may brake unexpectedly
when overtaking. It is therefore
recommend to use the accelerator
to manually increase speed when
overtaking, or to disengage ACC.
198 Adaptive cruise control
Caution!
ACC does not brake for
stationary obstacles or very slow
moving vehicles.
Engaging ACC
The control (3) for the cruise control is placed in the
direction indicator stalk.
1
Make sure that the auxiliary brake stalk is
in position A
2
Set the switch (3) to the ON position
3
When the required speed is reached, press SET
(1)
The desired speed is obtained by using the
accelerator pedal as usual and then pressing + or
– on SET (1).
If the cruise control (CC) is active, ACC is engaged by
moving the auxiliary brake stalk to position A.
When the cruise control is engaged, the display shows
“ACC”.
The cruise control cannot be engaged at low speeds.
See section “Cruise control” for more information.
J2021178
Note!
If the retarder stalk is in positions 0,
1, 2 or 3, only normal cruise control
is engaged. In these positions there
will be no automatic speed/distance
adjustment, based on the vehicle in
front of the truck.
Note!
Do not use ACC on slippery
surfaces.
Adaptive cruise control 199
Disengage ACC
The cruise control is disengaged by:
• depressing the brake pedal,
• moving the control (3) to “OFF”, or
• moving the retarder stalk to any other position than
A.
The previously set speed is retained in the memory. It
can be resumed by moving the control (3) to
“RESUME”. A temporary increase of speed, e.g. when
overtaking, does not interfere with the cruise control's
function.
J2021178
Inactivate ACC
By switching off the traction control via the “Vehicle
settings” menu in the display, the ACC is inactivated
at the same time. Inactivation of ACC is suitable when
the truck is on rollers, for example dynatests, authority
tests, vehicle inspections or similar.
To re-engage ACC the truck must be restarted.
For more information about traction control, see
“Driver's manual EBS”.
Change speed
Change the preset speed by short presses on + or – on
SET (1). The preset speed can also be changed by
using the accelerator pedal and SET (1).
The set speed in ACC is shown by a green LED
alongside the corresponding speed in the speedometer.
The set speed is shown in intervals of 5 km/h. In the
figure, the speed is set between 73 and 77 km/h.
J2015658
200 Adaptive cruise control
Change the time gap
Move the control (2) upwards to reduce the time gap
and downwards to increase the time gap.
When the control (2) is moved, the current time gap is
shown in the display for a short while (see figure on
right). In the example shown, the next longest of the
five time gaps has been selected.
J2021178
11:45
AM
ACC
7658.8 km
Note!
The lines indicates the current
distance. Five lines is the maximum.
Note!
Whenever the truck is started, the
third time gap is automatically
selected.
Note!
The actual distance will vary
depending on the speed of the truck.
Adaptive cruise control 201
When the truck itself adjusts the speed
A vehicle is detected in front of the truck
When ACC detects a vehicle, a green symbol lights in
the instrument.
J2015657
A green symbol in the instrument
shows that ACC has detected a
vehicle
The speed is adapted to the vehicle in front
If the vehicle in front is driving slower than your own
truck's ACC setting, the speed difference is shown
with yellow LEDs on the speedometer.
The ACC will only use the auxiliary brakes to reduce
your speed to the same speed as the vehicle in front,
once your truck has come sufficiently close to it. In
other words, the truck may not start braking as soon as
the symbol appears in the instrument or the
speedometer LEDs light.
J2015659
Yellow diodes show the difference
in speed between the vehicle in front
and the truck.
If the vehicle in front disappears out of sight
If the vehicle in front disappears out of sight of the
ACC, e.g if the vehicle changes lanes, increases speed
or turns off the road, the symbol will go out and the
truck will accelerate to the set speed again.
On a bend, a vehicle in front can temporarily disappear
from the field of vision of the ACC. As long as the
ACC senses that the truck is on a bend, it maintains
the same speed as before the vehicle disappeared from
the field of vision.
202 Adaptive cruise control
When the vehicle must be braked manually
If the truck catches up with a vehicle that is travelling
so slowly that ACC cannot manage to brake
sufficiently, a collision warning occurs: the symbol in
the instrument lights up and all the LEDs in the
speedometer turn red. At the same time, a signal is
sounded. Use the footbrake to reduce the speed
sufficiently!
J2015657
J2021188
Caution!
The ACC may identify a vehicle
that is very close to the
identification area, e.g. in an
adjacent lane. This may result in
unexpected braking of your truck.
Brake protection
To protect the wheel brakes from over-use, there is a
built-in protection which limits the use of the wheel
brakes. ACC then temporarily changes to reduced
capacity.
The “ACC reduced” symbol informs that ACC has
changed to only use the auxiliary brakes and that the
braking capacity for ACC is reduced.
Note!
If the connected trailer has no ABS
or has a faulty ABS, the system goes
to reduced capacity.
Adaptive cruise control 203
J203149
When ACC is permitted to use the wheel brakes again,
the symbols to the right are shown:
How long time it takes until ACC permits the use of
the wheel brakes again depends among other things on
how much the driver uses the footbrake during the
time the ACC has reduced the brake capacity.
If the brake protection is activated at the same time as
the ACC brakes for a slower vehicle, the system will
warn the driver (compare with collision warning).
Thereafter the system temporarily goes over to
reduced ACC.
Caution!
When ACC is in the reduced
mode, the ACC has reduced
braking capacity.
Note!
Economic use of ACC on downhill
slopes behind slower vehicles
reduces the risk of the brake
protection being activated and that
ACC goes to reduced mode.
Driving at low speed
When driving at very low speeds, ACC is
automatically disengaged . The symbol to the right is
then shown. See chapter "Cruise control" for more
information.
E.g. this can occur when driving in a slow moving
queue.
J203330
204 Adaptive cruise control
If the ACC does not work
ACC ACC will not function while the radar sensor is
warming up in low temperatures, or if it is very dirty
or covered with snow or ice.
Heavy vehicles
ACC will not function if the braking system (EBS) has
not managed to calculate the total weight of the load
after starting.
Note!
A few short brake stops will speed
up the calculation.
When it is too cold
Wait until the sensor warms up and the symbol goes
out.
J2021177
When the sensor is dirty
Clean the front of the radar sensor. The radar sensor is
located in a recess on the left side of the lower front of
the truck.
J2021176
Calibration
When the truck is started, calibration is performed on
the ACC. Calibration only takes a few seconds.
Note!
Wait until the ACC is calibrated
before driving away.
Powertronic 205
Powertronic, general
Powertronic is a fully automatic gearbox that changes
gear without any interruption in the power transfer. It
has a torque converter with a lock-up clutch working
with all gears. The gearbox can be fitted with a
retarder and a power take-off that can be engaged and
connected while driving. The gear shifter is mounted
on the seat.
Gear shifter
The gear shifter is fixed to the seat and the gear shift
lever can be tilted to allow the driver to move freely
around the cab without being hindered by the lever.
Gear shift lever
On the side of the gear shift lever facing the driver's
seat, is a +/– button (A) with spring-loaded up and
down positions and a neutral position in the middle.
On the top is a button (B) that is used to tilt the gear
shift lever to the horizontal position. There is also a
lock (C) on the front of the gear shift lever to prevent
unintentional gear engagement. The lock must be
pressed in for the following gear changes:
• from N to R
• from N to any of the forward gears
The lock does not need to be pressed when the gear
shift lever is moved from A to M.
J4020107
The gear shift lever can always be moved to N without
having to press a button.
Gear shift lever positions
Two different programs for driving forward plus
neutral or reverse can be selected with the gear shifter.
R Reverse. Gear changing is done with the +/– button
on the gear shift lever.
N Neutral. No gear engaged.
A Automatic program.
Note!
The engine can only be started with
the gear shifter in position N.
206 Powertronic
M Manual program. Changing up and down is done
using the +/– button on the gear shift lever.
F Tilted position.
Tilting the gear shift lever
The gear shift lever can be tilted to horizontal position
to allow easy movement between the driver's seat and
other parts of the cab.
To tilt the gear shift lever:
• Make sure the gear shift lever is in neutral position
N.
• Press in the button on top of the gear shift lever and
tilt the lever forwards, past the reverse position R,
to the horizontal position.
To raise the gear shift lever for driving:
• Move the gear shift lever upwards, past the reverse
position R, until it locks in neutral N.
Buttons
Changing up/down
The +/– button is used to:
• change up or down, one or more gear change steps
at a time in manual mode
• to select reverse gear
• select start gear in automatic mode or pre-selection
of gear 1 while driving
Economy/Power (E/P)
There is an economy/power (E/P) button on the top of
the gear shifter which is used for changing between the
economy and power programs.
J4020111
Powertronic 207
Display
Select the GAUGES menu from the display to view
information on Powertronic (applies to both a
stationary vehicle and one in motion). The display
provides information on the gear currently selected
and which gears are available.
See “Driver Instruction Display” for information about
how to set information about the gearbox as favourite
display.
The gearbox section in the display is divided into
smaller sections showing:
1
Drive program
2
Current gear
3
Available gears (up/down)
4
Lever position
1. Driving program
The section to the far left of the display shows the
driving program. The following programs are
available:
E = economy
P = power
B = brake program (requires VEB/VEB+ or retarder)
K = kick-down
L = Limp home
1 = start in 1st forward and 1st reverse
(see “Selecting starting gear”)
Z = engine speed too high to move from neutral
HR = High Range lock-up (option)
2. Current gear
The section to the right shows the current gear and if
the torque converter is engaged.
Forward gear no. 1–6
Reverse gear no. 1–2
C = converter (torque converter)
EN = Emergency Neutral
J3018211
208 Powertronic
SN = Safety Neutral
When “EN” is shown in the display, an electronic fault
has been indicated on one or more solenoid valves
which can cause damage to the gearbox. Gears that are
not affected can still be used. To engage a gear that is
higher than the damaged gear, the vehicle must be
accelerated to a faster speed so that the gearbox can
skip a gear. Use manual gear changing. Contact a
Volvo workshop.
When “SN” is shown in the display, the gearbox main
pressure is too low to be able to leave N. If “SN” is
shown when the gearbox is cold, run it warm in N and
try to engage the gear again.
3. Available gears
To the left of the lever position section is a section
with arrows showing the number of lower gears that
are available. To the right of the lever position section
is a section showing, in the same way, the number of
higher gears that are available.
The gearbox must be in manual mode in order to
utilize the available gears.
The gears are selected by the +/– button.
4. Lever position
The section in the middle of the display shows the gear
shifter's position.
A = Automatic
M = Manual gear changing
N = Neutral
R = Reverse gear
A flashing A, M, N or R indicates that Autoneutral
(option) is engaged. The gearbox is in neutral but the
gear shift lever is in drive position.
Powertronic 209
Driving programs
Driving programs E and P are used only for automatic
gear changing when the gear shifter is in position A.
E The economy program gives lower fuel
consumption.
P The power program is used when power has priority
over fuel consumption. Up- and down-changing is
done at higher engine speeds.
J4020109
Automatic gear changing
Gear changing is completely automatic in position A.
When reversing (R), gear changing is done manually.
If the gear shift lever is moved to M when driving with
the automatic program A changing will be inhibited
and the current gear will remain engaged through the
entire engine operating range.
If, while driving you want to make sure that 1st gear
will be used, e.g. on steep hills or with high rolling
resistance, the gear can be pre-selected. Pre-selection
means that down-changing, when necessary, is done at
an optimum engine speed, without the driver being
aware of it. Down-changing is done when the right
speed has been reached.
To pre-select 1st gear, press once on the minus button
while driving. Pre-selection of 1st can only be done at
speeds below 50 km/h. 1st remains as selected until
the driver presses +. When the speed exceeds 50 km/h,
it returns to automatic selection between 1 and 2 gears.
210 Powertronic
Kickdown
Kickdown is activated by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal (position B). The kickdown program
optimises gear selection/throttle for maximum
acceleration which most often leads to down-changing.
Kickdown functions in both the economy and power
programs, but not in manual mode.
Position A = full throttle
Position B = kickdown
J2012347
Manual gear changing
Gear change is done manually using the button on the
gear shift lever. Change up with + and down with –.
The change occurs when the button is released. If the
engine speed gets too high or too low, the control unit
will change gear automatically. The lock-up clutch,
“Lock-up” can not be affected manually.
Select starting gear
Selection of starting gear is done automatically after
driving a short while. Starting gear (1 or 2) can be
selected manually using the +/– buttons on the gear
shift lever. If 1st gear is selected a 1 is shown after E
or P in the left section of the display. If 2nd is selected
as the starting gear, no digit is shown in the display.
J4020108
Powertronic 211
Select 1st as starting gear
The truck starts in 1st gear when driving forward and
in R1 when reversing.
When the vehicle is stationary
• Set the gear shift lever to A or N
• Press –
Select 2nd as starting gear
The truck starts in 2nd when driving forward and in
R2 when reversing.
When the vehicle is stationary
• Set the gear shift lever to A or N
• Press +
Autoneutral
(Option)
The Autoneutral function puts the gearbox in neutral
position without the gear shift lever having to be
moved to the N position. Autoneutral can be activated
by the parking brake, the service brakes or by a signal
from the bodywork construction. When Autoneutral
puts the gearbox in neutral, A, M or R flashes. What
activates Autoneutral is decided by the body builder.
Brake interlock
(Option)
The “brake interlock” function prevents the command
when the gear shift lever is moved from N to A, M or
R which can allow the truck to roll away by mistake.
To drive away, the foot brake must be depressed
before the gear shift lever is moved from N to A, M or
R.
212 Powertronic
Dual driver stations
(Option)
On vehicles with dual driver stations, the gear shift
lever in the ordinary driver position must be in N,
neutral, to be able to drive from the second driver
position.
Auxiliary brakes
The auxiliary brakes also work in reverse.
Actions with gearbox malfunction
An “L” in the display indicates that two of three
datalinks to the engine are open circuit. The
Powertronic system then activates Limp home. This
function makes it possible to drive short distances,
with a fault in the vehicle, for example to the nearest
service workshop.
When Limp home is activated, only manual gear
changing is possible. When the gear shift lever is in
position M or R, the driver can change gear using the
+/– button.
Power take-offs are shut off automatically when
Limp home is activated. It is possible to re-engage it as
long as the engine speed is kept below 1000 rpm. All
special functions on the vehicle will be terminated and
cannot be activated.
Limp home will be disengaged automatically once the
fault has been rectified.
Reversing with loads
When reversing down steep inclines with a loaded
vehicle at low speed, there is a risk that the front
wheels lock if the service brake is used for regulating
the speed. By using the engine and torque convertor,
the driving wheels can be braked instead. Use the
Note!
The accelerator pedal must be
released before changing gear so that
the engine torque is reduced. This
also applies when engaging the lockup function.
Note!
The auxiliary brakes must be turned
off when changing down.
Powertronic 213
forward gears 1 or 2 depending on the inclination and
brake at low speeds by applying throttle. When
reversing at higher speeds and engine speeds with the
gear shift lever in R, the retarder and/or the engine
brake gives sufficient braking effect.
Rocking free
On slippery surfaces e.g. snow or sand, the truck can
be rocked free by carefully pressing down and
releasing the accelerator pedal. You then gradually
extend the wheel tracks you have got stuck in.
1
Make sure the differential locks are completely
engaged
2
Move the gear shift lever to M, gear 1
3
Carefully press down the accelerator pedal with
an even pumping action
If you want to rock by quickly changing between
forward and reverse, this can be done at low engine
speeds (less than 1100 rpm) and at a max speed of 5
km/h.
Marshalling
When marshalling, it may be necessary to increase the
engine speed to drive e.g. steering servo and hydraulic
pumps. You can then throttle and brake at the same
time, the engine speed is increased and you can
regulate the speed with the brake pedal. Use the lowest
gear. Make sure the brakes do not overheat.
Idling speed
If the vehicle is to stand still with a gear engaged, the
service brakes or parking brake must be used. To
reduce the driving and the braking power required, the
engine idling speed can be reduced to 550 rpm for
D11. D13 is preset at 500 rpm and cannot be reduced
any lower. For information about how idling speed is
reduced, see “Driver's Manual”.
214 Powertronic
Oil temperature
Normal working temperature for the gearbox is
approx. 80–95 °C. When driving at full throttle for
long periods with the torque converter working, the oil
temperature may rise and result in overheating.
Continuous retarder operation will also have this
effect. If the oil temperature becomes too high in
operation, the yellow warning lamp will light and the
associated symbol will be shown in the display. If the
yellow warning lamp lights while the retarder is
engaged, the retarder's braking effect is reduced. If the
temperature rises more, the red stop lamp will light
and the retarder will be turned off to protect the
gearbox.
Slow down when the yellow warning lamp comes on
and engage a lower gear until the gearbox has returned
to its normal operating temperature.
If the oil temperature becomes too high in normal
operation, check the oil level in the gearbox and
replace the filter.
Retarder temperature
If the temperature in the retarder exceeds 140 °C, the
yellow warning lamp will light and a symbol will be
shown in the display. The retarder braking effect is
reduced. If the temperature rises more, the red stop
lamp will light and the retarder will be turned off to
protect the gearbox.
Slow down when the yellow warning lamp comes on
and engage a lower gear until the gearbox has returned
to its normal operating temperature.
Powertronic 215
Oil pressure
The symbol is shown when the required oil pressure
cannot be reached.
The symbol is shown together with a white
information lamp when the gearbox main pressure is
low to allow the engine's maximum torque. The
vehicle can still be driven, but the engine torque is
limited. Contact a Volvo workshop. If the symbol is
shown together with a red warning lamp, stop
immediately and investigate the fault.
Oil filter
The symbol is shown when the oil filter is clogged.
The symbol is shown together with a yellow warning
lamp. Contact a Volvo workshop for filter change and
fault tracing.
Checking the oil level
Oil grade: Volvo Transmission oil 97342.
Check of the oil level must be done with the oil
temperature at 80–95 °C to ensure the correct oil level.
1
Clean round the oil filler cap and dipstick.
2
Park on a level surface, apply the parking brake
and start the engine.
3
Put the gear selector in N with the engine running
at approximately 600 rpm.
4
Wipe the dipstick with clean, lint-free paper.
5
Check the oil level on the dipstick, The level
should be between the markings on the dipstick.
Top up as necessary with oil of the right grade. If
the oil level is too high it may cause a high oil
temperature in the gearbox.
Pay attention to the purity of the oil!
216 Powertronic
Showing the oil level in the display
The current oil level for the gearbox can be shown in
the information display. The difference between max.
and min. is 3 litres. The below conditions must be
fulfilled for a value to be shown.
• The engine must have been running for at least 1
minute
• The transmission oil temperature must be 80–90 °C
• The engine speed must be 550–650 rpm
• The truck must be stationary and on a level surface
• The gear shifter in the N position
If any of these conditions are not fulfilled, a message
is shown in the display.
I-Shift 217
I-shift, general
I-shift is an automatic gearbox with 12 forward gears
and 4 reverse gears . The clutch and gear shifting are
operated fully automatically so that the driver can
concentrate on the traffic. If necessary, the driver can
choose to change gear manually. The gear lever,
mounted on the driver's seat, can be tilted horizontal to
the seat cushion. Tilting the selector will make it easier
for the driver to move around in the cab.
Gear selector
The gear selector is fixed to the seat and the gear
selector can be tilted to allow the driver to move freely
around the cab without being hindered by the selector.
Gear lever
On the side of the gear lever facing the driver's seat,
there is a +/- button (A) with spring-loaded up and
down positions and a neutral position in the middle.
On the top is a button (B) that is used to tilt the gear
selector to horizontal position. On the front there is
also a gear lever stop (C) to prevent unintentional gear
engagement. The lock must be pressed in for the
following gear shifts:
• from N to R.
• from N to any of the forward gears.
The lock does not need to be pressed when the gear
selector is moved from A to M.
The gear selector can always be moved to N without
having to press a button.
Gear selector positions
The gear selector is used to choose between four
different driving programs.
J4020428
218 I-Shift
R
Reverse. The truck must be stationary when selecting R.
N
Neutral position. No gear engaged.
A
Automatic programme. The gearbox will automatically
select the correct gear with respect to load, incline, speed
and throttle.
M
Manual program. Changing up and down is done with the
+/- button on the gear lever.
F
Tilted.
Tilting the gear selector
The gear lever can be tilted to horizontal position to
allow easy movement between the driver's seat and
other parts of the cab.
To tilt the selector:
• Make sure the selector is in neutral position N
• Press in the button on top of the gear lever and tilt
the lever forwards, past the reverse position R, to
the horizontal position
To raise the selector for driving:
• Move the selector up, past the reverse position R,
until it locks in neutral N
J4020429
I-Shift 219
Buttons
Changing up/down
The +/- button is used to:
• change up or down one step at a time during
manual gear changing
• adjusting gears in automatic mode
• to select split gear in neutral position when using a
power take-off
• selecting reverse gear
• selection of starting gear in automatic mode
J4020430
Economy/Power (E/P)
There is an economy/power button (E/P) on top of the
gear selector. This is used to:
• switch between the economy program and the
power program
J4020431
220 I-Shift
Limp-Home (L)
L is use to activate limp home.
J4020432
Display
Select the GAUGES menu in the display to view
information on I-shift (applies to both a stationary
vehicle and one in motion). Information on the
gearbox is shown on the driver display.
See ”Driver Instruction Display” for information about
how to set information about the gearbox as favourite
display.
The gearbox section is divided into smaller sections
showing:
1
Driving program
2
Selected gear
3
Available gears (down/up)
4
Lever position
1. Driving program
The section to the left of the display shows the current
driving programme. The following driving
programmes are available:
E = economy
E+ = freewheel possible
J3018210
I-Shift 221
P = power
B = braking
L = Limp-Home function
When the lever is tilted, the programme packet the
gearbox is equipped with is shown:
B = Basic
DC = Distribution and Construction
FE = Long Haul Fuel and Economy
HD = Heavy Duty GCM Control
The section to the left of the display shows the current
driving programme. The following driving
programmes are available:
E = economy
P = power
B = braking
L = Limp-Home function
When the lever is tilted, the programme packet the
gearbox is equipped with is shown:
B = Basic
DC = Distribution and Construction
FE = Long Haul Fuel and Economy
HD = Heavy Duty GCM Control
The section to the left of the display shows the current
driving programme. The following driving
programmes are available:
E = economy
P = power
L = Limp-Home function
When the lever is tilted, the programme packet the
gearbox is equipped with is shown:
B = Basic
DC = Distribution and Construction
FE = Long Haul Fuel and Economy
HD = Heavy Duty GCM Control
2. Selected gear
The section to the right of the gearbox field shows the
selected gear.
Gears 1 – 12
222 I-Shift
N = neutral (N1 = low split, N2 = high split)
R = reverse
3. Available gears
The section second from the left of the display shows
with arrows the number of lower gears (half steps) that
are available (maximum 3 arrows). The section second
from the right of the display shows how many higher
gears are available in the same way (maximum 3
arrows).
4. Lever position
The section in the middle of the display shows the gear
selector position.
R = reverse
N = neutral
A = automatic
M = manual
Program packages
Gearboxes have different characteristics and functions
depending on the program package that is installed.
The following program packages are available:
• Basic is the standard program for the gearbox
• Distribution & Construction includes functions
that make the truck lighter to maneuver.
• Long Haul Fuel & Economy and includes
functions that provide improved fuel economy and
also make the truck lighter to maneuver.
• Heavy Duty GCM Control is intended for heavy
trucks. This program also includes functions that
help improve fuel consumption and make the truck
lighter to maneuver.
I-Shift 223
Function description
The gearbox in this truck is fitted with program packet
Basic and has the following functions.
The gearbox in this truck is fitted with program packet
Distribution & Construction and has the following
functions.
The gearbox in this truck is fitted with program packet
Long Haul Fuel & Economy and has the following
functions.
The gearbox in this truck is fitted with program packet
Heavy Duty GCM Control and has the following
functions.
Performance Shift
The best way of synchronising the input and output
shafts is selected. This gives faster and more
comfortable gear changing.
Basic Shift Strategy
Automatic choice of start gear.
Basic Gear Shift Adjustment
Enables adjustment of automatically selected gear
during engine braking.
Gearbox Oil Temperature Monitor
A display that shows the gearbox oil temperature and a
warning system that informs the driver when the oil
temperature is too high.
EcoRoll
Automatic engagement and disengagement of the
freewheel function, with the aim of reducing fuel
consumption. When the accelerator pedal is released,
the transmission is disconnected so that the vehicle can
roll freely, and the engine is brought down to idling
speed.
224 I-Shift
Smart Cruise Control
Only active when the cruise control is engaged. Saves
fuel by deactivating the auxiliary brakes under certain
conditions. The function improves the cruise control
by disengaging the auxiliary brakes when climbing
hills.
Launch Control
Permits clutch control at low speeds by using the brake
pedal. Allows the engine to idle without slipping the
clutch. Regulates engine torque when pulling away to
optimize gear changing and avoid high engine speed.
Enhanced Shift Strategy
Works together with ECS and EBS to select the best
gear for easy maneuvering in difficult areas or to
obtain the maximum effect from the auxiliary brakes.
Heavy Duty GCM Control
Matches up gear change strategy and clutch operation
with high total weight (60-180 tonne).
Gear Selection Adjustment in Auto including
Kickdown
Enables selection of gears in automatic mode even
when the accelerator pedal is depressed. There is also
a Kick Down function for maximising the acceleration
of the truck.
Enhanced Power Take Off Functions
An optional function which supports Power Take Off
operations, e.g. autoneutral and splitbox.
I-Shift 225
Automatic shifting
The simplest way to drive the truck is to use the
automatic program (position A). Gear changing is
automatic and the driver can concentrate on the actual
driving.
When changing gear, the system will govern the
clutch, gearbox and throttle. The system selects the
gear and the point in time for gear changing for
optimum driving performance based on accelerator
pedal position, truck weight, road inclination, vehicle
acceleration, etc.
It is also possible to adjust the gears up or down in
automatic mode. The arrows in the display show how
many steps it is possible to change up or down.
Automatic choice of starting gear.
The gearbox selects the most suitable start gear with
respect to weight and the road’s gradient.
Adjusting the starting gear
You can select a starting gear by using the + and buttons.
Freewheel (EcoRoll)
The freewheel can be activated if the lever for the
auxiliary brake is in position A, and if E+ is shown in
the display. When the freewheel is activated, split gear
is set to N, neutral. Freewheel is activated differently
depending whether the cruise control is active or not.
If the cruise control is active:
• Freewheel is engaged on downward slopes when
the speed exceeds the selected driving speed (for
example 80 kph). The selected driving speed must
be exceeded by 6 kph or more. (See the section on
auxiliary brakes for more information as to how the
auxiliary brake functions and how the excess speed
can be set.)
J4020433
226 I-Shift
• Freewheel is engaged when the speed exceeds the
selected overspeed or below the set driving speed
(for example 80 kph).
If the cruise control is not active:
• Freewheel is engaged when the accelerator pedal is
released and the road is flat or slopes gradually
downhill.
• The free wheel is disengaged when the brake pedal
is depressed , the accelerator is depressed , the lever
for the auxiliary brake is set in position 0, 1, 2, 3 or
B or if the gear selector is set in position M.
When the free wheel is activated, N is shown as the
gear in the info display and the engine idles.
Locking gear
This function is used only when driving using the
automatic program A
The function can be used in all forward gears (1 to 12).
Whenever gear changing is not required (e.g. driving
up a hill), move the lever from A to M. No further gear
changes will be carried out and the current gear will be
kept engaged. The display shows an M.
To return to the automatic program, move the selector
back to A again.
J4020434
Note!
There is risk of over revving when
the gear is locked.
I-Shift 227
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear wears
the clutch and can increase the
risk for clutch breakdown.
Driving program
Economy
When the engine is started, the economy program is
always selected (shown as an E on the display). The
economy program gives priority to fuel economy and
is primarily used when driving under normal
conditions.
Performance
The power program is engaged/disengaged using the
E/P button (see illustration). The performance program
gives priority to driveability and is used when driving
in hilly terrain and off-road.
Brakes
A special braking program can be engaged using the
auxiliary brake lever. See the section on auxiliary
brakes.
J4020431
228 I-Shift
Kick-down
Kick-down is activated by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal (position B). The kick-down program
optimises gear selection/throttle for maximum
acceleration. This is possible in both economy and
power programmes but not in the manual position M.
Position A = full throttle
Position B = kick down
J2012347
Manual shifting
You can drive the truck with completely manual gear
changing or take over from the automatic gear
changing system whenever required. Gear changing is
done by first moving the lever to the manual position
M. The +/- button on the side of the lever is then used
to select the gear.
For a new gear, the +/-button should be pressed once
for each gear step upwards or downwards, to the
desired gear.
Press several times on the +/-button in sequence to
shift through several gears at once.
J4020435
Note!
Do not release the accelerator pedal
during gear changing.
I-Shift 229
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear wears
the clutch.
Reverse gears
The gearbox has four reverse gears (R1 to R4). The
truck must be stationary before reverse gear can be
engaged. The system will select R1 automatically
when the gear lever is moved to R.
When driving, it is possible to shift between gears R1
and R2 and between R3 and R4. To shift gear between
R2 and R3 the truck must be stationary.
Manual gear changing is via the +/-button on the gear
selector.
J4020436
Note!
The gear selector lock must be
pressed in before the gear selector
can be moved from N to R.
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear wears
the clutch.
230 I-Shift
In case of gearbox malfunction
When a fault occurs on the gearbox which means that
the vehicle cannot be driven, activate Limp home
function and drive on.
Activate Limp home like this:
1
Hold in L on the gear selector casing
2
Move the gear selector to A
Limp home is activated
3
Move the gear selector to M
4
Select gears using the +/- button on the gear
selector
When Limp home is selected, it is not possible to drive
if the selector is in position A. Only gears 1, 3 and 5
forwards and 1 reverse can be used. Gear shifting is
only possible when the truck is stationary.
To select reverse, move the lever to R. Move the lever
back to M to resume driving forwards. It is not
necessary to press the L button again.
J4020432
Note!
Limp homefunction should only be
used for short distances.
Limp homefunction will be disengaged when the
ignition is turned off.
Starting on hills
• The truck can be kept still using the parking brake
or trailer brake.
• Put the gear selector in A
• Depress the accelerator
• Release the brake once the clutch starts to pull
Caution!
Never hold the vehicle stationary
on an upward slope using the
accelerator pedal. The clutch
could overheat, which could
cause it to fail.
I-Shift 231
Driving off road
In uncertain or difficult driving conditions, such as
forest roads, building sites, or off-road, manual
position is preferable.
Clutch
The clutch is a dry disc type, i.e. has no torque
converter. So never pull away in high gears by
slipping the clutch. The information lamp will come
on and a symbol will appear on the display if the
clutch overheats.
J3014466
J3008835
Caution!
Never hold the vehicle stationary
on an upward slope using the
accelerator pedal. The clutch
could overheat, which could
cause it to fail.
Disengagement
If fast declutching is required, e.g. in slippery
conditions, move the gear lever to N, neutral.
232 I-Shift
I-Shift, general
I-Shift is an automated manual gearbox with 12
forward gears and 4 reverse gears. The clutch and gear
changing are operated fully automatically so that the
driver can concentrate on driving in traffic. If required,
the driver can choose to change gear manually. The
gear shifter is mounted on the driver's seat.
I-Shift is delivered with different software packages.
As some functions are optional, not everything in this
document may be applicable to your gearbox.
Program packages
The gearbox has different characteristics and functions
depending on the program package that is installed.
When the lever is tilted, (see “Tilting the gear shift
lever”) the program package the gearbox is equipped
with is shown in the display. For this, gearbox
information must be selected as favourite in the
display. The following program packages are
available:
• Basic (B is shown in the display) is the standard
program for the gearbox
• Distribution & Construction (DC is shown in the
display) includes functions that make the truck
easier to manoeuvre, e.g.:
- brake program
- several functions that work together with EBS
• Long haul & Economy (FE is shown in the
display) includes functions that contribute to
improved fuel consumption as well as functions
that make the truck easier to manoeuvre. In addition
to the same functions as the Distribution &
Construction package there is also a freewheel
function, I-roll, and Smart cruise.
• Heavy Duty transports (HD is shown in the
display) is intended for heavy duty transportation.
Driveability and comfort are optimised for heavy
weights, but the mode can be deselected for lighter
I-Shift 233
loads to improve fuel consumption and give better
comfort.
Basic is the standard program and the other programs
include extra equipment. What options to choose from
depends on which program package that has been
chosen. See the table below.
Program packages
Function
Basi Distribution &
c
Construction
Long haul &
Economy
Heavy Duty transports
Basic Power Take Off Functions
X
X
X
X
Basic Gear Selection Adjustment
X
X
X
X
Basic Vocational Functions
X
X
X
X
Basic Shift Strategy
X
X
X
X
Performance Shift
X
X
X
X
Gearbox Oil Temperature Monitor
X
X
X
X
Heavy Start Engagement
X
X
X
X
Enhanced Shift Strategy
X
X
X
Launch Control
X
X
X
I-Roll
X
X
Smart Cruise Control
X
X
X
Heavy Duty GCW Control
The table below shows additional optional functions
that are available for each program package
respectively.
Program packages
Possible options
Bas Distribution &
ic
Construction
Long haul &
Economy
Heavy Duty
Enhanced Power Take Off Functions
O
O
O
O
234 I-Shift
Program packages
Possible options
Bas Distribution &
ic
Construction
Long haul &
Economy
Heavy Duty
Enhanced Gear Selection Adjustment,
incl. Kick-down
O
O
O
Enhanced Performance - Bad Roads
O
O
O
Function description
Standard characteristics
Basic Power Take-Off Functions
Facilitates power take-off operation.
Pre-defined split gear positions determine which split
gear is to be engaged when one or two power take-offs
are connected. As the choice of gear is adapted to the
engine speed limitation, software parameters can be
set. Then the selection of gear is adapted to any
limitation of the engine speed due to bodywork
functions.
Basic Gear Selection Adjustment
Provides the possibility to adjust gear selection with
the gear shift lever’s buttons while engine braking in
automatic mode.
Basic Vocational Functions
Makes it possible to choose between driving programs
“Economy” and “Power”.
Basic Shift Strategy
Automatic choice of starting gear.
Performance Shift
Allows adjustment of automatically selected gear
when engine braking.
I-Shift 235
Gearbox Oil Temperature Monitor
Shows the gearbox oil temperature in the information
display.
Heavy Start Engagement
Starting with higher engine speed in power program in
1st, which gives a higher starting torque. The function
increases the engine speed to facilitate heavy starts.
This is useful e.g. when the truck is stuck in soft
surfaces.
Optional characteristics
Enhanced Shift Strategy
Works together with the ECS and EBS to select the
correct gear for smooth movement on surfaces difficult
to manoeuvre or to get the maximum effect from the
auxiliary brakes.
Launch Control
Allows the engine to drive the wheels at idle without
the clutch slipping, which can be useful when e.g.
driving in traffic queues.
I-Roll (only together with VEB/VEB+)
Automatic engagement and disengagement of the
freewheel function, with the aim of reducing fuel
consumption. When the accelerator pedal is released,
the driveline is disconnected so that the vehicle can
roll freely, and the engine is brought down to its idling
speed.
Smart Cruise Control
Only active when the cruise control is activated. Saves
fuel by deactivating the auxiliary brakes in certain
programs. The function improves the cruise control
function by releasing the auxiliary brakes at the end of
downhill slopes.
236 I-Shift
Heavy Duty GCW Control
Matches gear change strategies and clutch operations
with high total weights (>85 tonnes).
Enhanced Power Take Off Functions
Additional functions that support power take-off
driving.
Enhanced Gear Selection Adjustment in Auto
incl. Kick-down
Enables selection of gears in automatic mode even
when the accelerator pedal is depressed. There is also
a Kickdown function for maximising the acceleration
of the truck.
Enhanced Performance – Bad Roads
Enhanced performance program for difficult
conditions on i.e. poor roads in forests, construction
sites or off-road driving.
Gear shifter
The gear shifter is fixed to the seat and the gear shift
lever can be tilted to allow the driver to move freely
around the cab without being hindered by the lever.
Gear shift lever
On the side of the gear shift lever facing the driver's
seat is a +/– button (A) with spring-loaded up and
down positions, and a neutral position in the middle.
On the top is a button (B) that is used for tilting the
gear shift lever to the horizontal position. On the front
of the gear shift lever is also a lock (C) to prevent
unintentional gear engagement. The lock must be
pressed in for the following gear changes:
• from N to R
• from N to any of the forward driving programs
The lock does not need to be pressed when the gear
shift lever is moved from A to M.
J4020428
I-Shift 237
The gear shift lever can always be moved to N without
having to press a button.
Gear shift lever positions
The gear shift lever position can be changed between
five different positions.
R
Reverse. Changing up and down is done using the +/–
button on the gear shift lever.
N
Neutral. No gear engaged.
A
Automatic mode. The gearbox will automatically select
the correct gear with respect to load, incline, speed and
throttle.
M
Manual mode. Changing up and down is done using the
+/– button on the gear shift lever.
F
The gear shift lever is tilted.
Tilting the gear shift lever
The gear shift lever can be tilted to horizontal position
to allow easy movement between the driver's seat and
other parts of the cab.
To tilt the gear shift lever:
• Make sure the gear shift lever is in neutral position
N
• Press in the button on top of the gear shift lever and
tilt the lever forwards, past the reverse position R,
to the horizontal position
To raise the gear shift lever for driving:
• Move the gear shift lever up, past the reverse
position R, until it locks in neutral N
When the gear shift lever is tilted, the driving program
the truck is equipped with is shown in the display, see
“Program packages”.
J4020429
238 I-Shift
Buttons
Changing up/down
The +/– button is used for:
• changing up or down, one or more gear change
steps at a time in manual mode
• adjusting gears in automatic mode
• selecting split gear in neutral position when using a
power take-off
• selecting reverse gear
• selection of starting gear in automatic mode
J4020430
Economy/Power (E/P)
There is an economy/power button (E/P) on top of the
gear shifter. This is used to:
• switch between the economy program and the
power program. (Also in extended power program
if it has been chosen.)
• activate/inactivate the Heavy Duty program by
pressing in the button for at least three seconds.
J4020431
I-Shift 239
Limp home (L)
L is used to activate limp home, see “Actions with
gearbox malfunction”.
J4020432
Display
Select the GAUGES menu from the display to view
information on I-Shift (applies to both a stationary
vehicle and one in motion). Information about the
gearbox is shown in the driver display.
See “Driver Instruction Display” for information about
how to set information about the gearbox as favourite
display.
The gearbox section is divided into smaller sections
showing:
1
Driving programs
2
Selected gear
3
Available gears (down/up)
4
Gear shift lever position
1. Driving programs
The section to the left in the display shows the current
driving program. The following driving programs are
available (depending on which program package has
been chosen):
E = Economy
J3018210
240 I-Shift
E+ = I-Roll possible
P = Power
P+ = enhanced power program for difficult conditions
on poor roads
B = Braking program
L = Limp home function
HD = Heavy Duty
For more information about driving programs, see
section “Driving”.
2. Selected gear
The section to the right in the gearbox section shows
the selected gear.
Gears 1–12
N = Neutral (N1 = low split, N2 = high split)
R = Reverse no. 1–4
3. Available gears
The section second from the left in the gearbox section
shows with arrows the number of lower gears
available (maximum 3 arrows). The section second
from the right in the gearbox section shows how many
higher gears are available in the same way (maximum
3 arrows).
4. Gear shift lever position
The section in the middle shows the gear shift lever
position.
R = Reverse
N = Neutral
A = Automatic
M = Manual
F = Fold, i.e. tilted gear shift lever
I-Shift 241
Automatic gear change
The simplest way to drive the truck is to use the
automatic program (position A). Gear changing is
done automatically so that the driver can concentrate
on the actual driving.
When changing gear, the system will control the
clutch, gearbox and throttle. The system selects the
gear and the point in time for gear change for optimum
driving performance based on accelerator pedal
position, truck weight, road inclination, vehicle
acceleration, etc.
Automatic driving is recommended as often as
possible to use the gearbox's potential to its maximum.
It is also possible to manually adjust the gears up or
down in automatic mode. The arrows in the display
show how many steps it is possible to change up or
down.
Automatic choice of starting gear
The gearbox selects the most suitable starting gear
with respect to weight and the road’s inclination.
Adjusting the starting gear
You can also manually select a starting gear by using
the + and – buttons.
Keep the minus button pressed and move the lever to
the A or M position to quickly select starting gear 1.
This can be advantageous e.g. when marshalling, when
one changes between forward and reverse gears.
After a trailer has been disconnected (electrically)
from the tractor, the lowest starting gear is used until
the vehicle has moved a few metres to get smoother
marshalling. When the air suspension is set to manual
mode for height adjustment. e.g. when marshalling,
starting gear 1 is automatically selected for a slower
and smoother start.
J4020433
242 I-Shift
I-Roll
I-Roll (freewheel) can be activated if the stalk for the
auxiliary brake, to the right of the steering wheel, is in
the A position and E+ is shown in the display. When
I-Roll is activated the split gear is put into neutral.
I-Roll is activated in different ways depending on the
cruise control being active or not. When the I-Roll is
activated, N is shown as the gear in the info display
and the engine goes to idle.
If the cruise control is active:
• I-Roll is engaged on downhill slopes when the
speed exceeds the set driving speed (for example 80
km/h). The set permitted excess speed must be 5
km/h or more. (See the “Driver's Manual”, section
on auxiliary brakes for more information as to how
the auxiliary brake functions and how the excess
speed can be set.)
• I-Roll is disengaged when the speed exceeds the
selected overspeed or below, or just below, the set
driving speed (for example 80 km/h).
• The I-Roll function also includes the
Smart Cruise Control that inactivates the auxiliary
brakes at the end of downhill slopes to further save
fuel.
If the cruise control is not active:
• I-Roll is engaged when the accelerator pedal is
released and the road is flat or slopes gradually upor downhill.
• The I-Roll is disengaged when the brake pedal is
depressed, the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
stalk for the auxiliary brake is set in position 0, 1, 2,
3 or B or if the gear shift lever is set to position M.
Inactivate I-Roll by pressing the minus button on the
gear shift lever or by moving the auxiliary brake stalk
to the 0 position.
I-Shift 243
Locking gear
Example when automatic up or down-changing is not
desired can be:
• When the truck approaches a crest of a hill and one
wants to prevent an unnecessary down-change.
• On an uphill slope with a flat section.
• When driving on poor surfaces.
When automatic up or down-changing is not desired,
move the lever from position A to M. Additional
changing will not occur now and the engaged gear is
retained. To go back to the automated program and
thereby automatic gear changing again, move the gear
shift lever back to A.
The function can be used in all forward gears (1 to 12).
J4020434
Note!
There is risk of over-revving when
the gear is locked.
Note!
If the vehicle is stopped with a not
permitted starting gear engaged in
the M mode, the starting gear is
automatically selected.
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear strains
the clutch a lot and can increase
the risk for clutch breakdown.
244 I-Shift
Driving programs
There are four different driving programs:
• economy
• power or enhanced power for difficult conditions
on poor roads
• braking program
• HD (Heavy Duty)
Economy
When the engine is started, the economy program is
always selected (shown as an E in the display). The
economy program is optimised for best fuel
consumption and is used when driving in normal
conditions.
Power
The power program is engaged/disengaged using the
E/P button (see illustration). When the program is
engaged P/P+ is shown in the display. The power
program prioritises driveability at the sacrifice of
optimal fuel consumption and is used when driving in
hilly terrain and off-road. The power program
generally uses higher engine speeds than economy,
and a lower starting gear is selected.
To save fuel, the gearbox will automatically switch off
the power program when it is no longer required and
returns to the economy program.
Trucks equipped with the enhanced power program P+
has additional functions suited for driving in hilly
terrain and off-road. The program remains active until
the economy program is selected. (The function is
optional.)
Braking program
A special braking program can be engaged (a B is
shown in the display) using the stalk for the auxiliary
brakes. See the “Driver's Manual”, section on auxiliary
brakes. (The function is optional.)
J4020431
I-Shift 245
HD (Heavy Duty)
The HD program should be used when driving with
heavy loads. The HD program is activated/inactivated
by holding the E/P button depressed for at least three
seconds. When the program is engaged “HD” is shown
in the display. The selection remains even if the
ignition is switched off.
When the HD driving program is activated, starting
gear 1 is selected automatically.
(The function is optional.)
Kickdown
Kick-down is obtained by depressing the accelerator
completely (position B). Kick-down optimises the
choice of gear/throttle for maximum acceleration
which most often leads to a down shift. Kick-down
functions in both the economy and power programs,
but not in the manual mode M or in driving program P
+. Kick-down optimises the vehicle's power at the
expense of optimum fuel consumption. For the lowest
fuel consumption, only use the kick-down when
necessary. The accelerator pedal always has a
kick-down position, but access to the function is an
option.
Position A = full throttle
Position B = kick-down
(Kick-down is an option.)
J2012347
246 I-Shift
Manual gear changing
You can drive the truck entirely with manual gear
changing or take over from the automatic gear
changing system whenever required. Gear changing is
done by first moving the lever to the manual position
M. The +/– button on the side of the lever is then used
to select the gear.
For a new gear, the +/– button must be pressed once
for each gear step upwards or downwards, to the
desired gear.
Press several times on the +/– button in sequence to
shift through several gears at once.
Gear changing takes place as soon as the +/– button is
released.
J4020435
Note!
Do not release the accelerator pedal
while changing gear.
Note!
If the vehicle is stopped with a not
permitted starting gear engaged in
the M mode, the starting gear is
automatically selected.
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear strains
the clutch a lot and can increase
the risk for clutch breakdown.
I-Shift 247
Reverse gears
The gearbox has four reverse gears (R1 to R4). The
system will select R1 automatically when the gear
shift lever is moved to R when the truck is stationary.
When driving, it is possible to shift between gears R1
and R2 and between R3 and R4. To change gear
between R2 and R3 the truck must be stationary.
Manual gear shifting is done using the +/– button on
the gear shift lever.
J4020436
Note!
The gear shift lever lock must be
pressed in before the gear shift lever
can be moved from N to R.
Caution!
Starting in too high a gear strains
the clutch a lot and can increase
the risk for clutch breakdown.
248 I-Shift
Actions with gearbox malfunction
If the gearbox has a fault which means you cannot
drive the truck, activate the Limp home function to be
able to drive the shortest way home or to a workshop.
Activate Limp home as follows:
1
Move the gear shift lever to N
2
Keep L pressed in on the gear shifter cover and at
the same time move the gear shift lever to A
Limp home is activated
3
Move the gear shift lever to M
4
Select gear using the +/– button on the gear shift
lever
When Limp home is selected, it is not possible to drive
if the gear shift lever is in position A. Only gears 1, 3
and 5 forwards and 1 reverse can be used. Gear
shifting is only possible when the truck is stationary.
The L button does not need to be pressed in again
when you change between the M and R modes.
The Limp home function is disengaged when the
ignition is turned off.
Fuel economy driving
I-Shift is optimised for the best fuel consumption in
relation to the truck's situation. For the best fuel
savings, choose to drive in A mode as much as
possible. Only choose the M mode when the driving
conditions require manual intervention.
I-Roll
During normal driving, the gear shift lever should be
in the A position and the auxiliary brake in the A
position in order for I-Roll to be accessible. Use I-Roll
as much as possible, e.g. on slight downhill slopes.
Set the cruise control's speed slightly lower and
instead increase the overspeed. This gives more
J4020432
Note!
The Limp home function should
only be used for short distances.
I-Shift 249
opportunities when I-Roll can be activated and thereby
save fuel.
Prevents down-changing
In certain cases it can be better to remain in a higher
gear even if the engine speed is low. For example, just
before the top of a hill when you want to drive over
the crest without changing down, which saves fuel.
When driving, keep the plus button pressed in until the
truck starts to accelerate again, to prevent downchanging.
Prevents up-changing
To prevent an up-change when e.g. driving on an
uphill slope, the minus button can be held in until the
truck starts to retard.
The function can also be used just before an uphill
slope to get a higher speed into the uphill slope.
Down-changing functions normally in these cases.
Greatest possible down-change
To obtain the greatest possible down-change e.g. just
before a steep hill:
• Hold the minus button pressed in
AND
• Move the gear shift lever from the A to the M
position
• Release the minus button
This gives a great down-change step when the minus
button is released, for the purpose of immediately
getting a high engine speed in the vehicle. Keep the
lever in the M position as long as you wish to prevent
a new gear change.
Save brakes
Preferably use the engine brake to brake towards a
stop to save the service brakes. When braking hard,
brake program B can be used. Down-changing will
250 I-Shift
then occur which contributes to an increased braking
effect from the engine brake.
Queue driving
The Launch control function makes it possible to drive
the truck at idle, which can be suitable when driving in
traffic queues. If you have chosen
“Enhanced Gear Selection adjustment, incl Kick-down
” then it is also possible to change up and down to
adjust the speed to the traffic. The gearbox will then
increase the engine speed a little to be able to change
gear.
Activating while standing still:
1
Choose position A or M
2
Release the brake
3
Depress the accelerator pedal
4
Release the accelerator pedal once the vehicle
starts to move forward.
Note!
The truck does not need to be
stationary for the function to be
activated.
Note!
At low speeds and gears, queue
driving is activated automatically.
Depress the brake pedal to
inactivate.
When the brake pedal is depressed or it becomes so
heavy that the engine risks stopping, the clutch is
disengaged to prevent the engine from stopping. To
return to queue driving, press on the accelerator pedal.
Hill start
If the truck is equipped with Hill Start Aid, this should
be used to prevent the truck from rolling backwards
when starting on hills. (See “Driver instruction EBS”)
If there is no Hill Start Aid installed:
• Hold the vehicle stationary using the parking brake.
• Move the gear shift lever to the A or M position
and select a suitable starting gear.
• Depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
releasing the parking brake.
Caution!
Never hold the vehicle stationary
on an uphill slope by using the
accelerator pedal. The clutch
could overheat, which could
cause it to fail.
I-Shift 251
Driving on poor roads and in difficult conditions
In hilly or difficult driving conditions e.g. forest,
construction site or off-road driving, it can be
advantageous to use driving program P+ (option),
which gives fewer gear changes. Gear selection is
optimised for higher engine speeds to achieve good
response and acceleration at the expense of optimum
fuel consumption. This also gives greater tolerance for
changes in road inclinations.
To prevent unplanned gear changing, select manual
mode.
To prevent up-changing when e.g. driving uphill, the
minus button can be held pressed in. The function can
also be used just before an uphill slope to get a higher
speed into the uphill slope.
To achieve the greatest down-change possible, e.g. just
before a steep uphill slope, hold down the minus
button, move the gear shift lever from position A to M
and then release the minus button.
In normal driving conditions, return to the E driving
program by pressing the E/P button for optimum fuel
consumption.
Disengaging
If rapid disengaging is required, e.g. in slippery
conditions, move the gear shift lever to N, neutral.
Starting when stuck
1. Rocking free
On slippery surfaces, e.g. snow or sand, the truck can
be rocked free by carefully pressing down and
releasing the accelerator pedal. You then gradually
extend the wheel tracks you have got stuck in.
1
Make sure the differential locks (see “Driver's
Manual”) are fully engaged
252 I-Shift
2
Inactivate TCS (see “Driver's Manual”)
3
Choose driving program P/P+
4
Move the gear shift lever to the M position, gear
1, or the 1st reverse gear
5
Carefully press and release the accelerator pedal
with a smooth pumping action
2. Heavy starts
When stuck with a heavy load on a hill or soft surface:
1
Choose driving program P/P+ or HD
2
Select starting gear 1
3
Completely depress the accelerator pedal
4
Keep the accelerator pedal depressed even if the
warning for overloaded clutch appears
Extra torque from the engine is provided to help drive
away.
The function should be used already at the first attempt
to start, if it is an extra heavy start, as most torque is
obtained with a cold clutch.
3. Jerk starting
(Only for driving program P+)
If the truck has got stuck, it can be jerked loose by
using extra engine torque obtained during a short time.
The engine is set to a somewhat higher engine speed
and then the engine speed is reduced by using the
clutch, which helps to give extra torque during a short
time. The function can be used if the truck has e.g. got
stuck in deep clay.
1
Choose driving program P+
2
Move the gear shift lever to the A or M position,
gear 1, or to R
3
Keep the minus button pressed in
4
Completely depress the accelerator pedal (the
engine speed will rise to 1300 rpm)
5
Release the minus button, the clutch is engaged
Warning!
Starting in too high a gear strains
the clutch a lot and can increase
the risk for clutch breakdown.
I-Shift 253
Full VEB/VEB+ in manual mode
To increase comfort when driving in automatic mode,
the engine brake performance is somewhat limited in
low gears. When maximum engine braking is required
e.g. in construction site driving, move the gear shift
lever to the M position and change gear manually.
Extra down-changing for maximum engine brake in low
gears
For maximum comfort in low gears, the braking
program B does not permit more than one downchange at a time when the gearbox has one of these
gears engaged. To get maximum braking power e.g. at
construction site driving, move the auxiliary brake
stalk to the B position repeatedly, which results in a
down-change each time. Thereby a higher engine
speed and maximum engine brake is obtained.
Changing driving direction
(Applies only to trucks equipped with EBS)
Note!
The driving direction, forwards (A or M) or backwards
(R), can be changed while driving using the gear
shifter without the brake pedal being used. The truck
does not need to be standing still. The truck brakes
slowly down automatically and when stationary the
gear is changed for the new driving direction.
The function must only be used
when marshalling.
Driving with the gearbox-mounted power take-off engaged
If the power take-off is engaged when the gear shift
lever is in the N position, it is possible to move the
truck by moving the gear shift lever to the A or M
position. The power take-off will then stop temporarily
when driving.
It is possible to engage the power take-off while
driving at low speeds e.g. for gritting. To spare the
gearbox, no gear changing should be done.
254 I-Shift
Rocking to empty the platform
This method can be used to loosen loads that have got
stuck on the truck's platform.
1
Move the gear shift lever to the M position
2
Select gear 1
3
Choose driving program P
4
Accelerate and brake hard
5
Repeat in the opposite direction, if required
Driving on rollers
Sometimes the truck's drive shaft is used to drive e.g.
wheel washing equipment before driving on public
roads. Normally an up-change cannot take place while
the front wheels are still. To be able to change up in
these situations, do as follows:
1
Depress the accelerator pedal until the rear
wheels start to rotate
2
After 10 seconds, it is possible to change up to
the high range
E^ is shown in the display.
When driving on rollers it can be a problem to have
time to change gear without the rear wheels loosing
speed. Therefore, you can start even in a gear higher
than 6.
Loading and unloading 255
General
The air suspension system must be active during all
loading and unloading. The system is active if the
ignition is turned on, the pressure in the air tanks is
greater than 8 bar, when the parking brake is released,
when the air suspension control box is used or if
“Using air suspension with ignition turned off”.
On trucks in ADRit is sometimes necessary for the
main power to be switched off during loading and
unloading. Certain steps have to be taken, to avoid
damage to the chassis. Refer to “Loading and
unloading with main power disconnected”.
Ride height control
Change height with the control box
The height of the truck above ground can be controlled
manually with the aid of the remote control box. This
has a 3 meter long cable and magnets on the back so
that it can be used and secured outside the cab.
The engine does not need to be running in order to use
the control box, refer to “Using air suspension with
ignition turned off”, but the air pressure in the system
must be sufficient.
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
Warning!
Turn off the electronic air
suspension system when using
support legs, a plough without
floating position, or other
equipment that effects the truck's
height above the road. On trucks
with equipment which affects ride
height, there is a special switch to
shut off the air suspension
system. When body-building a
truck at a later date, the function
for turning off the air suspension
system can be implemented by a
Volvo workshop.
256 Loading and unloading
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
2 Use the axle switch to select the axle to be adjusted:
• M1 for the front axle.
• M2, for both front and rear axle.
• M3 for rear axle.
J7009818
3 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J7009819
Loading and unloading 257
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height. The previously set ride height is lost.
J7009822
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
2 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J7009831
258 Loading and unloading
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height. The previously set ride height is lost.
J7009834
Loading and unloading height memory
Storing a height in the memory
Three loading and unloading heights can be stored in
the memory.
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
Loading and unloading 259
2 Use the axle switch to select the axle to be adjusted:
• M1 for the front axle.
• M2, for both front and rear axle.
• M3 for rear axle.
J7009818
3 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J7009819
4 Use the axle switch to choose the memory that the
height will be stored in:
• M1, for memory 1.
• M2, for memory 2.
• M3, for memory 3.
J7009825
260 Loading and unloading
5 Keep the memory button depressed for at least five
seconds. The height is now stored in the selected
memory.
J7009820
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height.
J7009822
One loading and unloading height can be stored in the
memory.
Loading and unloading 261
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
2 Set the height you want with the height buttons.
J7009831
3 Keep the memory button depressed for at least five
seconds. The height is now stored in the selected
memory.
J7009832
262 Loading and unloading
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height.
J7009834
Retrieving a height from the memory
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
Loading and unloading 263
2 Use the axle switch to select the memory where the
height is stored:
• M1, for memory 1.
• M2, for memory 2.
• M3, for memory 3.
J7009825
3 Keep the memory button depressed for two seconds.
4 Release the button.
The truck assumes the stored height.
J7009820
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height.
J7009822
264 Loading and unloading
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
2 Keep the memory button depressed for two seconds.
3 Release the button.
The truck assumes the stored height.
J7009832
Loading and unloading 265
To return the truck to driving height, select drive
height.
J7009834
Quick unloading
For quick unloading, for example, when a container is
lifted off, the vehicle must first be lowered to its
lowest level with no air remaining in the bellows. The
suspension could otherwise be damaged.
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
266 Loading and unloading
2 Select M2, both axles.
J7009824
3 Lower the rear suspension to its lowest position with
the lower control button.
J7009819
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
Loading and unloading 267
2 Lower the rear suspension to its lowest position with
the lower control button.
J7009831
Using the air suspension with the ignition turned off
The ignition does not need to be on for the air
suspension system to function. Although the key is in
the stop position, you can regulate the height manually
and allow the vehicle to regulate its height
automatically. It is also possible to take out the key
and lock the doors.
Engaging the function
1 Turn the ignition key to the drive position.
J7008414
268 Loading and unloading
2 Select manual control.
J7009823
J7009835
3 Turn the ignition key to stop or radio position.
The air suspension can be controlled, manually or
automatically, until the air pressure is insufficient.
After four hours, the function is disconnected.
J7008413
Loading and unloading 269
Disengaging the function
Turn the ignition key to the drive position.
J7008414
or
Select ride height.
J7009822
J7009834
270 Loading and unloading
Loading and unloading with the main switch off
When loading and unloading vehicles in ADRtraffic, it
is sometimes necessary for the main-power to be
switched off. To prevent damage to the chassis, the
truck must be raised to its highest level when loading
and lowered to its lowest level when unloading.
Before loading
Raise the truck to it's highest level
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
2 Select M2, both axles.
J7009824
Loading and unloading 271
3 Raise the rear suspension to its highest position with
the upper control button.
J7009819
4 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
J7008413
5 Select ride height.
J7009822
6 Turn off the main switch.
272 Loading and unloading
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
2 Raise the rear suspension to its highest position with
the upper control button.
J7009831
3 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
J7008413
Loading and unloading 273
4 Select ride height.
J7009834
5 Turn off the main switch.
Before unloading
Lower the truck to it's lowest level:
1 Select manual control.
J7009823
274 Loading and unloading
2 Select M2, both axles.
J7009824
3 Lower the rear suspension to its lowest position with
the control button.
J7009819
4 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
J7008413
Loading and unloading 275
5 Select ride height.
J7009822
6 Turn off the main switch.
1 Select manual control.
J7009835
2 Lower the rear suspension to its lowest position with
the control button.
J7009831
276 Loading and unloading
3 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
J7008413
4 Select ride height.
J7009834
5 Turn off the main switch.
Fetch the swap body
1 Check that the load is secure
2 Check that the centre of gravity of the load is in
conformity with the vehicle's capacity
3 Position the vehicle exactly in front of the platform's
main members or guidance tunnel
Loading and unloading 277
4 Position the guiding members correctly on the
vehicle
J0010205
5 Check the length of the platform and if necessary
place the stop members correctly on the vehicle
J0010206
6 Open all four container locks on the vehicle
J9007931
278 Loading and unloading
7 Lower the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007932
8 Lower the truck on the air suspension so that it can
be reversed with 50 mm clearance between the truck
and the swap body
J9007934
9 Carefully reverse the vehicle in under the platform
Note!
10 Stop when the container locks on the vehicle are
under the lock holes in the platform
Shunting with hanging support legs
must be done at low speed and with
maximum care.
11 Raise the vehicle with the air suspension until the
support legs have been lifted sufficiently off the
ground to be manoeuvrable. If shunting with hanging
support legs the support legs must be lifted 100 mm
from the ground
Loading and unloading 279
12 Raise the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007995
13 Lock the container locks by turning them 90°
J9007933
14 Put the support legs in the transport position
280 Loading and unloading
15 Lower the lock pins with the switch in the cab in
order to lock the platform on the vehicle
J9007994
16 Put the air suspension in the driving position
17 The vehicle is ready to be driven away
J7009822
Loading and unloading 281
J7009834
Leave the swap body
1 Check that the place where the platform is to be put
is flat and will take the weight of the platform
2 Position the vehicle in the correct place for setting
down
3 Raise the vehicle with the air suspension
4 Raise the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007997
282 Loading and unloading
5 Position the platform's support legs in the setting
down position
6 Lock the support legs in the setting down position
7 Unlock the container locks
J9007931
8 Lower the truck on the air suspension so that there is
50 mm clearance between the truck and the swap body
J9007934
Loading and unloading 283
9 Lower the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007932
10 Carefully drive straight forward out from under the
platform until the vehicle is completely outside the
platform
11 Put the air suspension in the driving position
12 The vehicle is ready to be driven away
J7009822
284 Loading and unloading
J7009834
Fetch a container
1 Position the guiding members for the swap body in
the holders so that a container can be positioned on the
vehicle
J0010207
Loading and unloading 285
2 Raise the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007995
3 Check that all four container locks are open
J9007931
4 Raise the air suspension to its highest level so that
the chassis will not be damaged when the container is
lifted on
5 The container is lifted on
286 Loading and unloading
6 Lock the container locks
J9007933
7 Lower the lock pins with the switch in the cab
8 The vehicle is ready to be driven away
J9007994
Deliver a container
1 Lower the air suspension to its lowest level so that
the chassis is not damaged when the container is lifted
off
Loading and unloading 287
2 Raise the lock pins with the switch in the cab
J9007997
3 Unlock the container locks
4 The container is lifted off
5 The vehicle is ready to be driven away
J9007931
Load indicator
The load indicator can be found under ”Vehicle data”
on the display. The menu can only be accessed when
the vehicle is stationary.
For general information on how the display functions,
see ”Driver instructions Display”.
Note!
The truck should be in a level
position when gauging.
288 Loading and unloading
The display shows indicated pressure on each axle,
indicated weight of the truck, indicated weight of the
trailer and indicated weight of the load. With bogie
and double drive axles the indicated weight on both
axles is shown.
The values are updated every two seconds.
J3016133
Loading and unloading 289
The load indicator supports four types of equipage.
The symbols in the display mean different things for
different types, see table. When there is no value to be
shown, ”- - -” is shown instead.
Only truck
Truck with multiaxled trailer
Truck with single
axled trailer
Tractor with trailer
Front axle load,
truck
Front axle load,
truck
Front axle load,
truck
Front axle load,
truck
Rear axle load,
truck
Rear axle load,
truck
Rear axle load,
truck
Rear axle load,
truck
Total weight,
truck
Total weight,
truck
Total weight,
truck
Total weight, whole
combination
Load weight, truck
Load weight, truck
Load weight, truck
---
---
Front axle load,
trailer
Front axle load,
trailer
---
---
Rear axle load,
trailer
---
Rear axle load,
trailer
---
Total weight, trailer Total weight, trailer - - -
---
Load weight, trailer Load weight, trailer Load weight
If trailer, superstructure, turntable or suspension are
altered, the load indicator must be recalibrated at a
Volvo workshop, otherwise incorrect weights will be
displayed.
In order to retain the reliability of the system,
displayed values should be checked regularly. If
necessary, a new calibration should be carried out.
If there is not normal working pressure in the air
bellows, e.g. if the vehicle has been stationary for a
while, then the correct value cannot be shown. ”- - -”
290 Loading and unloading
is displayed until the normal working pressure of the
air bellows is restored.
If a sensor is faulty ”- - -” is shown for that axle. No
value will then be shown for total weight and load.
Exhaust cleaning 291
General
Volvo Trucks use SCR technology
(Selective Catalytic Reduction) catalytic exhaust gas
cleaning — to meet the requirements of Euro 4, the
new standard for exhaust gas emissions that came into
force on 1 October 2006. A new EU legal requirement
is introducing 1st October 2007 in order to monitor the
fulfillment of exhaust emissions for Euro 4 and Euro 5
engines. In addition to the existing
OBD-system (On-Board Diagnostic) the law requires
that there must also be a special level and diagnostic
system for the engine's exhaust gas after-treatment
system, which is known as NOx control monitoring
(NOx = nitrous oxides).
J2024483
NOx control monitoring system is to monitor:
• The level of NOx in the exhaust.
• The level of AdBlue in the tank.
• Faults in the emission control monitoring system.
The following effects will occur if faults are detected
in the exhaust gas after-treatment system:
• The monitoring system will inform the driver via
warning lamps and fault messages.
• "Non-erasable fault codes" are set.
• Possible derating of the engine (depending on type
of fault).
Conditions
The NOx control monitoring system is only active
under the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature —7 C to +35 C.
• Altitude above sea level less than 1600 m.
• Coolant temperature above 70 C.
In order for a "non-erasable fault code" to be set
(activated), a number of different basic conditions
Note!
These conditions do not apply if the
AdBlue tank is empty.
292 Exhaust cleaning
must be fulfilled. The conditions vary depending upon
which fault has arisen. There are three different faults
that generate a "non-erasable fault code":
1
Empty AdBlue tank.
2
NOx level exceeding the certified level.
3
The NOx level cannot be monitored.
Non-erasable fault codes
With the new fault codes for NOx once the fault code
has been set (becomes active), the fault code will be
stored for 400 days and will not be erased, even if the
current fault is remedied and the fault code becomes
inactive.
Once a "non-erasable fault code" is generated, an
estimation is made of the amount of time the engine
was running whilst the current fault was active. In this
way, you can obtain information about how long the
engine was running with a fault in the emission
system.
Derating (power reduction)
A new feature for NOx control monitoring process
means that when certain limits occur or a certain fault
arises in the exhaust gas after-treatment system, a
power reduction of 40% will occur. Before derating
occurs, the control and warning lights will light and
the instrument display will inform that derating will
occur. Derating will be activated once the vehicle has
stopped for the first time (with the engine running)
after the occurrence of the fault, for example at the
next red light. As soon as the reason for the power
reduction has ceased, the power reduction will be
deactivated the next time the engine goes to idle.
Power reduction occurs during any of the following
events:
• NOx level exceeding the certified level.
• AdBlue tank empty.
• The system could not monitor the NOx level during
50 hours of engine operation.
Exhaust cleaning 293
Exhaust cleaning
The engines are fitted with an exhaust gas cleaning
system which cleans the exhaust using the urea
solution AdBlue. AdBlue is injected into the exhaust
system at a point between the turbo and the silencer,
which has an inbuilt SCRcatalytic converter. The
catalytic converter is used to reduce emissions of
nitrogen oxides and particulates.
But in order to comply with the legal requirements of
Euro 4, the exhaust gas needs further treatment,
AdBlue is added.
Fuel
For the catalytic converter to work optimally, sulphurfree (max 10 ppm sulphur) fuel should be used, in
accordance with European standard EN590. As a
temporary measure, fuel with up to 350 ppm sulphur
content is permitted.
AdBlue (Urea solution)
The urea solution is sold under the trademark AdBlue.
It is a colourless liquid consisting of a mixture of urea
and distilled water. It may have a slight smell of
ammonia. The urea concentration of AdBlue is 32.5%.
AdBlue fulfills the ISO standard 22241-1 (previously
DIN-70070) and is the only Volvo approved urea
solution for filling in Volvo trucks with Euro 4
engines. AdBlue may also be sold and marketed under
other names depending on the distributor and may be
used as long as the ISO standard 22241-1 is fulfilled.
AdBlue is not hazardous but it should be handled with
care. If AdBlue is accidentally spilled on the truck,
rinse the area with water and dry off with paper or a
rag. The solution can be aggressive when hot and can
therefore damage, for example, nearby electrical
connectors, electrical wiring and hoses if spilled.
AdBlue freezes at approx. –11 °C, but this is not a
problem, as the SCR system is heated. The truck can
be started and driven normally.
Caution!
AdBlue that has been modified or
replaced with another liquid that
does not comply with ISO
22241-1, will lose its intended
cleaning effect and can damage
the SCR system.
Caution!
AdBlue is very corrosive and can
damage electrical connectors. If
AdBlue gets into electrical
connectors or wiring, they must
be replaced. Cleaning electrical
items is not enough.
294 Exhaust cleaning
Driving a truck with a Euro 4 or Euro 5 engine
Trucks with ADR
Bear in mind that the switch ADR is only for use in
emergencies. When the engine is switched off, a
process begins to pump clean the AdBluenozzle and
AdBluesupply lines. The process takes about 90
seconds and during this time the ADRswitch must be
switched on. It is especially important to do this in
cold weather as there is a risk of the solution freezing.
The process is not carried out if the ADRswitch is
used before or during the process.
OBD
The truck is equipped with OBD
(On-Board Diagnostics). MIL-symbol
(MIL = Malfunction Indicator Lamp), located bottom
left on the instrument panel will come on if there is an
emission-related fault. The reason for the lamp being
lit can be investigated during the next stop. If the lamp
lights, the truck should be driven to an authorised
Volvo workshop for checking. There is a delay in the
system that can cause the MILsymbol to not light
directly when the fault occurs but first somewhat later.
According to legal regulations, the lamp must remain
alight for a period after the fault has been corrected.
J3018128
Display message — with falling AdBlue level
To check for the amount of AdBlue in the tank, step to
the ”Fuel Data” menu on the display and select ”
AdBlue”. It is an advantage to have this selected as a
favourite menu, see "Driver instructions, Display".
When there is only a small amount of AdBlue left in
the tank (approx 10%), the information lamp will light
and a message will be displayed to inform the driver
that it is time to top up with AdBlue.
If the AdBlue tank is empty, the following message is
shown on the display together with the information
Note!
It may be a punishable offence not to
use AdBlue or to try to interfere with
the exhaust cleaning system.
Engine derate
at next stop
High emissions!
Exhaust cleaning 295
lamp and MIL symbol. Fill the tank immediately with
AdBlue. When the empty tank message is shown, a
certain amount of AdBlue is still circulating in the
system. The injection stops of AdBlue.
The fact that the urea tank becomes empty during
driving does not cause damage to the urea system or
the engine, as the remaining solution in the system
circulates and cools it. However, engine exhaust
emissions increase when the dosing valve is closed
and the exhaust gases are not further processed. If this
is not rectified by filling with AdBlue engine power
reduction will occur and a "non-erasable fault code"
will be set for 400 days.
If the SCRsystem cannot circulate AdBlue the
following message is shown together with the yellow
information lamp (CHECK) and MIL symbol.
The next time the truck is stationary with the engine
running, i.e. at traffic lights, the power will be reduced
by 40% of max power. The following message is
shown on the display together with the yellow warning
lamp (CHECK) and MIL symbol. The truck's engine
output returns to normal as soon as the AdBlue tank is
filled.
Engine derate
High emissions!
Display message - with malfunction of
emission control monitoring system
If a fault occurs in the NOx monitoring system, the
following message is shown on the display together
with the yellow information lamp (CHECK) and MIL
symbol.
If the system senses that the fault remains, the power
will be reduced by 40% of max power. The following
message is shown on the display together with the
yellow information lamp (CHECK) and MILsymbol.
The truck's engine power returns to normal when the
system senses that the fault is rectified.
Engine derate
at next stop
High emissions!
Engine derate
High emissions!
296 Exhaust cleaning
Display message - with malfunction of dosing
system for emission control
If a fault occurs in the NOx dosing system, the
following message is shown on the display together
with the yellow information lamp (CHECK).
Idling
To safeguard the power supply, trucks with Euro 4
engines have a faster idling speed in cold weather. The
engine electronic control system determines when the
increased idling speed needs to be applied; it cannot be
activated manually by the driver. If the truck is
equipped with I-shift it is especially important, when
idling, to engage neutral while the truck is stationary
with the engine running. This is to prevent overloading
the clutch and gearbox.
Exhaust
The catalytic converter gets very hot and cools down
more slowly than a normal silencer. This means that
the gases in the end pipe, e.g when the engine is idling
after driving, hold high temperatures for longer. The
exhaust will have an odour that is different from
engines without emission control. The difference is
most noticeable when the engine is cold. A cloud of
water vapour can be emitted during cold starting and
when pulling away. This is more noticeable than for
engines without exhaust gas cleaning. Vapour clouds
can form with temperatures up to +5°C. Steam can
also form during engine restart after a short break and
when the engine brake is being used, but to a lesser
extent than when starting from cold.
AdBlue system error
Visit workshop
Exhaust cleaning 297
Filling with AdBlue
AdBlue is not classed as being hazardous to the
environment but should still be handled with care.
The AdBlue tank is mounted either on the right-hand
side or left-hand side of the truck. The size of the tank
varies proportionally with the size of the fuel tank.
Filling the AdBlue tank is via local distribution tank
depots or fuel stations with a wide range of products.
For further information on AdBlue availability, visit
http://www.findAdBlue.com. Check the level in the
tank each time the truck is refueled. This is done to
ensure the amount of AdBlue is sufficient for the
planned driving distance. Do not fill the AdBluetank
with fuel; this will damage the SCRsystem.
To prevent other liquids than AdBlue being poured
into the AdBlueby mistake, the tank mouth and tank
hole are designed so that they will not accept any other
filling equipment. To further prevent any mistake in
this area, the tank cap is painted blue and is marked
with AdBlue. There is also a label on the tank warning
against filling with anything but AdBlue.
Take care not to fill the fuel tank with AdBlue when
standard filling equipment is not being used. This will
contaminate the fuel and cause AdBlue to enter the
injection system and combustion chambers, which can
damage the engine.
J2023221
Note!
Filling with anything other than
AdBlue can cause problems with the
SCRsystem and light up the OBD
symbol on the instrument panel.
Caution!
Never put AdBlue into the fuel
tank. This can damage the engine
and the fuel system.
298 Exhaust cleaning
Measures after spillage
With contact with the skin – rinse with plenty of water
and remove contaminated clothing.
With contact with the eyes, rinse thoroughly with
water for several minutes Call for medical help if
necessary.
If inhaled – breathe fresh air and call for medical help
if necessary.
Do not allow AdBlue to come into contact with other
chemicals.
AdBlue is not flammable. If AdBlue is exposed to
high temperatures, it will be reduced to ammonia and
carbon dioxide.
If AdBlue is spilled on the truck, wipe off the excess
and rinse with water. AdBlue is corrosive with metals
such as copper and aluminium. It can also cause
damage to alloys such as brass.
Spilled solution can form white crystals of
concentrated AdBlue on the truck. Rinse the crystals
away with water.
If spilt on a connector, the connector must be replaced,
AdBlue is highly corrosive and will therefore damage
the connector.
J9008510
Note!
Urea spill must not be allowed to
enter the normal drainage system.
Caution!
Urea spilt on hot components can
quickly generate vapour. Turn
your face away!
Exhaust cleaning 299
Cleaning the AdBlue tank
It can be necessary to clean out the AdBluetank if it is
advertently filled with diesel or some liquid other than
AdBlue. Rinse out with water, and if this is not
sufficient, use a domestic cleaning liquid. Rinse out
thoroughly with water to ensure that there is no
cleaning liquid residue left as this can damage the
catalytic converter.
1
Place a collection vessel under the AdBluetank
bottom plug
2
Loosen and unscrew the plug a few turns until the
contents start to run from the tank drain hole.
3
Allow it to drain until the tank is empty
4
Flush the tank out with clean water. Make sure
the tank is properly drained before continuing
5
Replace the plug
6
Empty the container in a place where it will not
constitute a risk to the environment
J2022819
Note!
After emptying the tank, it must be
filled with a minimum of 5 litres of
new AdBlue.
Diesel particulate filter
This vehicle is equipped with a ceramic particulate
filter that requires the use of low-sulphur fuel (less
than 50 ppm = 0.005 % sulphur) The lower the sulphur
content of the fuel, the better the function and life of
the system. I.e. if a fuel with 10 ppm sulphur is
available, it is recommended to use such a fuel in the
first hand. Use of fuel with a higher sulphur content or
mixing in other fuel can destroy the particulate filter in
a short time.
The particulate filter collects soot and ash particles. A
large quantity of particles will cause a higher exhaust
back-pressure, which leads to higher fuel consumption
and unnecessary wear on the engine. To avoid this,
there is a system that removes the soot particles
automatically by combustion. The combustion process
Note!
The fact that the vehicle is fitted
with a particulate filter does not
mean that it can be used in a
different way than a vehicle without
a particulate filter. Breathing the
exhaust gases is still unhealthy, in
other words good ventilation is still
necessary when the vehicle is idling.
A point-extraction exhaust hose shall
be connected to the tail pipe if the
engine must be run indoors.
300 Exhaust cleaning
is called active regeneration and consists of heating the
filter so that the particles are burnt.
The particulate filter also removes inorganic
contaminants (ash) which comes from engine oil
additives. Ash cannot be burnt, so regular service of
the particulate filter is necessary. To obtain the
maximum service interval and best function, it is
recommended that engine oils with low ash content,
VDS-4 or VDS–3 LSA are used. The above named
system informs the driver
when a predetermined level of ash particles have
accumulated in the particulate filter.
The particulate filter greatly reduces the emission of
soot particulates (PM), hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon
monoxide (CO). A proportion of the nitrogen oxides
(NOx) in the exhaust gases from the engine are
converted in the catalytic converter to nitrogen dioxide
(NO2), which helps to burn the soot particulates which
are caught by the filter. The total content of NOx from
the engine is not altered, but the proportion of NO2 is
increased. The NO2 can, in moderate concentrations,
irritate the respiratory passages and aggravate asthma.
However, the particulate filter does contribute to a
considerably improved environment on account of its
capacity to considerably reduce the quantity of soot
particulates, hydrocarbons and carbon monoxide.
High content of soot particles in the
particulate filter
Automatic regeneration of the particulate filter
There are two types of regeneration: automatic and
manual. Automatic regeneration (see below) is
performed while driving, manual regeneration when
the vehicle is stationary.
When regeneration of the filter is necessary, a symbol
is shown to the right and the message "Request
regeneration" in the display. See also section "ATS" in
the Driver's handbook.
J3018100
Exhaust cleaning 301
Regeneration takes about 15–20 minutes and the
exhaust silencer is very hot during this time. During
certain driving situations, e.g. if the speed is low and
the exhaust temperature is high, the temperature of the
silencer can be extremely high. In such cases the
symbol "High temperature, exhaust system" is shown
in the display. Avoid driving or stopping the truck at
an unsuitable place, i.e. in a tunnel, across a field, or
close to inflammable material or gases.
Caution!
Avoid driving or stopping the
truck at an unsuitable place when
the symbol "High temperature,
exhaust system" is shown in the
display.
If your driving style is such that an accumulation of
soot particles occurs, the blue information lamp
“INFO” will light and the symbol for soot/ash in the
filter will be displayed. As long as these icons are not
shown, there is no reason to change your
driving style.
J3014366
J3018100
Manual regeneration of the particulate filter
During certain driving situations, regeneration is not
initiated automatically. It can be due to situations such
as continuous driving (several hours) at low engine
load or continuous idling. In these cases it may be
necessary to start regeneration manually.
When the regeneration process must be started
manually, this is shown on the display as below.
Indication in the display
Symbol
Caution!
Make sure that the truck is in a
suitable place when regeneration
starts.
Cause
Action
Message
Regeneration
needed
The particulate filter
almost full
•
Drive on a motorway to allow
regeneration, or
•
Start manual regeneration the next
time the truck stops at a suitable
place
302 Exhaust cleaning
Indication in the display
Symbol
Cause
Action
Message
Regeneration
required
Particulate filter full
Flashes
•
Hold motorway speed so that
regeneration starts automatically, or
•
Start manual regeneration the next
time the truck stops at a suitable
place
ATS requires
service
Particulate filter
Stop the truck immediately in a
overfilled. Engine derated. suitable place and start regeneration
manually.
ATS requires
service
There is a serious fault in Stop the truck immediately and contact
the engine. The particulate your nearest Volvo workshop.
filter may be working
above its maximum
capacity. Engine derated.
Flashes
Flashes
Ash level high in particulate filter
If your driving style is such that an accumulation of
ash particles occurs, the information lamp "INFO" will
light and the symbol for soot/ash in the filter will be
displayed together with the message "Ash level high".
When the information lamp and symbol light: Contact
a Volvo workshop for service of the particulate filter
within 1-2 weeks.
J3014366
J3018100
Cab 303
Air suspension equipment
J7009816
304 Cab
J7009829
1
Bogie lift lamp
2
Driver display
3
Information and warning lamps
4
Diff lock switch and bogie switch
5
Remote control box
Remote control box
More information about how the air suspension and
control box can be used will be found in chapters
"Driving" and "Loading and unloading".
Road speed must be lower than 30 km/h when the
control box is used.
Cab 305
Control buttons
To specify air suspension function:
1
STOP, cancels regulation.
2
Drive position, for normal driving.
3
Manual control.
Changing ride height.
J7009817
J7009830
306 Cab
Axle button
To specify which axle is to be adjusted or which
memory is to be used:
• M1, front axle or memory 1.
• M2, front and rear axle or memory 2.
• M3, rear axle or memory 3.
J7009818
Control buttons
To raise or lower the truck.
To avoid having to hold in the control button, for
example when raising or lowering the truck to it's
highest or lowest height, activate the hold function.
Press one of the control buttons and at the same time
press the memory button. To cancel the hold function,
press the memory button again, one of the control
buttons, or STOP.
J7009819
Cab 307
J7009831
Memory button
To store or retrieve the memory content.
J7009820
J7009832
308 Cab
Lamps and symbols
Bogie lamp
The tag axle raise lamp is lit when:
• The bogie axle is lifted
• Load distribution between the drive axle and bogie
axle is changed
The bogie lift lamp lights when the load distribution
between the drive axle and bogie axle is changed.
J3014468
Bogie lift lamp
The bogie lift lamp flashes when:
• The drive axle load has increased by 30% on
vehicles which have a bogie button with a spring
loaded lower position.
Symbols for air suspension
Symbol
Meaning
Action
The control button is set
Select ride height
to manual control or
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
adjustment of ride height. displayed.
Axle load distribution 70%
If the control button is in
the centre position the air
suspension is in locked
position.
Check whether the air suspension is locked:
Turn the ignition key to the stop position (0)
and then back to the drive position (I).
If the symbol remains on the display the air
suspension is locked. See section "Air
suspension in locked position", page 628.
With "optimise traction",
the axle load distribution
is shown in the display.
None. The message disappears when optimal
load distribution has been achieved.
Truck not in drive
position.
Check that the control button is in the drive
position and wait until the truck reaches the
correct drive height.
Note! Drive very carefully when the symbol is
displayed.
A signal will sound if the speed is too high. If
a bellows is punctured, drive, at not more than
30 km/h, to a Volvo workshop, or contact
Volvo Action Service.
Cab 309
Symbol
Meaning
Action
CHECK THE AIR SUSPENSION There is an air suspension Check whether the fault is active at the next
AT THE NEXT STOP
malfunction.
stop: Turn the ignition key to the stop position
(0) and then back to the drive position (I). If
the message remains in the display, the fault is
active. See section "Air suspension in locked
position".
Seats
Driver's seat
Overview
1
Using memories
2
Move or decline seat cushion lengthwise
3
Move whole seat up or down and lengthwise
4
Heating and Ventilation
Use position one for maintaining the correct
climate comfort and position 2 for quickly
reaching the correct climate comfort.
5
Upper part: reclines the upper part of the backrest
Lower part: reclines the whole of the backrest
6
Adjust the lumbar support and side support
Damping:
The hardest setting corresponds to a fixed seat.
Store a position in the memory
1
Adjust the seat
2
Choose memory 1, 2 or 3 by turning button 1 to
position 1, 2 or 3.
3
Depress button 1 until it sounds
The position is stored.
Retrieving a position from the memory
1
Choose memory 1, 2 or 3 by turning button 1 to
position 1, 2 or 3.
J0010242
310 Cab
2
Depress button 1 once
The seat will revert to the stored position.
Overview
1
Move the seat cushion lengthwise
2
Move the whole seat lengthwise
3
Damping
The hardest setting corresponds to a fixed seat.
4
Seat tilt
5
Move the whole seat up or down
On seats without suspension, the control acts as a
lock. To lower the seat, release the lock and
remain seated. To raise the seat, stand up and
release the lock.
6
Heating (extra equipment)
7
Lumbar support
8
Ventilation (extra equipment)
Use position one for maintaining the correct
climate comfort and position 2 for quickly
reaching the correct climate comfort.
9
Reclines the upper part of the backrest
10
Recline the whole of the backrest
J0010243
Overview
1
Not used
2
Move the whole seat lengthwise
3
Damping
The hardest setting corresponds to a fixed seat.
4
Seat tilt
5
Move the whole seat up or down
On seats without suspension, the control acts as a
lock. To lower the seat, release the lock and
remain seated. To raise the seat, stand up and
release the lock.
6
Not used
7
Lumbar support
8
Not used
J0010243
Cab 311
9
Not used
10
Recline the whole of the backrest
Passenger seat
Insert the belt in the seat on both sides of the passenger
(A).
Change the angle of the seat with B.
Move the seat forward
1
Remove the seat belt
2
Fold the seat back
3
Lift the brace (C)
4
Push the seat as far as it will go
5
If required change the angle of the backrest
Slide the seat back as in points 3 - 5.
J0010244
J0009275
312 Cab
Relax seat
The relax seat can be rotated 90°. To rotate the seat,
the backrest must be in the upright position and the
seat moved forward.
Overview
1
Recline the complete backrest
2
Recline the upper part of the backrest
3
Heat(Extra equipment)
4
Recline the seat
5
Move the whole seat lengthwise
6
Move the whole seat lengthwise
7
Rotate the seat
8
Recline the complete backrest
1 2 3
4
5
J155258
Rotating the relax seat
1
Put the backrest in the upright position
2
Slide the seat to the forward position
3
Rotate the seat using lever 7
8
6
7
J155277
Cab 313
Warning!
When the seat is rotated, it may
obscure the driver´s view in the
rear view mirrors. Therefore, do
not drive the truck with the relax
seat rotated.
Adjusting the steering wheel
First adjust the seat.
1
Depress the foot pedal shown by the arrow.
2
Adjust the steering wheel vertically and
horizontally and adjust its angle.
3
Release the pedal, and the steering wheel is
locked in its new position.
J0010228
314 Cab
Doors
Opening and locking doors
Push the lever back to open the door. Push the lever
forward to lock the door.
To unlock the passenger door from the driver's door
1
Push the lever backwards
2
Push the lever forward to the locked position
3
Push the lever backwards
J8008392
Warning!
The doors should be unlocked
while driving! If an accident
occurs, rescue teams must be able
to enter the truck quickly.
Press on button 2 to lock both doors or to unlock the
passenger door only.
J8008391
Cab 315
Electrically heated mirrors
Press once on button 1 to start electrical heating for 30
minutes. The indication lamp in the button flashes.
Heating stays on for 30 minutes.
Hold button 1 in longer than 1 second to start the
electrical heating. The lamp in the button lights. The
heating is on until the engine is switched off.
J8008391
Electrically operated driving mirrors
1
Select which mirror is to be adjusted with the
buttons at 3
L for the left side mirror and R for the right side
mirror.
The lamp in the button lights.
2
Adjust the mirror with lever 3
The lamp in the button goes out after 10 minutes.
Further adjustment requires the mirror to be selected
again.
J8008391
316 Cab
Electric window lifts
Open window (Auto-down)
1
Press and hold the switch in the down position
(2) for 1 second
2
Release the switch
3
The window opens
The window stops when it is completely open or when
the down position (2) on the switch is depressed again
or when the up position (1) on the switch is depressed.
Make small adjustments with short pushes on the
switch.
J0010218
To close the window
Depress the up position (1) on the switch until the
window is completely closed.
Central locking
To unlock with the transmitter
To unlock the driver's door
Press the UNLOCK symbol to unlock.
The indicators will flash
To unlock the passenger door
1
Unlock the driver's door with UNLOCK
The indicators will flash
2
Press the UNLOCK symbol once more
The indicators will flash
J3017438
Cab 317
To lock with the transmitter
Press the LOCK symbol
The indicators light up
J3017345
To unlock with the key
1
Unlock
A door is unlocked
2
Lock
3
Unlock again
Both doors are unlocked
J8008535
318 Cab
Main switch
Switch on the main switch.
Press the UNLOCK symbol to unlock
or
Put the ignition key in the lock
J3017346
Switch off the main switch
1
Press the LOCK symbol to lock the door
2
Press the LOCK symbol twice
The main power is switched off
J3017347
Air conditioning ECC (Electronic Climate Control)
The AC does not function at low outer temperatures or
if the fan is turned off. Several external factors can
affect the system's function, e.g. persons with damp
clothing in the cab, open windows, the sun shining on
the cab temperature sensor or if the sensor is covered.
Cab 319
1
Turn off air conditioning. The lamp in the switch
lights when the air conditioning is turned off.
2
Temperature
3
Fan speed
4
Recirculation
5
Air distribution
6
Cab temperature sensor
6
2
3
1
4
5
J200692
Recirculation
Press recirculation to circulate the air within the cab.
The function is used to shut out poor air. The ECC
controls
the recirculation hatch automatically to improve the
cooling performance
J200696
The lamp in the button lights when
air recirculates in the cab.
Note!
Do not use recirculation with high
humidity, heavy rain, low outside
temperatures or if the parking heater
is running. It is necessary to draw in
new air and have the AC on to
prevent the windscreen from misting
up.
320 Cab
Air distribution
Always leave the panel nozzles (1) open. Irrespective
of how the air distribution is set, a small amount of air
will always come from the panel nozzles to ensure that
the temperature distribution in the cab is correct.
J8010781
1
Panel
2
Floor
3
Defrost
The normal air distribution provides slightly warmer
air to the feet and cooler air to the head. This is to
create a good working environment for the driver.
Cab 321
Setting the desired temperature
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
6
• Set the fan (3) to AUT
• Set air distribution (5) to AUT
• Set desired temperature (2)
In order to rapidly reach the desired temperature with
changes, a temporary, extreme increase or decrease of
temperature is made, at the same time as the fan speed
is increased.
The set temperature cannot be measured using a
normal thermometer. The AC takes into account,
among other things, the outside temperature and
sometimes speed. The temperature on the control is
therefore the experienced temperature and not that
which a normal thermometer would register.
2
3
1
4
5
J200692
As cool as possible
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
• Set the fan to AUT
• Set the air distribution in AUT
• Set the temperature as cold as possible
When the temperature control is at an end position and
the fan is set to AUT, the system will provide the
maximum fan speed.
When it is hot outside, it is normal that water drips
from the truck. This is harmless condensation coming
from the air conditioning.
J200693
322 Cab
As warm as possible
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
• Set the fan to AUT
• Set the air distribution in AUT
• Set the temperature to maximum heat
When the temperature control is at an end position and
the fan is set to AUT, the system will provide the
maximum fan speed.
J200702
Remove mist and ice from windows
• Check that recirculation is turned off
Note!
• Set the fan to AUT
Do not use recirculation with high
humidity or heavy rain. It is
necessary to draw in new air and
have the AC on to prevent the
windscreen from misting up. If the
defroster has been selected, the AC
operates at maximum (except at low
temperatures) to dry the air.
• Set the air distribution to defroster
• Set the temperature to maximum heat or the fan to
max
In AUT/defrost mode with cold outdoor temperatures,
the windscreen can become so warm that snow smoke
melts on it. This can cause the wiper blades to freeze
to the windscreen. Set the air distribution to the floor
only. The floor setting can also be used together with
the defroster to remove mist from the side windows.
Clean the inside of the windscreen with a normal
window cleaning fluid to reduce the risk of misting up.
Clean more frequently if someone smokes in the cab.
With cold outdoor temperatures, mist and ice can
occur on the side windows. To avoid this, close the
inner panel nozzles and aim the side nozzles at the side
windows.
J200699
Cab 323
Air conditioning MCC (Manual Climate Control)
1
Switch on the air conditioning The lamp in the
button lights when the air conditioning is on.
2
Temperature
3
Fan speed
4
Recirculation
5
Air distribution
J8008717
Recirculation
Press recirculation to circulate the air in the cab. Only
a small amount of air is then taken from the outside.
The function is used to shut out poor air.
The lamp in the button lights when air circulates in the
cab.
J200696
Note!
Do not use recirculation with high
humidity, heavy rain, low outside
temperatures or if the parking heater
is running. It is necessary to draw in
new air and have the AC on to
prevent the windscreen from misting
up.
324 Cab
Air distribution
Always leave the panel nozzles (1) open. Irrespective
of how the air distribution is set, a small amount of air
will always come from the panel nozzles to ensure that
the temperature distribution in the cab is correct.
J8010781
1
Panel
2
Floor
3
Defrost
Cab 325
Setting the desired temperature
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
• Turn on the fan (3)
• Set desired air distribution (5)
• Set desired cooling or heating (2)
• If necessary, start the air conditioning (1)
When it is hot outside, it is normal that water drips
from in the truck. This is harmless condensation
coming from the air conditioning.
J8008717
Remove mist and ice from windows
• Check that recirculation is turned off
Note!
• Set the fan to the highest possible speed
Do not use recirculation with high
humidity or heavy rain. It is
necessary to draw in new air and
have the AC on to prevent the
windscreen from misting up.
• Set the air distribution to defroster
• Set the temperature to maximum heat or the fan to
max
In AUT/defrost mode with cold temperatures, the
windscreen can become so warm that snow smoke
melts on it. This can cause the wiper blades to freeze
to the windscreen. Set the air distribution to the floor
only. The floor setting can also be used together with
the defroster to remove mist from the side windows.
Clean the inside of the windscreen with a normal
window cleaning fluid to reduce the risk of misting up.
Clean more frequently if someone smokes in the cab.
With cold outdoor temperatures, mist and ice can
occur on the side windows. To avoid this, close the
inner panel nozzles and aim the side nozzles at the side
windows.
J200694
326 Cab
Climate control system HEAT
1
Temperature
2
Air distribution
3
Recirculation
4
Fan speed
Recirculation
Move the control (3) to the lower position. Only a
small amount of air is then taken from the outside.
J8009986
Air distribution
Always leave the panel nozzles (with arrows) open.
Irrespective of how the air distribution is adjusted, a
small amount of air will come from the panel nozzles
to ensure that the temperature in the cab is correct.
J8008612
Cab 327
Setting the desired temperature
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
• Turn on the fan (4)
• Set desired air distribution (2)
• Set desired cooling or heating (1)
J8011876
Remove mist and ice from windows
• Open all the ventilation nozzles
• Set the fan to the highest possible speed
• Set the air distribution to defroster
• Set the temperature to maximum heat
In AUT/defrost mode with cold temperatures, the
windscreen can become so hot that snow smoke melts
on it. This can cause the wiper blades to freeze to the
windscreen. Set the air distribution to the floor only.
Clean the inside of the windscreen with a normal
window cleaning fluid to reduce the risk of misting up.
Clean more frequently if someone smokes in the cab.
With cold outdoor temperatures, fogging and ice can
occur on the side windows. To avoid this, close the
inner panel nozzles and aim the side nozzles at the side
windows.
J8011877
328 Cab
Cab heater PH-CAB
Start the heater
ADR
On ADRvehicles, the parking heater will not start if
the power take-off is engaged.
1 Check that the combustion air and exhaust openings
are not blocked.
Note!
The heater must be shut off when
fuelling.
Note!
The main switch must not be turned
off before the heater has stopped.
2 Open the panel vents
J8008612
Cab 329
3 Turn off recirculation.
J200695
4 Hold the switch in until the LED in the switch lights.
The heater starts and continues to run for 10 hours or
until it is manually switched off.
J8008457
5 Set the temperature with the thermostat. The
green indicator lamp lights up when the heater is
switched on.
J8008250
Start the heater with timer setting
ADR
ADR trucks do not have a time delay start function.
Setting is carried out via the driver's display. It is only
possible to set a start time when the truck is stationary.
(Refer to “Driver's instructions, Display” for
information about how the display works.)
1 Check that the combustion air and exhaust openings
are not blocked.
2 Open the panel vents
330 Cab
J8008612
3 Turn off recirculation.
J200695
4 Select menu "P-heater timer"
5 Select ”Programming”
6 Set the start date
7 Set the start time
8 Set the length of time the heater should be switched
on (max two hours)
9 Check that the settings are correct.
If they do not correspond, begin again or go
backwards in steps with ESC.
10 When the settings are correct, press "SELECT" to
confirm the settings and to return to the previous
menu.
Cab 331
Delete the settings by entering menu "P-heater timer"
and selecting "Zero".
11 Set the temperature with the thermostat.
The green indicator lamp lights up when the heater is
switched on.
J8008250
Turning off the heater
Hold the switch in until the LED in the switch goes
out.
The heater is also switched off when the engine is
started and when the cooling fluid temperature has
become sufficiently high.
J8008457
Automatic cut-off
The heater is switched off automatically when
Note!
• the flame goes out during operation and does not
relight within 90 seconds
The use of biofuel reduces the life of
the heater and fuel pump, while
increasing the need for servicing by
up to 10 times.
• the heater overheats
• the voltage drops below 20 V or increases above 30
V
If the heater stops while running, or will not start at all,
check the following:
• fuses
• fuel level in the fuel tank
• underpressure in the fuel tank
• that the air circulation is not blocked
332 Cab
Then try to start the heater again. If it stops again, or
will not start at all, contact a Volvo workshop (If the
heater has stopped or will not start at all because of
low fuel level or underpressure in the fuel tank, it may
take up to 6 starting attempts before the heater will
start).
The heater is switched off automatically when
• the flame goes out during operation and does not
relight within 90 seconds
• the heater overheats
• the voltage drops below 20 V or rises above 30 V
• the power take-off is activated
If the heater stops while running, or will not start at all,
check the following:
• the fuse
• fuel level in the fuel tank
• underpressure in the fuel tank
• that the air circulation is not blocked
Then try to start the heater again. If it stops again, or
will not start at all, contact a Volvo workshop. (If the
heater has stopped or will not start at all because of
low fuel level or underpressure in the fuel tank, it may
take up to 6 starting attempts before the heater will
start.)
Heater maintenance
In order for the heater to be reliable, the parking heater
must be run at regular intervals, even in warm
temperatures. A symbol and a message are shown in
the display when it is time to run it. The parking heater
must then be run for at least 20 minutes. Set the heater
to maximum. Open the windows and doors if the
temperature in the cab gets too high.
Cab 333
Cab and engine heater PH-ENGCA
Start the heater
On ADRvehicles, the parking heater will not start if
the power take-off is engaged.
1 Check that the combustion air and exhaust openings
are not blocked, and that there is no visible damage to
the exhaust or combustion air hoses.
Note!
The heater must be shut off when
fuelling.
Note!
The main switch must not be turned
off before the heater has stopped.
2 Open the panel vents
J8008612
334 Cab
ECC
3 Set the air conditioning:
• Recirculation off
• Fan to AUT
• Air distribution to AUT
• Desired temperature
J200696
MCC
3 Set the climate control:
• Recirculation off
• Fan in position 0 or 1
• Air distribution to panel vents and floor
• Temperature at MAX
J8011833
Note!
With cold temperatures, the fan knob
may need to be set to position 2 or 3.
Cab 335
HEAT
3 Set the climate control:
• No recirculation
• Fan in position 0 or 1
• Air distribution to panel vents and floor
• Temperature at MAX
J8011834
Note!
With cold temperatures, the fan knob
may need to be set to position 2 or 3.
4 Hold the switch in until the LED in the switch lights.
The heater starts and continues to run for 10 hours or
until it is manually switched off.
J8008457
MCC & HEAT
5 Set the temperature with the thermostat. The green
indicator lamp lights up when the heater is switched on
and the cab fan is running (warming-up phase).
J8008250
336 Cab
Note!
The heater can be used as a
supplement for cold starts, to raise
the cab temperature faster.
Start the heater with timer setting
ADRtrucks do not have a time delay start function.
Setting is carried out via the driver's display. It is only
possible to set a start time when the truck is stationary.
(Refer to the “Display” section for information about
how the display works.)
1 Check that the combustion air and exhaust openings
are not blocked.
2 Open the panel vents
J8008612
Cab 337
ECC
3 Set the climate control:
• Recirculation off
• Fan to AUT
• Air distribution to AUT
• Desired temperature
J200696
MCC
3 Set the climate control:
• Recirculation off
• Fan in position 0 or 1
• Air distribution to panel vents and floor
• Temperature at MAX
J8011833
Note!
With cold temperatures, the fan knob
may need to be set to position 2 or 3.
338 Cab
HEAT
3 Set the climate control:
• No recirculation
• Fan in position 0 or 1
• Air distribution to panel vents and floor
• Temperature at MAX
J8011834
Note!
With cold temperatures, the fan knob
may need to be set to position 2 or 3.
4 Select menu "P-heater timer"
5 Select "Programming"
6 Set the start date
7 Set the start time
8 Set the length of time the heater should be switched
on (max two hours)
9 Check that the settings are correct.
If they do not correspond, begin again or go
backwards in steps with ESC.
10 When the settings are correct, press "SELECT" to
confirm the settings and to return to the previous
menu.
Delete the settings by entering menu "P-heater timer"
and selecting "Zero".
Cab 339
MCC & HEAT
11 Set the temperature with the thermostat. The green
indicator lamp lights up when the heater is switched on
and the cab fan is running (warming-up phase).
J8008250
Start engine heater only
ECC
Start the heater as normal, but set the temperature
control to blue, the coldest available. The cab will not
be heated, only the engine.
J200697
MCC
Turn the thermostat to its lowest position.
J200698
340 Cab
HEAT
Turn the thermostat to its lowest position.
J200698
Turning off the parking heater
Depress the switch until the LED in the switch goes
out.
The heater is also switched off when the engine is
started and the coolant has become sufficiently warm.
J8008457
If the heater stops
The heater is switched off automatically when
Note!
• the flame goes out during operation and does not
relight within 90 seconds
The use of biofuel reduces the
service life of the heater and fuel
pump, and increases the need for
servicing by up to 10 times.
• the heater overheats
• the voltage drops below 20 V or rises above 30 V
• combustion has not started after two start attempts
• the power take-off is engaged or the engine stops
If the heater stops while running, or will not start at all,
check the following:
• the fuse
• fuel level in the fuel tank
• underpressure in the fuel tank
• that the air circulation is not blocked
Cab 341
Then try to start the heater again. If it stops again, or
will not start at all, contact a Volvo workshop. (If the
heater has stopped or will not start at all because of
low fuel level or underpressure in the fuel tank, it may
take up to 6 starting attempts before the heater will
start.)
Heater maintenance
In order for the heater to be reliable, the parking heater
must be run at regular intervals, even in warm
temperatures. A symbol and a message are shown in
the display when it is time to run it. The parking heater
must then be run for at least 20 minutes. Set the heater
to maximum. Open the windows and doors if the
temperature in the cab gets too high.
Rest heater SS-HEAT
The rest heater is a pump that continues to circulate
hot water from the engine during short rest periods, as
long as the engine is hot.
Start the rest heater
1Open the panel vents
342 Cab
J8008612
2 Hold the switch in until the LED in the switch lights
J8008457
Turning off the rest heater
Depress the switch until the LED in the switch goes
out.
The heater is also turned off when the coolant
temperature is too low to heat the cab.
J8008457
Cab 343
Luggage compartment hatch
Open the hatch
Pull the cable on the inside of the cab. When the first
snap is heard the hatch is still locked. Pull the cable a
little more to open the hatch.
J0010229
Lighting
To switch off the lights when the hatch is open:
Hold the door switch and turn clockwise.
J0008069
344 Cab
Electrically operated sun roof
Open the hatch at the rear:
Depress the lower part of the switch.
To open the entire hatch:
First open the hatch at the rear edge. Then release the
switch and depress it again.
Close the hatch:
J0009277
Depress the upper part of the switch.
Lighting
The cab lighting can be adjusted by the switches
located in the
• Front shelf
• Rear panel
Switch in front shelf
0
OFF
1
Door lighting (if the switch in the rear panel is in the 0
position)
2
Maximum lighting
J211668
Cab 345
Switch in rear panel
0
The front control adjusts the light
1
All lighting OFF (if the switch in the front shelf is not
in position 2)
J211668
The cab lighting can be adjusted by the switches
located in the
• Instrument panel
• Rear panel
Switch in instrument panel
0
OFF
1
Door lighting (if the switch in the rear panel is in the 0
position)
2
ON
J211668
346 Cab
Switch in rear panel
0
The front control adjusts the light
1
All lighting OFF (if the front switch is not in position 2)
J211668
The cab lighting can be adjusted by the switches
located in the
• Front shelf
• Instrument panel
• Rear panel
Switch in front shelf
0
OFF
1
Door lighting (if the switch in the rear panel is in the 0
position)
2
Maximum lighting
J211668
Cab 347
This switch turns on the night lighting in the front
shelf.
0
OFF
1
ON
J211669
Switch in instrument panel
Lights the night lighting in the door and in the storage
compartment in the instrument panel.
0
OFF
1
ON
J211669
Switch in rear panel
0
The front control adjusts the light
1
All lighting OFF (if the front switch is not in position 2)
348 Cab
The lighting in the cab can be adjusted by switches
located in the
• Front shelf
• Instrument panel
• Rear panel
Switch in front shelf
Lights the night lighting in the front shelf
0
OFF
1
ON
J211669
Switch in instrument panel
0
OFF
1
Door lighting (if the switch in the rear panel is in the 0
position)
2
ON
J211668
Cab 349
Lights the night lighting in the door and in the storage
compartment in the instrument panel.
0
Night lighting OFF
1
Night lighting ON
J211669
Switch in rear panel
0
The front control adjusts the light
1
All lighting OFF (if the front switch is not in position 2)
350 Cab
The cab lighting can be controlled by the control
located above the driver's position. The cab lighting
can be adjusted between four positions as required
(1-4), in addition the automatic courtesy light can be
switched off (5).
1
Lighting Off
2
Night lighting (red)
3
Normal lighting
4
Maximum lighting
5
Courtesy lighting On/Off
2
1
3
5
4
The reading lights can be used for a certain time even
when the lighting is switched Off.
Adjusting the lighting
The cab lighting can be dimmed using the + and –
buttons. The most recent dimmer setting is saved in
the memory.
J166564
A specific dimmer level can be set for when the door
is open. The most recent level is then saved in the
memory.
Switch in rear panel
The switch in the rear panel works also to switch off /
switch on the light.
0
The front control adjusts the light
1
All lighting OFF (if the front switch is not in position 2)
J211668
Cab 351
Electrical power outlet
Electrical power outlets (24 V and 12 V) can be found
in both the instrument panel and the rear part of the
cab. These are intended for extra equipment.
Note!
The cigarette lighter socket is not
intended to be used as a power
outlet.
Bunk bed
Press both buttons at the same time.
J8008443
Lift the bed slightly and pull the strap (1) down to
release the pins and raise or lower the whole bed
Make sure the lock pins engage properly in the holes!
Press both buttons (2) at the same time to lower the
bed.
J0010996
352 Cab
Bed netting for upper bunk
Raise the net if someone is sleeping in the bunk while
travelling
Raise the net (3) and fasten with the fixtures (4)
J0010991
Lower bunk
Office package
The bed can be transformed into two seats and a table.
1
Raise the middle of the mattress as a backrest
2
Fold up the table
3
Hook the table to the hooks in the wall
The table has marks for mounting the fixing eyes. The
fixing eyes can be used together with elastic straps to
hold e.g. a laptop computer while travelling.
J0010992
Cab 353
Bed netting for lower bunk
Raise the net if someone is sleeping in the bunk while
travelling.
J0010990
Smoke detector
Temporarily switch off the smoke detector
Push the switch once.
The smoke detector is switched off for ten minutes.
Use this function when smoking or when driving in a
dusty environment. The smoke detector can be
switched off both when it is silent and when it is
sounding an alarm. When the smoke detector is
switched off the lamp lights up every ten seconds.
After ten minutes the smoke detector becomes active
again.
J0008961
354 Cab
Battery for the smoke detector
When the battery is about to run out a short signal will
sound every 45 seconds. Change the battery.
Test the detector at least once every month (battery
control) and always after holidays or other long
periods of absence.
Note!
When the battery is being checked
the detector is switched off for ten
minutes.
Check the battery by holding the switch in for 5 - 10
seconds. If the battery is good an alarm will sound for
as long as the switch is depressed. When the battery is
being checked the detector is switched off for ten
minutes.
The detector should be handed in for inspection every
5 years, please contact your Volvo dealer.
Tilt the cab
J0008635
Cab 355
Warning!
Completely tilt the cab! It is not
permissible to work underneath a
cab which is not fully tilted. If the
cab cannot be completely tilted, a
suitable metal device must be
inserted to ensure that the cab
cannot fall back again. Never go
beneath or in front of a tilted cab.
Mechanical tilting
Tilting
1
Check that
•
there is sufficient space in front of the cab.
•
the hand-operated parking brake is on.
•
the gear lever is in neutral position.
•
the doors are either completely open or
properly shut.
•
the cap on the clutch fluid reservoir is
properly closed.
2
Fit the socket spanner (3) into the valve of the
hydraulic pump (1).
3
Turn clockwise to the stop position. The valve is
closed.
4
Get the pump rod.
5
Assemble the lever with the socket spanner (3).
6
Place the socket spanner in the pump (2).
7
Pump until the cab has reached maximum tilt.
J8008488
J0008203
356 Cab
J0008202
Tilting back
1
Fit the socket spanner (3) into the valve of the
hydraulic pump (1).
2
Turn anticlockwise to the stop position. The
valve is open.
3
Get the pump rod.
4
Assemble the lever with the socket spanner (3).
5
Place the socket spanner in the pump (2).
6
Pump until the cab is locked in the driving
position.
7
Check that the lamp showing unlocked cab does
not light up when the engine is running.
8
Put the tools away.
J0008208
Open valve (drive position)
J3014610
Control lamp for tilted cab.
Electric tilting
Tilting
1
Check that:
•
there is sufficient space in front of the cab.
•
the hand-operated parking brake is on.
•
the gear lever is in neutral position.
•
the doors are either completely open or
properly shut.
•
the cap on the clutch fluid reservoir
2
Fit the socket spanner (3) into the valve of the
hydraulic pump (1).
3
Turn clockwise to the stop position. The valve is
closed.
4
Turn the ignition to the radio position.
J8008489
Cab 357
5
Press in the lower part of the switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
6
Fit the socket spanner (3) in the switch (2).
7
Turn the switch (2) clockwise to stop.
8
Hold the switch (2) in the stop position until the
cab is completely tilted.
9
Release the switch (2).
J0008203
J0008202
J0008204
Tilting back
1
Fit the socket spanner (3) into the valve of the
hydraulic pump (1).
2
Turn anticlockwise to the stop position. The
valve is open.
3
Fit the socket spanner (3) in the switch (2).
4
Turn the switch (2) clockwise to stop.
5
Keep the circuit breaker (2) in the stop position
until the cab has been tilted completely back and
is locked in driving position.
6
Release the switch (2).
7
Check that the lamp showing unlocked cab does
not light up when the engine is running.
8
Put the tools away.
9
Push in the upper part of the switch.
If the cab is tilted electrically more than twice running
an overheating protection can be activated. Therefore
J0008208
Open valve (drive position)
358 Cab
allow the motor in the electric hydraulic pump to cool
for 15 minutes. If the pump does not work after 15
minutes check the fuse in the fuse box.
If the electric cab tilting mechanism still does not work
the cab can be tilted mechanically. If the cab will not
tilt it can be because of air in the system or because the
cab is too heavily loaded.
J8008489
J3014610
Control lamp for tilted cab.
J0008204
Switch for electric tilting.
Note!
If the pressure in the cab tilting
hydraulic system does not increase,
despite pumping, there is probably
air in the system.
Cab 359
To bleed the hydraulic system
1
Set the control valve to position ”down”.
2
Pump the hydraulic pump 30 times.
3
Tilt the cab.
4
Tilt the cab back again.
5
Check the oil level.
The oil should cover the pump piston when the
pump piston is in the lower position.
J8006515
Note!
Never put oil in the hydraulic system
when the cab is tilted.
Mobile telephone, communication equipment
Incorrect connection and installation of accessory
equipment or use of portable mobile phones without
exterior antennae can influence the truck's electronic
system. Always contact your Volvo dealer before
mounting accessories.
Alarm on
Press the LOCK symbol on the remote control. The
direction indicators light up.
Make sure that all doors and hatches are properly
closed before the alarm is activated.
The alarm is not activated if you lock with the key or
with the internal door lock.
J3017345
360 Cab
When the alarm is armed, a diode in the instrument
panel's front edge flashes.
The alarm is set off when someone tries to open one of
the doors, the hatch to the luggage compartment or the
grille. The alarm is also set off if the cab is tipped, if
someone moves around in the cab or if the battery is
disconnected.
If the alarm is triggered, a siren sounds and the
direction indicators begin to flash. The siren will
continue to sound and the direction indicators keep
flashing for as long as they are being triggered, but not
for longer than five minutes.
J0011038
Alarm without motion detectors
The alarm can be activated even if you are still in the
cab, if you first of all switch off the motion detectors
in the cab.
1
Press the switch in the cab
2
Check that the lamp in the switch lights
3
Press the LOCK symbol on the remote control
The direction indicators light up
J0011039
or
1
Turn the key to the radio position
2
Press the LOCK symbol on the remote control
The direction indicators light
If the direction indicators do not light up when the
alarm is activated, a door, the hatch to the luggage
compartment or the grille might be open. Make sure
that all doors and hatches are properly closed before
the alarm is activated. If not, the alarm will be set off
when the open door or hatch is closed.
The alarm is not activated if you lock with the key or
with the internal door lock.
When the alarm is on, a diode in the instrument panel's
front edge flashes.
J3017345
Cab 361
The alarm is set off when someone tries to open one of
the doors, the hatch to the luggage compartment or the
grille.
If the alarm is triggered, a siren sounds and the
direction indicators begin to flash. The siren will
continue to sound and the direction indicators keep
flashing for as long as they are being triggered, but not
longer than five minutes.
Alarm off
Press the UNLOCK symbol on the remote control.
The diode in the windscreen goes out.
If the direction indicators flash and the diode in the
windscreen flashes faster, the alarm has been triggered
at some time since the alarm was activated.
If a door or hatch is opened within 2 minutes from
deactivation the alarm will be activated again.
The alarm is off when the diode in the windscreen is
not lit up.
If the battery in the remote control is discharged, you
can turn the alarm off by opening the door with the
key. The alarm will then be set off , but will stop when
the correct starter key is put in the start lock and the
ignition is switched on.
J3017346
Starting the assault alarm
Hold the switch down for two seconds, The siren
sounds
It is possible to lock or unlock the doors and to drive
off despite the fact that the assault alarm is activated.
J0011041
362 Cab
Switching off the assault alarm
Hold the switch down for two seconds. The siren
stops.
J0011041
Go into service mode
When the alarm is in service mode, the battery and
various parts of the alarm system can be disconnected
without the alarm being set off. A symbol on the
display shows that the alarm is in service mode.
1
Turn the starter key to drive position
2
Hold the switch down to switch off the motion
detectors
3
Press the LOCK symbol on the remote control
4
Check that the LED on the instrument panel
lights up
The symbol for service mode is shown in the display
as long as the starter key is in drive position.
J3016334
J0011039
J3017347
Cab 363
To get out of service mode
1
Turn the starter key to drive position
2
Hold the switch down to switch off the motion
detectors
3
Press the UNLOCK symbol on the remote
control.
4
Check that the LED on the instrument panel goes
out
J0011039
The symbol for service mode in the display goes out.
J3017346
Note!
The alarm may be in service mode at
delivery.
Assistance button
An assistance button is located on the instrument panel
or radio shelf. The assistance button must be held
depressed for at least three seconds for an emergency
message to be sent to the office and/or VAS (Volvo
Action Service).
J3011613
Note!
The assistance button only functions
when the system is switched on.
364 Refrigerator
Safety instructions
• Under no circumstances interfere with the
refrigerant circuit
• The refrigerator box is not intended for storing
corrosive material or solvent
• Never cover the air channels or the ventilation
openings
• Defrost in good time when you find ice forming in
the refrigerator box
• Never use sharp tools to remove ice or to get out
objects which have become frozen in
• Never use detergent which contains abrasive
agents, acid or solvent
• When the refrigerator box is to be discarded a
specialist should be consulted regarding the
recycling of the components included in it
• A quick charger may only be connected to the
vehicle's battery when the refrigerator box is
disconnected
General
The refrigerator has a refrigerated space for storing
drinks and other food which needs cooling. The
temperature is adjustable as desired by using the
control panel located in the door. The normal setting is
five blue LEDs lit, which gives a temperature of about
+6ºC in the coolbox at normal surrounding
temperatures.
Usage
The refrigerator box is designed to cool foodstuffs. If
you wish to use it to cool medicines you must check
that they meet the special requirements in force for
cooling medical products. All material included in the
refrigerator box is approved for contact with food. The
refrigerant is freon free.
Refrigerator 365
Starting the refrigerator
Hold the switched marked "ON/OFF" (1) in for about
1 second. The green LED (2) lights up and the
compressor starts. The compressor will only start
when the battery voltage exceeds 24.2 Volts. If the
battery voltage is lower than this, the green light diode
(2) begins to flash.
Adjust the temperature by holding down the
temperature selector marked "TEMP" (3). The blue
LEDs (4) light one after the other and continue as long
as the temperature selector is held in. Select
temperature by releasing the temperature selector
when the correct number of LEDs light. The greater
the number of blue LEDs that are lit, the lower the
temperature in the refrigerator. The normal setting is
five blue LEDs lit, which gives a temperature of about
+6ºC in the coolbox at normal surrounding
temperatures.
Turning off the refrigerator
Hold the switched marked "ON/OFF" in for about 1
second. The green light diode goes out and the
compressor stops. If the refrigerator is not going to be
used for a period of time, it should be cleaned
thoroughly. After cleaning, the door should be held
wide open for at least 24 hours so that all the vapour
vanishes and no bad smells occur.
Voltage protector
To protect the battery from deep discharging, the
compressor is automatically turned off if the voltage
becomes too low. If the battery voltage is or has been
too low, the LED flashes green on the control panel
and the compressor does not start. The voltage monitor
disconnects at 22.8 V and reconnects again at 24.2 V.
If the LED flashes green despite the battery voltage
being normal, it is due to the voltage having been too
J0010488
366 Refrigerator
low earlier. Start the engine to generate a voltage boost
that automatically resets the voltage monitor.
Tilting the cab
Before the cab is tilted, the refrigerator should be
emptied of its contents and switched off.
Cleaning
Clean the refrigerator with a cloth with lukewarm
water and ordinary washing-up liquid. Make sure that
it does not force water into the gasket or into the
switch. Then dry with a dry cloth. Clean the
refrigerator both inside and outside at regular intervals
or as soon as it becomes dirty.
Defrosting
The moisture in the air can cause ice to form on the
refrigerator walls, which reduces the refrigerating
capacity. Defrost in good time by taking out all food
and putting it another refrigerator or freezer
compartment so that it keeps cold. Turn off the
refrigerator and leave the door open. When the ice
melts, most of the water runs out through the draining
hole in the rear centre of the refrigerator. Check that
the draining hole is not blocked. Then dry up the
remaining water thoroughly. Clean with a cloth with
lukewarm water and ordinary washing-up liquid, and it
is ready for use.
Interior lighting
The refrigerator has interior lighting which lights up
automatically when the door is opened. The lamp is
replaced by releasing the entire lighting assembly with
a twist to the left. The lamp is type C5W 24V SV 8.5.
Refrigerator 367
Fault tracing
If the refrigerator does not work, first check that the
voltage monitor is not triggered. If the fault persists,
contact your Volvo dealer.
Tips on saving energy
• Let warm goods cool down properly before you put
them in the refrigerator
• Defrost as soon as you discover ice formation on
the refrigerator walls
• Do not keep the refrigerator at too low a
temperature
• Do not open the door except when necessary
• Never leave the door open during normal operation
Technical specifications
Power requirement
24V/3A
Volume
25 litres
Cooling performance
40ºC below ambient temperature (Applies at
32º ambient temperature)
Refrigerant
R134a, 60 g
368 Fridge
Safety instructions
• Under no circumstances interfere with the
refrigerant circuit
• The refrigerator box is not intended for storing
corrosive material or solvent
• Never cover the air channels or the ventilation
openings
• Defrost in good time when you find ice forming in
the refrigerator box
• Never use sharp tools to remove ice or to get out
objects which have become frozen in
• Never use detergent which contains abrasive
agents, acid or solvent
• When the refrigerator box is to be discarded a
specialist should be consulted regarding the
recycling of the components included in it
• A quick charger may only be connected to the
vehicle's battery when the refrigerator box is
disconnected
General
The temperature is adjusted according to your own
requirements by using the control panel with digital
display which is located to the right of the refrigerator
box. Using the plus and minus buttons, temperatures
can be selected within the range +2 °C to +12 °C for
the refrigerator box.
Usage
The refrigerator box is designed for storage of cooled
food and beverages. If you wish to use it to cool
medicines, you must check that it meets the special
requirements that apply for cooling medical products.
All material included in the refrigerator box is
approved for contact with food. The refrigerant is
freon-free.
Fridge 369
Starting the refrigerator box
Hold in the switch (2) for about one second. The green
LED (3) lights up and the compressor starts. The
compressor will only start if the battery voltage is
higher than 24.2 V. If the battery voltage is lower, the
LED (3) will start to flash red. For further information,
see “Voltage monitor”.
Adjust the temperature by holding down the
temperature selectors marked “–” (4) or “+” (5). The
selected temperature is shown in the digital display (1)
and flashes twice before the display shows the current
temperature in the refrigerator box. The LED
continues to flash green until the selected temperature
is reached. Once the selected temperature is reached,
the LED lights green continuously. When the
temperature rises to a level above the selected
temperature, the compressor starts and the LED
flashes green as long as the compressor is running.
Switching off the refrigerator box
Hold in the switch (2) for about 1 second. The green
LED goes out and the compressor
stops. If the refrigerator box is not going to be used for
a period of time, it should be cleaned thoroughly. See
“Cleaning”. After cleaning, the cover should be held
wide open for at least 24 hours so that all the vapour
vanishes and no bad smells occur.
Voltage protector
To protect the battery from over-discharging, the
compressor is automatically turned off if the voltage
becomes too low. If the battery voltage is or has been
too low, the LED flashes red and the compressor does
not start. See also heading “Fault tracing”. The voltage
monitor breaks at 22.8 V and restarts again at 24.2 V.
If the LED flashes red with a lightning flash despite
the battery voltage being normal, this is because the
voltage has earlier been too low. Start the engine to
1
2
3
4
5
8
J209124
370 Fridge
generate a voltage boost that automatically resets the
voltage monitor.
Tilting the cab
Before the cab is tilted, the refrigerator box should be
emptied of its contents and switched off. Close the
refrigerator door before tilting the cab.
Cleaning
Clean the refrigerator box with a cloth with lukewarm
water and ordinary washing-up liquid. Make sure that
it does not force water into the packing or into the
switch. Then dry with a dry cloth. Clean the
refrigerator box both inside and outside at regular
intervals or as soon as it becomes dirty.
Defrosting
Air humidity can cause ice formation that reduces the
cooling effect. Defrost in good time by taking out all
food and putting it another refrigerator or freezer
compartment so that it keeps cold. Turn off the
refrigerator and leave the door open. Let the ice melt
and then dry up the water thoroughly. Clean with a
cloth with lukewarm water and ordinary washing-up
liquid, and it is ready for use.
Fault tracing
If the refrigerator box does not work, first check that
the voltage monitor is not triggered. See “Voltage
monitor” for actions. If the fault remains, check the
fault codes below and contact your Volvo dealer.
If the prism on the outside of the refrigerator box
shows green, the unit is operating correctly. If the
prism shows red, there is a fault in the refrigerator box
and the drawer must then be pulled out so that the fault
code on the PCB panel can be checked.
Fridge 371
• Faults are indicated by the LED flashing RED a
number of times. Each flash will last a ¼ of a
second
• After the number of flashes that indicate a fault,
there will be a delay with no flashes. The sequence
is repeated every fourth second.
• The LED always lights GREEN continuously when
the selected temperature has been reached. The
LED flashes GREEN while the compressor is
running in order to reach the selected temperature.
• If the LED flashes RED with a frequency that is
higher than 4 flashes per second and E1 or E2 are
displayed, then there is a fault in the NTC-sensor.
E3 Fault codes
Number of
flashes
Type of fault
1
The voltage guard has released
2
The condenser fan circuit is overloaded
3
The compressor does not start
4
Compressor speed is too low
5
The electronic unit's overheating protection
has released
Tips on saving energy
• Let warm goods cool down properly before you put
them in the refrigerator box
• Defrost as soon as you discover ice formation in the
refrigerator
• Do not keep the refrigerator/freezer space at too
low a temperature
• Do not open the door except when necessary
• Never leave the door open during normal operation
372 Fridge
Technical specifications
Power requirement
12/24 V / 48 W
Volume, refrigerator
26 litres
Cooling performance
45 °C below the ambient temperature (Applies with an ambient
temperature of 32 °C)
Refrigerant
R134a, 37 g
Alcolock 373
Start up
1 Turn the key ON-OFF to operate the hand unit.
Wait
Menu (hold)
J138920
Note!
The ignition key should be in the
OFF position when the handset is
warming up.
2 Wait unit the hand unit shows “Blow for 5 seconds”.
The status LED flashes green.
Depending on the ambient temperature, you may need
to wait for a few seconds (approx. 15 seconds at 20
°C, approx. 1 minute at 0 °C).
Blow for
5 seconds
Menu (hold)
J138921
374 Alcolock
3 Fit a nozzle to the hand unit. New users should use a
new nozzle.
J138922
4 Blow sufficiently hard into the nozzle. The
ALCOLOCK gives a continous tone to indicate the air
flow is sufficient. Continue to blow until you hear a
peep and the handset clicks. The LCD display should
then show “Wait”.
If you blow incorrectly, the LCD screen will show
either “Blow less hard” or “Blow longer and harder”.
Wait unit the handset shows “Blow for 5 seconds”
before trying again.
Note the test result on the hand unit.
5A If “Start engine” is shown in the LCD display and
the status lamp shows a green light, then you have
managed the test. The measured alcohol level is
between 0.00 and 0.10 ‰.
You have 5 minutes to start the vehicle.
Start
motor
J138923
Alcolock 375
5B If “Warning” is shown in the LCD display and the
status lamp lights yellow, you have managed the test
but there are traces of alcohol. The measured alcohol
level is between 0.11 and 0.19 ‰. You have two
alternatives:
• Press the right-hand button to drive despite the risk.
You have 5 minutes to start the vehicle.
• Wait for 5 minutes. Carry out a new test.
Caution
Start
J138924
5C If “Lock 0:60” is shown in the display and the
status lamp shows a red light, you have exceeded the
limit 0.20 ‰. You cannot start the vehicle.
Wait for 60 seconds until the lock timer stops. Carry
out a new test.
Lockout
0:60
J138925
Restarting the vehicle
If the motor was turned OFF for less than 30 minutes,
you can restart the motor without performing another
breath test. This is a safety feature which allows you to
quickly restart the motor if it stalls on the road. It is
also convenient for making frequent short stops.
Observe the message displayed on the handset
376 Alcolock
1A If “Restart possible” is shown in the display you
can restart the vehicle without a new breath test.
Restart
Available
Cancel (hold)
J138926
Note!
To cancel the restart, press and hold
the right button.
1B If “Blow for 5 seconds” is shown in the display,
the restart period has expired and you must manage a
new breath test before you can restart the vehicle.
Blow for
5 seconds
Menu (hold)
J138921
Sharing a vehicle
Drivers with their own personal handset can operate
the same vehicle without reprogramming the
ALCOLOCK. All the custom settings are downloaded
into the ALCOLOCK ECU every time a new handset
is plugged in.
Alcolock 377
The handset can be exchanged while the ignition is
ON or OFF.
It is strongly recommended you do not exchange the
handset while the vehicle is ON. You will be required
to conduct a breath test which may distract your
attention from the road.
In the interest of your own safety, you should only
exchange handsets when the vehicle is parked and the
ignition is OFF. To replace the handset while the
ignition is OFF, simply unplug the old handset and
plug in the new one, as described below.
1 Squeeze on both sides of the contact on the hand
unit's lower part to disconnect the hand unit from the
hand unit cable.
J138928
Warning!
Do not pull the hand unit cable.
The contact is similar to a RJ-45telephone connector and requires
you to squeeze lightly on the
release tags.
2 The LCD screen goes out when the cable is released
as shown in the figure to the left.
378 Alcolock
3 Connect an ALCOLOCK hand unit to the hand unit
cable by plugging in the cable to the hand unit's lower
part. You should hear a weak click sound.
All personal settings are downloaded to the
ALCOLOCK'S CONTROL UNIT.
The ALCOLOCK is now ready for normal operation.
J138929
The following steps must be taken if the handset
was exchanged while the ignition was ON.
1 Disconnect the ALCOLOCK'S hand unit cable from
the hand unit.
J138928
2 ALCOLOCK'S CONTROL UNIT peeps twice every
15th second to remind the driver that the hand unit has
been disconnected while the engine is running.
Alcolock 379
3 Use reasonable power to press in the new hand unit
cable into the ALCOLOCK'S hand unit contact. You
should hear a weak click sound.
J138929
4 Depending on the ambient temperature, you may
need to wait for a few seconds. During this time
“Wait” is shown.
Wait unit the hand unit shows “Test again”. The status
LED flashes green.
Retest
J138930
5 Fit a new nozzle to the hand unit.
J138922
380 Alcolock
6 Blow sufficiently hard into the nozzle. Continue to
blow until you hear a peep and the handset clicks. The
LCD display should then show “Wait”.
If you blow incorrectly, the LCD screen will show
either “Blow less hard” or “Blow longer and harder”.
Wait unit the hand unit shows “Test again”.
Note the message on the handset.
• If “Drive safely” is shown in the LCD display and
the status lamp shows a green light, you have
managed the test. You can continue to drive the
vehicle.
• If “Stop, Switch off engine” is shown in the LCD
display and the status lamp flashes red, you have
exceeded the permillage limit. You must stop the
vehicle safely and switch OFF the engine. Wait
until the restart and lock timer stop before you do a
new breath test.
Energy conservation
The ALCOLOCK can be placed into sleep mode after
the motor has been turned OFF. In sleep mode, the
ALCOLOCK will operate at minimum power to
conserve energy in your vehicle battery.
To place the ALCOLOCK into sleep mode, simply
press and hold both buttons. Alternatively, you can
wait until the sleep timer expires. You can choose
from 4 sleep times as described below.
Alcolock 381
1 Press and hold the left button to access the user
menu.
Step to the Standby position using the left button.
Press the right-hand button to choose the alternative.
Menu
Sleep
Next
Select
J138931
2 The sub-menu Standby contains 4 pre-programmed
standby times: 5, 30, 60 and 90 minutes.
Use the left-hand button to browse
3 Press and hold down the right-hand button to save
and leave the standby menu.
Enter End to return to the normal mode.
Volume control
Audio tones have been added to the handset to
improve the user experience. The volume of these
tones can be set inside the user menu.
Note!
The volume setting only applies to
the hand unit. These settings do not
apply to the ALCOLOCK'S
CONTROL UNIT.
382 Alcolock
1 Press and hold the left button to access theuser
menu.
Use the left button to scroll to Volume.
Press the right button to select this option
Menu
Volume
Next
2 Use the pushbuttons to adjust the volume of the
handset.
Select
Note!
Left button decreases the volume.
Right button increases it.
3 Press and hold the right button to save and exit the
Volume submenu.
Select Exit to return to normal operations.
Language selection
The ALCOLOCK can display text messages in several
languages. Access the user menu to change the display
language.
1 Press and hold the left button to access the user
menu.
Use the left button to scroll to Language.
Press the right button to select this option.
Menu
Language
Next
Select
Alcolock 383
2 Use the left button to browse through the available
languages.
3 Press and hold the right button to save and exit the
Language submenu.
Select Exit to return to normal operations.
Dates
As with other breath alcohol testers, the ALCOLOCK
handset must be calibrated every 12 months to
maintain its accuracy. Failure to calibrate the
ALCOLOCK within the designated period will disable
the breath testing feature.
Menu
A service reminder will be displayed on the handset 14
days before the calibration period expires. The
calibration expiry date can also be viewed in the user
menu as described below.
Dates
Next
Select
Additional important dates such as current clock date
and time, service date and lockout date can be found in
this menu.
1 Press and hold the left button to access the user
menu.
Use the left button to scroll to Dates.
Press the right button to select this option.
2 Press the left button until the calibration expiry date
appears on the LCD.
3 After you have finished reviewing the date, press
and hold the right button to exit the dates submenu.
Select Exit to return to normal operations.
General messages and errors
1 Calibration Expired
Note!
After one year of operation the ALCOLOCK will
require calibration. Once the calibration period has
expired the vehicle can be started without a breath test.
Press the right button and turn the key in the normal
sequence and the motor will be allowed to start.
Calibrate the handset yearly
2 ADR Incompatible
384 Alcolock
Your VOLVO ALCOLOCK is safe to use in ADR—
applications. Always make sure that an ADR
compatible handset is used.
Newer non ADR compatible ALCOLOCK V3
handsets will temporarily display “ADR incompatible”
when they are first connected along with a warning
tone. These handsets will operate correctly, but the
vehicle will no longer be allowed to transport
hazardous goods.
3 Other errors
The handset may not accept a breath test for various
reasons and messages such as Invalid Sample,
Cancelled Try again, communication error, RF (radio
frequency) detected, Incorrect or Low voltage. To
minimize errors, ensure that the handset is connected
properly and cabling, connectors and vehicle battery
are in good condition. Turn mobile phones off.
Attempt the test again.
4 If the ALCOLOCK should brake
If there is any problem to start the truck after a stand
still, the ALCOLOCK can be over rided with a 4-digit
code. This code is available at Volvo Action Service.
The code is changed every day and should not be used
for a long time. The truck should be taken to the
workshop so the ALCOLOCK can be repaired.
Technical messages and errors
1 Clock Error
The VOLVO ALCOLOCK receives its time signal
from the vehicle’s tachograph. Should the tachograph
fail or be removed for servicing, a “Clock error”
message will be displayed for several seconds. The
handset will operate correctly, but dates will not be
correctly displayed until a properly functioning
tachograph is connected.
2 Technical Error
Should the handset detect an internal power failure
“Technical error” will be displayed.
Alcolock 385
In this state, the motor can be started by pressing the
right button and turning the key in the normal
sequence. No breath test is required when a technical
error is detected.
3 Error codes
The handset will display error code 10, 20, 30, 40, 45
or 50 if a technical fault is detected. The handset will
reset to allow the user to attempt another breath test. If
the condition persists the ALCOLOCK will require
servicing.
386 Radio/CD
Safe Operation of the Radio
The driving conditions today require that the driver
pays full attention to the road at all times. It is advised
that when using this radio while driving the driver
maintain full concentration on the road. Therefore it is
strongly advised to do the following:
• Never Change a CD or read CD labels while
driving.
• Always Ensure the Volume of the Audio System is
set so that outside acoustics can also be heard.
• Use when possible the Steering wheel controls. It is
a feature to make it both easy and safe to handle the
radio while driving.
Introduction
The following instructions explain the general
functions and operations of the Volvo Radio.
Radio information is displayed through the LCD
display on the radio.
The radio is commanded by:
• The Faceplate.
• By the Remote Control.
• By the Steering Wheel Controls.
The main functions of the audio unit are:
• Radio Mode.
• CD
The main functions of the audio unit are:
• Radio Mode.
• CD (supporting MP3 and WMA).
• USB (supporting MP3 and WMA).
• iPod.
• Auxiliary audio input.
Radio/CD 387
• Hands free (Bluetooth Phone Operation).
General Overview
Radio/CD Controls Quick Reference
Guide
11
9
8
TA
10
12
RADIO
ESC
OK
CD/AUX
AUDIO
18
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU
16
13
14
17
15
J171284
1
“Preset 1” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
2
“Preset 2” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
3
“Preset 3” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
4
“Preset 4” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
5
“Preset 5” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
6
“Preset 6” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
388 Radio/CD
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
7
“Rotary Knob/PWR” Button
Push: Power On and Off
Turn: Volume Adjust & Audio Value Update
8
CD Slot
CD: Insert / Remove CD
9
“Eject CD” Button
CD: Eject CD
10
Radio Select Mode
Radio: Choose from FM & AM Bands
11
Information (Traffic / News)
Radio: Switch Traffic on or off
Radio: Cancel ongoing Traffic or News message
12
CD/ Mode Select
CD: Switch to CD
13
Up Button
Radio: Manual tuning up
14
(Fast) Forward >> Button
Radio: Seek
CD: Push and release: Select Next Track
CD: Push and hold: Fast Forward
15
Menu Button
Radio: Push and release: Menu Access
16
(Fast) Reverse << Button
Radio: Seek
CD: Push and release: Select previous Track
CD: Push and hold: Fast Reverse
17
Down Button
Radio: Manual tuning down
18
Audio Button
General: Audio Settings
Radio/CD 389
11
9
8
TA
10
12
RADIO
ESC
OK
CD/AUX
AUDIO
18
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU
16
13
14
17
15
J170065
1
“Preset 1” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
2
“Preset 2” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
3
“Preset 3” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
4
“Preset 4” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
5
“Preset 5” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
6
“Preset 6” Button
Radio: Push and release: Recall Preset Station
Radio: Push and hold: Store Preset Station
7
“Rotary Knob/PWR” Button
Push: Power On and Off
Turn: Volume Adjust & Audio Value Update
8
CD Slot
CD: Insert / Remove CD
9
“Eject CD” Button
390 Radio/CD
CD: Eject CD
10
Radio Select Mode
Radio: Choose from FM & AM Bands
11
Information (Traffic / News)
Radio: Switch Traffic on or off
Radio: Cancel ongoing Traffic or News message
12
CD/Aux Mode Select
CD/USB: Switch between sources other than
radio
13
Up Button
Radio: Manual tuning up
14
(Fast) Forward >> Button
Radio: Seek CD/USB: Push and release: Select
Next Track
CD/USB: Push and hold: Fast Forward
Bluetooth Phone: Accept incoming call
15
Menu Button
Radio: Push and release: Menu Access
16
(Fast) Reverse << Button
Radio: Seek
CD/USB: Push and release: Select previous
Track
CD/USB: Push and hold: Fast Reverse
Bluetooth Phone: Reject incoming call or hang
up
iPod: Push and hold: Enter iPod menu
17
Down Button
Radio: Manual tuning down
18
Audio Button
General: Audio Settings
Radio/CD 391
Steering Wheel Controls Quick
Reference Guide
1
“Next” Button
Radio: Push and release: Seek
Radio: Push and hold: Manual tune up
CD/USB: Push and release: Select next track
CD/USB: Push and hold: Fast forward
2
“Previous” Button
Radio: Push and release: Seek
Radio: Push and hold: Manual tune down
CD/USB: Push and release: Selectprevious track
CD/USB: Push and hold: Fast reverse
3
“YES” Button
Bluetooth phone: Accept incomingcall
4
“NO” Button
Bluetooth phone: Reject incoming call or hang
up
5
“Vol +” Button
General: Increase Sound Volume
6
“Vol —” Button
General: Decrease Sound Volume
3
4
NO
YES
1
2
6
5
J170066
392 Radio/CD
Remote Control Quick Reference
Guide
1
“Band” Button
Radio: Select between FM & AM Bands
2
“PWR” Button
General:Turns the Radio On and Off
3
“Seek” Button
Radio: Seek
CD/USB: Next or previous track
4
“Mute / Pause” Button
General: Mute or Pause the source of audio
5
“Aux” Button
Source:Select between USB, iPod or AUX
6
“CD Select” Button
CD: Select CD
7
Volume buttons
Radio/CD:Adjust the volume up and down
8
Preset 1 to 6
Radio: Select a Preset Station
8
1
2
PWR
3
7
4
5
6
J170068
Radio/CD 393
Display Quick Reference Guide
8
7 6
AF
MENU
5
TRAFFIC
NEWS
123
456
1
2 3
4
J192785
1
Text Display
Radio: Displays radio frequency and station
name
CD: Displays track, time and music when
available
2
Source display
Radio: Displays radio band (FM1, FM2, FM3 or
AM)
CD: Displays CD
3
Preset Number
Radio: Displays Preset Number
4
Random
CD: Displayed when random is on
5
Traffic Info
General: Indicates that the Traffic function is on
6
News Info
General: Indicates that the News function is on
7
AF
General: Indicates that the AF (Alternative
frequency) function is on
8
Menu
General: Displayed when in Menu
394 Radio/CD
3 4
1
5
TRAFFIC
NEWS
PTY
AF
9
10
2 11
6
8
7
J170070
1
Text Display
Radio: Displays radio frequency and station
name
CD/USB: Displays track, time and music when
available
2
Source display
Radio: Displays radio band (FM1, FM2, FM3 or
AM)
CD/USB: Displays other source than radio
3
Phone connected
General: Indicates that the phone is connected
4
Bluetooth on
General: Indicates that the Bluetooth function is
on
5
Traffic Info
General: Indicates that the Traffic function is on
6
News Info
General: Indicates that the News function is on
7
AF
General: Indicates that the AF (Alternative
frequency) function is on
8
PTY
General: Indicates that the PTY (Program type)
function is on
9
Repeat
CD/USB: Display when Repeat is on
10
Random
CD/USB: Displayed when Random is on
11
Alarm
Radio/CD 395
CD/USB: Indicates that the Alarm clock function
is on
Main Functions
Many functions are controlled or adjusted through the
radio Menu. If the Menu screen is open and the radio
experiences no activity for a 10 second period, the
radio will cancel any incomplete actions, close the
Menu screen and return to normal operation. The radio
will save all completed changes.
Power
Switching On & Off, Mute and Pause of the
Audio System
The audio system is switched on or off by pressing the
“Rotary Knob/PWR” Button. If the driver wants to
quickly mute the audio system sound, press the“Rotary
Knob/PWR”Button.
Radio Mode
Band Selection (FM and AM)
To select the radio as the play mode, turn the radio on
and press the “RADIO” button . The radio will then be
active on the last used radio band (AM, FM etc.).
To switch between the bands (AM/FM1/FM2/FM3)
use the“RADIO” button .
Seek in radio mode
There are two ways to seek for a radio station:
1
Use the Seek buttons to seek up or down on the
radio. Once a station is found the seek function
will stop. OR
2
Use the Seek buttons of the Steering Wheel
Control to seek up or down on the radio. Once a
station is found the seek function will stop.
(Optional feature)
396 Radio/CD
Manuel tuning
Manual Tuning can be performed in two ways:
1
Push Up button or Down button to tune up or
down respectively. OR
2
Push and hold the Seek buttons of the Steering
Wheel Control, to tune up or down respectively.
(Optional feature)
Presets (Storing Radio Stations)
Up to 12 FM and 6 AM radio stations can be stored for
fast access. There are three sets of FM radio preset
bands, which are FM1, FM2, FM3 and one AM radio
preset band. Each preset band can store 6 stations on
buttons 1 to 6. To store a specific station into a preset
button, do the following:
1
Push the “RADIO” button until the required
frequency band is active (AM, FM1, FM2, FM3)
2
Tune the radio to the desired station.
3
Push and hold the desired preset button (1–6).
4
There will be a short delay as the station is
stored. When audio returns the process is
completed.
Presets (Selecting a Stored Radio Station)
To select one of the preset stations, perform the
following:
1
Push “RADIO” button to select the required band
(AM, FM1, FM2, FM3).
2
Push and release the required preset button (1–6)
to activate the desired station.
Scan mode
The scan feature allows the user to perform a radio
station search without having to toggle manually to the
stations. When in scan mode, each station found will
play for 10 seconds to give the user a chance to sample
the station program or music. The scan will then
Radio/CD 397
continue on to the next available station unless the user
chooses to stop the scan and stay at the present station.
To enter scan mode, perform the following:
1
Press “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing “OK”.
To exit scan mode and stay at the present station
perform:
1
Press the “RADIO” button.
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS is used by many radio stations throughout
Europe. The system provides features such as
Automatic frequency changing (AF) and trigger
signals for Traffic announcements (TA) and News.
Alternative Frequency (AF)
The range for FM stations is quite limited. For this
reason many stations transmit on alternative
frequencies in different areas. By using the AF
function, the driver can listen to such a station
continuously without retuning the radio manually
between the areas.
Some stations transmit different programs in different
areas during some part of the day. To avoid tuning
away from a locally sent program, the AF function can
be set to stay with that program by using AF LOC
(local).
When travelling long distances the reception of a
locally sent program may be lost. In such case, using
the AF REG (regional) will allow the radio to tune to
other transmitters within that station.
When a radio search is performed the first time after
activating AF, the radio creates an internal list of
available stations. An additional search will be done
due to that list, which makes the search faster. The list
is sorted with respect to the stations’ RDS codes and
the stations may not be tuned in frequency order in an
AF search.
398 Radio/CD
AF Activation
To activate or deactivate AF, perform the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “AF” is
displayed.
3
Select the AF status by pressing the “OK” button.
When AF is active, the display shows the AF icon.
Traffic Announcement (TA) and News
This feature allows the radio to play traffic or news
announcements even if the radio is in CD mode. To
ensure that the message is heard, the volume will be
automatically adjusted to the highest of the three
following volume levels:
• Volume level 10.
• The present normal volume level.
• A retained TA/News volume level.
The TA/News volume is set by adjusting the volume
during a TA/News announcement. The radio will
retain this TA/News volume setting.
Traffic Activation
There are two ways to activate the Traffic function:
Note!
1
If Traffic is active, then the AF
function will be active.
Push and release the information TA button.
OR
1
Press the “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“TRAFFIC” is displayed.
3
Activate “TRAFFIC” by pressing “OK” button.
When Traffic is active, the display shows the
Traffic icon.
Radio/CD 399
News Activation
To activate the News function, perform the following:
Note!
1
Press the “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “NEWS” is
displayed.
If News is active, then the AF
function will be active.
3
Activate “NEWS” by pressing “OK” button.
When News is active, the display shows the News
icon.
Traffic / News Announcement Rejection
To reject a current Traffic or News announcement,
Push and release the information TA button.
Enhanced Information Concerning Other
Networks (EON)
A network of stations may transmit News or Traffic
announcements on just one of its stations. The RDS
feature EON ensures that this information is received
by doing an automatic frequency change. After the
announcement the radio will return to the previous
station.
Emergency Announcement - Alarm
In the event of a major disaster, an emergency
announcement may be transmitted on the radio. When
such is received, "ALARM" is displayed and the
Volume is adjusted as for TA/News announcements.
CD Mode
The radio is designed to work with standard CD
format on CD-R as well as CD-RW discs.
Switching to CD Mode
There are two ways to switch to the CD mode:
1
Push the “CD” button until CD shows on display.
OR
2
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Note!
The Traffic and/or News functions
need to be active for this feature to
work.
400 Radio/CD
Eject a CD
To eject a CD press the Eject button. When CD is
ejected the radio will play the previous audio source. If
the CD is not removed from the CD slot, it will
automatically reload after 15 seconds.
Changing a Track on a CD
There are two ways to change a track on a CD:
1
Push and release the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to move to the next or
previous track respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to the previous or
next track respectively. (Optional feature)
Fast Forward or Fast Reverse on a CD
Fast forwarding or reversing a CD can be performed in
one of two ways:
1
Push and hold the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to fast forward or fast reverse
respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to fast reverse or
fast forward respectively. (Optional feature)
Playing Tracks on a CD or in Random Order
There are two possible Random settings for a CD:
Random All and Random Folder (If the content of the
CD is stored in folders). To play tracks in random
order, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“RANDOM” is displayed.
3
Activate Random by pressing the “OK” button.
Radio/CD 401
Scan a CD
When CD is scanned, the first 10 seconds of each track
is played. To activate Scan, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing“OK” button.
Scanning will stop if
1
The “ESC” or “OK” button is pressed. OR
2
All tracks are browsed through.
Audio Settings
Adjusting Volume Up and Down
The audio systems volume can be adjusted up by
turning the Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and
adjusted down by turning the knob in a counterclockwise direction.
It can also be adjusted up and down by using the + and
— on the steering wheel controls respectively.
Adjusting Bass Up and Down
The audio systems bass can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “BASS” shows on the
display. The bass is then adjusted up by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
down by turning the knob in a counter-clockwise
direction. It can also be adjusted up and down by using
the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on the radio
respectively.
Adjusting Treble Up and Down
The audio systems treble can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “TREBLE” shows on the
display. The treble is then adjusted up by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
down by turning the Rotary knob in a counterclockwise direction. It can also be adjusted up and
down by using the “OK” button or the “ESC” button
on the radio respectively.
402 Radio/CD
Adjusting Balance Left and Right
The audio systems balance can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “BALANCE” shows on the
display. The balance is then adjusted right by turning
the Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
left by turning the Rotary knob in a counter-clockwise
direction. It can also be adjusted right and left by using
the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on the radio
respectively.
Adjusting Fader Front and Back
The audio systems fader can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “FADER” shows on the
display. The fader is then adjusted front by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
back by turning the Rotary knob in a counterclockwise direction. It can also be adjusted front and
back by using the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on
the radio respectively.
Speakers Selection
(Optional feature)
The audio system can be adjusted to 4 or 2 speaker
mode by performing the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“ADVANCE” is displayed.
3
Press the “OK” button to enter the Advance
submenu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until
“SPEAKERS” is displayed.
5
Change between 2CH and 4CH by pressing the
“OK” button.
Clock
Displaying the Time
By default, the time of day is displayed only when the
ignition is ON and the radio is OFF. The Clock can be
Radio/CD 403
set to show the time also when radio is ON, by doing
the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “VISIBLE”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to change between ON/
OFF status.
12- or 24-Hour Format
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour mode. The
12-hour mode distinguishes between AM and PM. To
change the time format, do the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “12/24 HR”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to change between 12H or
24H options.
Setting the Clock
To set the clock manually, do the following:
Note!
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
Normally the time is set
automatically by the trucks system.
The option to manually set the time
will then not be available.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “SET
TIME” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Set time sub
menu.
6
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
hours up or down respectively.
404 Radio/CD
7
Push the “OK” button to set the hour and toggle
to the minute adjustment.
8
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
minutes up or down respectively.
9
Push the “OK” button to save the time and finish
the process.
Anti Theft Code (Guard)
The radio unit is set to function with only one vehicle.
The Guard feature prohibits operation of the radio
anywhere else. The Guard is automatic and no manual
handling is normally needed.
In case of malfunction
If, by some reason, the radio fails in detecting the
required vehicle, the user will be prompted to enter the
Anti Theft Code (sticker found in Drivers Handbook).
The display will then show "CODE 0000". Please note
that this is a malfunction and should be checked at an
authorized workshop. To enter the code, do the
following:
1
For the current (blinking) digit, turn the volume
knob until the right number is shown.
2
Press the power button to enter the digit.The next
digit will start to blink.
3
Repeat step 1 and 2 until all four digits has been
entered.
The user has three tries to enter the code. If these are
unsuccessful the radio will be locked for 60 minutes
until three new tries are allowed.
Deactivating Guard
It is possible to deactivate Guard, but (is) not
recommended. To deactivate the Guard function, do
the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“ADVANCE” is displayed.
Radio/CD 405
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Advance sub
menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “GUARD”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter.
6
Push the “OK” button to set Guard ON or OFF.
The user will be requested for the Anti Theft Code to
deactivate or activate Guard. The display will then
show "CODE 0000" with the first digit blinking. To
enter the code, do the following:
1
For the current (blinking) digit, turn the volume
knob until the right number is shown.
2
Press the power button to enter the digit. The
next digit will start to blink.
3
Repeat step 1 and 2 until all four digits has been
entered.
The user has three tries to enter the code. If these are
unsuccessful the radio will be locked for 60 minutes
until three new tries are allowed.
Tips and Tricks
CD, MP3, and WMA
• A CD with MP3 or WMA will take several seconds
to read before it starts playing.
• For best performance, a MP3/WMA CD should not
contain other file types than MP3, WMA, M3U and
PLS.
Main Functions
Many functions are controlled or adjusted through the
radio Menu. If the Menu screen is open and the radio
experiences no activity for a 10 second period, the
radio will cancel any incomplete actions, close the
Menu screen and return to normal operation. The radio
will save all completed changes.
406 Radio/CD
1
Radio
2
USB port
3
Steering wheel controls
4
Driver Information Display
5
Microphone
Power
Switching On & Off, Mute and Pause of the
Audio System
The audio system is switched on or off by pressing the
“Rotary Knob/PWR” Button. If the driver wants to
quickly mute the audio system sound, press the“Rotary
Knob/PWR”Button.
Radio Mode
Band Selection (FM and AM)
To select the radio as the play mode, turn the radio on
and press the “RADIO” button . The radio will then be
active on the last used radio band (AM, FM etc.).
To switch between the bands (AM/FM1/FM2/FM3)
use the“RADIO” button .
Radio/CD 407
Seek in radio mode
There are two ways to seek for a radio station:
1
Use the Seek buttons to seek up or down on the
radio. Once a station is found the seek function
will stop. OR
2
Use the Seek buttons of the Steering Wheel
Control to seek up or down on the radio. Once a
station is found the seek function will stop.
Manuel tuning
Manual Tuning can be performed in two ways:
1
Push Up button or Down button to tune up or
down respectively. OR
2
Push and hold the Seek buttons of the Steering
Wheel Control, to tune up or down respectively.
Presets (Storing Radio Stations)
Up to 12 FM and 6 AM radio stations can be stored for
fast access. There are three sets of FM radio preset
bands, which are FM1, FM2, FM3 and one AM radio
preset band. Each preset band can store 6 stations on
buttons 1 to 6. To store a specific station into a preset
button, do the following:
1
Push the “RADIO” button until the required
frequency band is active (AM, FM1, FM2, FM3)
2
Tune the radio to the desired station.
3
Push and hold the desired preset button (1–6).
4
There will be a short delay as the station is
stored. When audio returns the process is
completed.
Presets (Selecting a Stored Radio Station)
To select one of the preset stations, perform the
following:
1
Push “RADIO” button to select the required band
(AM, FM1, FM2, FM3).
408 Radio/CD
2
Push and release the required preset button (1–6)
to activate the desired station.
Scan mode
The scan feature allows the user to perform a radio
station search without having to toggle manually to the
stations. When in scan mode, each station found will
play for 10 seconds to give the user a chance to sample
the station program or music. The scan will then
continue on to the next available station unless the user
chooses to stop the scan and stay at the present station.
To enter scan mode, perform the following:
1
Press “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing “OK”.
To exit scan mode and stay at the present station
perform:
1
Press the “RADIO” button.OR
2
Press the Previous button or the Next button on
the steering wheel.
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS is used by many radio stations throughout
Europe. The system provides features such as
Automatic frequency changing (AF) and trigger
signals for Traffic announcements (TA) and News.
Alternative Frequency (AF)
The range for FM stations is quite limited. For this
reason many stations transmit on alternative
frequencies in different areas. By using the AF
function, the driver can listen to such a station
continuously without retuning the radio manually
between the areas.
Some stations transmit different programs in different
areas during some part of the day. To avoid tuning
away from a locally sent program, the AF function can
be set to stay with that program by using AF LOC
(local).
Radio/CD 409
When travelling long distances the reception of a
locally sent program may be lost. In such case, using
the AF REG (regional) will allow the radio to tune to
other transmitters within that station.
When a radio search is performed the first time after
activating AF, the radio creates an internal list of
available stations. An additional search will be done
due to that list, which makes the search faster. The list
is sorted with respect to the stations’ RDS codes and
the stations may not be tuned in frequency order in an
AF search.
AF Activation
To activate or deactivate AF, perform the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “AF” is
displayed.
3
Select the AF status by pressing the “OK” button.
When AF is active, the display shows the AF icon.
Traffic Announcement (TA) and News
This feature allows the radio to play traffic or news
announcements even if the radio is in CD mode. To
ensure that the message is heard, the volume will be
automatically adjusted to the highest of the three
following volume levels:
• Volume level 10.
• The present normal volume level.
• A retained TA/News volume level.
The TA/News volume is set by adjusting the volume
during a TA/News announcement. The radio will
retain this TA/News volume setting.
Traffic Activation
There are two ways to activate the Traffic function:
Note!
1
If Traffic is active, then the AF
function will be active.
OR
Push and release the information TA button.
410 Radio/CD
1
Press the “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“TRAFFIC” is displayed.
3
Activate “TRAFFIC” by pressing “OK” button.
When Traffic is active, the display shows the
Traffic icon.
News Activation
To activate the News function, perform the following:
Note!
1
Press the “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “NEWS” is
displayed.
If News is active, then the AF
function will be active.
3
Activate “NEWS” by pressing “OK” button.
When News is active, the display shows the News
icon.
Traffic / News Announcement Rejection
To reject a current Traffic or News announcement,
Push and release the information TA button.
Enhanced Information Concerning Other
Networks (EON)
A network of stations may transmit News or Traffic
announcements on just one of its stations. The RDS
feature EON ensures that this information is received
by doing an automatic frequency change. After the
announcement the radio will return to the previous
station.
Emergency Announcement - Alarm
In the event of a major disaster, an emergency
announcement may be transmitted on the radio. When
such is received, "ALARM" is displayed and the
Volume is adjusted as for TA/News announcements.
Program type (PTY)
Some stations transmit common program types, e.g.
Sports, Drama and Finance, along with an identifying
Note!
The Traffic and/or News functions
need to be active for this feature to
work.
Radio/CD 411
signal. This allows the user to search for such
programs.
PTY Activation / Deactivation
To activate the PTY function, perform the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button on the radio.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “PTY” sub
menu and activate/deactivate by pushing the
“OK” button.
3
Activate “PTY” by pressing “OK” button.
When PTY is active, the display shows the PTY icon.
When a search is performed, this is indicated by
displaying the chosen Program type.
CD Mode
The radio is designed to work with standard CD
format and MP3 and WMA files. The CD player will
accept CD-R as well as CD-RW discs.
Switching to CD Mode
There are two ways to switch to the CD mode:
1
Push the “CD” button until CD shows on display.
OR
2
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Eject a CD
To eject a CD press the Eject button. When CD is
ejected the radio will play the previous audio source. If
the CD is not removed from the CD slot, it will
automatically reload after 15 seconds.
Changing a Track on a CD
There are two ways to change a track on a CD:
1
Push and release the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to move to the next or
previous track respectively. OR
412 Radio/CD
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to the previous or
next track respectively.
Fast Forward or Fast Reverse on a CD
Fast forwarding or reversing a CD can be performed in
one of two ways:
1
Push and hold the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to fast forward or fast reverse
respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to fast reverse or
fast forward respectively.
Playing Tracks on a CD or in Random Order
There are two possible Random settings for a CD:
Random All and Random Folder (If the content of the
CD is stored in folders). To play tracks in random
order, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“RANDOM” is displayed.
3
Activate Random by pressing the “OK” button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All and Folder.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Random
mode.
Repeating Tracks on a CD
There are three possible Repeat settings for a CD:
Repeat All, Repeat track and Repeat Folder (If the
content of the CD is stored in folders). By default,
Repeat All is active.
To change the repeat setting, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until “REPEAT”
is displayed.
Radio/CD 413
3
Enter Repeat Sub menu by pressing “OK” button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All, Track and Folder.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Repeat
mode.
Changing to another Folder on a CD
If the content of the CD is stored in folders, it is
possible to change folders directly. To do this, push
either the Up button or the Down button to move to the
next or previous album/folder respectively.
Scan a CD
When CD is scanned, the first 10 seconds of each track
is played. To activate Scan, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing“OK” button.
Scanning will stop if
1
The “ESC” or “OK” button is pressed. OR
2
All tracks are browsed through.
External audio input
There are three possible external audio input modes,
USB, iPod and Aux. A USB and an AUX device can
be connected and accessible at the same time.
However, if an iPod is connected the USB and the
AUX devices will be disabled as an available source.
USB Mode
The radio is designed to work with USB devices
formatted with the USB Mass Storage Device Class
standard. Other USB devices may still work with the
radio though. If a USB device doesn’t work properly,
try reconnecting the device which may solve the
problem in some cases.
A USB device must be connected prior to operating in
this mode.
414 Radio/CD
Switching to USB Mode
There are two ways to switch to USB mode.
1
Push the CD/AUX button until USB shows on
the display. Or
2
Connect a USB device.
Disconnecting a USB device
No special preparations are needed to disconnect the
USB device. When USB device is removed the radio
will play the previous audio source.
Changing a Track on a USB Device
There are two ways to change a track on a USB:
1
Push and release the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to move to the next or
previous track respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to the previous or
next track respectively.
Fast Reverse or Fast Forward on a USB
Device
Fast forwarding or reversing can be performed in one
of two ways:
1
Push and hold the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to fast forward or fast reverse
respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and hold
Seek buttons to move to fast reverse or fast
forward respectively.
Playing Tracks on a USB Device in Random
Order
There are two possible Random settings for a USB
device: Random All and Random Folder (If the
content of the USB device is stored in folders).
To play tracks in random order, do the following:
Radio/CD 415
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“RANDOM” is displayed.
3
Enter Random Sub menu by pressing “OK”
button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All and Folder.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Random
mode.
Repeating Tracks on a USB Device
There are three possible Repeat settings for a USB
device: Repeat All, Repeat track and Repeat Folder (If
the content of the USB device is stored in folders). By
default, Repeat All is active.
To change the repeat setting, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until “REPEAT”
is displayed.
3
Enter Repeat Sub menu by pressing "OK” button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All, Track and Folder.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Repeat
mode.
Changing to another Folder on a USB
If the content of the CD is stored in folders, it is
possible to change folders directly. To do this, push
either the Up button or Down button to move to the
next or previous album/folder respectively.
Scan a USB
When USB is scanned, the first 10 seconds of each
track is played.
To activate Scan, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing “OK” button.
416 Radio/CD
Scanning will stop when:
1
The “ESC” or “OK” button is pressed. OR
2
All tracks are browsed through.
iPod Mode
The radio supports iPod Classic, iPod Video, and iPod
nano. The iPod settings, e.g. Shuffle or Repeat, used
prior to connecting the iPod to the radio will be used
by the radio. An iPod device must be connected prior
to operating in this mode.
Connecting the iPod
Connecting the iPod can be done with twodifferent
cable sets:
• A split cable from the iPod 30-pin connector to a
USB connector and a 3.5 mm audio connector.
• A separate iPod/USB cable plus a 3.5 mm male/
male stereo audio cable connected to the iPod
earphone output. The iPod volume should in this
case be set to maximum prior to connecting to the
radio.
When the iPod is connected to the radio, the iPod’s
controls will lock. All control of the iPod is done by
the radio buttons. When in this state, the iPod will
display a Volvo logotype.
Switching to iPod Mode
There are two ways to switch to iPod mode:
1
Push the CD/AUX button until iPod shows on the
display. OR
2
Connect an iPod device.
Disconnecting the iPod device
No special preparations are needed to disconnect the
iPod device. When the iPod device is removed the
radio will play the previous audio source.
Radio/CD 417
iPod Menu
When iPod is connected and source, the user can push
and hold the “ESC” button to enter the iPod Menu.
This Menu contains some of the most common
functions used in the iPod. E.g. the user can search for
Artists and Albums, as well as starting a Playlist.
Push and hold the “ESC” button for 1 second to enter
the iPod Menu at last used level.
Push and hold the “ESC” button for 2 seconds to enter
the iPod Menu at top level.
Changing a Track on iPod
There are two ways to change a track:
1
Push and release the “OK” button or the “ESC”
button on the radio to move to the next or
previous track respectively. OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and
release Seek buttons to move to the previous or
next track respectively.
Fast Reverse or Fast Forward on an iPod
Fast forwarding or reversing can be performed in one
of two ways:
1
Push and hold the “OK” button to fastforward.
OR
2
Using the steering wheel controls: Push and hold
Seek buttons to move to fast reverse or fast
forward respectively.
Playing Tracks on iPod in Random Order
There are two possible Random settings for iPod:
Random Album and Random All.
To play songs in random order, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“RANDOM” is displayed.
Note!
Push and hold the “ESC” button will
enter the iPod menu.
418 Radio/CD
3
Enter Random Sub menu by pressing “OK”
button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All and Album.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Random
mode.
Repeating a Track on iPod
There are two possible Repeat settings for iPod:
Repeat One, and Repeat All.
To change the repeat setting, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button
2
Push Up button or Down button until “REPEAT”
is displayed.
3
Enter Repeat Sub menu by pressing “OK” button.
4
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between All, track and folder.
5
Push “OK” button to activate the desired Repeat
mode.
Scan iPod
When iPod is scanned, the first 10 seconds of each
track is played.
To activate Scan, do the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Select “SCAN” by pressing “OK” button.
Scanning will stop when:
1
The “ESC” or “OK” button is pressed. OR
2
All tracks are browsed through.
AUX Mode
To select an auxiliary audio input:
Push the “CD/AUX” button until “Aux” shows on the
display.
Radio/CD 419
An auxiliary audio input may be selected except when
in iPod mode. The output volume of the Aux device
should be set to maximum. Please note that for an Aux
device, changing tracks, fast forwarding etcetera must
be done directly on the Aux device.
Audio Settings
Adjusting Volume Up and Down
The audio systems volume can be adjusted up by
turning the Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and
adjusted down by turning the knob in a counterclockwise direction.
It can also be adjusted up and down by using the + and
— on the steering wheel controls respectively.
Adjusting Bass Up and Down
The audio systems bass can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “BASS” shows on the
display. The bass is then adjusted up by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
down by turning the knob in a counter-clockwise
direction. It can also be adjusted up and down by using
the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on the radio
respectively.
Adjusting Treble Up and Down
The audio systems treble can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “TREBLE” shows on the
display. The treble is then adjusted up by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
down by turning the Rotary knob in a counterclockwise direction. It can also be adjusted up and
down by using the “OK” button or the “ESC” button
on the radio respectively.
Adjusting Balance Left and Right
The audio systems balance can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “BALANCE” shows on the
display. The balance is then adjusted right by turning
the Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
420 Radio/CD
left by turning the Rotary knob in a counter-clockwise
direction. It can also be adjusted right and left by using
the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on the radio
respectively.
Adjusting Fader Front and Back
The audio systems fader can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “FADER” shows on the
display. The fader is then adjusted front by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
back by turning the Rotary knob in a counterclockwise direction. It can also be adjusted front and
back by using the “OK” button or the “ESC” button on
the radio respectively.
Adjusting Mid (Medium Frequency Range) Up
and Down
The audio systems fader can be adjusted by pressing
the “AUDIO” button until “MID” shows on the
display. The mid is then adjusted up by turning the
Rotary knob in a clockwise direction and adjusted
down by turning the Rotary knob in a counterclockwise direction. It can also be adjusted up and
down by using the “OK” button or the “ESC” button
on the radio respectively.
Speakers Selection fmfh mid
The audio system can be adjusted to 4 or 2 speaker
mode by performing the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“ADVANCE” is displayed.
3
Press the “OK” button to enter the Advance
submenu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until
“SPEAKERS” is displayed.
5
Change between 2CH and 4CH by pressing the
“OK” button.
Radio/CD 421
Activate Speed Dependant Volume (ASC)
The audio systems volume can be set to increase with
the speed of the vehicle. This is sometimes preferred
to compensate for road and engine sounds. The feature
can be set to three levels of sensitivity, LOW, MID
and HIGH.
To activate ASC, perform the following:
1
Press the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“ADVANCE” is displayed.
3
Press the “OK” button to enter the Advance
submenu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “ASC” is
displayed.
5
Press the “OK” button to enter the ASC
submenu.
6
Push Up button or Down button to choose
between LOW, MID and HIGH.
7
Press the “OK” button to enter the desired ASC
setting.
Bluetooth Hands free Phone Mode
The radio is designed to work with mobile phones that
support the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile 1.5. Other
Bluetooth capable mobile phones may still work with
the radio though.
To connect a mobile phone to the radio through
Bluetooth, the following steps must be completed on
the radio.
1
Activate the Bluetooth function.
2
Add the Phone.
Bluetooth Activation
The purpose of this process is to make a Bluetooth
connection possible.
1
Push the “MENU” button.
Note!
Corresponding steps have to be
taken on the mobile phone. An
added phone will be stored in a list
for quick access when connecting at
another time.
422 Radio/CD
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Hands
Free” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter the Hands Free
sub menu.
4
Push the “OK” button to activateBluetooth.
When Bluetooth is active, the display shows
an icon.
Adding a Phone
The purpose of this process is to make a connection
between the radio and a phone as well as to add a
phone to the radio phone list, in which the radio can
store up to 16 different phones.
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Hands
Free” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter the Hands Free
sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “Add
phone” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to initiate the phone
connection.
The radio will now do a search for a blue tooth phone.
This is indicated by the Bluetooth icon blinking. Note
that the phone must be in a corresponding connecting
state during this process. When a connection is
established, the user will be prompted to enter a code
on the phone. Enter code 0000 to verify connection.
Activating another Phone
The purpose of this process is to disconnect a present
bluetooth phone and establish a connection to another
phone in the phone list.
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Hands
Free” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter the Hands Free
sub menu.
Note!
If the phone list already contains 16
different phones, the message
"PHONE LIST FULL" will be
shown in the display.
Radio/CD 423
4
Push Up button or Down button until the display
shows “ChangePhName” (where “PhName” will
be the name of the presently connected phone).
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Change phone
sub menu.
6
Push Up button or Down button until the phone
name that is to be connected is displayed.
7
Push the “OK” button to connect to the other
phone.
Deleting a Phone
The purpose of this process is to delete a specific
phone from the phone list in the radio.
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Hands
Free” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter the Hands Free
sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “Edit
Phone” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Edit phone sub
menu.
6
Push Up button or Down button until the phone
name that is to be deleted is displayed.
7
Push the “OK” button to delete the phone.
8
The display will show “Delete?”. Push the “OK”
button to verify.
Deleting all Phones
The purpose of this process is to delete all phones
from the phone list in the radio.
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Hands
Free” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter the Hands Free
sub menu.
424 Radio/CD
4
Push Up button or Down button until “Edit
Phone” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Edit phone sub
menu.
6
Push Up button or Down button until “Delete
All” is displayed.
7
Push the “OK” button to delete all phones.
8
The display will show “Are U sure?”. Push the
“OK” button to verify.
Accept call
To answer an incoming phone:
1
Press the “OK” button. OR
2
Press the “YES” button on the steering wheel.
Outgoing call
Use your mobile phone to dial/connect the call. If the
mobile phone is connected to the Handsfree system the
call will be automatically transferred to the Handsfree
system.
Transfer call between Bluetooth Handsfree and
mobile phone
Press the “AUDIO” button to transfer the phone call
back and forth between the Handsfree and the mobile
phone.
End or reject call
To end a call or to reject an incoming call:
1
Press the “ESC” button. OR
2
Press the “NO” button on the steering wheel.
Note!
When leaving the truck during a call
via Bluetooth Handsfree, the call
should be manually transferred to the
mobile phone.
Radio/CD 425
Clock
Displaying the Time
By default, the time of day is displayed only when the
ignition is ON and the radio is OFF. The Clock can be
set to show the time also when radio is ON, by doing
the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “VISIBLE”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to change between ON/
OFF status.
12- or 24-Hour Format
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour mode. The
12-hour mode distinguishes between AM and PM. To
change the time format, do the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “12/24 HR”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to change between 12H or
24H options.
Setting the Clock
To set the clock manually, do the following:
Note!
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “CLOCK”
is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Clock sub menu.
Normally the time is set
automatically by the trucks system.
The option to manually set the time
will then not be available.
426 Radio/CD
4
Push Up button or Down button until “SET
TIME” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Set time sub
menu.
6
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
hours up or down respectively.
7
Push the “OK” button to set the hour and toggle
to the minute adjustment.
8
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
minutes up or down respectively.
9
Push the “OK” button to save the time and finish
the process.
Turning the alarm ON or OFF
To set turn On or Off the Alarm time, do the
following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Wake Up
Alarm” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enterWake up alarm sub
menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “On/Off” is
displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to change the alarm status.
Setting the Alarm
To set the Alarm time, do the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
2
Push Up button or Down button until “Wake up
alarm” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enterWake up alarm sub
menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “SET
TIME” is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter the Set time sub
menu
Radio/CD 427
6
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
hours up or down respectively.
7
Push the “OK” button to set the hour and toggle
to the minute adjustment.
8
Push Up button or Down button to adjust the
minutes up or down respectively.
9
Push the “OK” button to save the time and finish
the process.
Anti Theft Code (Guard)
The radio unit is set to function with only one vehicle.
The Guard feature prohibits operation of the radio
anywhere else. The Guard is automatic and no manual
handling is normally needed.
In case of malfunction
If, by some reason, the radio fails in detecting the
required vehicle, the user will be prompted to enter the
Anti Theft Code (sticker found in Drivers Handbook).
The display will then show "CODE 0000". Please note
that this is a malfunction and should be checked at an
authorized workshop. To enter the code, do the
following:
1
For the current (blinking) digit, turn the volume
knob until the right number is shown.
2
Press the power button to enter the digit.The next
digit will start to blink.
3
Repeat step 1 and 2 until all four digits has been
entered.
The user has three tries to enter the code. If these are
unsuccessful the radio will be locked for 60 minutes
until three new tries are allowed.
Deactivating Guard
It is possible to deactivate Guard, but (is) not
recommended. To deactivate the Guard function, do
the following:
1
Push the “MENU” button.
428 Radio/CD
2
Push Up button or Down button until
“ADVANCE” is displayed.
3
Push the “OK” button to enter Advance sub
menu.
4
Push Up button or Down button until “GUARD”
is displayed.
5
Push the “OK” button to enter.
6
Push the “OK” button to set Guard ON or OFF.
The user will be requested for the Anti Theft Code to
deactivate or activate Guard. The display will then
show "CODE 0000" with the first digit blinking. To
enter the code, do the following:
1
For the current (blinking) digit, turn the volume
knob until the right number is shown.
2
Press the power button to enter the digit. The
next digit will start to blink.
3
Repeat step 1 and 2 until all four digits has been
entered.
The user has three tries to enter the code. If these are
unsuccessful the radio will be locked for 60 minutes
until three new tries are allowed.
Tips and tricks
USB and MP3
• WMA and MP3 are the only formats readable by
the device.
• Playlist must be in .PLS or .M3U format.
• If the USB device does not work together with the
radio, please try to reconnect the USB device which
in some cases solves the problem.
• Some USB devices comes with extra software
installed which makes them not compatible with the
USB Mass Storage Device Class Standard. If this is
the case, formatting the USB device can sometimes
solve the problem.
Note!
Formatting the unit will erase all
data on the USB device, so make a
back-up of the data before trying this
action.
Radio/CD 429
Bluetooth
• Compatible with standard 1.5. (In order to see if
your phone supports the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Profile 1.5 please visit the Bluetooth organization
homepage, https://www.bluetooth.org/tpg/
listings.cfm, and search for the detailed
specifications of your phone. (Note that the link
above could change if the structure of the Bluetooth
homepage is updated.)) You can also contact your
cellular supplier to get the details directly from
them.
• More information at www.bluetooth.org.
iPod
• The radio is designed to support the following iPod
models (note that both older and newer generations
of these iPods may also work): iPod nano - 1st,
2nd, and 3rd generation iPod classic - 5th and 6th
generation
• iPod adapter can be found at e.g.
www.sendstation.com.
• For best performance, the iPod firmware should be
recently updated www.apple.com.
CD, MP3, and WMA
• A CD with MP3 or WMA will take several seconds
to read before it starts playing.
• For best performance, a MP3/WMA CD should not
contain other file types than MP3, WMA, M3U and
PLS.
430 Telephone
Getting started
Turning on the telephone
1
Turn the ignition key to drive or radio position.
2
Hold ON/OFF in until the green lamp lights
J3014429
Turning off the telephone
Hold ON/OFF until the telephone is turned off. The
green lamp in the button goes out.
J3014429
Telephone 431
Insert the SIM card
The telephone can be used with a mini-SIM card only.
The SIM card is provided by your network operator.
The SIM card can be mounted in only one way round
in the card slot.
J3015501
Enter your PIN code.
You will receive a PIN code together with your SIM
card that in some cases is activated when the SIM card
is inserted for the first time. You must enter your PIN
code in order to use the telephone. This code must be
entered every time the telephone is turned on. You can
turn off this code in menu 5.4
1
Enter the code
2
Press YES
If the wrong PIN code is entered too many times in
succession, the telephone will request a PUK code
instead. The PUK code is also supplied together with
your SIM card.
Change language
1
Go to telephone mode (YES)
2
Press in rapid succession (within three seconds):
>>
5
3
432 Telephone
3
Select the desired language from the list
Telephone position
Once the telephone has been turned on, the driver's
display will show information concerning the
telephone; the driver's display will be in telephone
mode.
Return to information mode by pressing NO on the
keypad or from the steering wheel by pressing the ESC
stalk switch.
The driver's display must be in telephone mode before
the telephone can be used. Go to telephone mode by
pressing YES on the keypad or from the steering
wheel, or by entering a telephone number on the
keypad.
Go to radio mode from information mode by pressing
>> or << on the steering wheel.
Go from telephone mode to
• the telephone directory with <<
• the menus with >>
• the latest dialled number with YES
Calling
Making a call
1 Go to telephone mode (YES)
2 Dial the number, including the area code
If it is wrong:
• Delete the last dialled number with CLR
• Delete a figure in the middle of the number by
stepping with the arrows until the cursor is beneath
the figure and press CLR.
The symbol that is shown when the
display is in telephone mode.
The symbol that is shown when the
display is in radio mode.
Telephone 433
3 Press YES or lift the handset
J3014428
Answering a call
Press YES or lift the handset
J3014428
Finishing a call
Press NO or replace the handset
Your sound system will return to the same volume as
before the call.
J3014427
Making an emergency call
You can always make an emergency call, even without
the ignition key and without a SIM card. The truck's
main switch must be turned on.
1
Hold ON/OFF in until the green lamp lights
434 Telephone
2
Dial the SOS number (112 in EU)
You can even dial the alarm number in the PIN
code menu.
3
Press YES on the button pad or lift the handset
Last dialled numbers
The telephone stores the last dialled number or name
automatically.
1
Go to telephone mode (YES)
2
Press YES to show the numbers
3
Move to the right number with >> and <<
4
Press YES to call the number
Telephone directory
The telephone directory can store 99 names and
numbers. Additional names and numbers can be stored
on the SIM card.
Search the directory
1
Go to telephone mode
2
Press <<
3
Press YES
4
Step through the numbers until you find the
number you want to call
5
Press YES
Search for a name
1
Go to telephone mode
2
Press <<
3
Enter the first letter or letters of the name
4
Press YES
5
Step through the names using the arrow keys
until you find the right one
6
Press YES to ring up
Telephone 435
While making a call
Change volume
The volume can be adjusted using + and - on the
steering wheel.
J6008661
Respond to call waiting during a call
Press YES to answer the call.
Press NO to decline from answering the call.
The busy tone is given to the person ringing you.
Call menu
The call menu can be accessed during a call by
pressing << or >>. Press NO to return to showing
telephone number and call time.
Menu
Note
Confidential
Turn off the microphone so that the caller cannot hear what is being said.
Hold
Disconnect the caller temporarily so that you can call a third party. When the
third party has answered, one can switch between the calls using ”Switch” or
connect them together with ”Connect”.
Handset
Use the handset
Handsfree
Using handsfree.
Memory
Go to the telephone directory.
Connect
Talk to both parties at the same time. (If two calls are being made.)
436 Telephone
Menu
Note
Switch
Switch between two calls. (If two calls are being made.)
Managing messages
There are more message functions than those
described her. See the section about menus for a list of
all the functions under menu 2, Messages. You cannot
manage messages while driving.
Write and send messages
1 Go to telephone mode (YES)
Operator
|<< Memory Menu >>|
2 Go to menu 2, "Messages"
Menu
2
|<< Messages>>|
3 Press YES
4 Go to menu 22, "Write"
Menu
|<< Write
22
>>|
5 Press YES
6 Write the message:
Press the key with the letter you want to write. Press
once for the first letter, twice for the second and so on.
Delete with ”CLR”.
Button
Character
1
[]1-?¿!¡,.:"’()
2
abc2äåàáâæç
Telephone 437
Button
Character
3
def3èéëê
4
ghi4ìíî¡
5
jkl5
6
mno6ñöòóôø
7
pqrs7ß
8
tuv8üùúû
9
wxyz9
*
Space
0
[email protected]*#&$£/%
#
Change between lower to upper case
7 Press YES
8 Select "Send" or "Save"
Saved messages can be found under menu 21, "Read",
and can be sent later.
Press several times on NO or hold NO to return to
telephone mode.
Read a message
An envelope on the display indicates an incoming
message.
Symbol for message
1 Go to menu 2, "Messages"
2 Press YES
3 Go to menu 21, "Read"
4 Press YES
5 Select which message you want to read. New
messages are marked with "N", read messages with
"R" and saved messages with "S". In addition to
whether the message is new, read or saved, the sender
of the message and when it arrived is also shown.
438 Telephone
6 Press YES
7 Read message
8 Press YES
9 Choose between delete, answer, edit, send, ring
sender or save number.
10 Press YES to select
or
Press NO to not select any alternative.
Press several times on NO or hold NO to return to
telephone mode.
Menus
Step between the menus
Go to telephone mode (YES). Press >> to access the
menus.
• Step between submenus with >> and <<
• Step from one menu to a submenu with YES
• Confirm or select by pressing YES
• Undo or say no to an alternative by pressing NO
briefly.
• Return to telephone mode by holding down NO
Telephone 439
Example:
You are in telephone mode and want to change the ring
signal.
1
Press >> to access the menus
2
Step through with >> or << until you come to menu 5,
settings
3
Press YES to select the settings menu
4
Step through until you come to the sounds submenu
5
Select the sounds submenu
6
Step through to the ring signal submenu
7
Select the ring signal submenu
8
Step through to the desired ring signal
9
Select the desired ring signal
You have now changed the ring signal. Press several times
on NO or hold NO to return to telephone mode.
Jump directly to a menu
Instead of stepping through all the menus, you can
jump directly to a menu by entering the menu number
rapidly (within three seconds).
1
Press >> to access the menu system.
2
Press the number of the desired main menu.
3
Press the number of the desired submenu.
Example:
You are in telephone mode and want to change the ring
signal. Press rapidly:
>>
5
6
2
Change to the desired ring signal
Menus, overview
Only some of the menus are available when driving.
440 Telephone
Menu
Note
1 Call log
Information on incoming and outgoing calls is stored here.
11 Missed calls
Choose between ring, save, or delete each number.
12 Received calls
Choose between ring, save, or delete each number.
13 Called numbers
Choose between ring, save, or delete each number.
14 Delete list
141 All
142 Missed
143 Received
144 Ringed
15 Message length
151 Last call
152 Number of calls
153 Total time
154 Reset
To reset the call information, you must enter the telephone code. The code is
1234 for a new telephone but can be changed in menu 552.
Menu
Note
2 Messages
If Dynafleet is on, the menu ”Messages” is inhibited and all managing of
messages is then via Dynafleet.
21 Read
New messages are marked with "N", read messages with "R" and saved
messages with "S". Any message can be deleted, answered, edited and
forwarded. The sender can be called and the number can be saved.
22 Write
23 Speech message
Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
24 Settings
241 SMSC number
The SMSC number is to your operator's message centre and is provided
together with the SIM card.
242 Validity
Specify how long the message is to be saved in the message centre. The
telephone operator will try to send the message to your telephone for as long
as the message is saved at the message centre.
Telephone 441
Menu
Note
243 Type
Specify the type of message to send.
Menu
Note
3 Edit memory
31 Add
Add a name and telephone number. Choose to save it to the telephone
memory or the SIM-card memory.
32 Search
Search using the first letter(s) of a name. Choose to edit, delete, copy or move
the number. Copying implies that the number is copied so that it is in both
telephone memory and SIM-card memory. Moving implies that the number is
moved from the telephone memory to the SIM-card memory or visa-versa.
33 Speed dial
Stores a number on a rapid dial button. First choose the speed dial button
(1-9) then search for the number in the memory to be stored on it.
34 Empty SIM
Delete all numbers stored on the SIM-card.
35 Empty memory
Delete all numbers stored in the telephone memory.
36 Status
Shows the number of used memory slots in the telephone and SIM-card
memories. The maximum number of memory slots is shown in brackets.
Menu
Note
4 Call functions
41 Send number
Select if your telephone number should be seen by the receiver when calling
from the phone.
42 Call waiting
Choose whether to answer other calls while talking in the telephone.
43 Auto-answer
Select if the telephone should answer all incoming calls automatically.
44 Auto-redial
With auto re-dial the telephone will automatically try to redial if a number is
busy.
45 Speed dial
Choose whether to allow dialling with speed dial.
46 Forwarding
Select if the call should be forwarded and to which number.
461 All calls
462 When busy
442 Telephone
Menu
Note
463 No reply
Forwarding with no reply. The number of ring signals permitted depends on
your operator.
464 Unavailable
Forwarding if the telephone is in an area of poor coverage.
465 Fax poll
Forwarding when the call comes form a fax.
466 Data poll
Forwarding when the call comes from a computer, i.e. if GSM-data is
transferred to the telephone.
467 Cancel all
Cancel all forwarding.
Menu
Note
5 Settings
51 Factory settings
Resets the telephone to the settings that applied from the factory (affects
language, operator, ring volume, ring signal, button click, speed-dependent
volume, radio auto-mute, Dynafleet)
52 Operator
Choose if the telephone should search for another operator when it cannot
find own operator or if you should select between operators available.
53 Language
Choose language.
54 SIM-security
With SIM-security "On", the PIN code must be entered every time the
telephone is switched on. With SIM-security "Off" the PIN code never needs
to be entered when the telephone is switched on. With SIM-security "Auto"
the PIN code only needs to be entered when the telephone is switched on if
the SIM-card is changed.
55 Change codes
551 PIN code
You will receive a PIN code together with your SIM card. The PIN code can
be changed here. The PIN code can be 4-8 numbers.
552 Telephone code
The telephone code is 1234 when the vehicle is delivered. You can change the
telephone code here.
56 Sound
561 Ring volume
Select the volume of the ring signal here. Change volume
with << and >>. Go back to menu "Sound" with NO.
562 Ring signal
Select ring signal.
563 Button click
Select button click on or off.
Telephone 443
Menu
Note
564 Speed-dependent volume
If Speed-dependent volume is on, then the volume will increase as the speed
increases.
565 Radio auto-mute
If Radio auto-mute is on, the radio volume is reduced to zero when the phone
rings.
57 Dynafleet status
Select if Dynafleet is connected or not. If Dynafleet status is set to connected,
all messages are managed via Dynafleet. The telephone's menu 2 is not then
available.
Measures with malfunctions
No contact with the display
If, for any reason the telephone looses contact with the
display, it will function anyway. To dial a number,
enter the number and press YES.
Faulty handsfree or handset
If the handsfree does not function, the telephone
automatically shuts off the handsfree and only the
handset can be used. The same applies if the handset
does not function.
444 Booster
Booster
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 is a premiumclass eight-channel power amplifier for motor
vehicles. If has integrated cross-overs for all channels
and a number of sub-woofer controls for individual
adjustments. The booster is factory installed and preset
to give a natural and well balanced sound.
Installation
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 is factory
installed according to Volvo's demands, which
guarantees safe use for all types of operation. Any
modifications of the factory installation can cause
damage to the booster and void the guarantee.
Methods of use
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 is safe to use
within these specifications according to Volvo's
specified methods of use.
Fuses
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 is equipped
with external fuses of 2×15 A. If the fuses should
blow, contact Volvo Action Service or a Volvo
workshop.
Indicator lamps
Volvo's multi-channel booster VA 400.8 has a green
lamp for POWER and a red lamp for PROTECTION
(protected mode). The green lamp lights when the
booster is turned on and functions normally. The red
lamp lights if the booster is in protected mode. If the
red lamp does not reset automatically after a certain
time, contact Volvo Action Service or a Volvo
workshop.
Booster 445
Subwoofer controls and switch
It is possible to make adjustments to Volvo's multichannel booster VA 400.8 to optimize the subwoofer
performance in different vehicles.
Volume: Scale range: 0 dB–12 dB steplessly
adjustable
The dot on the scale is Volvo's reference setting.
LPF: Scale range: 50 Hz–120 Hz steplessly adjustable
The dot on the scale is Volvo's reference setting.
Phase adjustment: Scale range: 0°–180° steplessly
adjustable
The dot on the scale is Volvo's reference setting.
Phase switch: Positions: NORMAL – INVERSE
NORMAL position is Volvo's reference setting.
J8011992
Fault tracing
Fault: The sound is shut off after a period of normal
use.
Information: After a very high sound level for a long
period and/or high temperature in the baggage/storage
area, the booster can go to protected mode due to
overheating. The sound is shut off and the red lamp
lights.
Action: Lower the volume on the main unit to level 10
and wait for the sound to return.
446 Booster
If the sound does not return or if Volvo's multichannel booster VA 400.8 should not function due to
another reason, contact Volvo Action Service or a
Volvo workshop.
Dynafleet 447
Dynafleet
Dynafleet is a system for transport planning combined
with vehicle planning, message handling and
automatic reporting of vehicle status and driver times.
The driver communicates continually with the office.
The traffic officer in the office can direct the vehicle to
various places for various missions. The driver can
send messages to other drivers, to the office or
privately. Contact between the driver and the office
means that much of the order administration can be
administered in a simple way and more effective
manning of transport is achieved. Communication with
the central office takes place via the GSM mobile
phone network.
The system collects information from the tachograph
and the engine control unit. Dynafleet provides the
driver with information about the vehicle and driving
activities. This makes it possible to have a better
transport administration and follow-up of the running
costs of the vehicle, the work contribution of the driver
and how economically the driver drives.
The section “Design and function” describes the most
basic functions that all drivers must be familiar with.
In the “System management” section there is a system
overview and a description of how the system is
started. The remaining sections describe the system
functions in more detail.
448 Dynafleet
Technical description
J3019628
Dynafleet comprises two units, Dynafleet Gateway
and Dynafleet Driver Tool. Dynafleet Gateway has an
assistance button located on the instrument panel.
Dynafleet Driver Tool has a keyboard and also has a
separate colour display as an option. The Dynafleet
unit is connected to various electronic control units
and the tachograph via the vehicle’s electronic
network. Communication with the central office takes
place via the GSM mobile phone network.
The Dynafleet Driver Tool is located in the instrument
panel beneath the radio. The screen is located above
Dynafleet 449
the dashboard. Dynafleet Gateway is located in the
electrical distribution box.
Driver data is logged as four different types of activity:
driving time, rest time, working time and waiting time.
While the vehicle is in motion, the activity is
automatically logged as driving time. When stationary,
the logged activity is determined by the settings on the
tachograph for driver 1. Information is taken directly
from the tachograph.
All data is transferred to the office for further
processing and follow-up. Transfer of vehicle data to
the office is performed via the GSM network. If there
is poor coverage, the information is stored temporarily
in the Dynafleet system. Basic data reports are also
transferred when required by the central office. The
GPS receiver provides the system with correct system
time and position.
Reduced functionality
The system is developed for Volvo’s FH and FM
vehicles, but can be installed in any vehicle. This will,
however, limit some of the functionality due to other
vehicles having different types of tachograph, different
electronic systems, etc., than the vehicles for which the
system has been developed.
450 Dynafleet
Controls
J3019842
1
“Esc” has two functions depending on the
situation:
• In forms where you can choose between
different values, pressing “Esc” means that you
cancels the setting.
• In other cases, pressing “Esc” moves you up a
level in the menu tree.
2
“Select” has three functions depending on the
situation:
Dynafleet 451
• With a question, pressing “Select” indicates a
Yes answer to the question.
• In forms where you can choose between
different values, pressing “Select” means that you
confirm and accept the current setting.
• In a menu, pressing “Select” moves you to the
active option, i.e. the highlighted submenu with
white text on a black background.
3
IR receiver, receives signals from the keypad.
4
“Arrow keys, right, left, up and down”, moves
the cursor in the selected direction.
5
IR transmitter, transmits signals to the Dynafleet
unit.
Keyboard
Use the keyboard to type messages. Do no expose the
keyboard to sunlight, damp, moisture or dirt.
The IR transmitter on the keyboard must be directed
towards the IR receiver on the Dynafleetunit when
you type.
To switch between QWERTY and Cyrillic on the
keyboard, press ALT and SHIFT at the same time, or
CTRL and SHIFT at the same time.
Four-way directional cross
The standard functions in Dynafleet can be performed
using the joystick which is located on the dashboard,
near the steering wheel.
Care of the plastic casing and IR transmitter/
receiver
Clean with ordinary cleaning agents for vehicle
interiors. Try first on a small area that is not visible so
that the surface is not damaged.
Check that the lenses on the IR transmitter and the IR
receiver are clean, if the system does not react to
keyboard messages. The lenses should be cleaned with
a soft, clean and slightly damp cloth.
Note!
The keypad can only be used while
the truck is stationary. Store the
keypad in the glove compartment in
the radio shelf while travelling. The
keypad is then protected against the
sun and will not move when braking
suddenly or in a collision.
452 Dynafleet
Emergency alarm button
There is an emergency alarm button in the instrument
panel or on the radio shelf. The button must be held
pressed in for at least three seconds for an alarm
message to be sent. Depending on the settings for the
office the request is sent to the office and
VAS (Volvo Action Service) or Security Services. If
the tool Dynafleet Driver is installed in the vehicle,
pop-up messages inform the driver of status updates
for the ongoing request.
Extra equipment:
After using the emergency button or writing an
assistance request you will always be called by an
operator on a telephone number specified in the
Dynafleet online portal. The intention of the call is to
get confirmation of the action you initiated. If you do
not receive such call within reasonable time, your
initial request might have failed because of influences
beyond our control. We then recommend trying to
reach our services via more conventional methods.
J3011613
Note!
The emergency assistance button
only functions when the system is
switched on or during standby. We
advice adjusting the standby time to
a suitable level to secure availability
of the feature. (Standby time is
configurable in the Dynafleet online
portal. Check with the administrator
to make these changes).
Display
J3015818
Dynafleet 453
The screen is mounted above the dashboard. The
screen pops up or drops down automatically when the
system is started or stopped.
Use a clean, soft and slightly damp cloth to clean the
screen glass. Other plastic components can be cleaned
with ordinary cleaning agents for car interiors.
Menus and symbols
The menus vary in appearance. The relevant symbols
and functions are
described below.
Standard menu
1
Symbol that indicates which part of the system
you are viewing, i.e. Mail, Log, or Settings
Menu.
2
Unread messages, shows that there are one or
more messages in the message list.
3
The lower icon shows the GSM signal strength
and the upper shows GPRS signal strength.
4
The currently active alternative is shown as white
text on a black background.
5
Scroll-strip that shows if there is more
information available. Depress "down" to show
the information.
Note!
Make sure the screen is not exposed
to fluids.
454 Dynafleet
J3019630
Using the menus
The example below describes how the menus in
Dynafleet are used. The example shows how to send
an SMS.
1
Set the cursor on "Mail" using the arrow keys.
2
Press "Select" to activate the mail menu.
3
Set the cursor on "Write new" using the arrow
keys.
4
Press "Select" to continue.
5
Set the cursor on "SMS (standard characters)"
using the arrow keys.
6
Press "Select" to write a new SMS.
7
Type in telephone number and message. Move
the cursor between the different fields using the
arrow keys.
8
Move the cursor to "Send" using the arrow keys.
Dynafleet 455
9
Press "Select" to send the message.
Starting the system
1
Turn the starter key. The system will start
automatically when the key is in the radio
position. The colour screen rises.
2
The system will automatically identify the driver
by reading the driver card in the digital
tachograph.
3
After the greeting you can begin to work with the
system.
1
Turn the starter key. The system will start
automatically when the key is in the radio
position.
2
The system will automatically identify the driver
by reading the driver card in the digital
tachograph.
3
After the greeting you can begin to work with the
system.
1
Turn the starter key. The system will start
automatically when the key is in the radio
position. The colour screen rises.
2
If the truck has an analogue tachograph, the
driver is identified by logging in on the
Dynafleet Driver Toolunit with information from
the office.
3
After the greeting you can begin to work with the
system.
1
Turn the starter key. The system will start
automatically when the key is in the radio
position.
2
If the truck has an analogue tachograph, the
driver is identified by logging in on the
Dynafleet Driver Toolunit with information from
the office.
456 Dynafleet
3
After the greeting you can begin to work with the
system.
Shutting off the system — stand by
When the key is turned to 0, the system goes to the
standby mode. The screen shuts off and drops down if
it is not already down. The system continues to log
data when it is in the standby mode. After 2 hours (or
some other time decided by the office) in standby
mode, the system goes to a rest mode and stops
logging data. The system can thereafter be woken up
by an SMS, e.g. with temperature logging or location
logging (the system is woken up by GSM
communication).
The system is shut down completely only when the
main switch is turned off. In this state, Dynafleet
cannot receive GSM communications.
Transferring data
The data collected and saved in the system is
transferred to the fleet office where it is compiled and
documented. Information is transferred to the office
via the GSM network.
Caution!
Wait for 3 minutes after you have
stopped driving before you switch
off the main electrical supply,
otherwise data can be lost. Read
more about how you switch off
the main electrical supply in the
“Driver instructions” section.
Dynafleet 457
General
The main menu consists of the following menu
choices:
Mail
Receive, send and manage messages.
Drive/rest time
Shows driving and rest times.
Orders
Receive and manage incoming orders.
Log
Shows the vehicle's log.
Emergency & Assist.
Shows status of on going Emergency assistance call.
Send, view status of an Assistance call.
Dynafleet
Mail
Drive/rest time
Orders
Log
Emergency & Assist.
Tacho. Remote dl.
Settings
Shut down
Tacho. Remote dl.
Initiates driver card data or tachograph mass memory
remote download and displays data transfer statuses.
Settings
Managing settings in Dynafleet.
Shut down
Puts Dynafleet in standby mode
Mail
In the mail menu, the driver can receive, send and
manage messages.
When the Dynafleet-unit has received one or more
messages, the symbol for new message is shown in the
upper right of the display and the speaker sounds if it
is switched on.
It is always possible to send simple text messages
between the vehicle and the office. The office can
decide to activate SMS, E-mail or formatted messages
(predefined form to fill out).
J3011516
458 Dynafleet
Mail menu
The mail menu consists of the following menu
selections:
Meddelanden
Write new
Write new
Write a new mail. Choose between message to office,
SMS or E-mail.
Inbox
Inbox
Read and manage received messages. Navigate to the
position information if the GPS coordinator is
connected to the mail menu (see the Navigation
section).
Outbox
Read and manage sent messages.
Draft
Manage drafts.
Sent
Manage sent messages.
Address book
Manage contacts in the address book.
Two types of SMS characters that can be used
There are two types of text messages that can be used.
• Standard characters - Uses standard GSM
characters which are not supported in all languages
but are compatible with all mobile phones.
• Extended characters - Uses unicode which supports
all languages. The message is shorter and the user
should make sure that the receiver's mobile phone
is compatible to receive this type of SMS message.
Navigate to destination using navigation
The Dynafleet unit needs to be connected to a
compatible navigation device. Contact your local
dealer for more information.
Outbox
Draft
Sent
Address book
Dynafleet 459
If a message from the office contains position
information, this can be sent to the navigation device
from the unit. This is done from the message menu
(press enter when viewing the message): a "Navigate
to..." command can be selected to push the destination
to the navigation device.
General driving and resting times
The “Drive/rest time” menu is used to facilitate the
observance of driving time regulations. The function is
adapted to work in accordance with EU driving time
regulations together with the tachograph. The settings
can be changed and allow different driving times from
the office.
Main menu – Drive/rest time
The Drive/rest time menu consists of the following
menu items:
Show driver activities, shows the times for all
ongoing and accumulated times for driver activities.
Enter detailed driver activities, used by the driver to
set a detailed activity while he is not driving.
The lower part of the display shows ongoing activities:
TCO: current activity on the tachograph, accumulated
activity time and ongoing activity time.
DTJ: current activity, accumulated activity time and
ongoing activity time.
460 Dynafleet
Main menu – View driver activities
If any regulation is about to be broken, a warning is
shown in the display. The office unit can be used to set
how long before a regulation is broken a warning
should be given.
Break time
Time with activity Resting or Waiting since the
current break period was started. A new break period
starts when activity Driving or Working is detected.
Continuous driving
Sum of Driving time since last qualified break time. It
shall not exceed 4h30. It is reset to zero after 45
minutes or 15+30minutes of break time.
Continuous resting
Duration of qualified break time. It adds times when
exceeding the minimum breaks times (15, 30 or 45
minutes).
Daily driving
Sum of Driving time since the current driving session
was started. A new daily driving session starts the first
time activity Driving is detected after the daily rest
condition is fulfilled.
1 week driving time
Displays the total driving time for the current week.
Starts after a weekly rest. The maximum is 6
continuous driving sessions within a week.
Show driver activities
Break time
01:00
Continuous driving
04:15
Continuous resting
00:30
Daily driving
08:45
1 week driving time
20:0
2 week driving time
75:0
Daily resting
01:30
Dynafleet 461
2 weeks driving time
Displays the total driving time for two weeks (last and
current week). The time is not to exceed 90 hours.
Daily resting
Cumulated resting time between two driving sessions.
Shall be at least 9h (short daily rest) or 11h.
Detailed driver activity
The detailed driver activity must first be enabled by
the office before it can be used. It allows the driver to
specify activity in addition to the tachograph resting/
waiting/working activities. The select activity is
reported back to the office. It can be selected in the
"Set driver activity detail" menu or in the pop up
window when turning key off. The activity ends when
selecting another one or on driving.
Calculation of driving times at not affected by the
selection of a detailed driver activity with the
exception of “Ferry”. The “Ferry” activity should be
selected before going on ferry or train to comply with
EU regulations.
Orders
An order consists of the assignment, location,
allocation status, planned arrival time and planned
departure time. An order can be accepted or rejected
by the driver. The driver can also report about an
order's progress through the order status. When an
order is received, an icon is shown at the top of the
screen.
The appearance of the orders is decided individually
by each office.
Navigation (accessory)
The Dynafleet unit must be connected to a compatible
navigation unit. Contact your local dealer for more
information.
J200701
462 Dynafleet
If an order from the office contains position
information, this can be sent to the navigation system
from the unit. This is done from the menu where the
order is accepted. This selection is only available if the
order has been accepted. The selection is made by
pressing “Select” when the destination address is
highlighted.
Logs
Go to the journal menus by pressing the function key
with the journal symbol or via the main menu.
From the main menu in the journal you can reach all
accessible journals in the system .
Log
Trip log 1
Trip log 2
Vehicle long-term log
Temperature
1 Reset: 2008-06-03, 09:49
Vehicle log active
2 Reset: 2008-06-03, 15:02
Vehicle log paused
Dynafleet 463
Vehicle log 1 and 2
Shows accumulated vehicle data in absolute values
and % of the distance since the last reset while active
(not paused).
Trip log 1
Distance
438.1 km
Fuel
163.2 litres
Average fuel consumption
37.2 l/100
km
Idling
21%
PTO
0%
AdBlue
6.2 litres
Economy zone
69%
Overspeed zone
1%
Rolling with engine
disengaged
9%
Cruise control
22%
Speed limit exceeded
2%
Top gear
42%
Vehicle long-term log
The vehicle long-term log shows the accumulated
values for distance, fuel consumption and average fuel
consumption.
Vehicle long-term log
Distance
11523.2 km
Consumption
36814.8 l
Average fuel consumption
37.3 l/100
km
464 Dynafleet
Temperature
Requires extra equipment connected to Dynafleet unit.
Contact your local dealer for more information.
Temperature
This shows the temperature in the trailer. Up to four
different temperatures can be shown, depending on
how many sensors there are.
Temperature 1
-18 ºC
Temperature 2
-7 ºC
If a sensor has an alarm function, this is shown in red
figures or with an exclamation mark (!), depending on
which display the truck is fitted with
Temperature 3
+4 ºC
Temperature 4
+12 ºC !
Trailer doors
Closed
Defroster status
On
Reset: 2008-06-02, 09:49
Shows the latest resetting date/time and allows the
driver to reset the corresponding vehicle log.
Vehicle log active or vehicle log
paused
Used by the driver to change between paused and
active vehicle log.
Driver coaching
Driver coaching must first be activated by the office. It
helps the driver to improve the fuel consumption by
suggesting different actions in the pop-up window
such as e.g.
• “You have been idling too long. Please turn off
ignition.”
• “Shift up to improve fuel economy”
• “You are driving too fast. Please slow down.”
Dynafleet 465
Emergency & Assistance
Assistance request
Send a request for assistance. Enter necessary
information in the free-text field.
Assistance status
This shows the status for sent assistance request: time
it has been initiated, time received by office, time is
has been attended to and the requesting driver name.
Emergency & Assistance
Assistance request
Assistance status
Emergency status
Emergency status
This shows the status for sent emergency assist
request: time it has been initiated, time received by
office, time is has been attended to and the requesting
driver name. Read more about the emergency
assistance button, “Emergency assistance button” on
page 452.
Statuses are erased 7 days after a request is initiated.
The message is then “No ongoing request”.
On any status change, a pop up window will inform
the driver of the new status.
Tachograph download menu
Tacho. Remote dl.
Go to the tachograph remote download menus via the
main menu.
This function requires to have a digital tachograph
supporting the remote download feature installed in
the vehicle and the service to be enabled. Contact your
local dealer for more information. This menu is not
displayed if the function is not available.
An icon on the status bar informs the user of an
ongoing remote download process running in the
background. If the process fails, a specific icon is
displayed and details are avaible in Driver or
Tachograph data status menus.
Tacho. Remote dl.
Initiate driver card dl.
Driver data status
Initiate tacho. mem. dl.
Tachograph data status
This icon informs the user of an
ongoing remote download process in
the background.
466 Dynafleet
This icon shows that the download
process failed. Details are avaible in
Driver or Tachograph data status
menus.
Initiate driver card dl.
Initiates a driver card data download from the
tachograph to the office. A maximum of one transfer
per day is allowed. Once initiated the process runs in
the background and status is reported through popups
and Driver data status menu.
This function requires the driver to be logged in on the
Driver Tool using his driver card inserted in the
tachograph (driver slot).
Greyed menu item means this function is disabled by
office.
EU regulations require at least one transfer every 28
days or more frequent depending on country specific
regulations.
Driver data status
This menu informs the driver about driver data
transfers:
• Current ongoing transfer: which driver has initiated
the transfer and current status.
• Date of last successful transfer.
• Days since last data available at the office.
• Last warning message and date it was received.
Initiate tacho. mem. dl.
Initiates a tachograph mass memory download from
the tachograph to the office. A maximum of one
transfer per day is allowed. Once initiated the process
runs in the background and status is reported through
popups and Tachograph data status menu.
Dynafleet 467
Greyed menu item means this function is disabled by
office.
EU regulations require at least one transfer every 90
days.
Tachograph data status
This menu informs the driver about tachograph mass
memory transfers:
• Current ongoing transfer: which driver has initiated
the transfer and current status.
• Date of last successful transfer.
• Days since last data available at the office.
• Last warning message and date it was received.
Settings
The settings menu gives access to all adjustable
system parameters. To alter a setting, press “Select” on
the setting that is to be altered and scroll between the
alternatives shown using the arrow keys. Press
“Select” to accept the highlighted setting. The
following alternatives can be selected in the settings
menu:
Screen saver, adjusts the delay before the screen saver
is activated or turns the function off.
Language, selects desired language
Settings
Screen saver
▼
Language
▼
Units
▼
Volume
▼
Brightness
▼
Backlight
▼
Units, selects between European, British or American
units.
Keyboard
▼
Volume, adjusts the speaker volume.
System information
Brightness, adjusts the screen brightness.
Back lighting, adjusts the screen backlight.
Keyboard, selects the keyboard layout.
System information, shows the hardware version,
software version, serial number, information about
tachograph, information about connected USB units
and information about connected navigation devices.
468 Dynafleet
System errors and warnings
If a fault occurs, a fault message is shown on the
screen. Usually you acknowledge that you have read a
fault, warning or message by pressing "Esc". The
message will then disappear although the problem will
still be present and should be rectified as soon as
possible.
Driver Time Warning pop ups
A "Driver Time Warning" pop up appears showing the
rule about to be broken (rule name and remaining
time) or already broken (rule followed by "broken"
and exceeding time). Supported warnings are:
• Continuous driving time
• Daily driving time
• 1 week driving time
• 2 week driving time
• Daily resting
Driver Time Information pop ups
• You must make up rest time during the week.
• Normal daily rest is 11 hours. This period was a
reduced daily rest period.
Driver Time Management pop ups
• Was last rest a weekly rest?
• Normal weekly rest is 45 hours. OK to consider this
rest period as a weekly rest?
Tachograph download warning pop
ups
A "Driver data warning" pop up appears when no
driver data have been successfully transferred to office
since a long time (threshold is setup by office):
Dynafleet 469
• Driver data has not been transferred since more
than XX days. Proceed now?
A "Tachograph data warning" pop up appears when no
tachograph data have been successfully transferred to
office since a long time (threshold is setup by office):
• Tachograph data has not been transferred since
more than xx days. Proceed now?
Tachograph download information pop
ups
• Remote download process is being initiated. Please
wait…
• Data transfer is only allowed once a day. Proceed
now?
• Transfer ongoing, refer to status menu for further
updates.
Tachograph download error pop ups
• No link with office. Please retry later!
• Failed: login with driver card is required to perform
data transfer.
• Failed: data has already been transfered today.
470 External equipment
Roof air deflector, setting instructions
The following requirements must be met to obtain
correct adjustment and effect from the roof spoiler:
• The truck must be parked on a flat surface.
• The tyres must have the correct tyre pressure.
• Trucks with air suspension must have the correct
pressure in the compressed air system.
• The cab hinges must be intact.
• Neither driver or passenger may be inside the cab
during adjustment of settings.
Clarifications
H = difference between H1 and H2.
H1 = height of body. Measurement should be made
from the top of the chassis, or from the ground to the
top of the body.
H2 = cab height. Measurement should be made from
the top of the chassis (compare H1) and to the upper
edge
of the rain gutter on the rear of the cab.
G = distance between the cab rear side (at rain gutter)
and body front side.
A = adjustment stay.
A1 = top hole of stay.
Calculation example
An FH with long low cab has:
H1 = 3700, H2 = 2750
H = H1 – H2 = 950
G = 700
Enter the values in the diagram for an FH with long
low cab and read off. In this case field A4. Therefore
use hole A4. If the read-off point approaches the upper
border line of the field, choose the next field.
Note!
If any of the values are changed, a
new setting of the spoiler must be
made.
External equipment 471
J8010117
472 External equipment
Short low cab FH
External equipment 473
Long low cab FH
J8009974
474 External equipment
Globetrotter FH
J8010407
External equipment 475
Low roof spoiler
J8010408
476 External equipment
Roof air deflector, setting instructions
The following requirements must be met to obtain
correct adjustment and effect from the roof spoiler:
• The truck must be parked on a flat surface.
• The tyres must have the correct tyre pressure.
• Trucks with air suspension must have the correct
pressure in the compressed air system.
• The cab hinges must be intact.
• Neither driver or passenger may be inside the cab
during adjustment of settings.
Clarifications
H = difference between H1 and H2.
H1 = height of body. Measurement should be made
from the top of the chassis, or from the ground to the
top of the body.
H2 = cab height. Measurement should be made from
the top of the chassis (compare H1) and to the upper
edge
of the rain gutter on the rear of the cab.
G = distance between the cab rear side (at rain gutter)
and body front side.
A = adjustment stay.
A1 = top hole of stay.
Calculation example
An FH with long low cab has:
H1 = 3700, H2 = 2750
H = H1 – H2 = 950
G = 700
Enter the values in the diagram for an FH with long
low cab and read off. In this case field A4. Therefore
use hole A4. If the read-off point approaches the upper
border line of the field, choose the next field.
Note!
If any of the values are changed, a
new setting of the spoiler must be
made.
External equipment 477
J8010117
478 External equipment
Globetrotter XL FH
First choose which diagram to use:
A = “With accessory parts”
B = “With supplied upper stay”
C = “Lower stay in normal position”
D = “Lower stay in delivery position”
J8010116
External equipment 479
Lower stay in delivery position
J8010406
480 External equipment
Lower stay in normal position
J8010404
External equipment 481
With supplied upper stay
J8010405
482 External equipment
With accessory parts
J8009980
External equipment 483
Roof air deflector, setting instructions
The following requirements must be met to obtain
correct adjustment and effect from the roof spoiler:
• The truck must be parked on a flat surface.
• The tyres must have the correct tyre pressure.
• Trucks with air suspension must have the correct
pressure in the compressed air system.
• The cab hinges must be intact.
• Neither driver or passenger may be inside the cab
during adjustment of settings.
Clarifications
H = difference between H1 and H2.
H1 = height of body. Measurement should be made
from the top of the chassis, or from the ground to the
top of the body.
H2 = cab height. Measurement should be made from
the top of the chassis (compare H1) and to the upper
edge
of the rain gutter on the rear of the cab.
G = distance between the cab rear side (at rain gutter)
and body front side.
A = adjustment stay.
A1 = top hole of stay.
Calculation example
An FM with long low cab has:
H1 = 3700, H2 = 2750
H = H1 – H2 = 950
G = 700
Enter the values in the diagram for an FM with long
low cab and read off. In this case it is field A2.
Therefore use hole A2. If the read-off point
approaches the upper border line of the field, choose
the next field.
Note!
If any of the values are changed, a
new setting of the spoiler must be
made.
484 External equipment
J8010118
External equipment 485
Short low cab FM
J8009970
486 External equipment
Long low cab FM
J8009971
External equipment 487
Globetrotter FM
J8009972
488 External equipment
Globetrotter LXL FM
(Standard)
G
A2
H1
H2
A10
H=H1 H2
950
850
A10
A9
A8
A7
750
650
A6
A5
A4
A3
550
450
350
100 200
A2
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100 1200 1300
G
J163986
External equipment 489
(Long stanchions. Only in certain markets.)
G
A1
H1
H2
A11
H=H1 H2
1200
1100
A11
0
A1 9
A 7
A 8
A
1000
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
900
800
A1
700
600
100 200
300
400
500
600
700
800
G
900 1000 1100 1200 1300
J172205
490 External equipment
Front mirror
When machine washing the cab, make sure the front
mirror is not damaged. The mirror, sun shade and roof
of the cab can be damaged in a machine wash with a
front brush. To avoid this, strap the mirror in place to
e.g. a handle on the front of the cab.
External equipment 491
Ladder
Important ! Fix the ladder securely.
J8008441
J8008440
492 External equipment
Warning!
You should never climb on the
ladder when it is mounted on the
cab.
Side underrun guard
Extend the side underrun guard
1
Pull up the pins
2
Extend the side underrun guard
J0010429
Note!
Do not pull on the side skirt.
External equipment 493
Remove the side underrun guard
1
Extend the side underrun guard
2
Remove any lamps fitted to the side skirt
3
Loosen the wire holding the side underrun guard
4
Pull the side underrun guard straight up
J0010431
Note!
If the truck is to be driven without
the side underrun guard, remove the
rear bracket as well.
Install the side underrun guard
Check that:
• the guard fits down into the lower groove properly
• the wires are in place
• the locking pins fit into the holes correctly
494 External equipment
Lower the spare wheel
First check that the tensioning strap
• is mounted
• is intact, including the seams
• has a knot in the roller
• is properly coiled on the roller
• tighten the strap if required
J0010180
Stand outside the wheel's radius.
Loosen all four nuts.
A sleeve for loosening the nuts and a crank for
lowering the wheel are in the vehicle's tool equipment.
J0010182
External equipment 495
Raise the spare wheel
First check that the tensioning band
• is mounted
• is complete, including the seam
• has a knot in the roller
• is properly coiled on the roller
Tighten the band if necessary.
J0010181
If the vehicle has a side underrun guard or chassis
skirt, use the inner hole (A) on the holder.
Lay the wheel straight under the holder. Do not pull it
in with the winch.
Tighten all four nuts to 400 Nm.
A crank for lifting up the wheel, and sleeve for
tightening the nuts are in the vehicle's tool equipment.
J0010183
496 External equipment
Spare wheel retainer behind the cab
The spare wheel retainer is mounted behind the cab
and the spare wheel is winched down on the right-hand
side of the truck.
3
In the event of a puncture, try to park the truck on
level, solid ground, leaving sufficient space to be able
to winch down the wheel.
Take care not to slip when standning on the chassis
frame.
1
Tubular stay
2
Attachment cross
3
Winch
4
Strap
5
Attachment bar
6
Clevis pin and split pin
Check that the strap is undamage and that the stitching
is not broken.
Check the knot in the winch roller.
Check the clevis pin and split pin which holds the
lever.
Check that the strap does not lie in the split in the rim
or has fastened round the air valve.
Check that the strap is correctly wound onto the
winch. Tension the strap if necessary. The crank is
included in the truck tool kit.
4
2
5
1
6
External equipment 497
1
Unscrew the M20 bolt on the attachment cross
approx. 15 mm.
Turn the attachment bar 90° and pass it between
the spare wheel retainer stays.
mm
15
90
Caution!
Hold the socket and T-bar at
right angles to the bolt to avoid
it slipping and causing possible
injury.
Caution!
The wheel may move,
depending on the angle of the
parked truck. Take care that
hands etc are not trapped.
498 External equipment
2
Remove the three M10 bolts which hold the
tubular stay. Remove the stay.
3
Unwind the strap on the winch so that the wheel
can be rolled out to the edge of the retainer. The
strap should be stretched in this position. Check
that the wheel can be winched down to the ground
without any risk of passing traffic.
90°
Caution!
Avoid holding a ahand on the
upper edge of the retainer
(under the winch) as there is a
risk of fingers being trapped by
the lever.
4
Winch the wheel down to the ground. Remove the
support strap.
External equipment 499
Winching up and securing the wheel
Place the support strap round the wheel.
Carry out similar function checks to those prior to
lowering the wheel.
Place the wheel at right angles to the truck direction of
travel.
Winch up the wheel until it rests steadily on the
retainer.
Do not remove the support strap from the wheel.
Move the wheel into position. Make sure that the
complete wheel stands upright against the spare wheel
retainer stays. Wind in the strap.
Fit the attachment bar and attachment cross against the
retrainer and rim.
Check that the lugs that hold the attachment bar in
place are outside the spare wheel retainer stays.
Torque-tighten the bolt to 80 ± 20 Nm.
Fit the tubular stay to the spare wheel retainer.
Caution!
Avoid holding a hand on the
upper edge of the retainer (under
the winch) as there is a risk of
fingers being trapped by the
lever.
Turntable, general advice
Volvo use turntables from several different
manufacturers. An instruction for the turntable is
attached to the turntable handle when the truck is
supplied from the factory. If the instructions are
missing, contact your Volvo dealer who can help you
get hold of a new instruction. Follow the general
advice in this instruction until you receive the
instructions from the supplier.
Note!
Only use the general instructions
until you receive the instructions
from the supplier.
500 External equipment
Operation
Turntables can have somewhat different designs,
depending on the manufacturer. A common feature is
that all have a handle for releasing the trailer coupling
and a safety inhibitor to prevent the handle from
accidently releasing the coupling. Make sure that the
handle is secured by the inhibitor before driving away.
Care
Turntables made from steel plate or with surfaces of
another metallic material shall be greased before the
first coupling. The surface shall be completely covered
in grease and more grease shall be added if the metal
surface becomes visible. Follow the advice in the
suppliers instructions when you receive them.
The turntable requires a lithium-based grease with
NLGI 2 consistency, e.g. Volvo grease 2 EP.
Couple the trailer
On trucks with the battery box at the rear it is
especially important to follow these instructions when
coupling or uncoupling a trailer.
Danger!
Make sure that the handle is
secured by the inhibitor before
driving away.
External equipment 501
Couple a trailer
1
Position the tractor and trailer on a level, even
surface.
2
Make sure the trailer cannot roll.
3
Unlock the fifth wheel.
4
Make sure the trailer's slide plate is 20–50 mm
lower than the truck's fifth wheel. See the
illustration on the right.
5
Reverse the truck.
6
Make sure the fifth wheel is properly locked, and
to check, jerk the truck forward just once.
7
Fold up the support legs.
8
Connect the air and electricity supplies.
J9008577
502 External equipment
Uncoupling a trailer
1
Position the tractor and trailer on a level, even
surface.
2
Make sure the trailer cannot roll.
3
Lower the support legs to the correct position.
4
Lower the truck's rear air suspension so that a
space of 20–50 mm is created between the fifth
wheel and the trailer sliding plate. See the
illustration on the right.
5
Disconnect the air and electricity supplies.
6
Unlock the fifth wheel.
J9008576
Moving the turntable
1
Release the inhibitor with the switch in the cab
2
Keep the trailer stationary with the trailer brake
3
Move the truck carefully
J9008326
External equipment 503
Danger!
Make sure that there is no one
between the tractor and the trailer
before you move the turntable.
504 Maintenance
General information
Driver instruction Maintenance contains information
about preventive measures that the driver should take
in order for the truck to be used in traffic in a safe way
with maximum reliability. The maintenance in this
instruction is however not totally inclusive. Many
more points are included in the service provided by
Volvo's workshops.
When a truck is purchased, a maintenance program is
created. The program is based on vehicle type, driving
conditions, oil grades, etc and is unique for every
truck. If the conditions that applied when the
maintenance program was created should change, the
maintenance program must also be changed. Contact
your Volvo dealer.
For complete information about lubrication points, oils
and fluids, service intervals, Basic service and Full
service, refer to Volvo's service literature which can be
ordered from your Volvo dealer together with Volvo's
complete assortment of lubricants.
Checks before driving
These points are included in the daily inspection. See
"Driver service" in the folder's plastic sleeve for the
check list.
• Apply the parking brake
• Switch on the lighting
• Turn on the hazard warning lights
1 Control and warning lamps on the instrument panel
shall work
2 Headlights and other lighting shall function
3 There shall not be any stones in the tyres
Maintenance 505
4 There shall not be any condensation in the air tanks
Drain the air tanks to check that
there is no condensation water.
Water in the air tanks is a sign that
the air drier is not functioning.
5 There shall not be water in the fuel water-separator,
if such is fitted. The symbol for water-in-fuel shall not
light in the display. If the symbol should light, the
water separator must be drained
6 Windscreens and rear view mirrors shall be whole
and clean
7 The trailer coupling shall be in good condition
8 The load shall be properly secured
9 The coolant level
The coolant level with a cold engine shall lie between
the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. Fill
with coolant, Volvo recommend ready-mixed Volvo
Coolant VCS. If there is good quality water available,
concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS mixed with water
can be used instead.
Always use Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains an
anti-corrosion agent especially adapted to suit Volvo
engines. Mixing with other types of coolant can result
in inferior anti-corrosive properties resulting in
damage to the engine.
J2017318
506 Maintenance
Note!
Never mix Volvo Coolant VCS with
other coolants or anti-corrosive
agents. This could damage the
engine.
Make sure the filler and pressure
caps are tightened securely by hand.
9 The coolant level
The coolant level with a cold engine shall lie between
the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. Fill
with coolant, Volvo recommend ready-mixed Volvo
Coolant VCS. If there is good quality water available,
concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS mixed with water
can be used instead.
Always use Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains an
anti-corrosion agent especially adapted to suit Volvo
engines. Mixing with other types of coolant can result
in inferior anti-corrosive properties resulting in
damage to the engine.
J2017422
Tilt the cab for filling.
Note!
Never mix Volvo Coolant VCS with
other coolants or anti-corrosive
agents. This could damage the
engine.
Make sure the filler and pressure
caps are tightened securely by hand.
Maintenance 507
10 Engine oil level
The dipstick is secured. Bend the dipstick slightly
downwards and then pull it out. Make sure the dipstick
is secured again after checking the oil level.
The distance between markings on the dipstick
corresponds to 6-8 litres of oil depending on the
version.
The oil level can also be checked on the driver
information display.
J2017384
Note!
The level must never drop below the
bottom mark! Top up with oil when
the level approaches the bottom
mark. Do not overfill!
On a run-in engine, the normal oil
level is between the min and max
marks on the dipstick.
10 Engine oil level
The dipstick is secured. Bend the dipstick slightly
downwards and then pull it out. Make sure the dipstick
is secured again after checking the oil level.
The distance between markings on the dipstick
corresponds to 6-8 litres of oil depending on the
version.
The oil level can also be checked on the driver
information display.
J2017385
508 Maintenance
Note!
The level must never drop below the
bottom mark! Top up with oil when
the level approaches the bottom
mark. Do not overfill!
On a run-in engine, the normal oil
level is between the min and max
marks on the dipstick.
11 Washer fluid level
The washer fluid tank serves both the headlight and
windscreen washers. The tank holds 15 litres of
washer fluid. Use Volvo washer fluid, available from
Volvo dealers. Follow the directions on the package.
J1007366
The washer liquid tank is under the
service hatch.
12 Instruments shall be complete and there shall be no
cracks in the glass
13 All controls shall be complete and easily operated
14 No faults shall be active in the driver display
15 No faults shall be active on the tachograph
16 The brake pressure shall be sufficiently high
Checks when fuelling
Always fill up the tank! (Double tanks, connected to
each other, should be filled up separately.) Fill up the
tank(s) after the days work to avoid condensation in
the fuel tanks, due to temperature variations.
Maintenance 509
1 Clutch fluid level
Check that the fluid level is between the min and max
marks. Top up with fluid as necessary. Dirty or
incorrect fluid may cause serious faults.
Fill up with the correct clutch fluid: Brake fluid as per
standard DOT 4 (SAE J 1703)
J0008165
Note!
Fill the fluid carefully. Tighten the
reservoir cap well. Any fluid that
runs out can damage the paintwork.
2 Tyre pressure (at least every fortnight)
For tyre pressures, refer to “Recommended tyre
pressures”
Changing wiper blades
1
Lift the wipers off the windscreen.
2
Press in the plastic catch (1).
3
Push the wipers away from the wiper arm (2).
Push down the washer nozzle if it is in the
way.
J0008264
510 Maintenance
Replace the battery in the remote control
The remote control for the central locking system and
possibly an alarm uses a 3 volt battery, type CR 2032.
Replace the battery once a year.
Batteries can be purchased at your local Volvo dealer.
Old batteries should be left for recycling.
J8010734
Changing bulbs
Headlights
1
Switch off the main electrical supply.
2
Open the door.
3
Open the hatch by the upper foot step.
4
Pull the locking tab towards you and press in
the clips in the hatch (so that the headlamp
releases).
5
Tilt the headlamp forward.
6
Release the cabling.
7
Remove the headlamp.
8
Fit the new headlamp and
refit the other parts.
J206384
Maintenance 511
J200364
Note!
Never touch the new bulb with your
fingers. Grease, oil and the like
evaporate from the heat of the bulb
and can damage the reflector. This
applies especially to headlamp bulbs.
Note!
Never wash a truck when the
headlamps are tilted forward!
512 Maintenance
1
2
3
5
4
J201644
Number
Function
Watts (W)
Base
1
Direction indicators
21
BAu 15 s
2
Main beam
70
H7 PX 26 d
3
Dipped beam
Alternative dipped beam
70
Gas discharge HID
H7 PX 26 d
4
Fog light
70
H3
5
Static Corner Light
70
H7 PX 26 d
Replace gas-discharge tube
1
Open the door.
2
Open the hatch by the upper foot step.
3
Pull the locking tab towards you and press in
the clips in the hatch (so that the headlamp
releases).
4
Tilt the headlamp forward.
5
Loosen the cover over the gas discharge lamp
and remove it.
Caution!
Turn off the lighting, turn of the
ignition, remove the key from the
ignition lock and disconnect the
main power.
Maintenance 513
6
Turn the connector and release the wiring.
7
Untighten the clamp that holds
the gas discharge lamp and remove
the lamp.
8
Fit the new gas discharge lamp
and clamp it securely.
9
Turn the connector to secure it, and fit the
cabling.
10
Fit the cover over the gas discharge lamp
11
Move the headlamp back into place.
1
2
3
4
J201684
Note!
Gas discharge lamps contain
mercury and must not be thrown
away with garbage. Gas discharge
lamps must be left for recycling.
Note!
To not touch the glass of the gas
discharge lamp. Grease, oil and the
like evaporate from the heat of the
bulb and can damage the reflector.
Note!
Change both lamps on the same
occasion! This is to prevent the
lamps from having different tints.
514 Maintenance
Caution!
Be careful when handling broken
gas discharge lamps as they
contain mercury, which can be
dangerous. Wear gloves,
breathing mask and provide good
ventilation when replacing lamps
with broken casings.
Rear lights
1
Remove the screws securing the lens
2
Press the old bulb inwards and turn anticlockwise
3
Press in the new bulb and turn clockwise
4
Fit the lens
J0008265
Number
Function
Watts (W)
Base
1
Reversing light
21
BA 15 s
2
Rear fog lamp (certain markets)
21
BA 15 s
3
Tail lamp and number plate lighting
5
BA 15 s
4
Brake lights
21
BA 15 s
5
Flashers
21
BA 15 s
6
Tail lights
5
BA 15 s
7
Side marker lamps
5
BA 15 s
Maintenance 515
1
Remove the screws securing the lens
2
Press the old bulb inwards and turn anticlockwise
3
Press in the new bulb and turn clockwise
4
Fit the lens
J0010818
Number
Function
Watts (W)
Base
1
Rear fog lamp (certain markets)
21
BA 15 s
2
Tail lights
5
BA 15 s
3
Number plate lighting
5
BA 15 s
4
Reversing light
21
BA 15 s
5
Flashers
21
BA 15 s
6
Brake lights
21
BA 15 s
7
Tail lights
5
BA 15 s
8
Side marker lamps
5
BA 15 s
Other lighting
Changing the direction indicator bulbs.
1
Remove the screw from bottom of the lens
2
Remove the lens
3
Press the old bulb inwards and turn anticlockwise
4
Press in the new bulb and turn clockwise
5
Replace the lens and the screw
516 Maintenance
Replacement bulbs
Watts (W)
Base
Side flashers
21
BAY 9 s
Position marking lights
5
BA 15 s
above the bed
10
BA 15 s
Courtesy lamp, general lighting
10
BA 15 s
roof, ”spot” lamps
10
BA 15 s
doors
5
BA 15 s
Cigarette lighter illumination
1,2
E15
Ashtray illumination
2
E20
Courtesy lamp,
Engine wash
Use hot water when washing the engine and use a
high-pressure washer with caution. Avoid flushing
water on electrical components.
Washing the chassis
The chassis should, as well as the cab, be washed as
soon as it has become dirty. Be especially careful,
when washing with high pressure, of axles, joints and
other moving parts where water and dirt can be forced
in. Avoid flushing away any lubrication. If this should
happen, be extra careful to re-lubricate the
components.
Wash the cab
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it becomes
dirty, especially during the winter when road salt and
dampness otherwise cause corrosion.
To avoid paint damage and to achieve good results
when washing, the following should be paid attention
to:
Washing method: Use a high pressure washer if
available. For dirt that cannot be removed with this
Note!
Never flush water directly on
sealings/gaskets.
Maintenance 517
method, you could try to remove carefully with a
brush or sponge and with cleaning agents of the type
that is best suitable for the particular type of dirt. You
risk scratching the paintwork using brush washers
without first carefully washing with a high-pressure
washer or by using brush washers that are badly
maintained (worn, dirty brushes etc.)
Washing agents, general: Different cleaning agents are
recommended for different types of dirt. Always
follow the manufacturer's recommendations with
regard to area of use, dosage and maximum
temperature. Avoid allowing chemicals to dry on the
paintwork.
Cleaning agents: Avoid using strong alkaline agents
(pH >12). Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Flush generously with cold water before chemicals are
applied if the temperature is above 30 °C. Wash
smaller areas and flush clean to avoid long exposure
times or the chemicals drying in.
Polishing and waxing
Painted surfaces
After a time, the paintwork can loose its lustre. You
can delay this process by waxing the cab regularly. If
the cab paint surface becomes mat, use a mild polish.
Follow the product manufacturers recommendations
and general guidelines. First wash the vehicle
according to the above and allow to dry. Then use a
polishing agent or deep cleansing agent with only a
small amount of abrasive components. Wax with a
liquid wax. Use only clean cloths/rags, etc. Work
across the paintwork with mild pressure.
Chrome plated parts
First wash the chrome with the same agent used for the
rest of the cab. Use concentrated washer liquid to
remove any film. The chrome can then be waxed with
the same wax as the rest of the cab. Never use cleaning
agents containing abrasives on chrome parts.
518 Maintenance
Care of upholstery
Washing upholstery
Textiles
First vacuum clean to remove loose dirt. Then use a
foam cleaning agent to lift away remaining dirt. Avoid
scrubbing with hard brushes. When all of the textile
surfaces are treated, let them dry overnight. Vacuum
clean thoroughly to remove the dry foam and
remaining dirt.
For the seats, beds and textile mats, water and a
synthetic washing agent can be used. However, never
use water or water-based cleaning agents on the
headlining and wall panels.
Leather
Vacuum clean. Use special cleaners for leather
upholstery.
Vinyl
Water and a synthetic washing agent can be used.
Headlining and wall panels
Never use water or water-based cleaning agents.
Seat belt
Water and a synthetic washing agent can be used.
Floor mats and engine cover upholstery
Vacuum clean and brush clean. Wash with water
occasionally, especially during the winter.
Removing stains
Treat stains as quickly as possible!
Textiles
Remove loose particles of stains. Pick up as much as
possible with dry rags. Vacuum clean around the stain
Maintenance 519
so that dirt around the stain is not dissolved. Treat the
stain from the outside inwards towards the middle,
with stain remover. Dry off parts of the stain that are
dissolved. Treat the stain again and dry off dissolved
parts. Continue until the whole stain is removed.
Be very careful with the amount of stain remover, to
avoid the stain dissolving and becoming larger.
Leather
Use lukewarm, mild soapy water. Never scrape or rub.
Never use strong solvents such as petrol, white spirit
or alcohol.
Vinyl
Never scrape or rub. Never use strong solvents such as
petrol, white spirit or alcohol.
Paintwork damage
The paintwork is an important part of the truck's
protection against rust, and should therefore be
checked regularly for damage. Damage to paintwork
requires immediate attention to ensure that rust does
take hold. The most common types of paintwork
damage, and the damage you can repair yourself are:
• Small paint damage and scratches
• Wear on wing edges and door thresholds
When touching up, the vehicle should be well
cleaned and dry and have a temperature above
+15ºC.
Touching up small paint damage
Material:
• Rust remover (cold phosphating agent) – tube or
can.
• Undercoat – can
• Spray paint or touch-up pen (the top of the pen
contains abrasive paste for after treatment.)
• Penknife or similar
520 Maintenance
• Brush
If the damage has not reached the underlying metal
and a damaged paint layer is still in place, the paint
can be applied directly after light scraping to remove
any dirt.
If the damage has reached the underlying metal
proceed as follows:
1 Scrape the damaged surface down to bare metal and
chamfer the edges of the paint with a penknife or
similar (figure 1).
2 Apply rust remover (mind your eyes and skin), wait
a few minutes and then flush thoroughly with water.
Dry quickly!
3 Stir the undercoat (primer) well and apply several
coats using a fine brush or match (figure 2).
4 When the undercoat is dry, apply the top coat with a
brush Make sure the paint is stirred well and apply
several thin coats and let dry between applications.
5 For scratches, work as above but to protect the
undamaged paint it may be necessary to mask off
(figure 3).
J0008158
6 Wait a few days and then apply the after treatment.
The top of the pen contains abrasive paste for
polishing the touched up surfaces. Use a soft cloth and
small amount of abrasive paste.
J0008159
Maintenance 521
J0008160
Care of aluminium rims
Aluminium rims are often exposed to different types
of dirt such as road dirt, oil, asphalt, tar and brake dust.
To protect the rims from discolouration, oxidisation
and unnecessary wear, regular maintenance is
required. For additional protection a protective wax
must be used, e.g. when driving is slush, salted roads
or environments close to the sea.
Clean the aluminium rims regularly. First flush with
water, preferably using a high pressure washer. Use a
brush to clean the rim. For difficult dirt, a cleaning
agent for aluminium rims may be used. Rinse with
clean water afterwards.
To maintain the rim's shine, a polish for aluminium
rims should be used after cleaning.
Clean the aluminium rims regularly. Flush with water,
preferably using a high pressure washer. Use a sponge
or rag to clean the rim. A mild cleaning agent may be
used to remove stubborn dirt.
Polish or cleaning agents with abrasive action must not
be used as this will damage the rim's surface.
Care of steel rims
Steel rims are often exposed to different types of dirt
such as road dirt, oil, asphalt, tar and brake dust. To
522 Maintenance
protect the rims from discolouration, oxidisation and
unnecessary wear, regular maintenance is required.
For additional protection a protective wax must be
used, e.g. when driving is slush, salted roads or
environments close to the sea.
Damage to the rim's paint must be remedied
immediately to prevent corrosion.
Clean the rims regularly. First flush with water,
preferably using a high pressure washer. Use a brush
or sponge to clean the rim.
For stubborn dirt, an alkaline cleaning agent (pH>7)
may be used.
Tools
11 12 10 13
1
8
6
9
7
14
2
3
5
4
J199126
1
Socket for changing wheels and two combination
pliers
(only for vehicles with disc wheels)
2
Socket head key for oil plugs (extra equipment)
3
Hammer
4
Adjustable wrench (extra equipment)
5
Polygrip pliers (extra equipment)
Maintenance 523
6
Combination screwdriver (extra equipment)
7
Socket wrench for tilting cab
8
Crank handle
9
Jack
10
Opening lever for changing tyres (only trucks
with
spoked wheels)
11
Closing lever for changing tyres (only trucks with
spoked wheels)
12
Socket wrench for changing wheels (only trucks
with spoked wheels)
13
Handle for changing wheels (only trucks with
spoked wheels)
14
Drawbar for towing
General information about oils and greases
Lubricating service is very important when it comes to
service and maintenance of the truck. Vehicle
components such as the engine, gearbox, rear axles,
etc., must be lubricated with either oil or grease. The
following information about oils and greases is
important. Your Volvo dealer has more information on
the complete range of Volvo lubricants.
Oils
For components that are lubricated with oil, the grade,
viscosity and service interval are very important. The
type of oil to be used for a specific component
depends on the oil's grade and viscosity. This
information can be found on the container and/or on
the oil's product information sheet. When a specific
part number is recommended, the part will always
have the correct grade and viscosity for the purpose.
Synthetic oil
Synthetic oil is being used increasingly for the
lubrication of vehicles. The raw material for these oils
is the same as for mineral based oils, raw oil, but the
524 Maintenance
manufacturing processes are rather different. As a rule,
synthetic oil has better temperature stability and cold
properties but its friction properties sometimes result
in synchronisation faults. Synthetic oil can also have a
negative effect on sealing materials. It is therefore
important that approved synthetic oil is used.
A synthetic oil is not necessarily better than a mineral
oil. This is however a common misunderstanding and
extended oil replacement intervals are therefore
assumed. The service interval recommended by Volvo
apply irrespective of whether the oil is mineral-based
or synthetic.
Grade
A large number of grade designations are used.
Different oil types have different grade designations.
Viscosity
Viscosity is a very important property in an oil. It is a
measure of the runability of the oil, which effects the
thickness of the oil film and fuel consumption. The
ambient temperature in the area where the truck is
used, determines which viscosity is recommended.
There are two systems, called SAE viscosity grade
classifications, which divide oils into viscosity grades
(such as SAE 10W, SAE 80W-90 etc.) Engine oils and
transmission oils belong to two different systems. It is
therefore always important to know within which
system the viscosity grade is specified. For example,
engine oil with a viscosity grade SAE 40 has
approximately the same viscosity as transmission oil
with the viscosity grade SAE 90. However, in both
systems a higher number indicates a higher viscosity.
Service interval
When it has been decided which oil should be used
(i.e. the quality and viscosity are known), the
recommended service interval is fixed.
Maintenance 525
Grease
For components that are lubricated with grease, the
grease type and service intervals are very important.
The type of grease to be used for a particular
component is given under each component
respectively. The information can be found on the
grease container and/or on the grease's product
information sheet. In some cases, using grease with a
particular Volvo part number is recommended. If this
grease is used, the correct type is automatically
obtained.
Grease types
Type of grease is determined by a number of different
properties, for example:
• Type of thickener, which can be lithium, lithium
complex, polymer or clay.
• Grease consistency, specified by the NLGI number.
• The presence of EP additives.
• The occurrence of solid lubricants, such as graphite,
copper or molybdenum sulfide
Service interval
When it has been decided which oil should be used the
recommended service interval is fixed.
Engine
Oil recommendations
Low-emission engines put great demands on the
engine oil. In order to ensure a long life span with
maintained low emissions and low fuel and oil
consumption, it is necessary to use engine oil that is
better than that normally used in older engine
generations.
Volvo has developed the earlier VDS and VDS-2
specifications and modified them for Euro 3 engines.
526 Maintenance
This new specification is called
Volvo Drain Specification-3 (VDS-3). VDS-3 consists
of still stricter requirements for piston cleanness and
cylinder polishing compared to VDS-2, to ensure the
engines' durability and reliability. In VDS-3, the
quality requirement for ACEA E7is included, which
ensures the performance requirements not covered by
VDS-3 field test. VDS-3 comprises not only the field
test of Volvo D12 engines, but also the most strict
engine requirements covered by the ACEA E7
requirement specification.
VDS-3also covers the same viscosity classes as
VDS-2, i.e. 5W-30, 5W-40, 10W-30, 10W-40,
15W-30and 15W-40. VDS and VDS-2 oils can of
course be used in Euro 3 engines as well but with
shorter oil change intervals.
Oil grade
VDS, VDS-2, VDS-3
Note!
alternatively API CF, CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4
Extra oil additives must not be used.
This includes engine and metal
treatment additives added to the
engine oil.
or ACEA E2, E3, E4, E5, E7
Note that the combination of several of the above
mentioned qualities is required in some cases.
Viscosity
The viscosity is selected in accordance with the table.
The temperature values refer to constant ambient
temperatures.
1) Only VDS-2 or VDS-3 oils.
VDS-3 approved oils in viscosity class 5W-30can be
used up to +30 °C.
J1008235
Maintenance 527
Note!
When using 10W/30, fuel
consumption can be lower than when
15W/40 is used. Be aware, however,
of the temperature interval
recommended for 10W/30.
Fill with oil
Check the oil level with the truck standing on a level
surface and after the engine has been turned off for at
least 30 minutes. Top up the oil when the level
approaches the lower mark. Do not overfill!
Top up with oil through the filler pipe behind the
service hatch.
Fill carefully so that the oil does not run outside. Oil
that runs outside can damage other parts of the engine.
Fill with oil
Check the oil level with the truck standing on a level
surface and after the engine has been turned off for at
least 30 minutes. Top up the oil when the level
approaches the lower mark. Do not overfill!
Top up with oil through the filler pipe behind the
service hatch.
Use the side filler pipe on the left of the engine when
the cab is tilted.
Fill carefully so that the oil does not run outside. Oil
that runs outside can damage other parts of the engine.
528 Maintenance
Change engine oil
The drain plug (A) is located in the bottom of the
sump. Drain the oil directly after a trip while it is still
thin. Always replace the full-flow filter (B) and the
bypass filter (C) at the same time as the oil is changed.
Use only Volvo original oil filters.
Caution!
Hot oil can cause burns. Take
care to avoid spilling oil when
topping up. Oil spilt on the
engine can affect cooling
performance.
1
Remove any sound baffles underneath the engine
2
Clean around the drain plug
3
Remove the drain plug
4
Drain the oil
Note!
5
Clean the filters and filter brackets externally to
prevent dirt form entering when the new filters
are fitted
6
Loosen the existing oil filters and dispose of
them. The oil filters are of the disposable type
and should always be scrapped after use
The filters must not be cleaned,
replacement is the only measure that
may be taken. Always replace the
filters when the oil is changed.
7
Clean the sealing surface (2) for the oil filter seal
and the surrounding surfaces on the filter bracket
thoroughly
8
If the oil filter bracket has been designed with a
protective edge (1) for the oil filters, clean the
inside of the protective edge carefully as well
9
Apply a thin film of oil to the rubber seals on the
new oil filters
10
Screw on the oil filters by hand until the rubber
seals just touch the sealing surfaces
11
Then turn an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn (or as
specified by the marking on the filter)
12
Fit the drain plugs with new gaskets and fill with
fresh oil Use the side filler on the engine to fill
with oil
13
Put back the sound baffles underneath the engine
if previously removed
J1007362
Maintenance 529
J1007781
Oil change volumes
Engine type
Oil change volume Oil volume in litres
(litres) including
between dipstick
approximate volume Max-Min marks
for oil filter
D9A
28
6
D9A/D9B OILSST, D9B OILS-PL
33
5
D11A (EU-III)
36.5
5
D11B (EU-IV)
36.5
5
D13A/D13B OILS- 33
PL
8
D13A/D13B OILS- 37
ST
6
D16C, D16E
9
42
Service intervals
The interval for engine oil replacement varies
considerably depending on how the truck is equipped,
what it is used for, the type of terrain where it is
driven, the grade of engine oil, the quality of the diesel
fuel, fuel consumption, the weight of the truck
combination, etc, etc. Ask your Volvo dealer for the
service schematic for your own truck.
530 Maintenance
The first oil and filter change is at the warranty service
after 10 000 km or 4 weeks, whichever occurs first.
The exceptions are all FM and FH trucks made in
Europe. They do not need warranty service on their
engines.
Limitations in the service intervals for D9B,
D11A/D11B, D13A and D16E
• No oil change interval may exceed 12 monthsfor
these engines.
• If the sulphur content of the fuel exceeds 0.05 per
cent by weight, the oil change interval should be
reduced to 2/3 taking into account the distance
driven and engine running hours.
• If the sulphur content of the fuel exceeds 0.5 per
cent by weight, the oil change interval should be
reduced to 1/3 taking into account the distance
driven and engine running hours.
Limitations in the service intervals for other
engines
• No oil change interval is allowed to exceed 6
months.
• If the sulphur content of the fuel exceeds 0.5 per
cent by weight, the oil change interval should be
halved. This is to be applied irrespective of
mileage, engine hours or fuel volume consumed.
Fuels with an extremely low sulphur content, e.g.
environmentally classified fuels, do not allow
lengthening of service intervals.
• Long life full-flow filters, must be used if the oil
change intervals exceed 30,000 km.
Fuel system
REMEMBER to always observe cleanliness when
working with the diesel engine fuel system. Make sure
the tank is as full as possible to avoid condensation.
Note!
These restrictions in sulphur content
and oil change intervals can even be
used on older engines, but it is not a
demand.
This applies without regard to
distance, engine hours, calendar time
and fuel
consumption. Fuel with an extremely
low sulphur content, i.e.
environmentally classified fuel, does
not allow lengthening of service
intervals.
Maintenance 531
Ensure the area around the filler opening and the filler
cap is clean when refueling. Take care to filter fuel
being taken from your own tank or drum and make
sure all receptacles are clean.
Diesel fuel— quality and function
General quality requirements
The composition of fuel plays a vital role in the
function, service life and emission spectrum of an
engine. In order to achieve specified levels of
performance with regard to power and fuel economy
and to fulfil emission requirement legislation, only
fuel fulfilling legal requirements and national and
international standards may be used. These standards
are the minimum requirements for commercial fuel
and are frequently prepared in consultation with the oil
companies and the automotive industry. Examples are:
• EN590 (with nationally adapted cold requirements)
• ASTM D 975 No 1–D and 2–D
• JIS KK 2204
Some countries have more stringent demands for
environmental reasons than is required by the basic
standards, such as in the following countries:
• Sweden – Environmental class 1 and 2
• Finland – So called City-diesel
• Denmark – Special qualities for buses and
distribution vehicles
• California – CARB specification
These fuels exhibit better exhaust emissions than
standard fuels and can therefore be recommended.
They may give slightly lower engine power and a
slight increase in fuel consumption.
Sulphur content
The sulphur content of diesel fuels should be as low as
possible. Sulphur is converted to sulphur dioxide in
the engine and is then converted to sulphuric acid in
Note!
The injection equipment must not
be adjusted to compensate for any
loss of power.
532 Maintenance
the atmosphere, which contributes to acid rain. The
particle emissions increase with the sulphur content.
The sulphur content of the fuel affects the oil change
intervals. Fuels with extremely low sulphur content,
such as environmentally classified fuels, do not permit
the oil change interval to be extended.
Viscosity and density
Viscosity and density have a direct influence on the
performance, emissions and service life of an engine.
Low viscosity and density reduce engine power.
Unusually high viscosity and density effects
exhaust emissions negatively and can shorten the life
of the injection equipment.
Recommended values:
• viscosity: 1.5 cSt —4.5 cSt at 40ºC
• density: 810— 860 kg/m3 at 15ºC
Lubricity
Volvo recommends a lubricity limit not exceeding
460 µm at 60ºC, according to the HFRR test
(ISO12156).
Ignition properties, cetane number
A short ignition delay (high cetane rating) is important
for low emissions, particularly in low emission
engines. With low cetane numbers (40-43), the content
of hydrocarbons (smell), nitrous oxides and particles
will increase, as will the engine noise. The starting
ability of the engine is also considerably reduced.
Volvo recommends that the cetane number should
exceed 45 with regard to technical aspects and should
exceed 53 with regard to emissions.
Water and particles
You must ensure that water and particles do not get
into the fuel or the fuel tank, since they cause
corrosion and wear to the fuel injection equipment.
Water also facilitates the growth of bacteria and mould
in the tank, which can cause filter blockage. In cold
weather, water that has not been dispersed in the fuel
Maintenance 533
can freeze and block the fuel supply. On markets
where water and particles are commonly found, a prefilter and water separator must be fitted.
Properties at low temperatures
The resistance of the fuel to low temperatures is
limited by its ability to pass a filter. The low
temperature requirements for fuel in various
geographical regions and seasons are defined in
national standards. Oil companies are responsible for
ensuring that low temperature properties are
acceptable at all times of the year.
Additives
It is always the oil companies who are responsible for
ensuring that the correct proportions of additives are
present in the fuel as regards ignition ability,
lubrication and low temperature properties. Volvo do
not allow using other fuel additives and other types of
fuels. Volvo do not allow addition of additives or other
fuels in the tank. The only exception is kerosene, see
the recommendation below.
Paraffin/Kerosene
Paraffin (kerosene) may only be used to improve low
temperature properties when necessary. This should be
done in consultation with the oil company that markets
the diesel fuel in question. Low temperature properties
are improved by about 2–3 °C per 10% addition of
paraffin. It is not permitted to add more than 20%
paraffin (kerosene), since the viscosity, density and
cetane rating fall, which reduces engine power and the
starting ability of the engine. In addition, the exhaust
emissions will increase.
Note that the max. limit for the mixture's lubricating
ability of 460 µm at 60 °C must never be exceeded.
For example, it is not permitted to mix paraffin with
Swedish environmentally classified fuels. If you
change fuel quality to environmentally classified fuels
or if you add paraffin, old deposits in the fuel tank and
fuel pipes can be dissolved and can accelerate filter
534 Maintenance
blockage, with subsequent performance impairment
and possible malfunction.
Gasoline and alcohol
Petrol and alcohol are not fuels for diesel engines.
Petrol (gasoline) and alcohol raise the octane rating
and lower the cetane rating (ignition properties). In
addition, the lubricity is considerably impaired. The
components in the fuel system can be damaged by
petrol (gasoline) and alcohol. In addition, petrol
(gasoline) and alcohol lower the flash point, which
affects the explosion limit and fire safety. Because of
the lower boiling point, the risk of vapour lock in the
system is increased since the fuel can boil in the
cylinder head etc.
Diesel boosters
Many manufacturers of commercially available
additives (so called diesel boosters) promise reduced
fuel consumption and improved lubricity, although
they do not have any demonstrable effect whatsoever
on either fuel consumption or lubricity.
Volvo does not accept any responsibility for warranty
claims if these additives have been used and it is not
Volvo's policy to test or evaluate these additives.
FAME
FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters), also called
"biodiesel" are available on certain markets both as in
its pure state and as a mixture in diesel fuel. FAME is
also known as e.g. rapeseed methyl ester (RME) and
sunflower/Soya methyl ester (SME). When mixed in
normal diesel fuel, the concentration of FAME is
maximum 5%, in accordance with EN590.
Raw vegetable oil or animal oils do not fulfil
EN14214 and shall not be used as a fuel or a
mixture component for diesel engines. These
products are not approved by Volvo and the use of
unapproved products voids the guarantee.
When using FAME:
Caution!
Petrol (gasoline) and alcohol
must never be mixed with diesel
fuel!
Note!
It is not permissible to add diesel
boosters to the fuel.
Maintenance 535
• the specific FAME service intervals and
maintenance intervals apply. These are shorter
than the normal intervals. Contact your Volvo
workshop for complete information concerning
care, maintenance and guarantees when using
FAME.
• can fuel consumption increase somewhat.
• can engine power be reduced somewhat.
• fuel consumption data is not shown in the driver's
display or Dynafleet correctly, since calculations
are based on use of ordinary diesel fuel.
• the vehicle can smell different and some smoke can
be emitted at start up.
Cold weather characteristics for FAME are not good.
The high viscosity at low temperatures can increase
the risk for damage to the fuel injection system or that
the fuel filter is blocked. Using a fuel heater can
improve the characteristics somewhat. During cold
weather conditions it is therefore recommended to
contact the supplier of FAME concerning the
temperature recommendations that apply. With
problems starting during the winter, use normal diesel
fuel.
Think of the following when using FAME:
• Regular checks of the oil level are necessary since
the oil can be diluted with unburnt fuel.
• FAME has certain solvent properties and e.g.
dissolves dirt and deposits in the tank. If the vehicle
has previously been run on diesel or if one suspects
that the tank can contain dirt or deposits, then a
number of fuel filter replacements are
recommended. The tank may also need to be
cleaned out. Contact your Volvo Workshop for
more detailed information.
• FAME is more sensitive for bacteria and water
contaminants than diesel fuel. Specific conditions
therefore apply to storage of FAME, contact your
fuel supplier for instructions.
536 Maintenance
• Use up most of the fuel in the tank before changing
to a new fuel. This is to avoid bacteria spreading in
the tank.
• If the vehicle is not used for a period of at least 4
weeks, the system should be flushed through with
diesel by driving on at least one full tank.
• Engine/cab heaters are not adapted to run on
FAME, so a separate diesel tank must be fitted.
Engine/cab heaters shall only use diesel in
accordance with EN590.
• FAME is aggressive to paint and certain types of
rubber and plastic. If FAME comes into contact
with a painted surface, wash it off immediately and
thoroughly to avoid damage.
Used oil
Used oil and two-stroke oil considerably shorten the
service life of the injection equipment. In addition, the
exhaust emissions increase if these oils are used.
Note!
It is not permissible to add used oil
or two-stroke oil to the fuel tank.
Fuel at airports and military operations
It is normal practice that trucks at airports and in
military operations use aircraft jet fuel or various
military grades of diesel. It is important to monitor the
specifications of the fuel in question and it is essential
to find out correct data about all the additives that have
been put into the fuel in question. If you have a
question, contact Volvo Trucks!
Changing fuel filter
Change the fuel filter when doing an oil change, or as
required, for example if:
• the fuel pressure drops
• the power output decreases
• the fuel quality is uneven
• the symbol for blocked fuel filter starts to light
1
Clean the filter bracket thoroughly
Caution!
Take care not to allow fuel to run
over and damage electrical
components.
Maintenance 537
2
Remove the filter using a filter wrench
Note!
3
Moisten the new filter gaskets with diesel
4
Screw on the filter by hand until the gasket
contacts the sealing surface
5
Then turn an additional 3/4 to 1 turn (or as
specified by the marking on the filter).
The new filter must be empty when
it is mounted. Under no conditions
may it filled with fuel before
mounting.
6
Bleed the fuel system
Note!
7
Start the engine
8
Make sure the filter is not leaking
If there is a water separator fitted,
change the filter in this at the same
time as changing the fuel filter. At
the same time clean the water level
sensor in the plastic bowl under the
filter using a soft cloth.
Filter for fuel tank ventilation
The filter is used in certain markets and should be
replaced every 24th month. Under certain conditions
the filter may need changing more often, e.g. when
driving in dusty environments.
Priming the fuel system
Vent the fuel system
Vent the fuel system if:
• The engine has been stationary for a long period.
• The tank has been run dry.
Venting
1
Stop the vehicle
2
Apply the parking brake
3
Tilt the cab
4
Remove sound insulation over the left chassis
member
5
Pump using the hand pump on the fuel filter
bracket, pump 200–300 times, until resistance is
Note!
Never prime the system using the
starter motor.
538 Maintenance
felt. Venting is complete. It is not necessary to
open any nipples.
6
Start the engine and run it at idle.
7
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat the
venting.
8
Let the engine run at idle
9
Check for any leakage
10
Check that the engine runs evenly
11
Fit the sound insulation
Venting
1
Stop the vehicle
2
Apply the parking brake
3
Turn the key to the R-position
4
Press the switch for venting
A symbol is shown in the display.
5
Start the engine and let it run at idle
6
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat venting
7
Check for any leakage
8
Check that the engine runs evenly
Draining the fuel tank
Drain the fuel tank of any sludge and condensation
annually. By doing this, the risk of water getting into
the engine and causing running problems is avoided.
1
Place a receptacle under the bottom plug of the
fuel tank
2
Undo the plug and screw it out a few turns, so
that sediment and condensation water start to run
out of the drain hole in the plug. Do not remove
the plug, or all the fuel will also be drained
3
Leave it to run until pure fuel appears
4
Screw in the bottom plug
5
Empty the container in a place where it will not
constitute a risk to the environment
J2017320
Maintenance 539
Changing filter
J2018385
The following general directions apply:
• The air cleaner filter insert may only be
removed for replacement
• Filter inserts must not be cleaned
The filter element may not be removed for inspection,
cleaning, etc. since dust and dirt particles can always
get into the inlet system's clean side when the filter
element is removed.
Any attempts at cleaning such as shaking, blowing
with compressed air, etc., will always entail a change
in the structure of the filter surface and result in
deterioration in its efficiency.
Changing primary filter
A symbol on the display will be shown to indicate that
the primary filter must be changed. The primary filter
must be changed at least every 24 months.
When the symbol lights, first check that the net in the
air intake is not blocked.
J3014483
540 Maintenance
J0011030
1
Tilt the cab
2
Unscrew the four bolts holding the filter and the
filter cover
3
Pull out the filter. It may be difficult to grip the
filter
4
Clean inside the filter housing with a damp cloth.
Take special care to ensure that the sealing
surface on the corrosion-resistant outlet pipe is
clean
5
If there is a secondary filter, mark on the
secondary filter end that the primary filter has
been changed
6
Lubricate the new filter seal with the
accompanying silicon grease
7
Lubricate the cleaned sealing surface on the end
of the outlet pipe in the same way. Use only
silicon grease! Mineral oils will ruin the seal
8
Install the new filter
9
Make sure the filter enters the outlet pipe
10
Press in the filter hard
11
Fit the cover
12
Tighten the four retaining bolts
13
Write the date of the change on the end of the
filter
J0008113
J0008357
Maintenance 541
14
15
16
Check that the hoses to and from the filter
housing are not damaged and that hose clips are
tight
Check that the rubber bellows between the cab
and the chassis are tight against the mating
surface
Check that the rubber valves are intact
Note!
Do not touch the filter unnecessarily.
The filter must not be reused!
Note!
If the control lamp lights after a
primary filter change, then even the
secondary filter shall be changed, if
fitted.
Changing secondary filter
Change the secondary filter after changing every third
primary filter or at least every 48 months.
1
Loosen the hose clip that is securing the filter
element (see illustration)
2
Pull out the filter element
3
Lubricate the steel pipe end with the
accompanying silicon grease. Lubricate the part
to be mounted in the rubber filter housing
connection as well as the sealing surface for the
primary filter. Use only silicon grease. Mineral
oils will ruin the seal and the rubber connection
4
Put in the new secondary filter
5
Press in the filter until it bottoms
6
Write the date of the change on the end of the
filter
7
Fit the primary filter
8
Fit the cover
9
Tighten the retaining bolts
10
Tighten the hose clip that is securing the
secondary filter in the air cleaner
J0008170
542 Maintenance
J0008151
Drain the cooling system
Remove the expansion tank cap to facilitate draining.
All drain points must be open to completely drain the
cooling system.
Drain in the following order:
1
Radiator
2
Cylinder block
Once the system is empty, also:
3
Any gearbox oil cooler, see below
Drainage point on oil cooler for gearbox:
Drain also the oil cooler for the gearbox when draining
the cooling system.
Detach the hoses and drain.
Maintenance 543
J2019327
Remove the expansion tank cap (4) to facilitate
draining.
All drain points must be open to completely drain the
cooling system.
Drain in the following order:
1
Radiator
2
Engine
The drain plug is at the front edge
on the right side of the engine.
3
Extra radiator if fitted
544 Maintenance
Service intervals
Volvo Coolant VCS
Coolant change
Other
500 000 km or every 48th
month.
Volvo Coolant VCS shall not
be used with a coolant filter.
Note that Volvo Coolant VCS cannot be mixed with
other coolants and anti-corrosive agents.
Anti-freeze
The mixing ratio with Volvo coolant VCS shall be 40 60 %.
Protection against freezing
down to:
Mixture of concentrated
antifreeze
-25ºC
40 %
-30ºC
46 %
-38ºC
54 %
-46ºC
60 %
Note!
–46 °C is the maximum freezing
point depression. Increasing the
concentration above this depletes the
frost protection.
Note!
Mixing with other types of
concentrated coolant can result in
inferior anti-corrosive properties
resulting in damage to the engine.
The system must be flushed
carefully during coolant
replacement.
The table shows the approximate
quantity of concentrated antifreeze
required for frost protection to the
stated
temperature.
Maintenance 545
Fill with coolant in an empty system
1
Stop the engine
Note!
2
Set the heater control to warm
3
Fill coolant to MAX in the expansion tank
Only a guideline, depends on vehicle
settings and equipment.
4
Run the engine warm
5
Allow the engine to cool down
6
Check the coolant level
The cooling system is ventilated automatically.
Engine
Coolant volume
(litres)
D9A FM9, D9B FM, D11A, D11B
37
D13 FH
44
D13 FM
42
D16C, FH16
52
Viscous fan
The vehicle must be driven directly to a garage if the
coolant temperature or coolant level warning diode
comes on while driving and there is a fault with the fan
so that the fan can be checked.
Electrically controlled fan
On electrically controlled fans, it is not just the coolant
temperature that decides when the fan should start.
Note!
Never cover the radiator. The
engine is fitted with a charge air
cooler and is therefore very sensitive
to air flow blockage (overheating
and reduced power). Do not
therefore cover the radiator (charge
air cooler) with boards, radiator
blinds etc.
546 Maintenance
The fan may therefore start when a thermostatically
controlled fan would not start.
Check the drive belts (Multi-V)
Check the engine drive belts. Replace belts if any
pieces of the groove have broken off.
The fan belts are tensioned automatically, which
reduces the risk of slip and increases service life. The
generator/compressor (air conditioning) drive belts are
not tensioned automatically and their tension must
therefore be checked. Contact your Volvo-garage.
Working on the electrical system
There are a number of jobs on the electrical system
which the driver may need to do himself, such as
changing fuses.
The truck has an alternator and when working on
the electrical system the following should be
observed:
1
When putting in batteries make sure they are
correctly connected
2
Never run the alternator with a disconnected
battery. The batteries and alternator must not be
disconnected while the engine is running
3
The negative terminal on the battery should
always be disconnected first and connected last,
for example, when changing the battery. This
reduces the risk for short circuits and sparks
which can be dangerous due to hydrogen gas
4
Help-start batteries must be correctly connected
to prevent damage to the rectifiers in the
alternator, positive to positive and negative to
negative
5
When charging the batteries at least one of the
battery cables (negative or positive) must be
disconnected
6
When working on the electrical system of the
truck, the current must be switched off
J0008252
Caution!
So-called start help units must not
be connected, because these can
give very high voltages, which
can in turn damage control units.
Maintenance 547
Instructions for electrical welding
These instructions generally apply to all types of
electric welding work on vehicles.
Welding must be carried out with great accuracy to
achieve a satisfactory joint. Great care must be taken
to avoid damage, personal injuries and accidents.
When carrying out welding, it is important that the
following measures are taken in order to avoid
personal injuries or damage to the vehicle:
• The welder must have sufficient knowledge of
welding on vehicles. For this reason, a trade
education is necessary
• It is important to prepare the welding area carefully.
Heat sensitive parts such as cabling and air ducting
shall be protected or removed
• The welding area and the location of the welding
machine's earth connection must be clean. I.e. paint,
corrosion, oil, grease and dirt etc shall be removed.
• The cable clip should be in contact with the
material to be welded to prevent damage to any
electrical components. The connecting clip must
also make good contact with the material being
welded. This is to prevent damaging electrical
components. If two parts are to be welded together,
it is essential that both of these are connected to the
welding machine's earth connection.
• Ensure that no electrical casings (e.g. the control
unit) come into contact with the welding electrode
or the welding machine's earth connection.
• A direct current is generally used for welding
• When carrying out welding in a cab, the airbag
should be disconnected to avoid personal injuries
• When carrying out welding in a cab, put the starter
key in stop mode and disconnect connectors to
instrument cluster and other control units
After completed welding — paint the welded area.
548 Maintenance
Connection of electrical accessories
• Always use the stipulated size of fuse and the
correct wire cross-section. Dimension continual
loads on fuses to not more than 80% of their rated
current
• When working on the electrical system of the truck,
the power must be switched off
• Always use Volvo original connectors (terminals,
insulators, fuses etc.)
Cigarette lighter as a power point
The cigarette lighter point is designed to heat up the
cigarette lighter and is dimensioned for loads of up to
ca. 4 Ampere . It is strongly recommended that you do
not use the socket as a power point. Your Volvo dealer
can give you information about the connection of other
types of electrical sockets.
12 volt electrical outlet
The electrical outlet beside the cigarette lighter may be
loaded to max. 10 Ampere .
Connection of prepared equipment
Use the premounted cable harnesses for connecting
e.g. telephone chargers and coffee makers. Contact a
Volvo workshop if you are uncertain.
Connection of non-prepared equipment
Non-prepared equipment refers to equipment for
which the cable harnesses have not been factory
installed and supplied with the truck. Please ask your
Volvo dealer to arrange for connection.
Note!
Fire risk if fuses are too large.
Maintenance 549
Checking electrolyte level in batteries
The level should be 5 – 10 mm above the plates.
Fill with battery water if required. Do not fill more
than 10mm above the cell plates.
J0008268
Note!
Battery electrolyte contains
corrosive sulfuric acid. Remove
electrolyte spill immediately from
skin. Wash with soap and plenty of
water. Seek medical help if the
electrolyte comes into contact with
eyes or any other sensitive part of
the body. Remember that batteries
contain oxyhydrogen gas and are
extremely explosive. Short circuits,
naked flames or sparks in the
vicinity of a battery may cause a
powerful explosion resulting in
personal injury and material damage.
Caution!
Use protective goggles when
working on batteries.
550 Maintenance
Charge status
It is useful to know how discharged a battery is before
it is charged, to be able to charge it in the best manner.
The ambient temperature plays a part in both the
charging ability and capacity, not until at +25 °C does
the battery give 100 % of its capacity. The battery
cannot be charged especially well below 0 °C, see
table.
The batteries must not be left uncharged. Every third
to fifth week, even a “charged” battery needs a
maintenance charge, due to self-discharge and possible
small consumers <40mA (clocks, tachograph etc.) if
the vehicle does not have a main switch. If there is a
main switch and a properly connected solution, one
can stretch to five weeks between maintenance
charging.
Temperature
-18ºC
0ºC
+25ºC
Capacity 20 h (Ah)
50%
85%
100%
Charge acceptance (A)
6%
25%
100%
An alternator can never charge the battery to 100%; in
favourable circumstances a maximum level of 90%
can be achieved. Complete recharging can only be
done with a battery charger over a long period of time
(1-2 days). Increased power demand from the
alternator and battery may result in the battery being
discharged. The easiest way to check the charge is
with a voltmeter, but an aerometer (specific gravity
gauge) together with a voltmeter gives a more correct
result. The diagram below shows the rest potential and
state of charge compared with the specific gravity of
the acid.
Maintenance 551
J0010460
* State of Charge (Charge status)
Specifications for the electrical system
System voltage
Battery
24V
number
2
voltage
12 Volt
capacity
D9: 140, 170 or 225 Ah
D12: 170 or 225 Ah
Electrolyte specific weight:
fully charged battery
1.265-1.290 g/cm3
half charged
1.25 g/cm3
charge necessary
1.20 g/cm3
552 Maintenance
Manual gearbox and I-shift
Gearbox Approximate replacement volume in litres
AT2412C 16
AT2512C 16
ATO2512 16
C
VT1708B 11,5
VT2009B 12
VT2214B 13,5
VT2412B 13
VT2514B 13,5
VT2814B 13,5
VTO2214 13,5
B
VTO2514 13,5
B
VTO2814 13,5
B
If the gearbox has a rear PTO or oil cooler, extra oil
must be added as per the following table.
Maintenance 553
Component
Additional oil volume in
litres
Single power take-off BKU/
PTR
0,8
Double power take-off DBKU/ 0,8
PTRD
Oil cooler TC-MWO
(Cool TW and T1, old
designations)
0,1
Oil cooler TC-MWOH
(Cool TWH and T1H, old
designations)
0,8
Oil cooler TC-MAOH
0,8
Oil cooler TC-MWOH2
0,8
Oil cooler TC-MAOH2
0,8
For several different reasons these gearboxes cannot
have the same service recommendations. They have
therefore been divided into service categories. The
service categories, numbers or letters, can be found on
the ID plate on the gearbox. The categories are G, 1, 2,
3 and 4.
J1006942
Note!
If the gearbox has no entry under
service category on the ID plate, it
belongs to service category G.
Two different service recommendations can be applied
for the gearboxes:
• Standard service recommendation
• Alternative service recommendation
The alternative service recommendation provides
longer service intervals than standard service
554 Maintenance
recommendation. The alternative service
recommendation demands the use of special oil.
The standard service recommendation and alternative
service recommendation both consist of three parts.
The three parts are oil grade, viscosity and service
intervals. These can be found in the same order on the
following pages. The following procedure can be very
useful when deciding which oil to
use.
1
Find out which service category the component
belongs to
2
Use the information in the table under Service
intervals and determine the service
recommendation to be used
3
Use the information under Oil grade and
Viscosity to determine which oil to use
Oil grade
1
Transmission oils: Volvo transmission oils
97305, 97307 or 97315.
2
Engine oils: API CE or CF; ACEA E2 or E3.
Note!
Only monograde oils.
Note!
The choice of oil grade affects the
service interval; see the table below.
Maintenance 555
Viscosity
Viscosity is selected in accordance with the diagram.
Temperatures refer to constant ambient temperatures.
1) Applies to engine oils: Note that multigrade oils are
NOT to be used in manual gearboxes. Use only
monograde engine oil SAE 30, SAE 40 or SAE 50.
If oil cooler TC-MAOH/-MAOH2 is fitted, engine oil
SAE 50 or Volvo Transmission oil 97315 must be
used.
J1008787
Note!
If the temperature is below –25 °C,
use Volvo Transmission oil 97307.
Gearboxes with oil cooler TCMWO, TC-RWO, TC-MWOH, TCMWOH2 can be run in ambient
temperatures above +30 °C with
engine oil SAE 30, SAE 40 or SAE
80W90 or Volvo Transmission oil
97307.
Service intervals
The service category of the gearbox is dependant on
where the vehicle was manufactured. In some markets
there can be vehicles with gearboxes belonging to
different service categories, and in these cases special
care must be taken with the planning of the first oil
and oil filter change.
556 Maintenance
Service
category
Intervals
Service
First oil and filter change after 10,000 km
categories 1 and or 4
3
weeks, whichever occurs first.
Service
First oil and filter change after
categories 2 and 400,000 km or three years,
4
whichever occurs first.
Oil grade
Service category
G
1 and 2
3 and 4
Oil and filter change interval (km)
Volvo Transmission oil 97305
Engine oil SAE30 or 40
120 000/12 months
-
Engine oil SAE50
120 000/12 months
120 000/12 months
120 000/12 months
Volvo Transmission oil
97307
180,000/12 months
400,000/36 months
-
Volvo Transmission oil
97315
180,000/12 months
400,000/36 months
400,000/36 months
• For TRAPP-HD and use on building sites with very
hilly terrain, corresponding to VS (Very severe) and
VS+ (Very severe+) driving conditions, according
to the definitions for "Engine operating conditions
(EOC)" which describes the degree of loading on
the engine, then transmission oil 97315 or engine
oil SAE 50 must be used. The oil exchange interval
for transmission oil 97315 is max 2500 driving
hours, and for engine oil SAE 50, max 600 driving
hours.
• If a PTO or split gear is used for more than 50 % of
the driving time, the oil must be changed after max
2500 driving hours for transmission oil 97307, and
after max 600 driving hours for engine oil SAE 50
(or SAE 40 or SAE 30).
Maintenance 557
• If the total weight for the combination exceeds
80 ton and the ambient temperature is above 30°C
for more than 1 month per year, the oil change
intervals shall be halved.
Replenishing oil level in gearbox
When the oil level in a gearbox is too low, it must be
topped up with oil. The following then applies:
• If the same oil is used to top up the gearbox as the
one already in the gearbox, there is no limit to how
much oil can be filled or how many times the oil
level can be replenished.
• If approved oil other than the one already in the
gearbox is used for topping up, then no more than
one litre may be used. This applies regardless of
how many times the oil is topped up to the correct
level. If more oil needs to be added, carry out a
complete oil change instead
Oil and filter changes after a repair to the
gearbox
If a component has been repaired or renovated, or if
the gearbox has been opened, an extra oil and filter
change must be carried out. This change must be
carried out at 10,000 km or 4 weeks, whichever is first,
after a component has been repaired, overhauled or
opened. When the extra oil and filter change has been
completed, the component's normal service
recommendation applies.
Checking the oil level
1
Remove the sound baffle, if fitted, from
underneath the gearbox
2
Check that the oil level is between the centre and
the maximum level on the transparent level plug
in the gearbox (A) (maximum and minimum oil
level, see picture)
3
Top up with oil as necessary, but first clean
round the filler plug (B)
Note!
Do not undo the transparent level
plug.
558 Maintenance
4
Remove the air vent hose from the filler plug (B)
and unscrew the plug
5
Fill with new oil until the level reaches the top
half of the maximum and minimum oil levels on
the transparent level plug (A) (max and min oil
levels, see illustration)
6
Apply a layer of thread sealant to the threads of
the filler plug (B) and screw the plug on. The
pipe on the plug should have the same orientation
(pointing diagonally upwards) as before removal
7
Install the air vent hose
8
Refit any sound baffles under the gearbox
J1006732
J1007661
Change oil and filter
Drain the oil immediately after driving. Then it has
low viscosity.
1
Untighten the drain plug.
2
Unscrew the screws holding the oil filter housing
(1).
3
Remove the filter housing (1).
4
Pull out the old filter (2).
5
Clean the sealing surface between the filter
housing and the gearbox.
6
Replace the gasket.
7
Fit the new filter.
8
Screw on the filter housing.
9
Fit the drain plug.
Caution!
Hot oil can cause burns.
Note!
The support tube in the centre of the
filter must not be removed /
replaced.
Maintenance 559
10
Fill the gearbox with new oil up to the maximum
oil level on the transparent level plug (see
illustration).
11
Run the gearbox for at least one minute in neutral
with the clutch pedal released.
12
Check the oil level again.
13
If the level has dropped, top up with more oil and
run the gearbox for another minute.
14
Repeat the check and top up until the level does
not drop after running the gearbox.
J0008163
1
Filter housing
2
Filter
J1007661
Level plug
Note!
Do not untighten the level plug.
Automatic gearbox
Oil grade
Transmission oils fulfilling quality requirements of
both Dexron III and Allison C4 shall be used.
Gearbox
Oil change volume, approx. litres
VT1705PT
35
560 Maintenance
Gearbox
Oil change volume, approx. litres
VT1706PT
35
VT1906PT
35
VT2006PT
35
VT2206PT
35
VT2506PT
35
Viscosity
Transmission oils fulfilling quality requirements of
both Dexron III and Allison C4 shall be used. This
automatically provides oils of the correct viscosity.
These oils must be used irrespective of ambient
temperatures.
Service intervals
• First filter change after 10,000 km or 4 weeks,
whichever occurs first. The oil level must be
checked after changing the filter. No oil change
shall be performed
• After the first filter change has been done, the oil
and filter shall be changed every 90 000 km or once
a year, whichever occurs first
• Under some gearbox operating conditions, shorter
change intervals may be necessary. Examples of
such are extreme heat and much use of the retarder
• The change interval must be halved for heavy
driving or frequent driving under hilly road
conditions
• All these types of gearboxes are equipped with a
ventilation filter, which ensures that air pressure
does not build up in the gearbox. The ventilation
filter must be kept clean and open, and therefore it
must normally be changed after 24 months. If the
gearbox is operating under very dusty and dirt
conditions, it will be necessary to reduce the
replacement intervals for the ventilation filter
Maintenance 561
Checking the oil level
Check the oil level with the gearbox at operating
temperature, 70–90°C to ensure that the oil level is
correct.
1
Clean round the oil filler cap and dipstick
2
Park on a flat surface, apply the parking brake
and start the engine
3
Put the gear selector in neutral with the engine
running at about 1000 rpm
4
Wipe the dipstick on a clean lint-free paper
5
Check the oil level with the dipstick and top up
with the correct grade of oil as necessary. The
level should be between the markings on the
dipstick. If the oil level is too high it may cause a
high oil temperature in the gearbox
Pay attention to the cleanliness of the oil!
J1007408
Change oil and filter
1
Clean the gearbox and the external oil filters.
2
Drain the oil through the sump drain plug (B).
3
Unscrew the old oil filters (A).
4
Clean the mating surfaces for the oil filters on the
gearbox.
5
Oil the rubber gaskets on the new oil filters and
tighten them by hand in accordance with the
instructions on the filters.
6
Fit the drain plug (B) with a new sealing.
7
Clean round the oil filler cap and dipstick, and
fill new oil in
the gearbox.
J1006796
562 Maintenance
J1007408
Transfer gearbox
Oil recommendations
On transfer boxes with a transparent level plug the oil
level shall be between the centre and the maximum
level on the transparent level plug .
On transfer boxes without transparent level plug, the
oil is to be filled up to the edge of the level hole.
J1007661
Transfer box
Oil change volume, approx.
litres
FD7
5,5
VT2501TB
5,5
Oil grade
1
Transmission oils: Volvo Transmission oils
97305, 97307 or 97315.
2
Engine oils: API CE or CF; ACEA E2 or E3.
Note!
Only monograde oils.
Maintenance 563
Note!
The choice of oil grade affects the
service interval; see the table.
Viscosity
Viscosity is selected according to the diagram below.
1) For components that are run at stable ambient
temperatures higher than +30 °C. Applies to engine
oils: note that multigrade oils MUST NOT be used.
J1008789
Note!
If the temperature is below -25°C,
use Volvo Transmission oil 97307.
Service interval
First oil change after 10,000 km or 4 weeks, whichever
occurs first.
Apply the service intervals in the table:
Oil grade
Service interval, km/months
Engine oil Transmission oil
97305
120 000 / 12
Transmission oils 97307,
97315
180 000 / 12
564 Maintenance
Replenishing oil level in transfer gearbox
When the oil level in the transfer box is too low, it
must be topped up with oil. The following then
applies:
• If the same oil is used to top up the transfer box as
the one already in the transfer box, there is no limit
to how much oil can be filled or how many times
the oil level can be replenished.
• If approved oil other than the one already in the
transfer box is used for topping up, then no more
than 0.5 litre may be used. This applies regardless
of how many times the oil is topped up to the
correct level. If more oil needs to be added, carry
out a complete oil change instead
Oil change after repair of transfer box
If a component has been repaired, renovated or
opened, an extra oil change must be carried out. This
oil change must be carried out at 10,000 km or 4
weeks, whichever is first, after a component has been
repaired, overhauled or opened. When the extra oil
change has been completed, the component's normal
service recommendation applies.
Checking the oil level
1
Check that the oil level is between the centre and
the maximum level on the transparent level plug
in the transfer gearbox (A) (maximum and
minimum oil level, see picture)
2
Top up with oil as necessary, but first clean
round the filler plug (B)
3
Unscrew the filler plug (B) and fill with oil until
the oil level is between the centre and the
maximum level on the transparent level plug (A)
(maximum and minimum oil level, see picture)
4
Refit the filler plug (B). If the seal ring on the
plug is damaged, change the seal ring
Note!
Do not undo the transparent level
plug.
Maintenance 565
J1007655
J1007661
Oil change
1
Clean around the drain plug (C) and the filler
plug (B).
2
Unscrew the drain plug (C) and drain the oil.
Unscrew the filler plug (B).
3
Fit the drain plug (C). If the sealing ring on the
plug is damaged, it must be replaced.
4
Fill new oil into the transfer gearbox until the oil
level reaches the centre of the transparent level
plug (A) (maximum and minimum oil level, see
illustration).
5
Refit the filler plug (B). If the sealing ring on the
plug is damaged, it must be replaced.
J1007656
566 Maintenance
J1007661
Note!
Do not remove the transparent level
plug.
Driving front axle
Oil recommendations
Driving front
axle
Change volume approx. litres
FS0910HZ
11.5
Note that the hub's change volume is not
included.
Each hub change volume is approx. 1.5
litres.
Oil grade
Transmission oil API GL-5.
Viscosity
Viscosity is selected in accordance with the diagram.
Temperatures refer to constant ambient temperatures.
1) When driving in severe condition or frequently
driving on inclines, we recommend SAE 80W/140,
SAE 85W/140 or SAE 140 (instead of the normal SAE
90)
Maintenance 567
Note!
SAE 80W/90 must not be used.
Service intervals
• First oil change after 10,000 km or 4 weeks,
whichever occurs first.
• After the first oil change, the oil should be changed
every 120,000 km or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first
Oil change after repair of driving front axle
If a component has been repaired, renovated or
opened, an extra oil change must be carried out. This
oil change must be carried out at 10,000 km or 4
weeks, whichever is first, after a component has been
repaired, overhauled or opened.
When the extra oil change has been completed, the
component's normal service recommendation applies.
When replenishing the oil level in the driving
front axle
When the oil level in the driving front axle is too low,
it must be topped up with oil. The following then
applies:
• If the same oil is used for topping up as the one
already in the driving front axle, there is no limit to
how much oil can be filled or how many times the
oil level can be replenished in the driving front axle
• If approved oil other than the one already used in
the driving front axle is used for topping up, then
no more than one litre may be used. This applies
regardless of how many times the oil is topped up
to the correct level. If more oil needs to be added,
carry out a complete oil change instead
568 Maintenance
Checking the oil level
Front axle wheel gears
The front axle should be raised.
1
Clean around the level/filler plugs (A) for the
wheel gears
2
Turn the wheel so that the level mark on the
level/filling hole is horizontal
3
Remove the level/filler plug and check that the
oil level reaches up to the edge of the filling hole
4
Top up with oil as necessary
5
Install the level/filler plugs for the wheel gears. If
a seal ring on any of the plugs is damaged, the
seal ring must be changed
J1007657
Front axle differential carrier
1
Clean around the level/filler plug (A).
2
Remove the level/filler plug (A), and check that
the oil level reaches up to the edge of the filler
hole.
3
Top up with oil as necessary.
4
Refit the level/filler plug (A).
If the filler plug has a sealing washer, the sealing
washer must be replaced.
J1007658
Maintenance 569
Change oil
Front axle wheel gears
1
Clean the connections for the drain plug (A) and
the level/filler plug (B).
2
Position the wheel so that the drain plug (B) is at
the bottom.
3
Remove the drain plug and drain the oil from the
wheel gear housing. Remove also the level/filler
plug (A) to facilitate draining.
4
Refit the drain plug (B). If the drain plug's
sealing ring is damaged, it must be replaced.
5
Position the wheel so that the level mark by the
level/filler hole (A) is horizontal.
6
Fill each wheel gear housing with new oil to the
edge of the level hole.
7
Refit the level/filler plug (A). If the level/filler
plug's sealing ring is damaged, it must be
replaced.
J1007659
The front axle must be raised
Front axle differential carrier
1
Clean around the drain plug (B) and the level/
filler plug (A).
2
Remove the drain plug (B) and drain the oil.
Remove the level/filler plug (A).
3
Refit the drain plug (B). If the plug has a sealing
washer, the sealing washer must be replaced.
4
Fill the differential carrier with new oil to the
edge of the filler hole.
5
J4017902
Refit the level/filler plug (A). If the plug has a
sealing washer, the sealing washer must be
replaced.
J1007658
570 Maintenance
Flywheel mounted power take-off
Power take-off Approximate change volume in litres
PTOFLY
5
Oil grade
Transmission oil:
Volvo transmission oil 97305.
Engine oil:
API CE, CF or ACEA E2, E3.
Viscosity
Viscosity is selected in accordance with the diagram:
1) For components without oil cooler that are run at a
stable ambient temperature higher than +30°C.
Applies to engine oils: note that multi-grade oils
SHALL NOT be used.
Components with an oil cooler can be run in an
ambient temperature above +30°C when using oils
SAE 80W-90 or SAE 40.
J1008789
Service intervals
• First oil and filter change after 10,000 km or 4
weeks, whichever occurs first
• After the first oil and filter change, the oil should be
changed every 120,000 km or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first.
Maintenance 571
Compact retarder
Oil change volumes
Retarder
Volvo
design
Voith
design
RET-TH
VR3250
VR 3250
Oil volume, litre
Production filling
Service filling
6,1
5,4
Heat exchanger,
completely drained from
oil
6,1
In order to perform the service in a correct way, the
type of retarder must be known. The information can
be obtained by reading the type plate, see figure.
J5011336
Note!
The name of the retarder is not
marked on the type plate in some
cases. In such cases the retarder is of
type RET-RTH.
Grade
Approved oils for use, see Voiths homepage:
http://www.voithturbo.de/
vt_en_paa_road_retarder_service_oellist.htm
Viscosity
Approved oils for use, see Voiths homepage:
http://www.voithturbo.de/
vt_en_paa_road_retarder_service_oellist.htm
572 Maintenance
EOC
(Engine Operating Condition )
L
M
H
S
VS
Model
Oil grade
RET-TH/
VR 3250
Voith Type A
120 000 / 241
60 000 / 241
45 000 / 241
Voith Type B
135 000 / 241
90 000 / 241
65 000 / 241
Voith Type C
180 000 / 241
135 000 / 241
90 000 / 241
VS+
km/max month
See information about applicable EOC definitions for each engine type, pages 7-23, Service bulletin 175–09,
Lubrication service and oil change.
Approved oils for use, see Voiths homepage:
http://www.voithturbo.de/vt_en_paa_road_retarder_service_oellist.htm
1
Whichever occurs first.
For Light/Medium/Heavy-applications where at least
one of the following conditions apply, the service
interval for Severe applications shall be used:
• use in areas with high ambient temperatures, such
as in Saudi Arabia
• continuous driving at altitudes above 1500m above
sea level
• continuous driving in extremely hilly topography
• use of the retarder in position 1–3 or B more than
once per km
• use of the retarder in position 1–3 or B more than
10% of driving time
The service interval, repairs or inspected components
are the same as for new components.
Maintenance 573
Checking the oil level
The oil level in the retarder normally only needs to be
checked when there is a problem with the retarder,
such as low braking torque, oil leakage or in certain
cases when an oil change has been done on the
retarder. To ensure the correct oil level in the retarder,
it is most suitable to perform the oil level check after
driving, when the oil is hot. The vehicle must be
standing horizontally.
Warning!
The retarder must be disengaged
when you check the oil level. Hot
oil can otherwise be forced out
from the retarder and cause burns.
Use protective gloves.
Note!
It is important for retarder function
that the oil level is correct.
1
Clean around the drain plugs (C), oil filler plug
(A) and breather plug (B).
2
Place a suitable vessel under the retarder to
collect the oil.
3
Remove the drain plugs, the oil filler plug and the
breather plug and let the oil run out of the
retarder.
4
Check the sealing rings on the drain plugs. If they
are damaged, the plugs must be replaced. Refit
the drain plugs and tighten them to 16 Nm.
5
Measure the collected oil volume, if necessary
correct it to the right oil volume,
or refill the retarder with new oil measured to the
right volume. For the correct oil change volume,
see Oil change volumes. For the correct oil grade,
see Oil grades.
6
Fill with oil through the filler hole. The filling
time should be at least 3 minutes to allow the
retarder system to ventilate through the breather
passage.
7
Check the sealing ring on the oil filler plug. If it
is damaged, the plug must be replaced. Refit the
oil filler plug and tighten it to 50 Nm.
A
B
208263
73
OIL
WATER
C
J206945
574 Maintenance
8
Check the sealing ring on the breather plug. If the
sealing ring is damaged, replace it. Refit the
breather plug and tighten it to 13 Nm.
9
After filling oil, drive with an approx. speed of
50 km/h. Engage
the retarder 5 times in position 2 for about 5
seconds each time. Most suitably done in
connection with road test.
Oil change
Oil change volume:
5.4 litres.
Oil change is best done immediately after driving
when the oil is hot and
has lower viscosity.
Use oil according to “Oil recommendations”
The vehicle must be standing horizontally.
Warning!
The retarder must be disengaged
when changing oil. Hot oil can
otherwise be forced
out of the retarder and cause burn
injuries. Wear protective gloves.
J0008610
Maintenance 575
1
Remove any sound baffles from under the
gearbox.
2
Clean around the drain plugs (D), filler plug (A)
and breather plug (E).
3
Remove the drain plugs (D), filler plug (A) and
breather plug (E) and let the oil run out of the
retarder.
4
Clean around the plug (C) and remove the plug
with strainer.
5
Wash and blow clean the strainer in the plug (C)
with compressed air.
6
Refit the plug (C) with strainer. If the sealing ring
is damaged, replace it. Torque tighten the plug to
100 Nm.
7
Refit the drain plugs (D). If the sealing rings are
damaged, they must be replaced. Torque tighten
the plugs to 20 Nm.
8
Fill the retarder with exactly the correct amount
of oil. Pour the oil carefully into the filler hole
(A). The filling time should be at least 3 minutes
to allow the retarder system to ventilate through
the breather passage (E).
9
Refit the filler plug (A). If the sealing ring is
damaged, it must be replaced. Torque tighten the
plug to 50 Nm.
10
Refit the breather plug (E). If the sealing ring is
damaged, it must be replaced. Torque tighten the
plug to 13 Nm.
11
Check-tighten the retarder's top cover screws
according to the tightening diagram. Tightening
torque 30 Nm. Applies only to the first retarder
oil change.
12
Refit any sound baffles under the gearbox.
Air drier, general
The purpose of the air drier is to dry and clean the
compressed air from moisture and oil, which could
otherwise cause malfunctions. The air drier is
Note!
After the oil change, drive at about
50 km/h. Apply the retarder 5 times
in position 2 for about 5 seconds
each time. This is done most suitably
when road testing.
J0008979
Tightening diagram
576 Maintenance
regenerated (dried) by allowing a certain amount of
the pumped air to flow back through the drier. The
system pressure drops during this process. If the
compressor has pumped a large amount of air, the
compressor may start up again before the required
amount of air has flowed back. This will result in a
number of compressor charging and regeneration
phases in sequence, until the required amount of air
has flowed back. This is quite normal.
Checking the air drier
Drain the primary and circuit tanks at least once a
week, or when the symbol for moisture is displayed. If
any of the tanks contain water, the desiccant must be
replaced and the air drier checked at a Volvo
workshop.
The desiccant in the braking system shall be replaced
every other year or when the symbol for replacement
of desiccant is displayed. If this function is not
activated, the replacement interval is every 12 months.
Use only Volvo original desiccant inserts, which have
a built-in oil filter .
J5012263
J5013654
The symbol has several meanings,
see section Display. In order to find
out why the symbol is lit,
look up the fault message in the
display diagnostic menu.
Note!
Do not use frost protection (alcohol)
in trucks with air driers.
Maintenance 577
Charging with air from an external compressed air source
Always use the test nipple on the air drier. Charging
with air in any other way may allow moisture to enter
into the system.
The test nipple and the air drier are located in the
wheel housing on the passenger side.
J0010459
Tilt the cab to access the test nipple.
Brake lining
Each brake caliper is fitted with an electric wear
sensor that shows the average thickness of both brake
linings. A yellow warning lamp will come on and an
error code will be set when only 20% of the brake
linings is remaining. The brake pads must then be
replaced. Brake lining wear can also be read using the
wear pin on the brake caliper. The line on the
measuring pin indicates the amount of outer brake
lining that is left. The marks correspond to 25, 50, 75
and 100 percent of lining thickness. When the linings
are new, 20 mm of the wear pin is visible. When 4 mm
of the wear pin is visible then the lining is
approximately 4 mm thick; worn out. Replace brake
pads on both wheels on the same axle at the same
time. The electric wear sensor must be recalibrated at a
Volvo garage after the brake pads have been changed.
J5011012
578 Maintenance
Note!
Brake lining wear can also be read
using the wear pin on the brake
caliper at every basic service, as a
complement to the electronic sensor.
Servo steering
Oil recommendations
Oil grade
Oil volume
Oil change
Filter change
Servo steering
PSS-SING
PSS-DUAL
ATF oil, type Dexron III
approx. 5.0
litres
approx. 9.0
litres
Only in
connection with
repairs.
Once
per year.
Steering system,
hydraulically steered
pusher axle and
hydraulically steered
trailing wheel axle
ATF oil, type Dexron III
approx. 6.0
litres
Only in
connection with
repairs
Checking the oil level
1
Clean around the cap and dipstick
2
Check the oil level. With the engine stationary,
the level should be on the MAX marking on the
dipstick
3
Top up with oil as necessary
Some trucks with 2-circuit steering systems have twin
oil reservoirs for the servo steering.
J0008138
Maintenance 579
Replacing filter
Change oil immediately after carrying out repairs.
1
Clean round the cap and the dipstick before the
cap is removed
2
Press down and unscrew the locking device for
the filter
3
Lift up the old filter and keep one finger under
the filter's centre hole, so that impurities from
inside the filter do not enter the oil reservoir
4
Transfer the locking device to the new filter and
insert it into the oil reservoir
5
Check that the filter is positioned correctly and is
locked in place securely
6
Check the oil level and top up with oil to the
MAX marking
7
Fit the cover
Hydraulic pusher axle and trailing wheel axle
Checking the oil level
1
Clean around the cap and dipstick
2
Unplug the connector on the electrical cable to
the dipstick. Check the oil level. With the engine
stationary, the level should be on the MAX
marking on the dipstick
3
Top up with oil as necessary
580 Maintenance
Rear axle
Oil recommendations
On vehicles with single gear, the oil is filled up to the
edge of the level hole.
On vehicles with hub reduction, the hub is first filled
with oil in accordance with the table above. The
differential is then filled with oil up to the edge of the
level hole.
Note!
If the rear axle has no entry under
service category on the ID plate, it
belongs to service category G.
For a number of reasons not all rear axles can have the
same service recommendations. They have therefore
been divided into service categories.
The service categories, numbers or letters, can be
found on the ID plate on the final drive. The categories
are G, 1 and 2.
Two different service recommendations can be applied
to rear axles:
• Standard service recommendation
• Alternative service recommendation
The alternative service recommendation provides
longer service intervals than standard service
recommendation. The alternative service
recommendation demands the use of special oil.
The standard service recommendation and alternative
service recommendation both consist of three parts.
The three parts are oil grade, viscosity and service
intervals. These can be found in the same order on the
following pages.
The following procedure can be very useful when
deciding which oil to use.
1
Find out which service category the component
belongs to
2
Use the information in the table under Service
intervals and decide which service
recommendation will be used
J1006943
Maintenance 581
3
Use the information under Oil grade and
Viscosity to determine which oil to use
Rear axle
Approximate change volume in litres
Final drive
Every hub
Total
RAEV80
12
12
RSS1344B
12,5
12,5
RS1356SV
Leaf springs
8,5
8,5
RS1356SV
Air suspension
9
9
RS1352HV 1
19
1,5
22
RS1352HV
Leaf springs
20
3
26
RS1352HV
Air suspension
16
3
22
RS1365HV
22
3
28
RS1370HV 1
19
1,5
22
RS1370HV
Leaf springs
20
3
26
RS1370HV
Air suspension
16
3
22
RSH1370C
(S5 hub)
17,3
0,6
18,5
CTEV87
(front axle)
Leaf springs
20
20
CTEV87
(rear axle)
Leaf springs
9
9
CTEV87
(front axle)
Air suspension
16
16
1
Oil volume1.5 litre only for hub reduction casings with part number 1524851 or 1524852. This marking can
be seen on the hub reduction casings.
582 Maintenance
Rear axle
Approximate change volume in litres
Final drive
Every hub
Total
CTEV87
(rear axle)
Air suspension
7,5
7,5
CTN372
(front axle)
26,5
3
32,5
CTN372
(rear axle)
23,5
3
29,5
CTN372,
BGT32TR
(front axle)
22
3
28
CTN372,
BGT32TR
(rear axle)
20
3
26
CTN472
(front axle)
28
3
34
CTN472
(rear axle)
25
3
31
RT2610HV
(front axle)
Leaf springs
23
3
29
RT2610HV
(rear axle)
Leaf springs
19
3
25
RT2610HV
(front axle)
Air suspension
23
3
29
RT2610HV
(rear axle)
Air suspension
19
3
25
RT3210HV
(front axle) 1
22,5
1,5
25,5
1
Oil volume1.5 litre only for hub reduction casings with part number 1524851 or 1524852. This marking can
be seen on the hub reduction casings.
Maintenance 583
Rear axle
Approximate change volume in litres
Final drive
Every hub
Total
RT3210HV
(front axle)
Leaf springs
22,5
3
28
RT3210HV
(rear axle) 1
1,8
1,5
21,5
RT3210HV
(rear axle)
Leaf springs
18,5
3
24
RTH2610B
(front axle)
Leaf springs
23
3
30
RTH2610B
(rear axle)
Leaf springs
19
3
26
RTS2370A
(front axle)
20
20
RTS2370A
(rear axle)
14
14
1
Oil volume1.5 litre only for hub reduction casings with part number 1524851 or 1524852. This marking can
be seen on the hub reduction casings.
Oil grade
1
SAE J 2360 or APL GL-5
Note!
2
Volvo Transmission oil 97312
The choice of oil grade affects the
service interval; see the table.
584 Maintenance
Viscosity
Viscosity is selected in accordance with the diagram.
Temperatures refer to constant ambient temperatures.
1) When driving in severe conditions or frequently
driving in very hilly road conditions, SAE 80W-140,
SAE 85W-140 or SAE 140 are recommended
2) SAE 90 may not be used in rear axle RAN281
J1008788
Note!
SAE 80W/90 must not be used.
Service interval
The service category of the rear axle is dependant on
where the vehicle was manufactured. In some markets
there can be vehicles with rear axles belonging to
different service categories, and in these cases special
care must be taken when planning the first oil change.
Service category Interval
Service
First oil change after 10 000 km or 4
categories 1 and weeks, which ever
G
occurs first.
Service category First oil and oil filter change after
2
400 000 km or three years,
whichever occurs first.
Oil grade
Service category
G
1 and 2
Oil change interval (km)
1
This recommendation is not applicable to RAN281.
Maintenance 585
Oil grade
API GL-5 and/or SAE
J2360
Service category
120 000/12
months
120 000/12
months
Volvo Transmission oil 180,000/12
97312
months 1
400,000/36
months
1
This recommendation is not applicable to RAN281.
• With construction site driving in extremely hilly
conditions the oil shall be changed after 2500
driving hours when using transmission oil 97312,
and after max 600 driving hours when using any
other oil
• For vehicles with hub reduction axles which are
frequently driven at more than 90 km/h the service
interval shall be halved
• If the total weight for the combination exceeds
80 ton and the ambient temperature is above 30°C
for more than 1 month per year, the oil change
intervals shall be halved
When replenishing oil level in rear axle
When the oil level in a rear axle is too low, it must be
topped up with oil. The following then applies:
• If the same oil is used to top up the rear axle as the
one already in the rear axle, there is no limit to how
much oil can be filled or how many times the oil
level can be replenished
• If approved oil other than the one already in the rear
axle is used for topping up, then no more than one
litre may be used. This applies regardless of how
many times the oil is topped up to the correct level.
If more oil needs to be added, carry out a complete
oil change instead
586 Maintenance
Check the oil level
If there is any oil leakage from the rear axle and/or hub
reduction hubs, or if there is any doubt about the rear
axle oil level, check as follows:
If there is a bogie, it must be lowered.
1
Clean around the level plug/filler plug (1)
2
Remove the level/filler plug (1) and check that
the oil level reaches up to the edge of the filling
hole
3
Top up with oil as necessary
4
Install the level/filler plug (1)
If the filler plug has a seal washer, the seal washer
must be changed.
J4017799
1
Level/filler plug
2
Drain plug
Change oil
Drain the oil immediately after driving. Then it has
low viscosity.
Drain the oil by unscrewing the drain plug in the rear
axle casing. Replace the sealing if it is damaged.
Warning!
Hot oil can cause burns.
Note!
If the vehicle has a rear axle with
hub reduction, the hubs must be
drained separately, see “Rear axle
with hub reduction”.
Maintenance 587
Note!
Oil can run down to the anti-roll bar
and spread out. Use a large vessel to
collect the oil. Place a piece of sheet
metal between the rear axle and the
anti-roll bar that the oil can run on to
when draining the rear axle. Clean
the anti-roll bar after the oil change
if oil has run onto it.
Rear axle with hub reduction
Change oil in the hub
Fill each hub first and then fill the remaining oil into
the rear axle casing. See “Oil recommendations” for
the correct oil volume.
The level mark must be horizontal when checking the
oil.
J4017800
588 Maintenance
The plug (1) must be in its lowest position when oil is
being drained.
J1007412
Tyres
Some advice on avoiding unnecessary
tyre wear
• Keep the correct air pressure, not too high and not
too low
• Remember that wear increases with speed
• Do not exert excess pressure on the tyres with
uneven loads
• Do not drive with imbalanced tyres
• Check front wheel toe-in regularly
• Do not shift tyres unnecessarily
Single drive wheels
Trucks with single tyres on the driving axle shall be
equipped with tyre pressure monitoring (TPM) and
electronic stability program (ESP). TPM warns the
driver if a tyre is leaking air, which could cause the
tyre to explode due to overheating. If an explosion
should occur, ESP provides an important function and
helps the driver keep control of the truck. From a
safety point of view, it is important that these systems
function correctly. If a fault in ESP, the braking
Maintenance 589
system or TPM is indicated, drive carefully with
reduced speed, especially on curves. The speed should
not exceed 60km/h. Lower the speed even further in
sharp curves. Rectify the fault as soon as possible.
Dual wheels
Use only tyres of the same type on dual mounted
wheels. The tyres may have max. 6 mm difference in
diameter.
Checking tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressures when refueling, or at least
every fortnight. Suit the pressures to the type of truck
and axle load, not to the technical maximum load.
Remember to also check the pressure in the spare tyre
occasionally.
Recommended tyre pressures
Follow the tyre manufacturer's recommendations.
If there is no recommendation, a temporary solution is
to use the tyre pressures in the diagram below.
Note!
The tyre pressures in the diagram
below are taken from ETRTO's
(European Tyre and Rim Technical
Organisation) standard manual. All
the larger tyre manufacturers are
members of ETRTO and use the
standard manual as a guide.
590 Maintenance
Dual mounting
Single mounting
Maintenance 591
Dual mounting
Single mounting
592 Maintenance
Dual mounting
Single mounting
Maintenance 593
Changing wheels
Removing the wheel
1
Chock the wheel that is to remain on the ground
2
Ensure that the brake is not applied to the wheel
that is to be removed
3
Place the jack under the axle, as close to the
wheel as possible
4
Undo the wheel nuts a couple of turns
5
Lift the truck so that the wheel looses contact
with the ground (Lift one side at a time.)
6
Remove the wheel nuts completely
7
Lift off the wheel
Warning!
Never crawl under the vehicle
while it is raised on a jack!
Place the jack on a solid,
horizontal and non-slippery
surface!
Chock the wheels that are to
remain on the ground with
substantial wooden blocks or
large stones. Chock both in front
of and behind the wheel
Release the brake on the wheel
that is to be removed
Note!
The jack shall not press against the
shock absorber bracket or the antiroll bar bracket.
Fit the wheel
Note!
Always use wheel bolts and wheel
nuts intended for the type of wheel.
Different types of wheel require
different types of wheel bolts and
wheel nuts.
594 Maintenance
Disc wheel
1
Clean and lubricate the wheel bolt threads with
oil only
2
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel, brake
drum and hub
3
Release the brakes (Otherwise the brake drum
can become oval.)
4
Torque tighten the wheel nuts to 200 ±8 Nm.
Tightening sequence according to illustration
5
After torque tightening, angle tighten the wheel
nuts 90°±10°. Tightening sequence according to
illustration. Check-tighten the wheel nuts after
driving the vehicle a short distance (approx. 200
km)
J0008154
Tightening order, disc wheels
Note!
If the torque when re-tightening is
less than 670 Nm on any of the
wheel nuts, then all the wheel nuts
must be released and then be torquetightened and angle tightened
according to the tightening
sequence . Every 6 months: Check
and re-tighten all wheel nuts
irrespective of whether the wheel has
been removed or not.
Note!
Note that the size of the wheel bolts
is M22x1.5, and not 7/8"-14 with a
UNF thread as on older Volvo
models.
Maintenance 595
Spoked wheel, single wheel
1
Clean and lubricate the wheel bolt threads with
oil only.
2
Clean the contact surface of the wheel and
spoked hub
3
Lift the wheel onto the hub. Make sure the valve
and both stops on the wheel rim are positioned
between two spokes
4
Fit two clamp shoes and nuts opposite each other
5
Gently tighten the nuts so that the wheel is
centred
6
Fit the remaining clamp shoes and nuts
7
Torque-tighten the nuts in steps to tightening
torque 330 ±30 Nm. Tightening sequence as
illustrated
8
Retighten the nuts to 330 Nm after driving the
vehicle a short distance (approx. 200 km)
J0008155
Single wheel, centring
Every 6 months: Check and re-tighten all wheel nuts
irrespective of whether the wheel has been removed or
not.
J0008156
Tightening order, spoke wheels
596 Maintenance
Spoked wheels, double wheels
1
Clean and lubricate the wheel bolt threads with
oil only.
2
Clean the contact surface of the wheel and
spoked hub
3
Fit the inboard wheel so that the valve and both
stops on the wheel rim are positioned between
two spokes (see figure)
4
Push on the spacer ring so that it is tight against
the inboard wheel rim. The spacer ring stop must
be placed between two spokes. Make sure the
stop does not obscure the valve on the inboard
tyre and the centring heels of the spacer ring are
on top of the spokes (see figure)
5
Lift the outboard wheel and press it against the
spacer ring. Make sure the valve on the outboard
tyre is located diagonally opposite the one on the
inboard tyre. Fit both upper clamps shoes and
nuts. Tighten the nuts enough to centre the wheel
6
Fit the remaining clamps and nuts. Tighten the
nuts in the correct order around the edge of the
wheel rim. Torque-tighten the nuts in steps
according to the illustration to 330 ±30 Nm.
Tightening sequence as illustrated
7
Retighten the wheel nuts to 330 Nm after driving
the vehicle a short distance (approx. 200 km)
Every 6 months: Check and re-tighten all wheel
nuts irrespective of whether the wheel has been
removed or not.
J0008177
J0008157
J0008156
Maintenance 597
Changing front wheel on a fully air
suspended truck
J0007843
1
Put the starter key in drive position
2
Lock the wheels which will be left on the ground.
Use chocks, heavy blocks of wood or large stones
3
Take the jack out
4
Tilt the cab
5
Lift the front of the chassis by means of the air
suspension so that the jack fits exactly under the
front reaction rod (A)
6
Lower the front suspension as far as possible
with the air suspension
7
Set the starter key in stop position
8
Put the control switch (the top one on the control
box) in the centre position
9
Take out the load retention strap
10
Tighten the load retention strap around the antiroll bar and chassis (B)
11
Loosen the wheel nuts (several turns)
12
Lift up the truck with a jack
13
Put a block of wood underneath the front axle
14
Remove the wheel
15
Install the spare wheel
598 Maintenance
16
Remove the block of wood from under the front
axle
17
Lower the jack
18
Remove the load retention strap
19
Put the starter key in drive position
20
Raise the vehicle with the air suspension
21
Remove the jack
22
Tighten the wheel nuts
23
Lower the cab
24
Remove the chocks
Removing a wheel on all wheel drive
truck
Raising the front axle on all wheel drive trucks
1
Chock the wheel that is to remain on the ground
2
Ensure that the brake is not applied to the wheel
that is to be removed
3
Undo the wheel nuts a couple of turns
4
Take out the wooden blocks that are kept in the
cab
5
Put the large wooden block under the spring unit
attachment to the front axle casing
6
Place the jack on the wooden block
7
Screw up the jack until it makes contact with the
axle casing
8
Lift the front axle up using the jack
9
Place the other wooden block standing upright on
the horizontal wooden block
10
Lower the axle so the axle casing rests on the
standing wooden block
11
Lower the jack's hydraulic piston
12
Screw up the jack until it makes contact with the
axle casing
13
Raise the axle with the jack so that the wheel is
free from the ground
J7009728
Maintenance 599
14
Leave the standing wooden block in place until
the spare wheel is fitted
15
Remove the wheel bolts completely
16
Lift off the wheel
Lower the axle by first lowering it onto the standing
wooden block. Then screw down the adjustable part of
the jack and lift the axle sufficiently to remove the
standing wooden block. Lower the axle completely.
J7009730
J7009729
Raising the rear axle on all wheel drive trucks
1
Chock the wheel that is to remain on the ground
2
Ensure that the brake is not applied to the wheel
that is to be removed
3
Undo the wheel nuts a couple of turns
4
Take out the wooden blocks that are kept in the
cab
5
Place the jack under the rear axle
6
Screw up the jack until it makes contact with the
axle casing
7
Raise the rear axle with the jack
8
Put the large wooden block under the axle casing
9
Lower the axle so the axle casing rests on the
standing wooden block
J7009731
600 Maintenance
10
Lower the jack's hydraulic piston
11
Screw down the adjustable part of the jack
12
Place the other wooden block under the axle
casing
13
Place the jack on the wooden block
14
Screw up the jack's adjustable part until it makes
contact with the support surface under the axle
15
Raise the axle with the jack so that the wheel is
free from the ground
16
Leave the standing wooden block in place until
the spare wheel is fitted
17
Remove the wheel bolts completely
18
Lift off the wheel
J7009732
Lower the axle by first lowering it onto the standing
wooden block. Remove the lying wooden block. Then
screw up the adjustable part of the jack and lift the
axle sufficiently to remove the standing wooden block.
Lower the axle completely.
J7009733
Disc wheel for disc brakes
J7008363
1
Rim
2
Disc
Maintenance 601
The wheel can also be used on vehicles with drum
brakes.
Caution!
Use only disc wheels with
exterior valve location on
vehicles with disc brakes.
Painting rims
Caution!
Protect the mating surfaces
between the hub and brake drum
when painting to keep them free
from paint.
Disc wheels: Only primer and
original finishing paint is allowed
on the wheel mating surfaces,
both on the outside and the
inside. There is a risk of the
wheel nuts coming loose if the
paint layer is too thick.
Spoke wheels: The sloping top of
the spokes must be completely
free from paint, etc.
602 Maintenance
Spare wheel in Combi-box
1
Tension the wheel in place with the tensioning
band
2
Fit the lever from the jack in the lever arm
Press the lever arm down as far as it will go
3
Fix the lever arm with the wingnut
J7009509
J7009510
Snow chains
Snow chains on the front axle should if possible be
placed on the passenger side On the drivers side, there
is a risk that snow chains will damage the link rod.
Maintenance 603
Hydraulic bogie lift
Oil recommendations
Bogie lift
Oil grade
Oil volume
Oil change
Hydraulic oil BLV or oil
that fulfills Standard
MIL-H-5606F.
5.5 litres
Once per year.
Checking the oil level
The bogie must be lowered and the bogie lift operated
to the end position.
1
Check that the oil level is between the markings
on the oil reservoir
2
Top up with oil as necessary
Changing oil
Drain the oil through the bottom plug (A). Refit the
plug and fill with oil.
Bodywork
Oil recommendations
Refer to the body builder's information for oil
recommendations and oil changes and for other
information about how the bodywork functions. Be
careful not to mix different types of hydraulic oil
without first having cleaned the hydraulic system or
after having asked the supplier of hydraulic oil for
advice.
J0008137
604 Maintenance
Cab tilt pump
Oil recommendations
Oil grade
Cab tilt pump
Hydraulic oil BLV
Oil change
Only in connection with
repairs.
Checking the oil level
Check the oil level with the cab in the driving position.
1
To check the oil level in the cab tilt pump, the
panel in front of the foot step must be removed
2
Place the pump rod for the cab tilt pump in its
rearmost position
3
Check that the oil level for the cab tilt pump is in
the centre of the level glass (B)
4
Top up with oil as necessary. Filler plug at (A)
The oil only needs to be changed in connection with
repairs.
Central lubrication
The central lubrication provides automatic lubrication,
which would otherwise be done at service intervals.
The advantages of this is that you get a more even
lubrication at all locations and the service occasions
are fewer.
The lubrication takes place during driving at 9 hour
intervals. The lubrication is also activated if the
vehicle has been stationary for more than 48 hours.
Manual lubrication
The central lubrication can be activated manually with
a switch under the pump's plastic cover on the main
unit.
If in doubt of the function of the central lubrication,
check the fuse and do manual lubrication.
J1007364
Maintenance 605
1
Start the engine.
2
Press in the switch under the plastic cover on the
central lubrication's main unit.
3
The pump motor should now run for approx. 2
minutes.
Replenishing lubricant
Important! It is extremely important to use the correct
equipment and quality of grease when replenishing to
avoid dirt getting into the system. Filling up is done
via the nipple, under the pump's plastic casing on the
central unit, with the tool intended for this.
Filling intervals: every six months or when the grease
level has decreased to the “MIN” mark
Grease consistency: NLGI 00 or NLGI 000 (For more
information about approved greases, contact an
authorised Volvo dealer.)
System volume:
Tractor: approx. 2.7 kg
Others: approx. 6 kg
Changing air filter for air conditioning system
Change air filter every 12 months. Never shake or
brush clean the filter if it becomes fouled any earlier.
Never wash the filter.
1
Unscrew the filter retainer
2
Dismantle the filter retainer
3
Discard the old filter
4
Clean the filter retainer
5
Fit the new filter
6
Assemble the filter retainer
7
Refit and screw on the filter retainer
J8008460
606 Maintenance
Refrigerant
Caution!
Refrigerant is a health hazard.
The air conditioning system may
only be serviced by authorised
personnel.
Parking heater
• Check that the combustion air and exhaust openings
are not blocked
• Check that the heater fuel pipes are carefully
installed and clamped
• To avoid harmful deposits, the heater should be
started once a month, even in summer, and should
then be allowed to run for 15 minutes. Do not
forget to set the thermostat and heat controls
• When the coolant is changed or topped up, the
engine must be warmed up until the thermostat
opens and the cooling system has been vented
before the heater can be started. If the heater is
started too early, there is a risk that the overheating
guard in the heater could be tripped
• Perform and annual check of the heater in good
time before the winter season starts. Contact your
Volvo workshop
Maintenance 607
Chassis lubrication
Chassis lubrication includes the lubrication of all
grease nipples using a grease gun and
check or change of oils.
Note!
Always make sure each grease point
is well lubricated. Grease until new
grease is forced
out and becomes visible. If no grease
forces its way out there is something
wrong and action
must be taken immediately.
Cab lubrication
Lubrication points
Lubricant
1 Lock and hinge
Grease, oil
2 Top footstep
Oil
3 Lower footstep
Oil
4 Door stop
Grease
5 Key hole
Lock oil
6 Striker plate, lock lug
Paraffin
7 Locks, baggage hatches
Paraffin
8 Cab lock
Grease
J1007404
Symbols
1
Engine oil
2
Gearbox oil or engine oil
3
Rear axle oil
4
ATF oil
5
Hydraulic oil
6
Brake fluid or clutch fluid
7
Lubricating grease
J1006475
608 Maintenance
Grease quality
Lithium based grease with EP additives and of
consistency NLGI no. 2. Check the following fluid
levels in connection with lubrication service:
• batteries
• cooling system
• washer reservoirs
4x2, 6x2, 8x2 vehicles with hydraulically
controlled bogies
J1007420
A=Lubrication points
B=Fluid level check
Maintenance 609
C=Oil change and filter change
1
Brake cam (one on each wheel, not included on
disc brakes)
2
Steering arm, 8x2 and 8x4
3
Spare wheel holder
4
Spring anchorage (2 pcs for 6x2 and 8x2)
5
Cylinder, bogie lift (2 pcs)
6
Axle, bogie lift (4 pcs)
7
Roller, balance arms (2 pcs)
8
Roller, bogie lift
9
Balance arms (6 pcs).
First, grease the grease nipple in the centre until
grease is forced out by the sealing ring
or the overflow hole. Then grease both the other
grease nipples until grease
is forced out.
10
Cradle (2 pcs, not included on air suspension).
Grease until grease is forced out.
11
Clutch fluid reservoir
12
Pump for cab tilt
13
Motor
14
Steering servo reservoir
15
Steering servo reservoir for dual servo systems
(certain versions of 8x2 and 8x4)
16
Manual gearbox
17
Automatic gearbox
18
Hydraulic oil tank (some variants)
19
Rear axle (2 pcs for 6x4 and 8x4)
20
Bogie lift (must be lowered when changing oil or
checking oil level)
The parking brake must be released when lubricating
so that grease can be forced in properly
to the brake cams. (Applies to vehicles with drum
brakes.) Chock a wheel with wooden blocks
or similar, so that the vehicle cannot start moving
during service work.
610 Maintenance
Besides the lubrication points in the lubrication
scheme, the joints for controls and levers should
regularly be
lubricated with thin engine oil.
Rear assembly 6X4, 8X4
A=Lubrication points
B=Fluid level check
C=Oil and filter change
1
Brake cam (one on each wheel, not included on disc
brakes)
10
Cradle (2 pcs, not included on air suspension and not
for RADD-BR with RSH-STD or RSH-HIG).
Lubricate until grease is forced out.
19
Rear axle (2 pcs for 6x4 and 8x4)
J1008539
Rear assembly, hydraulically steered pusher
axle
A=Lubrication points
B=Fluid level check
C=Oil and filter change
1
Brake cam (one on each wheel, not included on disc
brakes)
19
Rear axle (2 pcs for 6x4 and 8x4)
J1008538
Maintenance 611
4x4, 6x6 vehicles
J1008537
612 Maintenance
J1008540
A = Lubrication points
B = Fluid level check
C = Oil and filter change
1
Intermediate arm (2 pcs)
2
Brake cams (2 pcs on each front wheel, not
included on disc brakes)
3
Steering knuckle bearing upper and lower (2 pcs
on each front wheel)
4
Universal joint (2 pcs per side)
5
Spare wheel holder (1 pce)
6
Brake cam (one on each rear wheel, not included
on disc brakes)
7
Cradle (1 pce per side). Relieve the cradle when
lubricating. Lubricate until grease is forced
Maintenance 613
out.
8
Clutch fluid reservoir
9
Pump for cab tilt
10
Motor
11
Wheel gear (2 pcs)
12
Differential carrier, driving front axle
13
Steering servo reservoir
14
Manual gearbox
15
Automatic gearbox
16
Transfer gearbox
17
Hydraulic oil tank (some types)
18
Hub reduction (2 pcs)
19
Rear axle
20
Rear axle, front
21
Rear axle, rear
The parking brake must be released during lubrication,
so that the grease can be forced into the brake cams.
(Applies to vehicles with drum brakes) Chock a wheel
with a wooden block or similar, so that the vehicle
cannot move while being serviced.
Besides the lubrication points in the lubrication chart,
the joints for all controls and levers should be oiled
regularly with thin engine oil.
614 Maintenance
Central lubrication system
J9007322
Grease quality
Part
Part number
Volvo Grease 00CS
3093926
Volvo Grease 00 CSBD
3093927
For other approved grease qualities, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Filling intervals
The filling interval for the central lubrication system is
every 6th month or when the level
has dropped to the min. mark on the reservoir.
The volume is 2.7 kg for tractors and 6 kg for others.
Note
Bio-degradable
Maintenance 615
Type plates, location
J0009598
1
The chassis number is punched on the outside of
the right-hand frame member and is also found
on the type plate
2
The product identification plate is behind the
service hatch on FH trucks, and on the inside of
the right-hand door on FM trucks. The
dimensions plate is next to the product
identification plate and the cab number plate is
located on the right-hand B pillar
3
The engine designation is stamped on the lefthand side of the engine block above the starter
motor (plus certain information concerning the
ECU or on the valve cover)
4
Gearbox plate (right side, clutch housing)
5
Rear axle identification plate
616 Maintenance
The compressed air tanks also have type plates which
state:
• Manufacturer
• Part number
• Serial number
• Max operating pressure
• Max operating temperature
• Min operating temperature
• Tank capacity
Fuses and relays 617
General
The truck's fuses and relays are located under the
cover in the middle of the instrument panel and in
front of the passenger seat.
The are decals under the cover which show the
location of fuses and relays and what they are used
for.
The ordinary exterior lighting of the truck is controlled
by a lighting control unit. This contains control
functions for each lighting circuit respectively. There
are no melt fuses for these functions. If a circuit is
broken, for example, due to overloading or a short
circuit, the driver will be informed by a message in the
instrument. The function is restored once the fault has
been remedied.
618 Fuses and relays
Electrical distribution unit, left-hand drive trucks
1
2
J175064
Under the cover of each electrical distribution unit is a
decal with information about the location of the fuses
and relays and what they are used for.
1
Relay and fuse central with surrounding relays
2
Fuses and relays for bodywork
Fuses and relays 619
Electrical distribution unit, right-hand drive trucks
1
2
J175044
There is a decal under the cover of each electrical
distribution unit with information about the location of
the fuses and relays and what they are used for.
1
Relay and fuse central with surrounding relays
2
Fuses and relays for bodywork
620 Fuses and relays
Main fuses
The main fuses are located in the main fuse box inside
the battery box on the chassis. The four fuses are
screwed into the fuse box with spring washers and
nuts. It is important that the nuts are tightened to the
correct torque, see table. If they are not tightened
enough, heat can be generated. Too high torque can
cause deformation and cracks.
Warning!
Use the correct tightening torque.
Do not forget the spring washers.
J3014566
Dimensions
Tightening torques
M5
4.0 Nm +/- 5%
M8
20.0 Nm +/- 5%
M10
33.0 Nm +/- 5%
Normally the fuses last as long as the truck without
blowing. Should a fuse blow, the truck should be taken
in to the workshop for a check of the electrical system.
Size
1 125 A
Use
Preheating
Fuses and relays 621
Size
Use
2 200 A
Hydraulic bogie lift / Superstructure
3 125 A
Cab
4 40 A
Secondary lighting supply
622 Fuses and relays
In relay and fuse box
The fuses in the electrical distributor unit are of the
blade fuse type, two different types are used. If a fuse
in the same fuse holder has to be changed frequently,
the truck should be taken to the workshop for a check
on the electrical system.
Warning!
Always use the stipulated size of
fuse. Never use a higher fuse.
Note!
Switch off the current before
changing a fuse. The fuse holder can
burn up if the current is on.
Blade fuses
Fuse no.
Use
Fuse rating
F1
TPM
10 A
F2
Lighting, cargo area
10 A
F3
Loading lamp, fifth-wheel lighting
10 A
F4
Electrically adjustable seat, cab tilt pump, loading and fifth- 5 A
wheel lighting
F5
Instrumentation (kl. 30)
5A
F6
Air drier
5A
F7
Vehicle control unit, electronic immobilizer
5A
F8
Instrumentation, TPM
5A
F9
Range interlock, area interlock (in gearbox)
5A
F10
NOx sensor, road toll
5A
F11
Control unit gear shifter
5A
F12
Control unit transmission/retarder
10 A
F13
Windscreen wiper
15 A
F14
Cigarette lighter, lamp storage compartment, centre section
10 A
Fuses and relays 623
Fuse no.
Use
Fuse rating
F15
Water separator, fuel filter heater, water drain valve
10 A
F16
Differential lock, power take-off
5A
F17
Control unit external lighting
5A
F18
Horn, solenoid valve for compressed air horn
10 A
F19
Climate unit, FMS gateway
5A
F20
Central locking, parking heater
10 A
F21
Fan, climate unit
15 A
F22
Courtesy light
10 A
F23
Air suspension
5A
F24
Air drier, parking heater ADR, electrically heated rear view 10 A
mirrors
F25
Power supply, ABS/EBS trailer
20 A
F26
Bodywork fuse box
30 A
F27
Electric window lift left side, electrically heated rear view
mirrors
20 A
F28
ABS/EBS
20 A
F29
Coffee maker
30 A
F30
Electric window lift right side
20 A
F31
Main fuse for fuses 95–97
20 A
F32
Climate unit
20 A
F33
Electric cab tilting
30 A
F34
Amplifier
30 A
F35
Electrically adjustable seat
20 A
F36
Circuit for reversing lights, trailer
15 A
F37
Telephone, Dynafleet
5A
F38
Entry lamps
5A
F39
Electrically adjustable rear view mirrors
5A
624 Fuses and relays
Fuse no.
Use
Fuse rating
F40
Engine control unit
15 A
F41
Solenoid valves on engine, electric fuel pump
10 A
F42
Pre-heating relay engine, electrically controlled cooling fan
5A
F43
Body builder control unit BBM
5A
F44
Voltage converter for radio/12 V outlet
15 A
F45
Voltage converter for 12 V outlet
15 A
F46
Rotating beacon
15 A
F47
ACC
5A
F48
ABS/EBS, switch EBS
5A
F49
Air suspension/A-ride
3A
F50
Phone
5A
F51
Hydraulically steered axle
5A
F52
Air intake heating, relief relay radio position
10 A
F53
Illuminated sign on roof
10 A
F54
Dynafleet, FMS gateway
10 A
F55
Airbag, seat belt tensioner
5A
F56
Free
5A
F57
Control unit gear shifter/Retarder
3A
F58
D+ short circuit relay, only ADR
5A
F59
Reversing camera, Dynafleet
5A
F60
Hydraulically steered axle
5A
F61
Theft alarm, Volvo link (SAM), Folding rear view mirror
arm, Japan
5A
F62
Free
15 A
F63
Alcolock system
10 A
F64
Toll system
10 A
F65
Central lubrication system
10 A
Fuses and relays 625
Fuse no.
Use
Fuse rating
F66
Sun roof
10 A
F67
Bunk lamps, reading lamps
10 A
F68
Refrigerator
10 A
F69
12 Volt outlet
10 A
F70
ABS/EBS, trailer (kl. 15)
5A
F71
Extra equipment
10 A
F72
Level adjustment system, headlamps
5A
F73
Hydraulically steered axle
5A
F74
Headlamp washer (high pressure)
15 A
F75
Electrically heated seats
15 A
F76
ADR D+ short circuit relay, Fan instrument panel
5A
F77
24 V Power outlet, instrument panel
10 A
F78
24 V Power outlet, beside bunk
10 A
F79
12 V for TV
10 A
F95
Central locking
10 A
F96
Burglar alarm
5A
F97
Parking heater
15 A
LCM fuses
1
Direction Indicator lights trailer, Brake Lights and Headlight dipped beam, right side,
Reversing Lights, Parking Lights rear
25 A
2
Headlight main beam left side, Fog Lights, Warning light, Warning signal
25 A
3
Brake Lights trailer and Direction Indicator lights rear, left side, Headlight main beam right
side
25 A
4
Parking Lights trailer and Direction Indicator lights rear, right side, Brake Light left side
25 A
5
Reverse Lights trailer, Parking Lights front right side, Headlight dipped beam and Direction
Indicator lights trailer, left side
25 A
6
Parking Lights trailer and Parking Lights front, left side, Direction Indicator lights front
25 A
626 Fuses and relays
Fuses in the battery box
1
Tachograph
5A
2
Main fuses F95–F97
20 A
3
AdBlue system
20 A
To superstructure
56 X. Fuses for superstructure
Use
Fuse size
1
Kl.30, B+
15A
2
Kl.30, B+
15A
3
Kl.15, driving position
15A
4
Kl.15, driving position
15A
5
Kl.61, alternator
10A
6
Free
10A
56 P. Fuses for superstructure (options)
Use
Fuse size
1
Kl.30, B+
15A
2
Kl.30, B+
15A
3
Kl.30, B+
15A
4
Kl.30, B+
15A
5
Free
10A
6
Free
10A
Fuses and relays 627
Relays for bodywork, in front of passenger seat
Loc.
Function:
37
Parking lights
38
Pressure selection, dumper trailer
39
Free, for body builder
40
Free, for body builder
41
Free, for body builder
42
Spotlights
43
External engine start
44
Reversing light
45
Brake application (reverse lock)
46
Free, for body builder
47
Free, for body builder
Note!
The continuous load on a fuse may
not exceed 80 % of the rated current.
Fuses must always be replaced with
genuine fuses.
628 If something happens
Air suspension in locked mode
If there is a fault, the air suspension may go into the
locked mode. This disconnects the automatic ride
height.
Note!
The vehicle should be taken to the
workshop as soon as possible, but
can be used in the mean time.
To adjust the height
1 Control both sides at the same time
In the driving position, both sides are controlled at the
same time. The air in the bogie axle's bellows is
adjusted at the same time as the air in the drive axle is
adjusted.
J7009822
2 Use the axle switch to select the axle to be adjusted:
• M1 for the front axle.
• M2 for both front and rear axles.
The air in the bogie axle's bellows is adjusted at the
same time as the air in the drive axle is adjusted.
• M3 for rear axle.
The air in the bogie axle's bellows is adjusted at the
same time as the air in the drive axle is adjusted.
J7009818
If something happens 629
3 Adjust the height with the adjustment switch.
J7009819
Adjust the amount of air in the bogie
axle's lifting bellows
Drain the lifting bellows by pressing on the lower part
of the bogie switch.
J7008415
630 If something happens
Airbag
The air bag is to be inspected and if necessary
replaced, by an authorised Volvo workshop at the
year and month noted on the label mounted on the
door frame. This must be done to ensure full
functionality after the stated date. Do not do any work
on this system yourself.
When is the airbag inflated?
The airbag inflates only in the case of a head-on
collision with a fixed or heavy object.
If the airbag has inflated:
• Tow the truck to a Volvo workshop. Do not drive
with a deployed airbag.
• Have an authorised Volvo workshop change the
components in the system.
• Only Volvo original spares should be used when
components are changed (airbag, belts etc.).
When is the airbag not inflated?
• In the case of a collision with a soft object, such as
a snow drift or thicket.
J8008485
Warning!
If the truck is equipped with an
air bag, this is not a replacement
for the ordinary seat belt! The
airbag is not inflated during a
rear-end collision, side collision
or if the truck rolls over.
Always use the seat belt!
• In the case of a collision at low speed.
• In the case of a collision from the side, being driven
into from the rear or if the truck should overturn.
Superficial damage to the bodywork is not an
indication of whether the system functioned or not.
Caution!
Never drive with a deployed
airbag. By hanging out, it can
make steering the vehicle
difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust caused by triggering the
airbag can cause skin and eye
irritation with long-term
exposure.
If something happens 631
Warning!
You should never try to repair
any part of the system yourself.
All interference with the system
can cause malfunction and
serious personal injury and may
only be carried out by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Warning signs and first-aid
The truck has two warning triangles. The warning
triangles are stored in the space behind the left hand
seat. Certain trucks also have first aid kits, warning
flares and high visibility vests.
J0008197
Fire extinguisher
If there is a fire extinguisher, it is located near the
driver's seat.
The fire extinguisher must, once a month, be taken out
and turned upside down to prevent the powder from
settling.
632 If something happens
Starting with starting cables
Always use another vehicle or other batteries to help
start the engine.
1
Turn the ignition key to the 0 position.
2
Make sure that the help start battery has 24 V
total voltage or 24 V system voltage.
3
Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle and
make sure that the vehicles do not touch one
another.
4
Connect one of the clamps on the red cable to the
positive terminal on the help battery. The positive
pole is marked in red, P or +.
5
Connect the other clamp on the red cable to the
positive terminal on the battery of the vehicle that
needs help. The positive pole is marked in red, P
or +.
6
Connect one clamp on the black cable to the
negative terminal of the help battery marked in
blue, N or -.
7
Connect the other clamp on the black cable to a
place - an earth - some distance from the battery
of the vehicle which needs help.
8
Start the engine on the ”assisting vehicle”. Let
the engine run for some minutes at a higher speed
than normal (about 1000 rpm).
9
Start the engine on the other vehicle.
10
Remove the clamp on the black cable from the
earth point.
11
Remove the clamp on the black cable from the
negative terminal on the help battery.
12
Remove the red cable.
Caution!
So-called start help units must not
be connected, because these can
give very high voltages, which
can in turn damage control units.
J0008254
Note!
After the truck has been started by
using starting cables, the batteries
should be charged with a battery
charger. It takes about 20 hours to
fully charge a battery. An alternator
can never charge the battery to
100%; in favourable circumstances a
maximum level of 90% can be
achieved.
If something happens 633
Note!
Batteries contain acid which is
corrosive and poisonous. It is
therefore important that batteries are
handled in an environmentally safe
manner. Let your Volvo dealer help
you.
Warning!
Batteries contain oxyhydrogen
gas which is very explosive. A
spark, which can ignite if you
connect the starting cables
incorrectly, or if they are moved
around during the starting
procedure, is sufficient for the
battery to explode and cause
serious damage and injury.
Batteries contain sulphuric acid
which can give serious burns. If
the acid gets in your eyes, skin or
clothes, rinse with large amounts
of water. If the acid gets in your
eyes, get medical attention at
once. Do not lean over the
batteries.
Battery box rear
Always use another vehicle or other batteries to help
start the engine.
The starting cables shall be able to handle 1000 A for
at least 30 seconds.
1
Turn the ignition key to the 0 position.
2
Make sure that the help start battery has 24 V
total voltage or 24 V system voltage.
Caution!
So-called start help units must not
be connected, because these can
give very high voltages, which
can in turn damage control units.
634 If something happens
3
Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle and
make sure that the vehicles do not touch one
another.
4
Connect one of the clamps on the red cable to the
positive terminal on the help battery. The positive
pole is marked in red, P or +.
5
Connect the other clamp on the red cable to the
positive terminal on the battery of the vehicle that
needs help. The positive pole is marked in red, P
or +.
6
Connect one clamp on the black cable to the
negative terminal of the help battery marked in
blue, N or -.
7
Connect the other clamp on the black cable to a
place - an earth - some distance from the battery
of the vehicle which needs help.
8
Start the engine on the ”assisting vehicle”. Let
the engine run for some minutes at a higher speed
than normal (about 1000 rpm).
9
Start the engine on the other vehicle.
10
Remove the clamp on the black cable from the
earth point.
11
Remove the clamp on the black cable from the
negative terminal on the help battery.
12
Remove the red cable.
V42
Note!
Batteries contain acid which is
corrosive and poisonous. It is
therefore important that batteries are
handled in an environmentally safe
manner. Let your Volvo dealer help
you.
Note!
After the truck has been started by
using starter cables, the battery
should be charged with a battery
charger. It takes about 20 hours to
fully charge a battery. An alternator
can never charge the battery to 100
%; in favourable circumstances a
maximum level of 90% can be
achieved. See the “Electrical
system” section in the “Driver's
Manual” for more information.
If something happens 635
Warning!
Batteries contain oxyhydrogen
gas which is very explosive. A
spark, which can ignite if you
connect the starting cables
incorrectly, or if they are moved
around during the starting
procedure, is sufficient for the
battery to explode and cause
serious damage and injury.
Batteries contain sulphuric acid
which can give serious burns. If
the acid gets in your eyes, skin or
clothes, rinse with large amounts
of water. If the acid gets in your
eyes, get medical attention at
once. Do not lean over the
batteries.
Towing
Procedure before towing
• Remove the propshaft
• Insert the towing brace and towing pin
• Applying chocks to the wheels before the handoperated parking brake is disengaged
• Turn off TCS. Otherwise the system may activate
and the truck become disconnected from the towing
vehicle.
• Start the engine and let it run during the entire
towing operation. Lift up the bogie axle so that the
wheels do not turn when the truck is being reversed.
Use a tow rod.
The power steering does not operate during towing
and the vehicle will be heavy to steer.
J4018161
636 If something happens
Caution!
The gearbox can be damaged if
the propshaft is not removed.
When shunting (a few hundred
meters) a vehicle with a manual
gearbox, the propshaft can remain
in place if high gear is engaged.
Warning!
Always use a towing brace and
towing pin when towing. Never
tow from the forward underrun
guard. The underrun guard is not
designed to withstand this sort of
force.
Insertion of towing brace and towing
pin
Use towing brace (1) and towing pin (2) for towing.
1
Get out the towing brace (1) and the towing pin
(2)
They are in the storage space or behind the seats
2
Separate the towing brace (1) and the towing pin
(2)
3
Open the hatch by the footstep
4
Push in the towing brace (1)
5
Turn the towing brace (1) a quarter revolution
6
Pull out the brace (1) to the correct position
7
Engage the towing pin
8
Push the towing pin (2) through the towing brace
(1) flange
9
Push the locking pin through the towing pin
10
Lock the pin with the ring (3)
J9007790
If something happens 637
J0010970
Warning!
The towing brace may only be
used when towing on good roads.
It is not intended for recovery.
Note!
Lock the towing pin by turning the
handle 60° clockwise. Each towing
brace may be loaded from straight
ahead with half the gross weight of
the truck.
Towing backwards
Tow from the rear axle, rear spring anchorage or
trailer hitch hook.
J0006679
638 If something happens
Towing sideways
Choose a point close to the axle attachment, e.g. the
spring bracket or reaction rod bracket. Otherwise the
chassis could be subjected to such heavy loading that it
could be deformed.
Caution!
Do not use the anti-roll bar or
torque stay for towing.
Disengage the hand-operated parking
brake
If the engine will not start there are two ways of
disengaging the hand-operated parking brake. Either
replenish the air in the compressed air system, for
example from another vehicle, or disengage the handoperated parking brake mechanically.
Warning!
Always start by applying chocks
to the wheels, so that the truck
cannot roll away. This is very
important for all work underneath
the truck.
If something happens 639
Putting air in the compressed air system
Always use the test nipple on the air drier. Tilt the cab
to access the test nipple.
J5012251
Mechanically disengaging the hand-operated
parking brake
Remove any plastic cap from the back of the cylinder.
Unscrew the nut which then becomes visible, using the
intended tool from the tool box, until the brake is
released. Either the entire screw will come out or just
the nut will be visible.
Note!
Some vehicles have parking brake
cylinders for both front and rear
axles.
Note!
Always put air in the tanks for the
hand-operated parking brakes, when
available, and loosen the handoperated parking brake to make the
nut easier to screw. This protects the
brake cylinder from unnecessary
wear.
640 If something happens
Caution!
Never loosen or tighten the nut
mechanically when loosening or
replacing the hand-operated
parking brake. The cylinder can
be damaged.
The entire screw comes out
Unscrew the nut until the brake releases. The nut and
screw come out of the brake cylinder.
Screw the screw back in and replace the plastic cap
after towing.
J0009318
Only the nut shows
When you start to unscrew the nut, a red plastic button
comes out of the centre of the nut. After about four
turns it is completely out but another 45 turns or so are
required for the brake to be completely released.
After towing: Screw the screw back in until the red
plastic button goes all the way in.
J0009317
If something happens 641
Back-up function
Even if a fault should occur within the electrical
braking pressure control, it is still possible to brake the
vehicle. A built-in back-up function guarantees brake
operation via partial or complete pneumatically
controlled operation. The brake pedal travel will in this
case, be somewhat greater than normal and higher
brake pedal pressure may be required to achieve the
same stopping power. In back-up mode, the ABS
system is disengaged partly or wholly, depending on
where the fault occurred.
When EBS is disconnected the "stop message" lamp
on the display lights continuously (red). The
information on the display shows the text "Stop Brake
ECU failure".
In case of gearbox malfunction
An ”L” on the display and a yellow information lamp
indicate that an data link to the engine has been
broken. The Powertronicsystem then activates
Limp home. This function makes it possible to drive
the vehicle for short distances in case of a malfunction,
to the closest garage for example.
When Limp home is activated, only manual gear
changing is possible The driver can change gears when
the gear selector is in position M or R by using the up/
down button.
Power take-offs are shut off automatically when
Limp home is activated. It is possible to re-engage it as
long as the engine speed is kept below 1000 rpm. All
special functions on the vehicle will be terminated and
cannot be activated.
When the fault on the truck has been rectified
Limp home is turned off automatically.
Note!
The accelerator pedal must be
released before changing gear so that
the engine torque is reduced. This
also applies when engaging the lockup function.
Note!
The auxiliary brakes must be turned
off when changing down.
642 If something happens
If the vehicle gets stuck
If the truck gets stuck it may be possible to ”rock it
free” by moving the gear selector between R and A
positions with light accelerator pressure. This may
only be done at low engine speeds (below 1100 rpm)
and a maximum road speed of 5 km/h.
Index 643
A
About ACC ........................................... 197
ABS fails .............................................. 152
ACC, change speed .............................. 199
ACC, driving on bends ......................... 201
Activate ACC ....................................... 198
Adaptive Cruise Control ....................... 197
AdBlue, filling ...................................... 297
AdBlue, gauge ........................................ 49
AdBlue, tank cleaning .......................... 299
AdBlue, with spillage ........................... 298
AdBlue ................................................. 293
Adjusting the seat ......................... 309, 310
Adjusting the steering wheel ................ 313
ADR ..................................................... 193
Air cleaner, change filter ...................... 539
Air conditioning, maintenance ............. 605
Air conditioning, replace air filter ........ 605
Air conditioning ........................... 318, 326
Air distribution ..................... 320, 324, 326
Air pressure gauge, front braking
circuit ...................................................... 18
Air pressure gauge, rear braking circuit . 18
Air suspension,Symbols ........... 40, 87, 308
Air suspension .......................................... 1
Airbag ................................................... 630
Alarm clock ............................................ 52
Alarm .................................................... 359
Alcolock, additional features ................ 381
Alcolock, energy conservation ............. 380
Alcolock, messages and errors ............. 383
Alcolock, start up ................................. 373
All wheel drive ..................................... 135
Aluminium rims ................................... 521
Ammeter sensor calibration ................... 66
Ammeter ................................................. 47
Amplifier .......................................... 2, 444
Anti Theft Code (Guard), radio .... 404, 427
Assistance button .................................. 363
ATS ........................................................ 58
Audio settings, radio .................... 401, 419
Automatic cut-off ................................. 331
Automatic engagement of the
differential lock .................................... 146
Automatic gear change ......................... 241
Automatic gear changing ..................... 209
Automatic shut-off ............................... 332
Autoneutral ........................................... 211
Aux mode, radio ................................... 418
Auxiliary brakes, Powertronic .............. 212
Auxiliary brakes ................................... 148
Available gears ..................................... 240
Average speed ........................................ 50
Axle load, increase ............................... 167
B
Backlight ............................ 53, 63, 94, 132
Back-up function, EBS ......................... 641
Battery for the smoke detector ............. 354
Black Panel ....................................... 53, 93
Blocking valve ........................................ 27
Bluetooth hands free phone mode ........ 421
Bogie lamp ................................... 159, 308
Bogie lift, maintenance ........................ 603
Bogie lift, oil recommendations ........... 603
Bogie lift ............................................... 158
Bogie .................................................... 159
Booster ............................................. 2, 444
Brake Blending ..................................... 152
Brake interlock ..................................... 211
Brake lining wear ................................... 77
Brake lining, status ................................. 72
Brake lining .................................. 154, 577
Brake protection ................................... 202
Brake temperature .................................. 78
Braking program .................................. 244
Braking system, maintenance ............... 575
Bunk net, lower bunk ........................... 353
Bunk net, upper bunk ........................... 352
Burglar alarm ........................................ 359
Buttons, gear shifter, Up/Down
changing ............................................... 206
Buttons ................................................. 238
C
Cab heater (ADR) ......................... 328, 333
644 Index
Cab tilt pump, maintenance .................. 604
Cab, equipment ..................................... 303
Calibration ID ......................................... 99
Calling .................................................. 432
Camera ................................................. 131
CD mode ...................................... 399, 411
Central locking ..................................... 316
Central lubrication ................................ 604
Change a setting in the display ............... 45
Change air filter .................................... 539
Change idle speed ................................... 11
Change language, display ..................... 104
Change time gap ................................... 200
Changing front wheel on a fully
air suspended truck ............................... 597
Changing wheels .................................. 593
Charge pressure gauge ........................... 17
Chassis lubrication ............................... 607
CHECK lamp ....................................... 103
Check oil level, Powertronic ................ 215
Climate control system ......................... 323
Clock, radio .................................. 402, 425
Clutch ....................................................... 7
Clutch-independent PTO ...................... 177
Communication equipment .................. 359
Compact retarder, oil
recommendations ................................. 571
Compact retarder .................................. 148
Constant engine speed control .............. 170
Construction site driving ...................... 251
Container handling ............................... 284
Container, collect ................................. 284
Container, leave .................................... 286
Contrast, setting ...................................... 63
Control box ........................................... 303
Control of engine torque ...................... 153
Controls, Dynafleet .............................. 450
Cooling system, drain ........................... 542
Couple the trailer .................................. 500
Crawler gear ......................................... 155
Cruise control with braking .................. 151
Cruise control, disengage ..................... 169
Cruise control, engage .......................... 169
Cruise control ....................................... 169
D
Daily inspection .................................... 504
DAS ........................................................ 64
Data log .................................................. 72
Date, setting ...................................... 62, 96
Date ........................................................ 51
Day Running Light ................................. 22
Day running lights automatic, setting .... 68
Day running lights, setting ..................... 97
Derating (power reduction) .................. 292
Diagnostics ....................................... 69, 97
Diesel particulate filter ................... 58, 299
Diff Lock Control ................................. 146
Differential lock, automatic
engagement ........................................... 146
Differential lock, engage ...................... 140
Differential lock ................................... 136
Differential locks, engage .................... 143
Disengage ACC .................................... 199
Disengage cruise control ...................... 199
Disengage the cruise control ................ 169
Disengaging .......................................... 251
Display control stalk ....................... 82, 102
Display lighting, setting ......................... 63
Display symbols ..................................... 36
Display, general ...................................... 33
Display, I-Shift ..................................... 239
Display, overview ................................... 81
Display, Powertronic ............................ 207
Display, setting ....................................... 61
Display, settings ..................................... 94
Display ........................................... 80, 102
Distribute the load ................................ 166
Doors,Door lock ................................... 314
Draining ............................................ 68, 97
Drive belts, maintenance ...................... 546
Drive/rest time, Dynafleet .................... 459
Drive/rest time ...................................... 459
Driver Alert Support ............................. 174
Driver coaching, Dynafleet .................. 464
Driving a vehicle with ACC ................. 201
Driving and resting time ......................... 53
Index 645
Driving at low speed ............................ 203
Driving front axle, maintenance ........... 567
Driving front axle, oil
recommendations ................................. 566
Driving on rollers ................................. 254
Driving Powertronic, Driving
programs ............................................... 209
Driving programs ......................... 239, 244
Driving support system ........................ 170
Driving tips ........................................... 248
Driving, I-shift .............................. 222, 232
Dual driver stations .............................. 212
Dynafleet, main menu .......................... 457
Dynafleet .......................................... 2, 447
E
EBS, general ............................................. 1
Economy program ................................ 244
Economy/Power (E/P) .................. 206, 238
Electric trailer brake ............................... 29
Electric welding .................................... 547
Electric window lifters ......................... 316
Electrical power outlet ......................... 351
Electrical system, maintenance ............ 546
Electrically controlled rear view
mirrors .................................................. 315
Electrically heated rear view mirrors ... 315
Electronic Stability Program ................ 153
Emergency alarm & Assistance,
Dynafleet .............................................. 465
Emergency alarm & Assistance ........... 465
Emergency alarm button ...................... 452
Engage differential lock ....................... 137
Engage the cruise control ..................... 169
Engaging a gear .................................... 246
Engine brake ................................. 249, 253
Engine heater (ADR) ............................ 333
Engine oil, filling .................................. 527
Engine oil, replace ................................ 528
Engine wash ......................................... 516
Engine, oil recommendations ............... 525
Engine-mounted power take-off ........... 177
ESP ....................................................... 153
Estimated time of arrival ........................ 51
Euro 4 ................................................... 291
Exhaust cleaning, SCR ......................... 291
Exhaust cleaning .................................. 293
Exhaust ................................................. 296
F
Fault code, non-deletable ..................... 292
Fault codes, EBS .................................... 78
Fault diagnostics ..................................... 69
Fault Diagnostics .................................... 97
Favourite Display ................................... 54
Filling with AdBlue .............................. 297
Fire extinguisher ................................... 631
First Aid ................................................ 631
Fleet ID, setting ...................................... 66
Fleet limits, setting ................................. 64
Fog light ................................................. 22
Freewheel, I-Roll .................................. 242
Freewheel ............................................. 248
Fridge ................................................... 368
Front mirror .......................................... 490
Front wheel drive, engage .................... 135
Fuel consumption ................................... 48
Fuel Data ................................................ 90
Fuel economy driving ........................... 248
Fuel filter, replace ................................ 536
Fuel gauge .............................................. 18
Fuel heater .............................................. 12
Fuel system, maintenance .................... 530
Fuses and relays, general ...................... 617
Fuses, booster ....................................... 444
Fuses ............................................. 620, 622
G
Gauges .............................................. 17, 89
Gear position .......................................... 48
Gear selector ......................................... 217
Gear shift lever lock ............................. 236
Gear shift lever position ....................... 237
Gear shifter, Gear shift lever ................ 205
Gear shifter ........................................... 236
Gearbox, maintenance .......... 552, 559, 560
Gearbox, oil recommendations ............ 554
Gearbox ................................ 154, 217, 232
646 Index
Gearbox-mounted power take-off ........ 178
Grease ................................................... 523
Greatest possible down-change ............ 249
H
Headlights, replace light bulb ............... 510
Headlights ............................................... 22
Heavily loaded vehicle ......................... 155
Heavy starts .......................................... 252
High range lock-up ....................... 179, 181
High speed range .................................. 155
High split .............................................. 157
Hill start assist ...................................... 130
Hill start ................................................ 250
Hydraulic bogie lift, oil
recommendations ................................. 603
Hydraulic oil ......................................... 603
Hydraulic system, purge ....................... 359
I
Idle speed ................................................ 11
Idling speed .......................................... 213
Idling .................................................... 296
If the heater stops ................................. 340
Information messages ............................. 35
Instrument panel cluster self test ............ 70
Instrument, symbols ............................... 19
Instrumentation ....................................... 13
Instruments and controls, I-shift ........... 217
Instruments and controls, I-Shift .......... 236
iPod mode, radio .................................. 416
I-Roll .................................................... 248
I-shift, driving ............................... 222, 232
I-shift, general ...................................... 217
I-Shift, general ...................................... 232
I-shift, Instruments and controls ........... 217
I-Shift, Instruments and controls .......... 236
I-shift .................................................... 217
J
Jerk starting .......................................... 252
K
Keys .......................................................... 7
Kickdown ..................................... 210, 245
L
Ladder ................................................... 491
Lane Change Support ........................... 172
Lane Keeping Support .......................... 170
Language, numerical ............................ 102
Language, setting ................................... 61
Language, settings .................................. 94
LCS ................................................. 64, 172
Leg data .................................................. 49
Lift the bogie ........................................ 158
Lifting the axle ..................................... 165
Light bulb, replace ................................ 510
Lighting .................................. 22, 344, 345
Limp home ................... 212, 239, 248, 641
Load distribution .................................. 166
Load indicator ................................ 72, 287
Locking gear ......................................... 243
Locking the doors ................................. 317
Logs, Dynafleet, Dynafleet, logs .......... 462
Low speed range ................................... 155
Low speed, disengagement .................. 203
Low split ............................................... 157
Lower bogie axle .................................. 158
Lower bunk .......................................... 352
Lower the axle ...................................... 165
Lubrication ........................................... 604
Luggage compartment hatch ................ 343
Luggage compartment, lighting ........... 343
LVD system .............................................. 1
LVD-system ............................................. 1
M
Mail menu, Dynafleet ........................... 458
Main fuses ............................................ 620
Main menu, Dynafleet .......................... 457
Main switch .......................................... 318
Maintenance ......................................... 504
Manual braking .................................... 202
Manual changing .................................. 246
Manual gear changing .......................... 210
Manual gearbox .................................... 154
Marshalling ........................................... 213
Memory for seat position ..................... 309
Index 647
Menus when driving ....................... 42, 104
Menus when stationary ........................... 43
Menus ..................................................... 42
Message .................................................. 82
Messages, general ................................... 34
Mobil telephone .................................... 359
Monitoring of the wheel brakes ............. 78
N
Night mode ............................................. 63
Night/Day ......................................... 56, 94
Non-deletable fault code ...................... 292
Number tag ............................................... 7
Numerical language .............................. 102
Numerical translation table .................. 116
O
OBD ..................................................... 294
Office packet ........................................ 352
Off-road driving ................................... 251
Oil filter, Powertronic .......................... 215
Oil level .................................................. 72
Oil pressure gauge .................................. 17
Oil pressure, Powertronic ..................... 215
Oil recommendations, engine ............... 525
Oil temperature, Powertronic ............... 214
Oils ....................................................... 523
Orders, Dynafleet ................................. 461
P
Panic Alarm .......................................... 361
Panic braking function ......................... 154
Parking brake, release .......................... 638
Parking brake .......................................... 26
Parking heater (ADR) ........................... 328
Parking heater(ADR) ............................ 333
Parking heater, maintenance ................ 606
Parking heater, start with time
delay (ADR) ......................................... 329
Parking heater, temperature .................. 328
Parking heater, time delayed
starting (ADR) ...................................... 336
Parking heater, time delayed starting ... 329
Parking ..................................................... 7
Part number ...................................... 71, 99
Passenger seat ....................................... 311
Password, change ................................... 63
Password ................................................. 74
P-Heater Timer, setting .......................... 60
P-heater timer, Setting ............................ 96
Poly-V .................................................. 546
Poor starting conditions ........................ 155
Power program ..................................... 244
Power take-off, flywheel mounted ....... 570
Power take-off, maintenance ................ 570
Power take-off ...................................... 176
Power, radio ................................. 395, 406
Powertronic, High range lock-up . 179, 181
Powertronic, Instruments and controls . 207
Powertronic .......................................... 205
Pressure, primary tank ............................ 48
Prevents down-changing ...................... 249
Prevents up-changing ........................... 249
Primary tank, pressure ............................ 48
Priming ............................................. 68, 97
Procedure before towing ...................... 635
Program packages ................................ 232
Purge the hydraulic system .................. 359
Q
Queue driving ............................... 203, 250
R
Radio mode .................................. 395, 406
Rain sensor ............................................. 25
Range gear ............................................ 155
Rear axle, maintenance ................ 580, 584
Rear axle, oil recommendations ........... 580
Rear view mirror, electric heating ........ 315
Rear view mirror .................................. 315
Rear view mirrors ................................. 315
Recirculation ........................ 319, 323, 326
Reference pressure ................................. 57
Refrigerator box, tilt cab ...................... 370
Refrigerator .......................................... 364
Refuelling ............................................. 508
Regeneration ......................................... 299
Relay and fuse box ............................... 622
Release, parking brake ......................... 638
648 Index
Remaining fuel ....................................... 49
Remote control, replace battery ........... 510
Remove mist and ice from
windows ............................... 322, 325, 327
Replace engine oil ................................ 528
Replace fuel filter ................................. 536
Replace wiper blade ............................. 509
Reset data ............................................... 58
Reset trip data ......................................... 74
Reset, p-heater timer .............................. 61
Rest heater ............................................ 341
Retarder temperature, Powertronic ...... 214
Reverse camera .................................... 131
Reverse gear ......................................... 154
Reverse gears ........................................ 247
Reversing Warner ................................. 133
Reversing Warning ............................... 133
Reversing with loads ............................ 212
Rims ..................................................... 521
Rocking free ................................. 213, 251
Roof air deflector ................. 470, 476, 483
Roof hatch, Electrically
controlled roof hatch ............................ 344
Running in ................................................ 4
S
SCR, exhaust cleaning .......................... 291
Seats ............................................. 309, 310
Select starting gear ............................... 210
Selected gear ........................................ 240
Service reminder, forewarning ......... 75, 99
Service reminder, warning ............. 76, 100
Service reminder .............................. 75, 99
Servo steering, maintenance ................. 578
Servo steering, oil recommendations ... 578
Set speed ............................................... 198
Setting the temperature ......... 321, 325, 327
Settings menu, Dynafleet ..................... 467
Shutting off the system, Dynafleet ....... 456
Side underrun guard ............................. 492
Smoke detector ..................................... 353
Snow chains .......................................... 602
Spare wheel retainer behind the cab ..... 496
Spare wheel .......................................... 494
Split control .......................................... 157
Split ...................................................... 157
Stalk for auxiliary brake ....................... 150
Start and stop, Compressed air, gearbox . . 5
Start and stop, I-Shift ............................... 5
Start and stop ............................................ 5
Start engine heater only ........................ 339
Start the engine ......................................... 8
Start the rest heater ............................... 341
Starting on hills .................................... 130
Starting the heater ................................. 328
Starting when stuck .............................. 251
Starting with starting cables ......... 632, 633
Status symbols ........................................ 40
Steel rims .............................................. 521
Steered rear axle ................................... 168
Steering wheel adjustment ................... 313
Steering, filter replace .......................... 579
Steering ................................................. 578
Step between the menus ......................... 45
Stop lamp .............................................. 103
Stop message .................................. 36, 103
Stop symbol .......................................... 103
Subwoofer ........................................ 2, 444
Superstructure, fuses ............................ 626
Superstructure, oil recommendations ... 603
Swap body handling ............................. 276
Swap body platform ............................. 276
Swap body, collect ............................... 276
Swap body, leave .................................. 281
Switch off the main switch ................... 318
Switching off the TCS .......................... 134
Symbol for ACC ................................... 198
Symbols for air suspension ...... 40, 87, 308
Symbols in the instrument ...................... 19
Symbols, Air suspension .......... 40, 87, 308
Symbols ............................................ 36, 84
T
Tachometer ............................................. 17
TCS ....................................................... 133
Telephone ............................................. 430
Temperature gauge for coolant .............. 18
Temperature, engine oil .......................... 47
Index 649
Temperature, gearbox ............................. 47
Temperature, outside .............................. 47
Terrain-TCS ......................................... 133
Text strings ........................................... 103
Tilt the cab ............................................ 355
Tilting the cab ....................................... 366
Tilting the gear shift lever .................... 237
Time gap, change ................................. 200
Time, setting ..................................... 62, 95
Time/Distance ........................................ 91
Time ....................................................... 51
Tips and tricks, radio .................... 405, 428
To close the window ............................ 316
To unlock with the key ......................... 317
Tools ..................................................... 522
Total value .............................................. 73
Towing brace and towing pin ............... 636
Towing ................................................. 635
Traction Control System ...................... 133
Traction control, setting ......................... 64
Traction Control, settings ....................... 97
Trailer brake ........................................... 29
Trailer detection ..................................... 67
Transfer gearbox, maintenance .... 562, 563
Transfer gearbox, oil
recommendations ................................. 562
Tridem .................................................. 165
Trip data ................................................. 73
Trip meter ............................................... 50
Turn off the power, ADR ..................... 193
Turn on the main switch ....................... 318
Turning off the heater ........................... 331
Turning off the parking heater ............. 340
Turning off the rest heater .................... 342
Turntable .............................................. 502
Type plates, location ............................ 615
Tyre pressure .......................................... 56
Tyres, maintenance ............................... 588
U
Units, distance ........................................ 61
Units, fuel consumption ......................... 62
Units, pressure ........................................ 62
Units, setting ........................................... 95
Units, temperature .................................. 62
Unlocking ............................................. 316
Up/Down-changing .............................. 238
Upper bunk ........................................... 351
USB mode, radio .................................. 413
V
VEB ...................................................... 253
Vehicle care .......................................... 516
Vehicle data .................................... 72, 287
Vehicle ID .............................................. 72
Vehicle Messages ................................... 56
Vehicle setting ........................................ 64
Vehicle settings ...................................... 97
Voltmeter ................................................ 47
W
Warming up, engine ............................... 11
Warming up, gearbox ............................. 11
Warning devices ................................... 631
Warning messages .................................. 35
Warning triangles ................................. 631
Washing the chassis ............................. 516
Welding ................................................ 547
Wheel ID ................................................ 57
Wheels, maintenance ............................ 588
Winching up and securing the
spare wheel ........................................... 499
Window lifters ...................................... 316
Windscreen wiper ................................... 25
Windscreen wipers ................................. 25
Wiper blade, replace ............................. 509
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement